JP2015120056A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine includes start pockets for receiving a game ball driven onto a game area. When the game ball enters the start pocket, lottery processing for winning/losing of a jackpot is performed with a predetermined winning probability. As a result, a jackpot game for granting privilege to a player is performed when winning a jackpot. However, in the Pachinko machine, a special symbol gate 2500 is arranged, and the jackpot game is started based on the number of rounds where lots are drawn on condition of passage of a game ball through the special symbol gate 2500.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as can be seen in, for example, Patent Document 1, there is known a gaming machine in which a jackpot game is performed in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is first determined whether or not there is a game ball entering the start port. When a game ball enters the starting port, a lottery process is performed in which a winning combination that triggers the execution of the jackpot game or the number of rounds of the jackpot game is drawn. At this time, the special symbol is variably displayed on the predetermined display device for a predetermined fluctuation time. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it has been won when a predetermined fluctuation time has passed, the lottery game in which a lot of prize balls are paid out to the player is drawn in the lottery. Do as many rounds as possible. Still further, when the special symbol has been won by the special symbol stop display mode, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player after the special game is performed.

JP 2008-022870 A

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, after winning the jackpot according to the game ball entering the starting opening, the game and production according to the selection (execution of the jackpot game, control of the game state, Special symbol stop display etc.) will be performed sequentially. Therefore, it is difficult to give a wide range of games by such a control schedule with a low degree of freedom, and this reduces the interest of the game.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a situation, and it aims at providing the gaming machine which can suppress the fall of a game entertainment attraction.

  In order to achieve such an object, according to the first aspect of the present invention, a launching means for launching a game ball into the game area by a player's operation, and a start port capable of receiving the game ball driven into the game area A prize winning opening that is arranged in the gaming area and facilitates the reception of game balls by the operation of a predetermined opening and closing means, lottery means for performing lottery based on the reception of game balls to the start opening, and Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the variation time of the identification symbol is determined, and based on the determined variation time, the identification symbol is variably displayed, and then the identification symbol control means for stopping the display, and the lottery means When the identification symbol is stopped and displayed by the identification symbol control means on the basis that the result is a win, after the predetermined waiting period that occurs after the identification symbol is stopped and displayed, the large symbol is displayed. A hit control means capable of executing control related to the operation of the predetermined opening / closing means so as to facilitate the reception of the game ball at the award opening, wherein the hit control means includes the predetermined waiting period for the game The identification symbol is used as the predetermined waiting period in spite of the fact that the period is controlled based on the determination that the game ball has been received at a specific receiving port provided in the area. Judgment regarding acceptance of the game ball at the specific reception port over a predetermined time longer than the time required for the game ball launched by the launching means to reach the specific reception port. Due to the invalidation control being performed, it is determined in advance not to be terminated until the long predetermined time elapses regardless of whether or not the game ball is received at the specific receiving port. A first closing control period as a period having a length, and a control that is started after the end of the first closing control period and that makes a determination on accepting a game ball to the specific receiving port effective. The two closed control periods of the second closed control period as a period having an indefinite length, which are ended when the game ball is received at the specific receiving port, are sequentially generated. The gist is that the control can be executed.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is BB sectional drawing (A) of FIG. 10, CC sectional drawing (B) of FIG. 12 (A), DD sectional drawing (C), and EE sectional drawing (D). It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment or detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. They are the disassembled perspective view (A) which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, and the perspective view (B) seen from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit, (B) is a rear perspective view of a door frame base unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 26 from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 28 from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the ball | bowl feeding unit in a door frame base unit. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the part of the joint unit in a door frame base unit, (B) is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a joint unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a top lamp illumination unit, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit. It is a perspective view which shows a top lamp electrical decoration unit from diagonally lower front. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles a top lamp electric decoration unit for every main structure, and shows from the front, (B) is an exploded perspective view which shows (A) after. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the top lamp reflector unit in a top lamp electrical decoration unit, and shows from the front with a top lamp base. FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 35 later. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the left rotation lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the right rotation lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the center rotary lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of a plate unit. It is a back perspective view of a plate unit. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. It is a rear view in the state which removed the plate back plate of the plate unit. It is a perspective view shown later in the state which removed the plate back plate and ball rental unit of a plate unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a tray unit for every main component, and shows from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows FIG. 46 from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the dish unit main body in a dish unit, and shows from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows FIG. 48 from back. It is a rear view which shows the 1st ball removal mechanism in a dish unit. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd ball removal mechanism in a dish unit later. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is a bottom view of the state which removed the operation button unit board | substrate of the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the dish unit from below. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main button of the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is sectional drawing of the handle apparatus attached to the door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the operation handle part which comprises a handle apparatus, and a joint unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the operation handle part in a handle device. It is an operation | movement figure for demonstrating operation | movement of an operation handle part and a joint unit. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and the hit ball | bowl launching apparatus provided in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a hit ball | bowl launcher. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a tray unit, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the 2nd ball extraction port in a tray unit, and the flow of game ball. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the horizontal ball | bowl inflow port in a dish unit, and a storage tray. It is a front perspective view of a glass unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a glass unit and shows from the front. FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 later. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which pivotally supported the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame which attached components. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the pachinko machine cut along a horizontal line in the middle of the pachinko machine (main control board box part). It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a top view of a game board. It is an expansion perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part formed in a game board. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the main body frame which shows the structure by the side of the main body frame with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of a game board. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected and shown in the vertical direction in the state which assembled the front structural member in the game board, the game panel, and the panel holder. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front structural member, game panel, panel holder, etc. which mainly comprise a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 83 from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view shown from diagonally behind in the state which fixed the main control board box to the board | substrate holder for boards. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view showing the board substrate holder, the drawer holder, and the main control board box in an exploded perspective view after FIG. It is the schematic of the disassembled perspective view of the function display unit in a game board. It is the schematic of a function display sticker. It is the fragmentary view which looked at the function display sticker of the game board through the game window. It is the perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball | bowl launcher, and the perspective view (B) of the state which removed the firing motor part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a hit ball launching device. It is the front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hit ball | bowl launcher and a firing rail, and a perspective view (B) of a launching motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is not operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. They are a top view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), and a front view (B) AA sectional view (D) of the slide member provided in the ball striking device. FIG. 4 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball | bowl in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a main body frame, a ball path unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a ball passage unit. It is a front view of a ball passage unit. It is a side view for demonstrating the connection structure of a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of a prize ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the channel | path and drive relationship of a prize ball unit. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is the cross-sectional view cut | disconnected by the bottom rocking | fluctuation board part provided in a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is the partial cross section cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction in the position slightly lower than the center of the vertical direction of a pachinko machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the side wall of a main body frame. It is the side view (A) of a locking device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. The perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, the perspective view (B) of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the locking device, (C). It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the substrate unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the board | substrate unit. It is the front view seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder which makes the main body of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate holder for frames. It is a rear view of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate unit in the state which removed the payout control board box and the terminal board box. It is a top view which shows the connection relation of each board | substrate provided in a board | substrate unit. It is the schematic which shows the electrical connection of a board | substrate unit and a game board. It is a part of back view of the pachinko machine which shows the wiring etc. of a payout control board and a substrate unit. FIG. 139 is a front view of a game board for illustrating a cross-sectional location in the cross-sectional view in FIG. 138. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, and is the perspective view seen from the back surface of the state which open | released the cover body. It is a side view of the pachinko machine which attached the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, Comprising: It is the perspective view seen from the open side of the cover body. It is the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, Comprising: It is the perspective view seen from the shaft support side of the cover body. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine which attached the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the state where a cover body concerning a second embodiment was removed. It is a perspective view of the payout control board box which overlaps and contacts the lower part of the cover object concerning a second embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the inside of the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is a rear view for demonstrating the effect | action of the cylinder lock provided in the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is BB sectional drawing of FIG. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left rear. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structural member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at what was decomposed | disassembled from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled every apparatus with which a game panel is mounted | worn for each member, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the side winning opening member from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center accessory for every main member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the frame member of the center accessory and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the base plate of the center accessory from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the start opening unit of a center accessory from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the starting port unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the drive mechanism part of the starting port unit, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the principal part of the drive mechanism part from back diagonally. It is the perspective view which looked at the sub liquid crystal unit from diagonally forward. It is the side view which looked at the mounting state of a sub liquid crystal unit from the right side. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the sub liquid crystal unit and was seen from the diagonal front. It is a front view which shows the state which shielded the front of the sub liquid crystal unit with the 1st accessory unit and the 2nd accessory unit. It is a front view which shows the state by which the front of the sub liquid crystal unit was open | released. It is the perspective view which looked at the 1st accessory unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st accessory unit and was seen from the diagonal front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right movable part unit of the 1st accessory unit, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd accessory unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd accessory unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a right view which shows the movable part unit of a 2nd accessory unit. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable part unit and was seen from the diagonal front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the drive part of the 2nd accessory unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the drive part from the back. It is a right view which shows operation | movement of the movable part unit with respect to a sub liquid crystal unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the shutter type | mold character of a back unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the shutter type | mold accessory and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left inner shutter of the shutter type | mold accessory and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the left inner shutter from diagonally behind, and its principal part enlarged view. It is the perspective view which looked at the decoration board of the left inner shutter from diagonally forward, and its principal part enlarged view. It is the perspective view which looked at the right inner shutter of a shutter type accessory from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left outer shutter of the shutter type | mold accessory, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the right outer shutter of the shutter type accessory from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the drive part of the shutter type | mold accessory and was seen from diagonally forward. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the shutter-type accessory as viewed obliquely from a state in which each shutter is opened. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower side accessory unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower side accessory unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower drive part unit of the lower side accessory unit, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the distribution direction apparatus of the lower drive part unit, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the distribution part of the distribution production apparatus and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the rocking drive part of the distribution production device from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the rocking drive part from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering mechanism of the lower drive part unit, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering mechanism and was seen from diagonally behind. It is a front view of the lower drive part unit which shows the state which supplies a game ball to a distribution effect apparatus. It is a front view of the lower drive part unit which shows the state where the distribution production device was raised. It is a front view of the lower drive part unit which shows the state which inclined the distribution part of the distribution production apparatus to the left. It is a front view of the lower drive part unit which shows the state which inclined the distribution part of the distribution effect apparatus to the right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game-medium supply mechanism of a lower side accessory unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game medium supply mechanism and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game media supply mechanism and was seen from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the channel | path formation unit of the lower side accessory unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the channel | path formation unit from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view which shows the operation | movement by the return channel | path of a channel | path formation unit. It is a perspective view which shows the operation | movement by the discharge channel of a channel | path formation unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the other structure in the back box unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the other structure and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the horizontal decoration unit and was seen from the diagonal front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable decoration part of the horizontal decoration unit, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the horizontal base member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a block diagram of a main board and a peripheral board. It is a block diagram which shows especially the real-time clock function among the functions of a peripheral control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special control process. It is a flowchart which shows a start opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of round number lottery processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit game process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table structure in the random number memory means for special symbols. It is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. It is a table | surface which shows each characteristic for every kind of jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation pattern table which can be selected in a normal external disadvantageous game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16 ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process (step S1210). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the determination process (step S1225a) of the stop symbol in 1st production mode. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the determination process (step S1225b) of the stop symbol in 2nd production mode. (A) is a figure explaining the extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit, (b) is a figure explaining the extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit, (c) is a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating, (d) is a figure for demonstrating the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit. 12 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” is received from the main control MPU 4100a side. 12 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” is received from the main control MPU 4100a side. (A) is a table | surface which shows the jackpot expectation degree etc. when in the 1st production mode according to each production content series, respectively, (b) is a challenge bonus rush expectation degree in the 2nd production mode. It is a table | surface which shows each etc. according to each production content series. It is a time chart which shows another example about the display production pattern matched with production command "01H" in the 1st production mode. It is a time chart which shows another example about the display production pattern matched with production command "02H" in the 1st production mode.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine. 3 is a side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 6 is an outer frame, a main body frame, a game board, FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the door frame, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame constituting the pachinko machine.

  As shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. 4, a game window 101 that is pivotally supported by the body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and a game area 605 that is formed on the game board 4 and into which a ball is driven, and the game window 101. And a door frame 5 provided with a tray unit 300 as a storage tray for storing a ball to be paid out as a result of the game.

  A cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 that reinforces the decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side thereof. Further, as described above, the game board 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and the hitting ball launcher 650 (see FIG. 5) and the door frame 5 and the main body excluding the game board 4 are provided at the lower part of the back surface thereof. A board unit 1100 on which various control boards and power supply boards for controlling electrical components provided in the frame 3 are collectively provided is attached, and covers the rear opening 580 (see FIG. 6) of the main body frame 3. A cover body 1250 is detachably provided. Furthermore, in addition to the above-described dish unit 300, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 450 and a handle device 400 so as to close the gaming window 101. The door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, and the main body frame 3 cannot be visually recognized from the front. Hereinafter, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. FIG. 12 is a rear view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 10, a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 12A, and a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD. , E-E sectional view (D). FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment / detachment structure between the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14 shows a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view (A) which shows an attachment state, and the perspective view (B) seen from the downward direction. Further, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member, and FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the action of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 according to the present embodiment includes an upper and lower upper frame plate 10 and a lower frame plate 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right side frame plates 12 extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. , 13 are connected in a square shape by connecting them with connecting members 19 for connecting the respective end portions. Specifically, the connecting member 19 is formed in a podium shape with a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding center part is an engagement notch formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The side frame plates 12, 13 are fitted to the side surfaces of the left and right portions which are fitted to the portion 20, and the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the planes of the left and right portions lowered one step. The inner surface of the is in contact.

  In that state, the insertion hole 21 formed on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the upper frame plate 10 and both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right lowered by one step of the connecting member 19. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting holes 22 (shown on the connecting member 19 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 in FIG. Are also fixed by a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting screws 23 from above or below, and further, a plurality ( Two (in the illustrated case) mounting holes 24 and a plurality of (three in the illustrated case) connecting holes 25 formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 that are lowered by one step are aligned to form a plurality (from the lateral outer side). The upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and the lower frame are fixed by fastening with three connecting screws 26 and 27 in the illustrated case. 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is firmly coupled and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 26 and 27, one connecting screw 27 does not connect the side frame plates 12 and 13 and the connecting member 19 but connects the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The member 19 is directly connected from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is made of an extruded plate of a lightweight metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before is that when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island lined up in a game hall, a predetermined angle is given to the vertical plane of the island. Although it is necessary to perform a fixing operation, such an operation is performed by hitting the nail to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, so that it is easy to hit the nail. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. The left-right width when viewed from the front of the side walls 540 to 543 (see FIG. 69) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the main frame 3 can be increased. This is because the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and as a result, the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be formed larger.

  If the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy flat plate, sufficient rigidity cannot be ensured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12C, the side frame plate 12 (the side frame plate 13 has the same structure). .) Is formed by drawing so that the thickness h1 of the rear portion is increased by forming a space portion 28 (the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 11) opened rearward by a rib. Yes. Of course, the wall thickness h1 is the same as or slightly smaller than the wall thickness of the conventional wood.

  As shown in FIGS. 12B and 12D, in the front of the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 12, a groove portion 29 (side) into which one of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 is lowered one step is fitted. A groove portion 29 of the frame plate 13 is formed in FIG. From the groove 29 to the front end of the side frame plate 12, as shown in FIGS. 12 (B) to 12 (D), the other side of the left and right portions whose inner side surfaces are lowered by one step is connected. However, a shallow concave portion for reducing material is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove portion 29 is formed, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 12B, the recessed portion 30 (side frame) into which the hanging piece portion 53 of the upper support fitting 45 is inserted. The concave portion 30 of the plate 13 is formed as shown in FIG.

  In addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side formed as described above is provided with a hanging piece 53 of the upper support fitting 45 on the outer side of the side frame plate 12. A mounting hole 31 for fixing with a fixing screw 32 is formed in the lower portion of the mounting hole 31, and a fixing screw 34 is formed at the lower portion thereof so as to coincide with the mounting hole 69 formed in the vertical contact piece 72 of the lower support fitting 66. A mounting hole 33 for fastening is formed. A mounting hole 35 for fixing the side frame plate 12 and the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 with the fixing screw 36 is formed in the lower part of the mounting hole 33 and in the front portion of the side frame plate 12.

  On the other hand, in addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the open side frame part 13 is provided with an attachment hole 37 for attaching a closing projection 38 with an attachment screw 39 at the upper part thereof, and closing at the lower part thereof. An attachment hole 40 for attaching the projection 41 with the attachment screw 42 is formed, and an attachment hole 43 for attaching the side frame plate 13 and the cover reinforcing bracket 14 with the fastening screw 44 is further provided at the lowermost position. Is formed.

  The closing protrusions 38 and 41 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 121) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As shown in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and turning it to one side, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are connected to each other. The main body frame 3 can be released from the outer frame 2 by disengagement.

  Further, the cover reinforcing bracket 14 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is such that the main body frame 3 is placed on the upper surface when the cover reinforcing bracket 14 is closed. The front and side surfaces of the cover are covered with a decorative cover plate 15. A guide plate 18 for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer frame 2 on the open side of the decorative cover plate 15.

  By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, the main frame 3 is attached along the upper surface of one side of the upper support metal 45 and the cover reinforcement metal 14 which also serve to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12. A lower support fitting 66 is provided. The upper support fitting 45 is formed with a support flange 47 formed by bending the support protrusion piece 46 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion piece 46 toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin 504 (see FIG. 71) of an upper shaft support fitting 503 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the hole 47.

  Further, the lower support fitting 66 is also formed to protrude forward, and a support protrusion 68 protrudes upward from the protruding portion, and a frame support plate 506 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is provided on the support protrusion 68. The support holes formed in (see FIG. 72) are inserted. Accordingly, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main body frame 3 are engaged with the support protrusions 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66, By pivoting the pivot pin 504 of the upper pivot bracket 503 in the support hole 47, it can be pivotably supported in a freely openable / closable manner.

  The upper support bracket 45 is attached to a mounting step portion 49 formed in a concave shape on the upper surface and the front surface of the upper frame plate 10 on the shaft support side. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 48 and a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 50 formed in the mounting step portion 49 are aligned so that the mounting screws 51 are inserted from above, and the upper frame The upper support fitting 45 is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10 by being fastened to the holding plate 52 pressed from the back surface of the plate 10.

  A hanging piece 53 that contacts the outside of the side frame plate 12 is provided on the outer side of the upper support fitting 45, and a mounting hole is also formed in the hanging piece 53. Are fastened with fastening screws 32 to fix the upper support fitting 45 and the side frame plate 12 and to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 via the upper support fitting 45. .

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 66 is fixed by the fixing screw 34 in a state where the mounting hole 33 of the side frame plate 12 and the mounting hole 69 of the vertical contact piece 72 coincide with each other as described above. By inserting a mounting screw 71 into a mounting hole 70 formed in the middle of the horizontal surface of the metal fitting 66, it is fixed to the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 via the decorative cover plate 15.

  In the outer frame 2 configured as described above, the connecting member 19 is connected to the side frame by connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13, which are constituent members, with the connecting member 19. Since the connection member 19 is fastened in close contact with the inner surfaces of the plates 12 and 13 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the mounting strength is high and the rectangular shape is strong. It can be a framework. In addition to the engagement state of the connection member 19 with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the left and right sides of the connection member 19 that are lowered by one step in the groove portion 29 when the connection member 19 is attached to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since one part of the structure is fitted, the attachment of the connecting member 19 to the side frame plates 12 and 13 is strengthened, which can also improve the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately position it. Can be done.

  Further, when the upper support plate 45 is attached at a predetermined position after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 19, as shown in FIGS. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on a pachinko island base (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending device. Further, when the lower support metal fitting 66 is attached, the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 and the upper surface of the lower support metal fitting 66 are substantially flush with each other.

  Incidentally, a lock member 80 is pivotally supported on the back surface of the upper support fitting 45 for pivotally supporting the body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed as shown in FIG. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14A, the support protruding piece 46 of the upper support fitting 45 is formed as an arc-shaped flat plate at the tip and is perpendicular to the outer edge of the support protruding piece 46. A drooping wall 46a is formed. The drooping wall 46a can improve the strength of the support protruding piece 46 of the upper support fitting 45, and when viewed from the front, the lock member 80, which will be described below, cannot be visually recognized to improve the appearance. Then, the lock member 80 is used as a portion where the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 described below comes into contact, or as a stop portion so that the lock member 80 does not jump out of the support protruding piece 46. Further, the support hole 47 formed in the support projecting piece 46 is formed to be bent so as to be inclined slightly toward the inside from the side on the opposite side where the hanging wall 46a is not formed. Has been. The groove size of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 47 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 504.

  The hanging wall 46 a described above is formed by being bent at right angles along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 46 and the upper support fitting 45 from the entrance end portion in front of the support pothole 47, and the support pothole 47. A stop drooping portion 47a is formed by being bent inward at the entrance end portion of the front. A mounting hole 46 b is formed in the approximate center of the support projecting piece 46, and a lock member 80 is rotatably supported by a rivet 81 in the mounting hole 46 b. The lock member 80 is molded from a synthetic resin. The stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b are formed in an L shape, and an arc-shaped elastic piece 80c is integrally extended on the opposite side of the operation portion 80b. It is installed. A mounting hole 80d through which the rivet 81 is inserted is formed in an L-shaped base portion formed by the stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b. Thus, in a state where the lock member 80 is attached to the attachment hole 46b by the rivet 81 and is rotatably fixed to the back surface of the support protruding piece 46, as shown in FIG. The portion is in contact with the inner side surface of the hanging wall 46 a, and the stopper portion 80 a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47. Further, at this time, the tip end portion of the stopper portion 80a is not in a state of closing the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47. That is, in a normal state, a space in which the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support 503 of the main body frame 3 is inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support rod hole 47.

  By the way, the shaft support pin 504 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 47, and the tip side of the stopper portion 80a faces the stop hanging portion 47a at the inlet end portion (in this state) In a normal shaft support state in which there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 80a and the stop drooping portion 47a, the support hole 47 is formed by bending. The centers of the shaft support pin 504 and the tip end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a that are located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion are opposed to each other while being shifted in an oblique direction. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 504 that supports the heavy main body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support rod hole 47. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80. Further, as shown in FIG. 15A, the lock member 80 is formed in an arc shape so that it smoothly rotates when the distal end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is rotated by operating the operation portion 80b. . In the illustrated case, the arc center of the arcuate tip surface 80e is the center of the rivet 81 (the rotation center of the lock member 80).

  For this reason, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 504 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 47 and comes into contact with the arcuate tip surface 80e, the acting force F is The component force F1 (the normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip end surface 80e) acting on the contact portion between the support pin 504 and the arcuate tip end face 80e, and the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 504 and the support flange 47 Since the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 81 (rotation center of the lock member 80) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side, the stopper of the lock member 80 The moment that rotates the tip of the portion 80a in the direction away from the support protrusion 46 (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 504 is inclined between the tip of the stopper 80a of the lock member 80 and the support flange 47. Clamped between one side inner surface of the hole To hold. Therefore, the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 is not always loaded even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 504 is applied to the lock member 80, and the elasticity formed integrally with the synthetic resin. The plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 80c can be prevented, and the shaft support pin 504 can be prevented from falling off from the support hole 47 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 80a of the locking member 80 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 46 (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 80a Does not rotate in such a direction that it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 47a and disengages further, so that the lock member 80 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 46.

  Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 15A, the arc center of the arcuate tip surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is the center of the rivet 81 (the rotation center of the lock member 80), so Although the description has been given of the case in which no rotational moment is generated in the lock member 80 even when the acting force F in the direction of coming off along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47 is applied, as shown in FIG. When the radius of curvature of the arcuate tip surface 80f of the portion 80a is further reduced and the shaft support position by the rivet 81 of the lock member 80 is set to the inside of the support protrusion 46, the shaft support pin 504 is inclined with respect to the support collar hole 47. When the acting force F is applied in the direction of coming off along the inclination of the hole, and abuts against the arcuate tip surface 80f, the acting force F is brought into contact with the pivot pin 504 and the arcuate tip surface 80f. Component force F1 acting on the component (normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip surface 80f) and component force acting on the contact portion between the shaft support pin 504 and one side inner surface of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47 In the case of dividing into F2, the rotational moment is exerted by the component force F1 to rotate the lock member 80 in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure (clockwise rotation direction). Since the side only abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a, the lock member 80 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 46, and no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80.

  That is, the point that can be understood from the embodiment shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B is that the acting force is such that the shaft support pin 504 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47. When F is applied and abuts against the end faces 80e and 80f, a rotational moment that rotates the lock member 80 by the component force F1 acting on the abutting portion between the pivot pin 504 and the end faces 80e and 80f of the acting force F. By positioning the rotation center (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) of the lock member 80 at a position where no rotation occurs or a position where a rotational moment is generated where the lock member 80 rotates its tip end toward the outside of the support protrusion 46. In addition, no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times, and even if the lock member 80 rotates, one side of the tip of the stopper portion 80a is stopped. Since only abuts against the lock member 80 nor protrudes to the outside of the support protruding piece 46. Even if the shape of the tip surface of the stopper portion 80a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the tip of the lock member 80 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 46. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times. The present applicant confirms that the locking member 80 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 46 because the one side of the tip of the stopper portion 80a only abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a even when the 80 rotates. doing.

  The operation of the lock member 80 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed, a support protrusion 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66 is formed in a support hole (not shown) formed in a frame support plate 506 (see FIG. 71) of the main body frame 3. Must be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support fitting 503 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80, thereby pushing the figure. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), the lock member 80 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 80 c, so that the shaft support pin 504 can be inserted into the support rod hole 47. Then, when the pivot pin 504 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 47, as shown in FIG. 16C, the pivot pin 504 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 80a do not contact each other. Therefore, the lock member 80 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c and rotates in the clockwise direction, and the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80 returns to the normal state again and closes the inlet portion of the support hole 47, The distal end portion of the stopper portion 80 a faces the shaft support pin 504 so that the shaft support pin 504 does not fall out of the support rod hole 47. This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 504 from the support hole 47, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion 46 and the operation portion 80b of the lock member 80 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 80 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 80a is retracted from the support rod hole 47, so that the shaft support pin 504 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 47. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 can be removed from the outer frame 2 by lifting the main body frame 3 and releasing the engagement between the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 and the support protrusions 68 of the lower support fitting 66. .

  As described above, in the lock member 80 provided on the upper support fitting 45 of the outer frame 2 according to the second embodiment, the stopper portion 80a, the operation portion 80b, and the elastic piece 80c are integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, it can be very easily attached to the back surface of the upper support fitting 45, and since it has a very simple structure, there are few failures and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft supporting pin 504 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 47 and comes into contact with the front end surfaces 80e, 80f, the shaft supporting pin 504 of the acting force F And a position where no rotational moment is generated to rotate the lock member 80 by the component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the front end surfaces 80e and 80f, or the front end portion of the lock member 80 is rotated toward the outside of the support protruding piece 46. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) at the position where the rotation moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic piece 80c to be formed, and to prevent the pivot pin 504 from coming off from the support hole 47 over a long period of time. Since the locking member 80 is only towards the distal end on one side of the stopper portion 80a also rotates and abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a, the lock member 80 nor protrudes to the outside of the support protruding piece 46.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. FIG. 17 is a front view of the door frame, and FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame.

  As shown in FIGS. 17, 18, 21, and 22, the door frame 5 is a door frame base unit having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a vertically long polygonal shape. 100, a horizontally long top lamp lighting unit 200 attached to the upper part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, a tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, A glass unit 450 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the gaming window 101, and a security cover 470 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear side of the glass unit 450. And. The door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 is provided with side speaker lighting units 120 on both the left and right sides of the gaming window 101, which will be described in detail later. The outer periphery of the game window 101 is surrounded by the decoration unit 200 and the dish unit 300. Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle device 400 for performing a game ball driving operation on the left side (open side) of the dish unit 300 when viewed from the front.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 to 31. FIG. 23A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 23B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the back. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the left unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26 as seen from the back. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view in which the right unit of the side speaker electric decoration unit in the door frame base unit is exploded and seen from the front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which FIG. 28 is seen from the back. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball feeding unit in the door frame base unit in an exploded manner. FIG. 31A is an enlarged perspective view showing a joint unit portion in the door frame base unit, and FIG. 31B is an exploded perspective view showing the joint unit in an exploded manner.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base body having a gaming window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a vertically long inner periphery and a polygonal shape. 110, a side speaker lighting unit 120 fixed to the left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front side of the door frame base body 110, and a metal frame-shaped reinforcing sheet metal 140 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110. A horizontally long mounting base 160 fixed to the rear side of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and a ball feeding unit 170 that sends game balls, which are fixed to the mounting base 160 and supplied from the dish unit 300, one by one to the ball hitting device 650, An operation handle in the handle device 400 is disposed on the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and substantially below the ball feed unit 170 fixed via the reinforcing sheet metal 140 and the mounting base 160. And a joint unit 180 to transmit the rotation operation 410 to hitting the firing device 650 mainly includes.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 corresponds to a lower left decorative board 190 fixed to the lower left side of the gaming window 101 on the front side of the door frame base main body 110 and a ball removal path 393 of the dish unit 300 in the door frame base main body 110. A ball extraction path cover 191 that closes the ball extraction path opening 112 formed at the position, a door decoration drive board 192 that is fixed below the game window 101 on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a door decoration drive. A door decoration drive board cover 193 that covers the board 192 from the rear, a handle relay terminal plate 194 that is fixed immediately above the joint unit 180 on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a door frame base body on the lower side of the game window 101 The wiring receiving groove 110b formed on the rear side of 110 and capable of receiving wiring from the lower left decorative board 190 and the handle relay terminal board 194 is closed from the rear side. The wiring cover 195, and an stopper lever 196 which is pivotally supported on the rear side of the respective arranged door frame base body 110 in the upper left and right of the game window 101.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the present example has an overall rigidity increased by fixing a reinforcing sheet metal 140 in which metal sheets are assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has sufficient strength to sufficiently support the top lamp illumination unit 200, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The lower left decorative substrate 190 in the door frame base unit 100 has a plurality of LEDs 190a mounted on the front surface thereof, so that the left end portion of the later-described dish unit 300 can be decorated with light emission. On the other hand, the door decoration drive board 192 is provided in the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400, such as an electrical component and an electrical component provided on the door frame 5 (LEDs and lamps mounted on each board and the like, speakers 121 and 391). Wiring from the switch, the ball rental unit 301, the operation button unit 370, etc. are connected together and the wiring from the door decoration drive board 192 is incorporated into the board unit 1100 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. It is connected to the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 166) of the main control board box 624 attached to the prize ball payout control board 1186 and the game board 4 through 1102 and the like.

[1-2A-1. Door frame base body]
First, the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a vertically long frame shape with synthetic resin, as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the gaming window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper side reinforcing sheet metal 141, a shaft side reinforcing sheet metal 142, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of a reinforcing sheet metal 140 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a wider game area than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become.

  Also, below the gaming window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a prize ball passing port 111 through which the prize ball contact rod 343 of the dish unit 300 penetrates at the upper part of the shaft support side (left side in front view), and a prize ball A ball removal path opening 112 formed at a position corresponding to the ball removal path 393 in the dish unit 300 below the passage opening 111, and a ball for mounting the ball feeding unit 170 on the upper side of the open side (right side in front view). A feed opening 113, a lock hole 114 through which a cylinder lock 1010, which will be described later, is inserted further toward the opening side of the ball feed opening 113, and a cam insertion opening 115 through which the cam 416 of the handle device 400 can be inserted below the ball feed opening 113. Are formed so as to penetrate the door frame base body 110, respectively.

  Further, the door frame base body 110 has a mounting opening 116 for mounting a mounting elastic piece 473 of the crime prevention cover 470 and a left and right of the mounting opening 116, as will be described in detail later. Speaker openings 117 are formed so as to penetrate the rear ends of the left and right side speakers 121 in the side speaker lighting unit 120, which will be described later.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, a glass unit support step 110 a that is recessed forward along substantially the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 and the front outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 450 can contact, and the gaming window 101. On the lower side, a wiring receiving groove 110b that is recessed forward and is formed at a position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144, and can accommodate the wiring, and a cam insertion opening 115 is opened to attach the recessed joint unit 180 toward the front side. And a joint unit mounting recess 110c.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, door frame protrusions 110d and 110e projecting a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side are formed, and these door frame protrusions 110d and 110e are formed in a body frame 3 described later. The door frame 5 is positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3 by being inserted into the engagement grooves 584 and 585. In addition, the protrusion amount to the rear of the door frame protrusion 110d is formed to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110e.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the door frame base body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110h projecting forward for fixing the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 on the front upper portion thereof, and on the rear surface thereof. A stop lever mounting portion 110i for rotatably supporting the stop lever 196 is provided. In addition, the door frame base body 110 is formed with a large number of mounting bosses and mounting holes for fixing the side speaker lighting unit 120, the reinforcing sheet metal 140, the mounting base 160, the dish unit 300, etc. at appropriate positions. ing.

[1-2A-2. Side speaker lighting unit]
Subsequently, the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 illuminates the left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame 5 (light-emitting decoration), and the four arranged at the four corners of the gaming window 101. The left speaker lighting unit 120L that can emit predetermined music, sound effects, and the like to the player by the side speaker 121 and is disposed on the pivotal side of the gaming window 101 (left side in front view). And a right side speaker illumination unit 120R disposed on the open side (right side in front view) of the gaming window 101. The side speaker illumination unit 120 includes a vertically elongated illumination part 122 and an acoustic part 130 having a side speaker 121 disposed above and below the illumination part 122 in each of the left and right units. It has a configuration.

  More specifically, as shown in an exploded view in FIGS. 26 to 29, the illumination part 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 is a vertically long semi-cylindrical and transparent side illumination lens 123, and the side illumination lens 123. A transparent side illumination reflector 124 disposed on the rear side and constituting a cylinder with the side illumination lens 123; a side illumination base 125 disposed on the rear side of the side illumination reflector 124; and a side illumination base 125 The side decoration board 126 fixed to the rear side, and the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 are formed so as to enclose the upper end and the lower end from the front side, respectively, and are attached to the side illumination base 125 so that the side illumination lens is attached. 123 and the side illumination flash cover 127 that supports the side illumination reflector 124, and the side illumination flash cover A flash lens 128 having translucency to close the 27 flash openings 127a from the rear side, and a flash substrate 129 disposed on the rear side of the flash lens 128 and supported on the front surface of the side electric decoration base 125. .

  The illumination part 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 has a plurality of color LEDs 126a that can emit light in various colors at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction on the front surface of the side illumination board 126, and high luminance above and below the plurality of LEDs 126a. Each white LED 126b is mounted. In addition, openings 124a and 125a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 126a and 126b of the side electric decoration board 126 in the side electric decoration reflector 124 and the side electric decoration base 125, respectively. The light from the LEDs 126 a and 126 b mounted on 126 can be irradiated forward through the opening 125 a of the side electric decoration base 125 and the opening 124 a of the side electric decoration reflector 124.

  Moreover, in the electrical decoration part 122, in the inner side in the transparent cylinder of the side electrical decoration lens 123 and the side electrical decoration reflector 124, in the whole inner periphery of the side electrical decoration lens 123, and a part of inner periphery of the side electrical decoration reflector 124 In this way, the side lens sheet 123a having a substantially U-shaped cross section is disposed. The side lens sheet 123a is formed of a known optical sheet that displays transmitted light or reflected light in a pearl shape or a chromatic shape. When viewed from the player side, the side lens sheet 123a allows the side illumination lens 123a to be seen. In addition, an appearance as if a fluorescent tube (fluorescent tube) is arranged in a transparent column (pipe) formed by the side electric reflector 124 can be exhibited.

  Furthermore, in the electrical decoration part 122, the dividing wall 124b which divides | segments the several opening part 124a formed corresponding to the several LED 126a of the side decoration board 126 into three groups in the up-down direction is provided in the side electrical decoration reflector 124. The partition wall 124b prevents light from a predetermined LED 126a from entering another group. That is, the dividing wall 124b can clearly divide the fluorescent tube formed by the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 into upper, middle, and lower three parts. Accordingly, by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 126a mounted on the side decorative board 126, the fluorescent tube is caused to emit light in whole or in part, or light is emitted in various colors for each of the upper, middle, and lower parts. Can be done.

  Further, the side electric decoration reflector 124 is formed with a lens concave portion 124c that is recessed from the front side at a position corresponding to the upper and lower LEDs 126b on the side decorative substrate 126. 122a (see FIGS. 28 and 29) is inserted. The electrical decoration part 122 of this example is a fluorescent tube formed by the side electrical decoration lens 123 and the side electrical illumination reflector 124 by causing only the LED 126b to emit light strongly before the LED 126a emits light by the sub lens 122a and the LED 126b. As if it were a real fluorescent lamp, it is possible to produce a light emission effect that lights only after both ends shine.

  Furthermore, the illumination part 122 has a flashlight 129a (for example, an ultra-bright white LED or the like) that can emit strong light on the front surface of the flash substrate 129 supported on the rear side of the side illumination flash cover 127. The flashlight 129a emits light so that the player can irradiate a flashlight.

  The acoustic part 130 of the side speaker electric decoration unit 120 includes a speaker decoration 131 having a substantially circular speaker opening 131a disposed at the foremost part, and a substantially disk made of punching metal that closes the speaker opening 131a of the speaker decoration 131 from the rear side. Speaker cover 132, a decorative spacer 133 disposed behind the speaker cover 132 and cooperating with the speaker decoration 131 to sandwich the speaker cover and have a circular speaker front support port 133 a, and the speaker of the decoration spacer 133 It mainly includes a side speaker 121 disposed so as to close the front support port 133a from the rear side, and a back pressing member 134 having a speaker fitting port 134a that is fitted to the outer periphery of the side speaker 121 from the rear side. .

  As shown in the figure, the acoustic unit 130 has different speaker decorations 131, decorative spacers 133, and back pressing members 134 in different shapes depending on the positions where they are attached. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the upper left acoustic unit 130 in a front view includes a decoration 131b that is formed in a cylindrical shape and extends outward from the left side. The decorative spacer 133 has a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the speaker decoration 131, and the back pressing member 134 is formed with a back pressing decoration part 134 b that is paired with the decoration part 131 b of the speaker decoration 131. The upper left acoustic part 130 is further provided with a hinge cover 135 that is disposed above the back press decoration part 134 b of the back press member 134 and covers the lower side of the shaft pin 145 of the upper shaft support part 146 in the reinforcing sheet metal 140. Yes. In the lower left acoustic part 130 in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a plate shape having a decoration part 131 b, and the decoration spacer 133 includes a spacer decoration part 133 b that is paired with the decoration part 131 b of the speaker decoration 131. The back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, in the acoustic unit 130 at the upper right in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the decoration spacer 133 and the back pressing member 134 are inserted into the speaker decoration 131. It is formed in a possible cylindrical shape. Further, in the lower right acoustic part 130 in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in an annular shape, and the decoration spacer 133 is formed in a flat plate shape having a spacer decoration part 133b that contacts the rear surface of the speaker decoration 131. In addition, the back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape. Note that the lower right acoustic unit 130 further includes a decoration base 136 having a back presser member fixing port 136a through which the back presser member 134 can be inserted and fixed from the front side further on the rear side of the back presser member 134. .

  As shown in the figure, the four side speakers 121 in the side speaker electric decoration unit 120 of this example are arranged at the four corners of the game window 101, and the head of the player who plays the game is more or less. Are also arranged at the top, bottom, left and right positions, so that each side speaker 121 has independent acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, and 2.1ch surround including a lower speaker 391 described later) By sending a signal or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before. In addition, the side speaker 121 of this example is mainly in charge of the middle to high range, and the lower speaker 391 is in charge of the low range.

[1-2A-3. Reinforced sheet metal]
Next, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached along the back of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcement sheet metal 142 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcement sheet metal 143 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. A lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 attached along the lower surface of the lower side of the gaming window 101 is fastened to each other with screws or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes an upper shaft supporting part 146 having shaft pins 145 provided on the upper and lower ends of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on its upper surface, and its lower surface. A lower shaft support portion 148 having a shaft pin 147 (see FIG. 18) is integrally formed. The upper and lower shaft pins 145 and 147 are pivotally supported by an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

  Further, the lower reinforcing metal plate 144 of the reinforcing metal plate 140 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110. It is a lower bent protrusion piece 149 that is bent rearward (see FIG. 25), and both upper side edges of the upper long side edge are upper bent protrusion pieces 150 that are bent rearward. However, the portions sandwiched between the upper bent protrusions 150 on both sides are vertical bent protrusions 151 extending in the vertical direction. The amount of protrusion of the lower bent protruding piece 149 is not so large, and the lower bent protruding piece 149 does not engage with the groove portion or the concave portion to form the concave / convex engagement, but is formed to increase the strength. On the other hand, the amount of protrusion of the upper bent protrusions 150 on both sides is slightly larger than the amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusions 149, and somewhat prevents unauthorized tools from entering from below, but rather the lower reinforcement in the present embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the sheet metal 144 is a vertical bent protrusion piece 151.

  The vertical bent protrusion 151 is formed in a concave shape so that its upper edge shape matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 described later, and when the glass unit 450 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5 Further, the upper end piece of the vertical bent protrusion piece 151 is engaged with an engagement groove 451c formed along the outer periphery of the substantially central portion in the width direction (front-rear direction) of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. . The lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 152 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 111 formed in the door frame base body 110.

  In addition, the open side reinforcing metal plate 143 of the reinforcing metal plate 140 includes an open side outwardly protruding protrusion 153 bent rearward on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing metal plate 141 and the lower reinforcing metal plate 144, and Open side inner bent protrusions 154 are respectively formed, and the open side inner bent protrusions 154 are formed to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent protrusions 153. The upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 is formed with bent protrusions 155 and 156 that are bent backward on both sides of the long side. Further, the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 is formed with a shaft-supporting side L-shaped bent protrusion 157 extending rearward at the outer end of the long side. In addition, a hook cover 158 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 described later is attached to the rear lower portion of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 143.

[1-2A-4. Mounting base / ball feeding unit]
Next, the mounting table 160 and the ball feeding unit 170 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 18, 24, and 25, the mounting base 160 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the rear surface of the plate portion of the door frame base unit 100, and is a transparent synthetic resin similar to the security cover 470. Is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape whose front is opened. In order to smoothly guide the ball fired from the firing rail 515 to the game board 4, the mounting base 160 is formed by the rear surface of the mounting base 160 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed. The ball flying guide surface 161 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting table 160. By the way, the mounting base 160 according to the present embodiment has a prize ball passing port opening 162 through which the rear protruding portion of the prize ball passing port covering part 152 formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is penetrated at the upper part on the pivotal support side. A ball feed unit mounting recess 163 for attaching the ball feed unit 170 is formed in the lower part on the open side. A region in the oblique direction from the ball feed unit mounting recess 163 is a ball flight guide surface 161.

  Further, a lid notch 164 into which a finger can be put when removing a ball passage route cover 191, a door decoration drive board 192, and a door decoration drive board cover 193, which will be described later, is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 160. In addition, a vertical wall 165 is formed vertically on a part of the upper side of the mounting table 160. As shown in FIG. 18, the upright wall 165 is for preventing the lower part of the security cover 470 from moving forward by contacting the front surface of the security cover 470 when the security cover 470 is attached.

  Further, the mounting table 160 includes a crime prevention protrusion 166 that protrudes obliquely rearward from the above-described ball flight guide surface 161 to the prize ball passage opening 162. As described above, the security projecting piece 166 is provided between the security frame 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 and the inner ridges and the inner side ridges at the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The engaging portion is configured.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, the ball feeding unit 170 includes a box-shaped main body 171 fixed to the ball feeding unit mounting recess 163 and a ball pivotally supported by a support shaft 171 a of the main body 171. A feed member 172 and a weight 173 pivotally supported by the ball feed member 172 while rotating the ball receiving portion of the ball feed member 172 upward are provided. The ball feed unit 170 is located at the lower end of the third inclined surface 311c of the dish unit 300 by swinging the ball feed member 172 in response to the reciprocal movement difference of the ball striking rod 687 of the ball hitting device 650 described later. The balls are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 515 through the hitting ball supply port 171b formed in the main body 171.

  Reference numeral 174 in the figure denotes an E-ring that prevents the ball feed member 172 from coming off from the support shaft 171a of the main body 171 and prevents the weight 173 from coming off from the ball feed member 172. It is.

[1-2A-5. Joint unit]
Next, the joint unit 180 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, the joint unit 180 is housed in the joint unit mounting recess 110 c of the door frame base body 110 and is slidable in the lateral direction, and the joint unit 180 is housed in the state where the slide body 182 is housed. The cover body 184 covers the front surface of the unit mounting recess 110c.

  The joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base body 110 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape with the front surface open, and a cam insertion opening 115 is formed on the rear surface. In addition, a pair of attachment holes 110f for fixing the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in one corner portion of the joint unit mounting recess 110c that is positioned substantially diagonally. Furthermore, the arcuate abutment convex portions for allowing the slide body 182 to move smoothly by abutting against the outer surfaces of the upper and lower sides of the slide body 182 on the upper side and the bottom side of the inner side surface of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. 110g (in FIG. 31B, only the lower abutment protrusion 110g is shown, and the upper abutment protrusion 110g is not shown).

  On the other hand, the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 has a rear surface smaller than the joint unit mounting recess 110c so that the slide body 182 is housed in a space formed by the joint unit mounting recess 110c and the cover body 184 so as to be movable in the left-right direction. Formed in the shape of an open rectangular parallelepiped box, the rear face wall is provided with two guide protrusions 182a projecting a predetermined amount rearward and arranged in a substantially horizontal direction, and below the right guide protrusion 182a in the rear view. A plate-like slide protrusion 183 that protrudes rearward and a hole pierced between the two guide protrusions 182a so that a wiring through tube portion 428 of the handle device 400, which will be described later, penetrates on the left side of the slide protrusion 183 in rear view. And a rectangular cylindrical member through-opening 182b. The slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 has an inclined side 183a in which the traveling direction during sliding (right direction in rear view) is cut obliquely. In addition, a cam engagement recess 182 c that houses a cam 416 that is fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 of the handle device 400 is formed in a U shape on the front wall of the slide body 182 by a rib. Then, a vertical part of a part of the rib forming the cam engagement recess 182c is formed as an arc-shaped rib so as to protrude into the cam engagement recess 182c, and that part is a cam contact part 182d that contacts the cam 416. It has become.

  Further, the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape with the front surface opened, and a cylindrical boss-shaped guide protrusion 182a protruding from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted into the front surface of the slide body 182. Two lateral guide holes 194a that guide the movement of the slide body, an insertion lateral hole 184b through which the slide protrusion 183 projecting from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted, and the rear grip member 413 of the operation handle 410 It protrudes outward from a position corresponding to the wiring opening 184c that is attached to the end and is inserted through the cam insertion opening 115 and facing the rear end of the wiring through cylinder 428 and the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. And a mounting hole 184d formed. The cover body 184 can be attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110c by fixing a predetermined screw (not shown) to the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c through the mounting hole 184d. .

  In order to attach the slide body 182 and the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 to the joint unit mounting recess 110c, the slide body 182 is accommodated in the joint unit mounting recess 110c, and the cover body 184 is covered from the front in that state. When covering, the guide protrusion 182a is inserted into the guide lateral hole 194a, and the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion lateral hole 184b. Then, after the coating, by screwing into the mounting hole 110f with the screw through the mounting hole 184d, the slide body 182 is housed inside, and the assembly of the joint unit 180 is completed.

[1-2B. Top lamp lighting unit]
Next, the top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39. 32A is a front perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, and FIG. 33 is a perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit obliquely from the lower front. It is. FIG. 34A is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp electrical decoration unit disassembled for each main configuration and shown from the front, and FIG. 34B is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the top lamp reflector unit in the top lamp illumination unit disassembled and shown from the front together with the top lamp base. FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. Further, FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view showing the left rotating lamp in the top lamp lighting unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view showing the right rotating lamp in the top lamp lighting unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view showing the center rotating lamp in the top lamp illumination unit in an exploded manner.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes three rotating lights 244, 264, 284 (so-called Patlite (registered trademark)) arranged in the left-right direction. The sizes of the rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 are arranged in order from the left in front view. The top lamp electric decoration unit 200 is fixed to the front side of the horizontally long and box-shaped top lamp base 210 and the top lamp base 210 and to the upper front part of the door frame base unit 100 with the top lamp base 210 interposed therebetween. Top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating lamp unit 240, right rotating lamp unit 260, and central rotating lamp unit 280 attached to the front surface of top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating lamp unit 240, right rotating lamp unit 260, and Rotating lamp covers 201, 202, 203 that cover the front surface of the central rotating lamp unit 280, respectively, and are attached to the top lamp reflector unit 220, and a reflector inner 204 that covers the substantially central lower surface of the top lamp reflector unit are mainly provided ( (See Figure 34)

  Further, the top lamp illumination unit 200 includes a top lamp power supply board 205 fixed to the front right side of the top lamp base 210 and two top lamp decoration drive boards 206 fixed to the rear side of the top lamp base 210. In addition. The top lamp power supply board 205 includes the boards 224, 226, 231 and LEDs 244a, 266a, 231a, motors 245, 265, 285 of the rotary lamp units 240, 260, 280 and boards 248 in the top lamp lighting unit 200. , 268, 288, and 296, and LED 453a of a glass unit 450 described later, etc., for relaying and supplying power from a power supply board 1136 (described later). Further, the top lamp decoration drive board 206 emits light from the LEDs in the top lamp reflector unit 220, the LEDs in the central rotary lamp unit 280, the motors 245, 265, 285, etc. of the rotary lamp units 240, 260, 280, etc. This is for driving based on a control signal from a peripheral board 4010 (peripheral control board 4140) described later.

[1-2B-1. Top lamp base]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp base 210 in the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 has a shape in which the upper surface and the left and right side surfaces are substantially aligned with the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base unit 100. At the same time, the lower surface is shaped substantially along the gaming window 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in a box shape that is horizontally long and partitioned in the middle in the front-rear direction. The top lamp base 210 has a rear end of a mounting boss 221 i protruding from the front side to the rear from the top lamp reflector unit 220 while the mounting boss 110 h of the door frame base body 110 is inserted from the rear side at a position along the outer periphery. Are fitted and positioned, and a plurality of substantially cylindrical mounting boss portions 211 having insertion holes through which predetermined screws can be inserted are provided. The front end of the mounting boss 110h of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted into the mounting boss portion 211 from the rear, and the rear end of the mounting boss 221i of the top lamp reflector unit 220 is inserted from the front. By fixing a predetermined screw from the rear side to the mounting boss 221 i of the top lamp reflector unit 220, the top lamp base 210 (top lamp lighting unit 200) is attached and fixed to the door frame base unit 100. ing.

  Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a plurality of fixed boss portions 212 having insertion holes through which a rear end of a fixed boss 221j protruding rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be fitted and a predetermined screw can pass. ing. By fixing a predetermined screw to the fixed boss 221j of the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the rear side through the fixed boss portion 212, the top lamp base 210 and the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be assembled to each other. It has become.

  Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a connector opening 213 through which the connection connector 205a of the top lamp power supply board 205 can be inserted in the vicinity of the right end in front view, and the connector 205a is inserted through the connector opening 213. Is faced from the rear side of the top lamp base 210. Further, a board mounting portion 214 is provided on each of the left and right sides of the rear side of the top lamp base 210, and the top lamp decoration driving board 206 is attached to the board mounting portion 214.

[1-2B-2. Top lamp reflector unit]
Next, the top lamp reflector unit 220 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp reflector unit 220 of the present embodiment includes a box-shaped reflector base 221 that can cover the top lamp base 210 from the front side and is open at the rear side. The reflector base 221 is a cylindrical cylinder that has three rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 mounted side by side on its front surface, and projects between the central rotating lamp 284 and the left and right rotating lamps 244 and 264 greatly forward. It is partitioned by a portion 221a and an inclined portion 221b that hangs downward from the cylindrical portion 221a and inclines backward as it goes downward. In the reflector base 221, a substantially circular opening is formed in the cylindrical part 221a, and three rectangular openings arranged in the vertical direction are formed in the inclined part 221b (see FIG. 33). ). The reflector base 210 is provided with a vertically long bulging portion 221e that protrudes forward at both left and right ends, and a rectangular slit 221f that opens vertically is formed in front of the bulging portion 221e. The reflector base 211 has a shape in which the mounting positions of the three rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 are recessed backward by two cylindrical portions 221a and inclined portions 221b and two bulging portions 221e as shown in the figure. It has become.

  In addition, the reflector base 221 has a gently curved surface shape that is recessed rearward between the two cylindrical portions 221a and the inclined portion 221b (position where the central rotating lamp 284 is disposed). Between the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b, a lens opening portion 221g penetrating in a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view is formed on the left and right sides of the substantially horizontal center. Further, the reflector base 221 is mounted with a rotating lamp through which the front ends of the rotating lamp unit bases 241, 261, 281 of the rotating lamp units 240, 260, 280 having the rotating lamps 244, 264, 284 can pass from the rear side. A mouth 221h is formed. In addition, the reflector base 221 has a plurality of mounting bosses 221 i protruding rearward that fit with the mounting boss portions 211 of the top lamp base 210, and a plurality of mounting bosses 212 fitted to the fixed boss portion 212 of the top lamp base 210 and protruding rearward. And a fixed boss 221j. Although not shown in detail, the reflector base 221 is also provided with an attachment boss 221k that is directly attached to the door frame base unit 100 without using the top lamp base 210.

  By the way, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes, in addition to the reflector base 221, a pair of top inner lenses 222 that are fixed to the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the reflector base 221, and the reflector base 221 on the rear side of the top inner lens 222. A pair of lens sheets 223 disposed at a position corresponding to the lens opening 221g, a pair of reflector decorative substrates 224 disposed on the rear side of the lens sheet 223 and having a plurality of color LEDs 224a mounted thereon, and a reflector base 210. A transparent round lens 225 that is inserted into the cylindrical portion 221a from the rear side and closes the opening 221c, and behind the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 210 with the round lens 225 and the top inner lens 222 interposed therebetween. LED226a on the front Mounted and a pair of partition decorative substrate 226.

  The top inner lens 222 is formed of a transparent resin. The top inner lens 222 includes a curved lens portion 222a having a substantially trapezoidal curved surface that closes the lens opening 221g of the reflector base 221, and an inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 221. A partition lens portion 222b that closes the opening 221d and a round lens support portion 222c that contacts the rear end of the round lens 225 are provided. In addition, saw-shaped diffusion lens portions 222d are formed on the upper and lower sides of the curved lens portion 222a, and can emit light in a mode different from that of the curved lens portion 222a, and light from the front side can be emitted even when light is not emitted. Can be irregularly reflected.

  Further, the top inner lens 222 supports a lens sheet 223 on the rear side of the curved lens portion 222a sandwiched between upper and lower protruding pieces, and a protruding piece 222e protruding rearward from the rear side of the diffusion lens portion 222d. A support recess 222f is formed. As shown in the figure, in the reflector decorative substrate 224, a plurality of LEDs 224a are arranged at positions corresponding to the protruding pieces 222e of the top inner lens 222, and correspond to the curved surface lens portion 222a of the top inner lens 222. The positions are also distributed. Accordingly, the curved lens portion 222a and the diffusing lens portion 222d of the top inner lens 222 can emit light in different modes.

  The lens sheet 223 is a known optical sheet that displays transmitted light from the LED 224a mounted on the reflector decorative substrate 224 or reflected light from other light sources in a pearl shape or a chromatic shape. The LED 226a mounted on the partition decoration board 226 is an ultra-bright LED, and can emit a strong flash.

  Further, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes a top side lens 227 that closes a longitudinal slit 221f formed in the left and right bulged portions 221e of the reflector base 221, and a top side that fixes the upper end of the top side lens 227 from the front side. A lens retainer 228, a lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 227 and the reflector base 221, and a top side substrate base 230 that holds the lens sheet 229 by being fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221. And a top side substrate 231 mounted on the front surface with a color LED 231a fixed to the top side substrate base 230 and capable of irradiating light to the front top side lens 227 via the lens sheet 229.

  The top side lens 221 is formed in a square shape in a plan view with a transparent resin, and locking pieces 227a and 227b are formed at upper and lower ends, respectively. The locking piece 227b at the lower end is formed on the reflector base. The upper end locking piece 227a is pressed by the top side lens presser 228 after being locked to the lower end of the slit 221f in the set 221 so that it can be attached to the reflector base 221. The lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 221 is formed of an optical sheet similar to the lens sheet 223 described above, and is formed in a curved shape as shown in the figure. By being attached to 221, an appearance as if a columnar fluorescent tube is arranged on the rear side of the top side lens 227 can be exhibited.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the top side substrate base 230 is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and light from the LED 231a of the top side substrate 231 that is fixed to the rear side through the frame is converted into the lens sheet 229 and the top side. Light can be applied to the front surface via the lens 227.

[1-2B-3. Revolving light unit]
Next, the three rotating lamp units 240, 260, and 280 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 37, the left rotating lamp unit 240 has a circular opening 241a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 241a projects forward from the rotating lamp mounting port 221h of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 241 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and a substantially annular rotation fixed on the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241 disposed coaxially with the opening 241a of the rotating lamp unit base 241. A base part 242, a rotating lamp base gear 243 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 242, and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 242, and a lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 243. The rotating lamp mounting port 221 of the reflector base 221 is substantially parallel to the axis of the rotating lamp base 244 and the rotating lamp base gear 243. A left rotating lamp motor 245 disposed on the rear axis of the rotating lamp unit and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241 so that the rotating shaft 245a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241; A transmission gear 246 that is fixed to the rotating shaft 245a of the H.245 and meshes with the rotating lamp base gear 243, covers the entire rotating lamp base gear 243 and a part of the transmitting gear 246 from above, and covers the rotating lamp base gear 243 from the rotating portion base 242. The rotating unit holder 247 fixed to the rotating lamp unit base 241 and supported on the lower surface of the rotating unit holder 247 is coaxial with the rotating lamp base gear 243 and is directed to the lower rotating lamp 244. And a left rotating lamp substrate 248 having a high-luminance color LED (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The left rotating lamp unit 240 is mounted with a rotating lamp unit cover 249 that covers the rotating part holder 247 from above, a left rotating position detection sensor 250 that detects the rotating position of the rotating lamp 244, and a left rotating position detection sensor 250. And a counterclockwise rotation position detection substrate 251.

  The rotating lamp unit base 241 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 hangs downward on the upper surface thereof at an attachment step 241b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 241a and at a position rearward of the opening 241a. A mounting portion 241c mounted on the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 241d disposed on the rear side of the opening 241a for fixing the left rotating lamp motor 245 are provided. The mounting step portion 241b rotates from above. The part base 242 is adapted to be fitted. In addition, the rotating part base 242 has a left rotation position detected at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 241a of the rotating lamp unit base 241 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 243. A substrate support portion 242b that supports the lower end of the substrate 251; a wiring locking portion 242c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 242b and that locks the wiring connected to the left rotation lamp substrate 248 and the left rotation position detection substrate 251; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 243 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating portion base 242, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft supporting port 242a of the rotating portion base 242. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 243a that has a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 243b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 243 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating part base 242, and is inserted into the shaft support port 242a. 243 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 242a. In the left rotating lamp unit 240, the rotation position detecting piece 243b of the rotating lamp base gear 243 is detected by the left rotating position detection sensor 250, so that the rotating position of the rotating lamp 244 can be detected. Yes.

  Further, although not shown, the rotating portion holder 247 protrudes downward to a position coaxial with the shaft support opening 242a of the rotating portion base 242, and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft tube is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243. By inserting the holder shaft tube into the shaft support hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243, the rotating lamp The base gear 243 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. In other words, in the left rotating lamp unit 240 of this example, the rotating lamp base 242a, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft supporting hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating section holder 247 are provided by the rotating lamp base 242a. A gear 243 is rotatably supported. The left rotating lamp substrate 248 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 247. Although not shown in the drawings, the rotation unit holder 247 has a substrate support unit that supports the upper end of the left rotation position detection substrate 251 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 242b of the rotation unit base 242 on the lower surface. The left rotation position detection substrate 251 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 242 and the rotation unit holder 247.

  In addition, the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 is disposed on the lower side of the rotating lamp lens 252 and the transparent disk-shaped rotating lamp lens 252 disposed on the lower side of the rotating lamp base gear 243 as shown in the figure. The reflector 253 is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 243 and the reflector cover 254 that covers the reflector 253. The reflector 253 of the rotating lamp 244 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 253a, an opening 253b drilled in the center of the base portion 253a, and a base portion 253a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 253d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 253a and whose upper ends can come into contact with the rotating lamp base gear 243.

  The rotating lamp 244 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 252 facing the opening 253b of the reflector 253, and the rotating lamp lens 252 has an insertion hole 252a through which the mounting boss 253d of the reflector 253 can be inserted. The mounting boss 253d is inserted into the insertion hole 252a and the mounting boss 253d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 243, so that the rotating lamp lens 252 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 243 and the reflector 253. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 254 of the rotating lamp 244 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in plan view, has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an opening on the side surface of the reflector 253 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 253c. 254a is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38, the right rotating lamp unit 260 has a circular opening 261a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 261a projects forward from the rotating lamp mounting port 221h on the left side of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 261 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to be in the position, and a substantially circular shape arranged coaxially with the opening 261a of the rotating lamp unit base 261 and fixed to the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261. An annular rotating part base 262, a rotating lamp base gear 263 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 262 and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 262, and hangs down from the rotating lamp base gear 263. The rotating lamp 264 fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base and the rotating lamp base gear 263 is mounted in parallel with the axis of the rotating lamp base gear 263. A right rotating lamp motor 265 that is disposed on the axis behind 221h and that is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261 so that the rotating shaft 265a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261; A transmission gear 266 fixed to the rotating shaft 265a of the motor 265 and meshing with the rotating lamp base gear 263, the entire rotating lamp base gear 263 and a part of the transmitting gear 266 are covered from above, and the rotating lamp base gear 263 is covered with the rotating part base. Rotating portion holder 267 which is pivotally supported in cooperation with 262 and fixed to rotating lamp unit base 261, and is fixed to the lower surface of rotating portion holder 267 coaxially with rotating lamp base gear 263, to lower rotating lamp 264. And a right rotating lamp substrate 268 having high-luminance color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The right rotating lamp unit 260 includes a rotating lamp unit cover 269 that covers the rotating unit holder 267 from above, a right rotating position detection sensor 270 that detects the rotating position of the rotating lamp 264, and a right rotating position detection sensor 270. And a right rotation position detection board 271.

  The rotating lamp unit base 261 of the right rotating lamp unit 260 hangs downward at an upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 261a and at a position behind the opening 261a. An attachment portion 261c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 261d arranged on the rear side of the opening 261a for fixing the right rotating lamp motor 265 are provided, and the attachment step portion 261b is rotated from above. The part base 262 is fitted. In addition, the rotating portion base 262 detects the right rotation position at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 261a of the rotating lamp unit base 261 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 263. A substrate support portion 262b that supports the lower end of the substrate 271; a wiring locking portion 262c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 262b and that locks the wiring connected to the right rotation lamp substrate 268 and the right rotation position detection substrate 271; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 263 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating unit base 262, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft supporting port 262a of the rotating unit base 262. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 263a that has a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 263b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 263 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262, and is inserted into the shaft support port 262a. 263 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 262a. In the right rotating lamp unit 260, the rotating position detection piece 263b of the rotating lamp base gear 263 is detected by the right rotating position detection sensor 270, so that the rotating position of the rotating lamp 264 can be detected. Yes.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the rotating part holder 267 protrudes downward to a position that is coaxial with the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262, and can be inserted into the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of this holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263, the rotating lamp The base gear 263 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. That is, in the right rotating lamp unit 260 of this example, the rotating lamp base 262a, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft supporting hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating section holder 267 are used as the rotating lamp base. A gear 263 is rotatably supported. The right rotating lamp substrate 268 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 267. Although not shown, the rotating part holder 267 is provided with a substrate supporting part that supports the upper end of the right rotating position detecting substrate 271 at a position corresponding to the substrate supporting part 262b of the rotating part base 262 on the lower surface. The right rotation position detection board 271 is nipped and fixed between the rotating part base 262 and the rotating part holder 267.

  In addition, the rotating lamp 264 of the right rotating lamp unit 260 is generally larger than the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 as shown in the figure, and is a transparent disk-like shape disposed below the rotating lamp base gear 263. , A reflector 273 disposed below the rotating lamp lens 272 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 263, and a reflector cover 274 that covers the reflector 273. The reflector 273 of the rotating lamp 264 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 273a, an opening portion 273b drilled in the center of the base portion 273a, and a base portion 273a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 273d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 273a and whose upper ends can come into contact with the rotating lamp base gear 263.

  The rotating lamp 264 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 272 facing the opening 273b of the reflector 273, and the rotating lamp lens 272 is formed with an insertion hole 272a through which the mounting boss 273d of the reflector 273 can be inserted. The mounting boss 273d is inserted into the insertion hole 272a, and the mounting boss 273d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 263, so that the rotating lamp lens 272 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 263 and the reflector 273. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 274 of the rotating lamp 264 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an opening portion on a side surface of the reflector 273 that faces the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 273c. 274a is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the central rotary lamp unit 280 has a circular opening 281a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 281a is on the front side from the rotary lamp mounting port 221h in the horizontal center of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 281 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to protrude to the rear, and an opening 281a of the rotating lamp unit base 281 are arranged coaxially and fixed to the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281. A substantially annular rotating part base 282, a rotating lamp base gear 283 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 282 and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 282, and depends from the rotating lamp base gear 283. The rotating lamp 284 fixed to the lower surface thereof and the axis of the rotating lamp base gear 283 are substantially parallel to the rotation of the reflector base 221. A central rotating lamp motor 285 that is disposed on the axis behind the lamp mounting port 221h and that is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281 so that the rotating shaft 285a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281; A transmission gear 286 that is fixed to the rotation shaft 285a of the central rotary lamp motor 285 and meshes with the rotary lamp base gear 283, and the entire rotary lamp base gear 283 and a part of the transmission gear 286 are covered from above and the rotary lamp base gear 283 is covered. A rotating part holder 287 that is pivotally supported in cooperation with the rotating part base 282 and fixed to the rotating lamp unit base 281, and is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating part holder 287 coaxially with the rotating lamp base gear 283, and rotates downward. And a central rotating lamp substrate 288 having high-luminance color LEDs (not shown) that can emit light toward the lamp 284.

  The central rotary lamp unit 280 is mounted with a rotary lamp unit cover 289 that covers the rotary unit holder 287 from above, a central rotational position detection sensor 290 that detects the rotational position of the rotary lamp 284, and a central rotational position detection sensor 290. And a central rotational position detection board 291.

  The rotating lamp unit base 281 of the central rotating lamp unit 280 hangs downward on the upper surface thereof at an attachment step 281b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 281a and at a position rearward of the opening 281a. An attachment portion 281c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 281d arranged on the rear side of the opening 281a for fixing the central rotary lamp motor 285 are provided. The attachment step portion 281b is rotated from above. The part base 282 is fitted. In addition, the rotating portion base 282 has a center rotational position detected at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 281a of the rotating lamp unit base 281 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 283. A substrate support portion 282b for supporting the lower end of the substrate 291; and a wire locking portion 282c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 282b and that locks wires connected to the central rotary lamp substrate 288 and the central rotational position detection substrate 291; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 283 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating unit base 282, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft support port 282a of the rotating unit base 282. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 283a having a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection projecting radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 283b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 283 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating part base 282, and is inserted into the shaft support port 282a. 283 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 282a. In the central rotating lamp unit 280, the rotational position detection piece 283b of the rotating lamp base gear 283 is detected by the central rotational position detection sensor 290, so that the rotational position of the rotating lamp 284 can be detected. Yes.

  Further, although not shown in the drawings, the rotating part holder 287 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward to a position that is coaxial with the shaft supporting port 282a of the rotating part base 282 and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283, the rotating lamp The base gear 283 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. That is, in the central rotating lamp unit 280 of this example, the rotating lamp base 282a of the rotating part base 282, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft supporting hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 287 are used. A gear 283 is rotatably supported. The central rotating lamp substrate 288 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 287. Although not shown in the drawings, the rotation unit holder 287 is provided with a substrate support unit that supports the upper end of the center rotation position detection substrate 291 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 282b of the rotation unit base 282 on the lower surface. The central rotation position detection substrate 291 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 282 and the rotation unit holder 287.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the rotating lamp 294 of the central rotating body unit 280 has an intermediate size between the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 and the rotating lamp 264 of the right rotating lamp unit 260. A transparent disk-shaped rotating lamp lens 292 disposed below the rotating lamp base gear 283, a reflector 293 disposed below the rotating lamp lens 292 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 283, and the reflector 293 And a reflector cover 294 for covering. The reflector 293 of the rotating lamp 284 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 293a, an opening portion 293b drilled in the center of the base portion 293a, and a base portion 293a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 293 d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 293 a and whose upper ends can contact the rotating lamp base gear 283.

  The rotating lamp 284 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 292 facing the opening 293b of the reflector 293, and the rotating lamp lens 292 has an insertion hole 292a through which the mounting boss 293d of the reflector 293 can be inserted. The mounting boss 293d is inserted into the insertion hole 292a, and the mounting boss 293d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 283, whereby the rotating lamp lens 292 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 283 and the reflector 293. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 294 of the rotating lamp 284 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in plan view, has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an opening on a side surface of the reflector 293 that faces the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 293c. 294a is formed.

  By the way, the central rotating lamp unit 280 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of front side surfaces of the rotating lamp unit cover 289 formed between the rotating unit holder 287 and the rotating lamp unit cover 289 as shown in the drawing. A cover lens 295 having a plurality of protrusions 295a inserted into the notch 289a from the rear side, and a cover decorative substrate 296 disposed on the rear side of the cover lens 295 and having a plurality of color LEDs 296a mounted thereon. In addition. The cover lens 295 and the cover decoration substrate 296 are formed on the rotating lamp unit cover 289 while the lower ends thereof are supported by the grooved lens support portion 287a and the substrate support portion 287b formed at the front end of the rotation portion holder 287, respectively. The upper end is supported by a groove-shaped lens support portion and a substrate support portion (not shown). In this example, the front end of the rotating lamp unit cover 289 of the central rotating lamp unit 280 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LED of the cover decorative board 296 to emit light.

[1-2C. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 40 to 63. 40 is a front perspective view of the dish unit, FIG. 41 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit, and FIG. 42 is a plan view of the dish unit. 43 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. FIG. 44 is a rear view showing the dish unit with the dish back plate removed, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing the dish unit and the ball rental unit after removing the dish unit. FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view showing the plate unit disassembled for each main component from the front, and FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 46 from the back. 48 is an exploded perspective view showing the dish unit main body of the dish unit in an exploded view from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 48 from the rear. FIG. 50 is a rear view showing the first ball removal mechanism in the dish unit, and FIG. 51 is a perspective view showing the second ball removal mechanism in the dish unit later. 52 is an exploded perspective view showing the operation button unit in the dish unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 53 is a bottom view of the operation button unit in the dish unit with the operation button unit board removed, and FIG. FIG. 55 is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the unit from below, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the dish unit in an exploded manner.

  56 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device attached to the door frame, FIG. 57 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the operation handle portion constituting the handle device and the joint unit, and FIG. 58 is an operation in the handle device. It is a disassembled perspective view of a handle part. Further, FIG. 59 is an operation diagram for explaining the operation of the operation handle portion and the joint unit, FIG. 60 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device and the hitting ball launching device provided in the main body frame, and FIG. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a hit ball | bowl launcher. Further, FIG. 62 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the tray unit, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the second ball outlet and the flow of game balls in the tray unit. It is. Moreover, FIG. 63 is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the horizontally long spherical inflow port in a dish unit, and a storage tray.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment can store game balls that are paid out from a prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, and a ball hitting device 650, which will be described later, via the ball feeding unit 170. Can be supplied to. As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the dish unit 300 covers a front surface of the dish body 310 and a dish body 310 having a storage tray 311 that is open at the top and rear and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. The dish unit main body 320, the plate-like dish back plate 340 that covers the rear surfaces of the dish unit main body 320 and the dish body 310, and the first ball removal mechanism that can discharge all the game balls stored in the storage dish 311 of the dish body 310 350, a second ball removing mechanism 360 capable of discharging a part of the game balls stored in the storage tray of the plate 310, and a ball lending machine (not shown) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 A ball rental unit 301 that operates, a control button unit 370 that is fixed to the upper surface of the plate 310 and that can be operated by the player in accordance with a game state (game situation), and a plate unit main body 320 below the plate 310 dish A lower speaker unit 390 having a lower speaker 391 larger than the side speaker 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 disposed between the plate 340 and the lower right corner of the dish unit main body 320 when viewed from the front. A handle base 303 to be arranged and a handle device 400 supported by the handle base 303 for performing a game ball driving operation are mainly provided. Reference numeral 302 denotes a wiring cover that covers the electrical wiring connected to the dish illumination board 336 in the dish unit main body 320 to be described later. Further, as shown in the drawing, a lower left decorative board 190 for illuminating and decorating the left end of the dish unit main body 320 is disposed on the left side of the dish back plate 340 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in the figure, the lending unit 301 in the dish unit 300 is fixed to the upper side of the dish back plate 340 at the approximate center in the left-right direction, and is disposed next to the lending button 301a and the lending button 301a. A return button 301b, and a remaining lending indicator (not shown) that is arranged between the lending button 301a and the returning button 301b and displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards on the lending machine. When the ball rental unit 301 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 with cash or a prepaid card and the ball lending button 301a is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. Can be rented (paid out) into the storage tray 311 and when the return button 301b is pushed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the cash balance or prepaid card that has been inserted is returned. Yes.

  Further, the main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372 of the operation button unit 370 in the dish unit 300 are used when a player participates in game contents (game effects) performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 provided on the game board 4 or the like. To operate.

[1-2C-1. Dish body]
First, as shown in the drawing, the plate body 310 in the plate unit 300 occupies approximately 2/3 of the whole from the left end in a plan view, and has a storage tray 311 having a predetermined depth opened upward and rearward, and a storage plate 311 A second ball outlet 312 which is arranged at a predetermined position on the bottom and penetrates in the vertical direction, and is arranged on the downstream side of the third inclined surface 311c from the right end of the storage tray 312 to be connected to the storage tray 311 and can flow game balls. The first ball extraction path 313 (see FIGS. 44 and 47) that can guide the game ball to a position just below the second ball extraction port 312 and the upper side of the storage dish 311 are opened in a substantially rhombus shape and operated. An operation button unit mounting recess 314 in which the button unit 370 can be mounted, and a first ball extraction button 351 of the first ball extraction mechanism 350 that opens in a substantially circular shape behind the operation button unit installation recess 314 is mounted. Ball removal A button mounting port 315, a first ball vent mechanism supporting portion 316 for supporting the first ball vent mechanism 350 is disposed substantially directly below the first ball vent button mounting port 315 is mainly provided with.

  The storage plate 311 in the plate body 310 is disposed on the front surface of the ball inlet 341 of the plate back plate 340, and has a first inclined surface 311a that is lowered toward the right side and the front side in plan view, and a right end of the first inclined surface 311a. A second inclined surface 311b that is continuous with the rear portion of the second portion and decreases toward the right side and the rear side, and a third inclined surface that is continuous with the right end portion of the second inclined surface 311b and decreases toward the ball supply port 342 of the back plate 340. An inclined surface 311c, a fourth inclined surface 311d that is continuous with a front portion of the right end portion of the first inclined surface 311a and a front end portion of the second inclined surface 311b, and decreases toward the right and second inclined surfaces 311b; And a fifth inclined surface 311e that is continuous with the right end of the four inclined surfaces 311d and decreases toward the fourth inclined surface 311d (see FIGS. 42 and 43).

  In addition, the storage tray 311 is disposed between a partition wall 311f where a rising game ball cannot be crossed from the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e, and between the partition wall 311f and the third inclined surface 311c. And a sixth inclined surface 311g that decreases toward the third inclined surface 311c. The second ball outlet 312 is arranged between the first inclined surface 311a and the second inclined surface 311b. The second ball removal port 312 is normally closed by the second ball removal shutter 364 of the second ball removal mechanism 360.

  In the storage tray 311 of this embodiment, the first inclined surface 311a has a quadrangular shape (trapezoidal shape) that occupies approximately half the size of the storage tray 311 in plan view as shown in the figure. The second inclined surface 311b has a variable pentagon shape in which the length in the left-right direction is about 1/4 of the length of the storage plate 311 and the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower toward the third inclined surface 311c. The third inclined surface 311c has a horizontally long section shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. The fourth inclined surface 311d has a rectangular shape (trapezoidal shape) whose length in the left-right direction is substantially the same as that of the second inclined surface 311b and decreases in length toward the second inclined surface 311b. Further, the fifth inclined surface 311e has a rear end portion extending from the left end portion in the right direction by a predetermined distance substantially parallel to the third inclined surface 311c and then obliquely extending toward the rear third inclined surface 311c. While extending along the third inclined surface 311c across the partition wall 311f, the front end portion (right end portion) extends toward the right toward the right end portion of the rear end portion so as to extend rearward, and as a whole. The partition wall 311f is formed along the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the storage plate 311 includes a left end portion and a front end portion of the first inclined surface 311a, a front end portion of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and a front end portion (right end portion of the fifth inclined surface). The outer peripheral wall 311h rising upward is provided, and the outer peripheral wall 311h has a shape in which the storage tray 311 is recessed downward from the upper surface of the dish body 310 by a predetermined amount. In addition, the outer peripheral wall 311h of the storage tray 311 is formed in a loose arc shape that goes forward as it goes rightward at the front end portions of the first inclined surface 311a, the fourth inclined surface 311d, and the fifth inclined surface 311e. When the game ball that has flowed into the first inclined surface 311a from the ball inlet 341 comes into contact with the position facing the ball inlet 341 in the outer peripheral wall 311h, it is reflected in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e and It distribute | circulates on the 5 inclined surface 311d. The fifth inclined surface 311e is a gentle slope that allows the game ball flowing into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 to climb up to the right end of the fifth inclined surface 311e, Is changed to flow downward (to the left) in the direction of the fourth inclined surface 311d. In other words, the storage tray 311 of this example causes the game ball that has flowed in from the ball inlet 341 to once detour to the fifth inclined surface 311e and then flow into the third inclined surface 311c that serves as a supply path to the ball supply port 342. It is like that.

  In addition, the sixth inclined surface 311g in the storage tray 311 has a steeper inclination angle than the other inclined surfaces 311a to 311e, and a plurality of game balls are placed on the third inclined surface 311c on the downstream side. It is possible to facilitate alignment in a left-right direction toward the sphere supply port 342. Note that a stainless steel rail body 304 is attached to the third inclined surface 311c so as to improve the wear resistance of the circulating game balls and to prevent static electricity charged on the game balls. It can be removed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 44 and 47, the third inclined surface 311c of the storage tray 311 is formed in a groove shape in which the right end portion is slanted to the lower right and then is dropped downward and the rear side is opened. In addition, it is formed so as to be continuous with the first ball extraction path 313, and a flow path that is folded back with respect to the left-right direction by being continuous with the first ball extraction path 313 is formed. The boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313 is configured such that the flow path is closed by the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350. As desired for the slide 356, the ball supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340 is opened. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down the third inclined surface 311c is blocked from flowing by the first ball removal slide 356, so that it flows to the ball supply port 342 side.

  Note that the first sphere removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310 has a first sphere beside the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first sphere removal path 313 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 44). A slide groove 316a in which the extraction slide 356 is inserted and arranged to be slidable in the left-right direction, and a first sphere described later on the opposite side of the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first sphere extraction path 313 across the slide groove 316a. A flange portion 316b that locks the lower end portion of the extraction spring 357 is formed.

[1-2C-2. Plate unit body]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the dish unit main body 320 in the dish unit 300 constitutes the front surface of the dish unit 300, covers the front surface of the dish body 310 and the lower speaker unit 390, and is opened upward and rearward. A box-shaped main body 321 is provided. The main body 321 is shaped such that about 3/4 of the left side bulges forward in front view, and the lower speaker unit 390 is accommodated inside (rear side) of the bulged portion. It has become. Further, the main body 321 includes a speaker opening 321a formed so as to penetrate to a position corresponding to the lower speaker 391 of the lower speaker unit 390 on the right side of the center of the front surface of the bulged portion, and a speaker opening 321a. A dummy opening 321b formed on the left side and a second ball removal button opening 321c formed on the left side of the dummy opening 321b are formed so as to penetrate therethrough. Further, the main body 321 has an elliptical handle base mounting port 321d for mounting the handle base 303 at the lower right corner, and a lock opening 321e that is disposed above the handle base mounting port 321d and faces a cylinder lock 1010 described later. A section-shaped duct opening 321f that opens to the right side of the portion that bulges to the front side on the left side of the handle base mounting opening d, and a section-shaped ball discharge opening 321g that opens to a substantially central lower portion in the left-right direction. I have.

  The dish unit main body 320 of the dish unit 300 has a front back plate 322 that covers the speaker opening 321a and the dummy opening 321b of the main body portion 321 from the front side, and a speaker opening 322a of the front back plate 322 through the speaker opening 322a. A plate-shaped right cover 323 made of punched metal, which is disposed on the front surface corresponding to the speaker opening 321a, and four corners cut off, and is disposed in the approximate center of the front surface of the right cover 323 and is smaller than the right cover 323 and has a metallic luster on the surface. Plate-shaped right decoration base 324 that has been subjected to plating, a right decoration 325 that is disposed in the approximate center of the front surface of the right decoration base 324 and is smaller than the right decoration base 324, and a main body of the front back plate 322 A plate-like plate made of punching metal and disposed at the front surface corresponding to the dummy opening 321b of the portion 321. A left cover 326, a plate-like left decoration base 327 disposed substantially at the center of the front surface of the left cover 326, which is smaller than the left cover 326 and plated with a metallic luster on the surface, and a front surface of the left decoration base 327 A frame shape that is arranged substantially at the center and decorates the periphery of the left decoration 328 that is smaller and plate-like than the left decoration base 327, the speaker opening 321a, the dummy opening 321b, and the second ball release button opening 321c of the main body 321. The main body 329 is mainly provided. A plurality of through holes 322a are formed in the front back plate 322 of the dish unit main body 320 so as to penetrate the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 as desired. The through holes 322a and the punching holes of the right decoration base 323 are formed. The sound from the lower speaker 391 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the outside via (not shown).

  In addition, the dish unit main body 320 of this example has a main body left decoration base 330 fixed to the left end of the main body portion 321 on the front side of the lower left decorative substrate 190, and a front surface of the main body left decoration base 330 fixed to the surface with metallic luster plating. And a main body left decoration 331 that has been processed. The main body left decoration base 330 has translucency, and can be decorated with light emission by the LEDs 190 a of the lower left decorative substrate 190 disposed on the rear side of the main body left decoration base 330.

  Furthermore, the plate unit main body 320 is formed with a plate-like duct cover made of punching metal that covers the duct opening 321f of the main body 321 and a duct notch 333a such that the duct cover faces from the surface. And a main body right decoration 333 that covers the entire right side surface of the portion 321 that bulges to the front side and that has been subjected to metallic luster plating on the surface.

  The dish unit main body 320 has a plurality of horizontally long slits 334a arranged along the upper edge of the main body portion 321 and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a main body decoration 334 whose surface is plated with metallic luster, An upper decoration lens 335 having a light guide portion 335a disposed in the main body 321 below the main body upper decoration 334 and inserted into the slit 334a of the main body upper decoration 334, and an upper decoration lens 335 is disposed below the upper decoration lens 335. And a dish decorating board 336 on which a plurality of color LEDs 336a are mounted. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 336a of the dish illumination board 336, the main body upper decoration 334, that is, the upper edge of the dish unit main body 320 can be illuminated and decorated via the upper decoration lens 335.

[1-2C-3. Dish back plate]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the dish back plate 340 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a horizontally long plate shape, and is disposed in the upper left corner portion in a front view, and is in a horizontally long section shape in the front-rear direction. A ball inlet 341 that penetrates the ball, a ball supply port 342 that is arranged at a predetermined distance from the ball inlet 341 in a lower right direction and passes in a shape that allows a game ball to pass through, and a rear that communicates with the ball inlet 341. And a prismatic prize ball contact bar 343 extending to the main. As shown in FIG. 43 and the like, the ball inlet 341 of the dish back plate 340 opens toward the inside of the storage dish 311 of the dish body 310, and the length in the left-right direction is the first inclined surface 311a of the storage dish 311. Is approximately the same length. Further, the sphere supply port 342 is disposed at a position corresponding to the first sphere removal slide 356 of the first sphere removal mechanism 350 at the right end of the third inclined surface 331 c in the storage tray 311. The prize ball contact bar 343 is disposed at a position biased to the left end in front view with respect to the ball inlet 341 and the length in the left-right direction is about half of the length of the ball inlet 341. The rear end penetrates the prize ball passing port 111 of the door frame base main body 110 and communicates with an outlet 921 at the lower end (front end) of the front guide passage 920 in the full tank unit 900 described later. .

  In addition, the dish back plate 340 is disposed at a position where the front end of the prize ball contact bar 343 is a predetermined amount behind the ball inlet 341, and between the ball inlet 341 and the prize ball contact bar 343. The ball inlet 341 further includes a shelf 344 that extends over the entire length in the left-right direction and through which game balls can be circulated. The game balls distributed through the prize ball contact bar 343 by the shelf portion 344 can be made to flow downstream from the second ball outlet 312 of the storage tray 311.

  Further, the back plate 340 has a spherical flow path opening 345 corresponding to a ball extraction path 393 of the lower speaker unit 390 to be described later and penetrating in a substantially L shape. A latch opening 346 disposed below the inlet 341 (the second ball outlet 312 in the dish 310) and penetrating in a section shape through which a rear end of a latch unit 366 of a second ball outlet mechanism 360 described later is inserted; In addition, the wire insertion port 347 that is disposed in the upper right corner portion when viewed from the front and penetrates in a substantially section shape, and the ball rental unit 301 that is disposed on the upper side of the back plate 340 between the ball inflow port 341 and the wire insertion port 346 are attached. A ball rental unit mounting portion 348 for the purpose.

[1-2C-4. First ball removal mechanism]
Next, the first ball removal mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 includes a first ball removal button 351 and a first ball removal button 351, which are pressed by the player, as shown in FIGS. A first ball release button base 352 that is slidably supported in the vertical direction and is inserted from the lower side with respect to the first ball release button mounting opening 315 of the plate body 310, and a dish on the upper portion of the first ball release button base 352 The first ball removal button decoration body 353 fixed so that the first ball removal button 351 protrudes upward across the body 310, the first ball removal button decoration body 353, and the first ball removal button base 352 are supported. A rotating shaft 354 supported at the position of the first ball removing mechanism support portion 316 of the dish body 311 on the right side (left side in FIG. 50) in front view of the lower end of the first ball removing button 351, and a rotation shaft 354 times An inverted L-shaped first sphere extraction crank 355 whose one end is in contact with the lower end of the first sphere extraction button 351 and the other end extends downward, and the other end of the first sphere extraction crank 355. The lower end of the plate body 311 and supported by the first ball removal mechanism support 316 of the plate body 311 so as to be slidable substantially in the left-right direction. And a first ball removal spring 357 that urges the first ball removal crank 355 to rotate in a predetermined direction.

  The first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 is inserted in the slide groove 316a of the first ball removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310 so that it can slide in the left-right direction. In this state, the first sphere extraction crank 355 rotates and is slid in the left-right direction by the lower end on the other end side of the first sphere extraction crank 355. By sliding the first ball removal slide 356 in the left-right direction, the tip can move forward and backward with respect to the flow path at the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311 c of the dish body 310 and the first ball removal path 313. When the advancing to the boundary part and closing the flow path, the game ball that has circulated through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied to the ball supply port 342, and the flow path is retreated from the boundary part. When opened, the game balls that have circulated through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied (discharged) to the first ball removal path 313 side.

  Further, the upper end portion of the first ball removal spring 357 is locked to the first ball removal crank 355 on the opposite side to the one end side contacting the lower end portion of the first ball removal button 351 with the rotation shaft 354 interposed therebetween. A collar portion 355a is formed. The first ball removal spring 357 has its upper end engaged with the flange 355a of the first ball removal crank 355 and its lower end engaged with the flange 316b of the first ball removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310. By stopping, the first ball removal crank 355 is moved to the position where the first ball removal slide 356 closes the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal passage 313, and the first ball removal button 351 is the most. It can be urged to rotate in the direction of the raised position.

  When the first ball removal button 351 is pressed by the player, the first ball removal mechanism 350 has a first ball removal crank 355 via a contact pin 355b that contacts the lower end of the first ball removal button 351. Is rotated in a direction in which one end thereof moves downward against the biasing force of the first ball extraction spring 357, and the other end side is away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball extraction path 313. Move to. Then, the first ball removal slide 356 moves in a direction away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal passage 313 together with the lower end of the first ball removal crank 355, and the tip of the first ball removal slide 356 is moved. The third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313 communicate with each other by retreating from the flow path at the boundary portion, and all the game balls in the third inclined surface 311c, that is, the storage dish 311 are transferred to the first ball. It can be discharged to the outside through the extraction path 313.

  When the pressing of the first ball removal button 351 is released, the first ball removal crank 355 is rotated by the urging force of the first ball removal spring 357 so that the first ball removal button 351 is raised and the first ball is released. The leading end of the pull slide 356 advances into the flow path at the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball discharge path 313, closes the flow path, and is on the third inclined surface 311c (in the storage tray 311). A game ball can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650 via the ball supply port 342.

[1-2C-5. Second ball removal mechanism]
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51 and the like, the second ball removal mechanism 360 in the dish unit 300 is a second ball that protrudes forward from the second ball removal button opening 321c of the main body portion 321 in the dish unit main body 320. A pull-out button 361, a second ball-extracting slide 362 fitted and fixed at the tip, and supported so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower speaker unit 390 described later, and the front and rear of the second ball-extracting slide 362 The second ball-extracting crank 363 that is pivotally supported by the lower speaker unit 390 so as to be able to rotate around an axis extending in the left-right direction, and the second ball-extracting crank 363 is rotated to rotate the plate 310 Rotation about an axis extending in the vertical direction between a closed position where the second ball outlet 312 is closed and an open position where the second ball outlet 312 is opened A second ball-extracting shutter 364, a second ball-extracting spring 365 that urges the second ball-extracting shutter 364 to a closed position where the second ball-extracting port 312 is closed, and a second ball-extracting spring 365 A latch unit 366 capable of holding the second ball removal shutter 364 in the open position against the biasing force, and an opening corresponding to the second ball removal port 312 while slidably supporting the lower surface of the second ball removal shutter 364. A second ball removal base 367 fixed to the lower side of the plate body 310 and a rear end of the second ball removal slide 362 slidably and supporting a latch unit 366, which will be described later. A second ball removal mechanism support 368 (see FIG. 44 and FIG. 47) that rotatably supports the second ball removal crank 363 in cooperation with the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390; To have.

  The second ball removal slide 360 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 has a transmission groove 362a that is opened upward at the rear end portion thereof and into which the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 is inserted, and protrudes rearward from the rear end portion. An engagement protrusion 362b that can be engaged with the engagement claw 366a of the latch unit 366 is provided. The second ball removal crank 363 is a rod-like member extending substantially in the vertical direction, and a lower end portion thereof is inserted into the transmission groove 362a of the second ball removal slide 362 from above, and substantially in the middle in the vertical direction. The portion is pivotally supported by the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 so as to be rotatable. Thus, when the second ball removal slide 362 slides in the front-rear direction, the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 moves along with the slide of the transmission groove 362a, and the second ball removal crank 363 rotates. The upper end of the second ball removal crank 363 moves in the direction opposite to the lower end.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the second ball removal shutter 364 is disposed above the second ball removal slide 362, and the second ball removal port 312 of the dish body 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball removal base 367 are provided. A substantially semicircular (D-shaped) plate-like closing part 364a that can be closed, and a rod-like collar part that extends from the closing part 364a in one of the left and right directions (left direction in front view, right direction in FIG. 51). 364b, and is formed in a substantially P-shape as a whole. The second ball removal shutter 364 is pivotally supported by the plate body 310 and the second ball removal base 367 so that the tip of the flange portion 364b can rotate about an axis extending in the vertical direction, and the flange portion 364b. On the rear side, the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 comes into contact with a substantially middle portion in the left-right direction. Further, the front end portion of the second ball extraction spring 365 is locked to the rear base end portion of the flange portion 364b of the second ball extraction shutter 364. Although not shown, the rear end portion of the second ball release spring 365 is locked by a locking boss that hangs downward from the lower surface of the dish 310, and the second ball release spring 365 is provided. Thus, the closing portion 364a of the second ball removal shutter 364 is biased to a closed position (position shown in FIG. 51) for closing the second ball removal port 312.

  The second ball removal base 360 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 allows the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 to pass between the opening 367a and the position where the second ball removal shutter 364 is pivotally supported. A slit 367b extending in the front-rear direction is provided, and the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 supported on the lower side of the second ball removal base 367 through the slit 367b is the upper surface of the second ball removal base 367. It can contact | abut with the collar part 364b of the 2nd ball removal shutter 364 arrange | positioned in this. In addition, the 2nd ball removal base 367 is formed in the shape of a shallow dish, as shown in the figure, and can form an accommodation space for accommodating the second ball removal shutter 364 with the dish body 310. Yes. Further, the height of the accommodation space for accommodating the second ball removal shutter 364 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the second ball removal shutter 364 rotates to turn the second ball removal port 312. Even if is opened, the game ball is prevented from entering between the dish body 310 and the second ball removal base 367.

  In the second ball removal mechanism 360 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the second ball removal button 361 that protrudes forward from the front surface of the dish unit main body 320, the second ball removal slide 362 slides backward, The second ball removal crank 363 rotates so that the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 is guided rearwardly by the transmission groove 362a of the two ball removal slide 362. Then, as the second ball removal crank 363 rotates, the upper end portion thereof moves forward in the direction opposite to the lower end portion, and the second ball removal shutter 364 that contacts the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363. However, it rotates so that the closing portion 364a moves forward around the tip of the flange portion 364b against the urging force of the second ball release spring 365. Thus, when the closing part 364a moves forward and the second ball outlet 312 of the dish body 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball outlet base 367 are opened, the second ball outlet 312 in the storage dish 311 is opened. Thus, the game balls stored on the upstream side are discharged to the lower outside of the dish unit 300 through the second ball outlet 312.

  The second ball removal mechanism 360 of this example is provided with a latch unit 366, and the second projection of the second ball removal slide 362 is pushed by the second ball removal button 361 so that the pair of engagement protrusions 362b in the latch unit 366 are a pair. Contact between the two engaging claws 366a, the pair of engaging claws 366a are closed and engaged so as to sandwich the engaging protrusion 362b, and the second ball removal spring 365 is resisted against the biasing force of the second ball removal spring 365. The state where the button 361 is pressed, that is, the second ball outlet 312 can be held in the opened (opened) position by the closing portion 364a of the second ball shutter 364. In this state, when the second ball release button 361 is pressed, the pair of engagement claws 366a of the latch unit 366 are opened, and the engagement with the engagement protrusions 362b is released, and the biasing force of the second ball release spring 365 is used. The closing part 364a of the second ball extraction shutter 364 can be returned to a position where the second ball extraction port 312 is closed.

[1-2C-6. Operation button unit]
Next, the operation button unit 370 in the dish unit 300 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the dish body 310 in the dish unit 300, as shown in FIGS. A pair of octagonal main buttons 371 obtained by cutting off the four corners of a square in plan view and a left base button 372L and a right sub button 372R having a home base shape in plan view and arranged symmetrically on the left and right sides of the main button 371. The sub button 372, the main button 371 and the sub button 372 are slidably held in the vertical direction, and the operation button unit base 373 inserted into the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate body 310, and the operation button unit base 373 A plate-like operation button unit decoration member 374 for decorating the upper surface and an operation button unit Color LED375a which is fixed to the lower light emission decorated the operation button unit 370 Tobesu 373 is provided with an operation button unit substrate 375 in which a plurality mounted on an upper surface, a.

  The operation button unit 370 includes a main button sensor 376 that detects an operation of the main button 371, a left sub button sensor 377L that detects an operation of the left sub button 372L, and a right sub that detects an operation of the right sub button 372R. A button sensor 377R. The main button sensor 376, the left sub button sensor 377L, and the right sub button sensor 377L are photosensors each having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and are fixed to predetermined positions on the operation button unit substrate 375, respectively. .

  As shown in the figure, the operation button unit base 373 in the operation button unit 370 has a substantially rhombus shape in a plan view, and a main button housing recess 373a that can house the main button 371 from above, and a main button housing portion 373a. A plurality of guide grooves 373b that are formed on the inner peripheral surface and extend in the vertical direction to guide the main button 371 in the vertical direction, and a substantially circular opening formed in the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a. 373c, a plurality of light guide openings 373d that guide the light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit board 375 that opens at a predetermined width along the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a to the upper surface side, and the sub A pair of sub-button housing recesses 373e capable of housing the button 372 from above and formed on the diagonal upper corner of the long axis A plate-like top plate portion 373g that forms the upper surface of the operation button unit base 373, and a plate-like shape that hangs downward from the lower surface along the outer periphery of the top plate portion 373g. Side wall part 373h.

  The operation button unit base 373 is formed in a box shape having a lower surface opened by a top plate portion 373g and a side wall portion 373h. A main button housing recess 373a and a plurality of ( Here, eight light guide openings 373d, two sub-button accommodating recesses 373e, and two screw insertion holes 373f are opened. In the operation button unit base 373, the main button receiving recess 373a is formed with a thickness where the guide groove 373b is not formed, and the strength and rigidity of the inner wall surface and the bottom surface are increased. In addition, each light guide opening 373d formed on the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a is formed in a cylindrical shape that is long in the vertical direction, and is also formed by the outer peripheral wall of the cylindrical light guide opening 373d. The main button accommodating recess 373a is reinforced (see FIG. 53).

  As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the main button 371 includes a main button lens 371a that forms the upper surface of the main button 371 and has translucency, and a cylinder that supports the main button lens 371a and is open at the top and bottom. Main button base 371b, a vibrating body 371c disposed below the main button base 371b, and a vibrating body holder that encloses the vibrating body 371c and is fixed to the lower side of the main button base 371b via mounting screws 371d. 371e. Although not shown, the upper end of the main button 371 contacts the lower side surface of the main button base 371a, and the lower end contacts the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373. A main button spring is provided to bias the 371 so as to rise.

  The main button lens 371a of the main button 371 is formed in a box shape with an octagonal shape in plan view and an open bottom surface, and has a smooth shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of small lenses are provided on the back side. The light is emitted from the LEDs 375a of the operation button unit board 375 so that the entire surface of the main button 371 can be decorated with light emission substantially uniformly.

  As shown in the figure, the main button base 371b has an octagonal shape similar to that of the main button lens 371 on the upper end side. The lower end portion extends downward from an opening 373c formed in the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a in the operation unit button base 373 and directly above the LED 375a group disposed in the center of the operation button unit substrate 375. Can be located in. The main button base 371b includes a main locking claw 371f extending downward from two opposite sides and a plurality of guide protrusions extending in the vertical direction inserted into the guide groove 373b of the operation button unit base 373. 371g. The main button claw 371f of the main button base 371b is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the main button receiving recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373, so that the main button 371 is moved to the main button spring. It is possible to prevent the main button accommodating recess 373a from being pulled out by the urging force.

  Further, the main button base 371b is configured such that the vibrating body 371c can be attached to the inside of the one main locking claw 371f via the vibrating body holder 371e and the mounting screw 371d, and a portion to which the vibrating body 371c is attached. A detection piece 371h (see FIG. 54) detected by the main button sensor 376 is formed inside.

  When the main button 371 of this example pushes the main button 371 downward against the urging force of the main button spring, the detection piece 371 h of the main button base 371 b is interposed between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the main button sensor 376. The main button sensor 376 detects the operation after entering. The main button 371 is configured such that when an operation is detected by the main button sensor 376, the vibrating body 371c is activated, and the main button 371 is vibrated by the operation of the vibrating body 371c. Thus, it can be recognized that the operation of the main button 371 is accepted, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the main button 371. The operation button unit board 375 is provided with a light shielding plate 375b for preventing the main button sensor 376 from malfunctioning due to light from the mounted LED 375a.

  In addition, the sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 has a sub button lens 372a having a substantially isosceles right triangle shape in plan view and a light transmitting property, and a sub button lens 372a supported on an upper surface having a home base shape in plan view. The operation button unit base 373 is disposed below the sub button lens 372a between the sub button base 372b accommodated from above into the sub button accommodation recess 373e and the bottom surface of the sub button base 372b and the sub button accommodation recess 373e. And a sub button spring 372c that urges the button base 372b to move upward. The sub-button base 372a of the sub-button 372 includes a sub-locking claw 372d that hangs downward from the front and back with the sub-button spring 372c interposed therebetween, and a plate-shaped guide wall portion 372e that hangs downward from the long side of the home base. And a detection piece 372f extending further downward from the lower end of the guide wall portion 372e.

  This sub button 372 has a sub locking claw 372d that is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the sub button receiving recess 373e of the operation button unit base 373. Since the 372d is locked to the locking portion, the sub button 372 can be prevented from coming out of the sub button accommodating recess 373e by the urging force of the sub button spring 372c. Further, when the sub button 372 is pushed downward against the urging force of the sub button spring 372c, the detection piece 372f of the sub button base 372b enters between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sub button sensor 377. The operation of the sub button 372 is detected by the sub button sensor 377.

  Further, the operation button unit decoration member 374 of the operation button unit 370 is formed in a plate shape with a substantially rhombus shape in plan view, as shown in the figure. An opening 374a through which the sub button lens 372a can pass is formed, and a decorative member lens 374b having translucency is provided at a position corresponding to the light guide opening 373d of the operation button unit base 373. . In addition, a mounting hole 374c through which a mounting screw (not shown) can be inserted from above is formed in the upper corner of the long axis diagonal line, and through this mounting hole 374c and the screw insertion hole 373f of the operation button unit base 373. The operation button unit 370 is fixedly attached to the dish body 310 by a predetermined mounting screw. In this example, a screw concealment 378 for concealing the two attachment holes 374 c is attached to the upper surface of the operation button unit decoration member 374.

  As described above, in the operation button unit 370 of the present embodiment, the operation button unit base 373 is formed in a triple cylindrical shape by the main button housing recess 373a, the light guide opening 373d, and the side wall 373h. Since the strength and rigidity are enhanced, the operation button unit 370 is not easily damaged even if the main button 371 or the like is hit and operated strongly. In addition, the operation button unit 370 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate 310, and even if the operation button unit 370 is damaged or malfunctioned, The plate body 310 can be easily detached and replaced from above. Further, since the operation button unit 370 is supported (placed) on the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 described below via the plate body 310, the shock resistance and load resistance from the main button 371 and the like. Therefore, not only the operation button unit 370 but also the entire dish unit 300 is hardly damaged.

[1-2C-7. Lower speaker unit]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the lower speaker unit 390 in the dish unit 300 includes a lower speaker 391 having a diameter larger than that of the side speaker 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100, and a lower portion. A box-like speaker box 392 that mainly holds the speaker 391 at a position to the rear of the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320 at a position on the right side of the front face in a front view. The lower speaker unit 390 of the present embodiment is a bass-reflex type speaker in which the internal space of the speaker box 392 is opened to the outside through the open port 392a, and can produce a heavy bass with respect to the speaker diameter of the lower speaker 391. It can be done.

  The opening 392a of the speaker box 392 is formed at a desired position in the duct opening 321f of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320, and the flow of air entering and exiting the speaker box 392 due to vibration of the lower speaker 391 It enters and exits through the duct opening 321f. Further, the flow of air entering and exiting through the duct opening 321f by driving (vibration) of the lower speaker 391 is formed so as to pass through the grip members 412 and 413 of the operation handle portion 410 in the handle device 400. The player can operate the unit 410 by applying the air flow (wind) from the lower speaker 391 to the player's hand, giving the player an unprecedented feel and having fun. Yes. Note that by sending an acoustic signal having a frequency lower than the human audible band to the lower speaker 391, only the wind can be applied to the player from the duct opening 321f, and combined with the vibrating body 371c of the main button 371. As a result, it is possible to entertain a tactile sensation that is not available in conventional gaming machines.

  The speaker box 392 is disposed on the rear surface thereof downstream of the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction opening 312 of the dish 310, and flows through the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction opening 312. A ball removal path 393 is provided for guiding the game ball thus played to the lower portion of the speaker box 392 in the substantially horizontal direction. The ball extraction path 393 is formed in a substantially L shape with the rear open, and the door frame base main body in the door frame base unit 100 through the ball extraction path opening 345 of the back plate 340 in the dish unit 300. The rear side is closed by a ball passage cover 191 that closes the ball passage passage opening 110. In addition, the game balls that have circulated through the ball removal path 393 are discharged from the ball discharge port 321 g of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320 to the lower side of the dish unit 300.

  Further, the speaker box 392 has a second ball removal slide holding hole 394 for holding the front end of the second ball removal slide 362 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 slidably in the front-rear direction at the upper left portion in front view, A second ball removal mechanism support portion 395 that is disposed on the rear side of the two-ball removal slide holding hole 394 and supports the second ball removal mechanism support 368 of the second ball removal mechanism 360. The second ball removal mechanism 360 can be supported at a predetermined position by the second ball removal slide holding hole 394 and the second ball removal mechanism support 395.

[1-2C-8. Handle device]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the handle device 400 in the dish unit 300 includes an operation handle portion 410 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 and the door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 410. And a joint unit 180 that is linked to a rotation shaft 415 that rotates in response to a rotation operation of the operation handle portion 410 and changes the rotation motion of the rotation shaft 415 to a slide motion.

  First, the operation handle portion 410 is a handle support tube portion of a cylindrical handle base 303 attached so as to protrude forward from the handle base attachment port 321d of the main body portion 321 of the plate unit main body 320 of the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Inserted and fixed to 303a. Since the handle support cylinder portion 303a is formed so as to be inclined outward (right side) when viewed from above the pachinko machine 1, the operation handle portion 410 inserted and fixed to the handle support cylinder portion 303a. Is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1 so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to 5. Thus, by tilting the operation handle portion 410 outward in a plan view, there is an advantage that the player can easily grasp the operation handle portion 410 and can easily perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable in the rotation operation. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, even if the operation handle portion 410 is installed at an inclination, the rotational motion of the rotation shaft 415 of the operation handle portion 410 is smoothly transmitted, and the resilience of the ball hitting device 650 is increased. A structure that can be adjusted is adopted. After the operation handle portion 410 is inserted into the handle support tube portion 303a, the handle support tube portion 303a and the operation handle portion 410 (more precisely, the rear grip member 413) are connected with a screw or the like so that the operation handle portion 410 is It cannot be pulled out from the handle support cylinder 303a.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the operation handle portion 410 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable between the front gripping member 412, the rear gripping member 413, and the front gripping member 412 and the rear gripping member 413. The operation member 414 includes a linear columnar rotation shaft 415 whose one end is fixed to the rotation operation member 414, and a cam 416 fixed to the other end of the rotation shaft 415. The rear grip member 413 is integrally formed with a small-diameter portion fitted to the handle support cylinder portion 303a and a large-diameter portion in front of the small-diameter portion, and a shaft through-hole 418 through which the rotation shaft 415 passes is formed at the center. Is formed. When the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the shaft through hole 418, the bearing bush 417 is fitted into the rear end of the shaft through hole 418, and the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the bearing bush 417. On the other hand, the rotating shaft 415 that is passed through the shaft through hole 418 via the bearing bush 417 passes through the bearing hole 424 of the fixed bearing member 423 that is fixed to the front surface side of the rear grip member 413, and the rotation operation member 414. It is fitted in a shaft fitting hole 426 formed at the center.

  Further, on the front side of the rear grip member 413, a projection and a mounting hole (both not shown) for fixing the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 are provided, and the single button 421 is supported in a swingable manner. A swing pin (not shown) is formed, and a touch sensor 420, a firing stop switch 422, and a single button 421 are attached to the protrusions, mounting holes, and swing pins. Then, the wiring through cylinder having the wiring through hole 419 formed in the side of the shaft through hole 418 of the rear grip member 413 by collecting the wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 in a state where they are attached. It is led from the part 428 and the wiring opening 184c (see FIG. 31) to the back surface of the door frame 5, and is connected to the handle relay terminal plate 194 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The wiring from the handle relay terminal plate 194 is attached along the lower reinforcing plate 36 described above, and is electrically connected to a payout control board 1186 described later. Further, an urging spring 425 is provided between the fixed bearing member 423 and the rotation operation member 414 so as to be provided around the rotation shaft 415. It is designed to return to the position. Further, a switch contact convex portion 427 protrudes outside the shaft fitting hole 426 of the rotation operation member 414. When the rotation operation member 414 is in the original position by the urging force of the urging spring 425, the switch contact is made. When the convex portion 427 contacts the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 to turn off the firing stop switch 422 and the rotation operation member 414 is rotated by the player, the switch contact convex portion 427 becomes the actuator of the firing stop switch 422. Turn away and turn on. Further, since the single button 421 can be swung while the firing stop switch 422 is ON, the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 can be turned off by pressing the single button 421. ing.

  Note that the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation member 414 is subjected to conductive plating, and the touch sensor 420 detects contact when the player contacts the rotation operation member 414. Then, when the player rotates the rotation operation member 414, the firing stop switch 422 is turned on and the touch sensor 420 detects contact, a later-described firing motor 695 of the ball striking device 650 (see FIG. 91). ) Is driven to rotate.

  A cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is formed in a slanted ball shape, and a cam contact of a slide body 182 (see FIGS. 31 and 59) of the joint unit 180 described later according to the rotation of the rotating shaft 415. The part 182d is pressed and slid in one direction. In this embodiment, the operation handle portion 410 is attached in an inclined manner in plan view as described above by the cooperative structure of the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 and the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180. It is possible.

  As described above, the operation handle portion 410 is inserted and supported from the front side of the door frame 5 into the handle support cylinder portion 303a of the handle base 303, and the joint unit 180 is attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110c from the back side of the door frame 5. Thus, as shown in FIG. 56, the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is accommodated in the cam engaging recess 182 c of the slide body 182. In this case, the operation handle portion 410 is attached to be inclined in a plan view, so that the cam 416 is also inclined with respect to the vertical surface of the door frame 5, but the cam engaging recess 182c is predetermined in the front-rear direction. Since the space is wide, the entire inclined cam 416 can be accommodated in the space of the cam engaging recess 182c. Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the retracted state is such that the rotation center of the cam 416 is located on the side of the cam contact portion 182d, and the tip of the slanted cam 416 is below the cam engagement recess 182c. It is located in the space.

  When the player rotates the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 in the state described above, the rotation shaft 415 rotates and the cam 416 also rotates accordingly, so as shown in FIG. The slide body 182 moves in one direction (in the case of FIG. 59, in the right direction in the figure) by the contact between the cam contact portion 182d of the cam engagement recess 182c and the one outer surface of the cam 416 (outer front surface). Move to slide. That is, the rotational motion of the rotating shaft 415 is converted into the sliding motion of the slide body 182. For this reason, the distance S1 between the rotation center of the cam 416 in the initial state (before rotation) shown in FIG. The distance S2 is greater than the distance S1 due to the rotation. That is, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 slides by a distance of “S2-S1”. Then, the slide movement of the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the ball hitting device 650 as shown in FIGS. The tension of the hitting ball desired by the player can be obtained by adjusting the tension shown in FIG. The relationship between the handle device 400 and the ball hitting device 650 will be described in detail after the ball hitting device 650 is described.

  The wiring led out from the inside of the operation handle 410 to the back surface of the door frame 5 through the wiring through hole 419, the wiring through tube portion 428, and the wiring opening 184c And then connected to the operation handle terminal 1194 (see FIG. 132) of the payout control board 1186 that is collectively attached to the board unit 1100 attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. .

[1-2C-9. Effect of dish unit]
Next, the flow of game balls in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 62 and FIG. In this example, a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, flows from the ball inlet 341 into the storage dish 311 via the full tank unit 900 and the prize ball communication rod 343 of the back plate 340. The game ball that has flowed from the ball inlet 341 first flows into the first inclined surface 311a. The first inclined surface 311a is formed so that the front side and the right side when viewed from the front are lowered, and the game balls that flow into the first inclined surface 311a from the ball inflow port 341 follow the inclination of the first inclined surface 311a. The outer peripheral wall 311h that surrounds the front outer periphery of the storage plate 311 comes into contact with a position substantially opposite to the ball inlet 341. This position of the outer peripheral wall 311h is inclined in a curved line with respect to the surface of the dish back plate 340 on which the ball inlet 341 is formed, and the game ball in contact with the outer peripheral wall 311h moves rightward in front view. It is designed to reflect.

  Then, the game ball that has flowed into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 and reflected rightward on the outer peripheral wall 311h enters the fifth inclined surface 311e beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d. The fifth inclined surface 311e is lower on the left side when viewed from the front, that is, on the fourth inclined surface 311d side, and the inclination angle is set to a gentle inclination that allows a game ball entering from the first inclined surface 311a to climb up. Thus, the game ball that has entered the first inclined surface 311a beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d circulates to the upper portion (right end portion in plan view) of the fifth inclined surface 311e while ascending the fifth inclined surface 311e. It will be. The fifth inclined surface 311e is partitioned from the front side to the rear side by the outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f around the right end, and the game ball that has entered the fifth inclined surface 311e The outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f are surrounded by the fifth inclined surface 311e so as to return to the fourth inclined surface 311d disposed on the left side of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

  The game balls that have entered the fourth inclined surface 311d from the fifth inclined surface 311e flow to the second inclined surface 311b on the rear side of the fourth inclined surface 311d according to the inclination of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and further It enters from the inclined surface 311b to the right third inclined surface 311c, and is supplied to the ball launcher 650 from the ball supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340 disposed at the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c. It has become. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the storage tray 311 from the ball supply port 341 does not go directly from the first inclined surface 311a to the third inclined surface 311c via the second inclined surface 311b, but from the first inclined surface 311a. Once entering the fifth inclined surface 311e via the fourth inclined surface 311d, the third inclined surface 311c is reached via the fourth inclined surface 311e and the second inclined surface 311b. The game ball flowing in from 341 can be detoured.

  As a result, a plurality of game balls can be stored effectively using the entire storage tray 311, and the game balls are stored in a state of low storage as in conventional pachinko machines, and the game balls block the ball inlet 341. Then, the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is actuated to stop paying out the game ball, or the game ball launching operation at the ball launcher 650 is stopped and the game is interrupted. Can be prevented well.

  By the way, a large number of game balls are stored in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of this example, so that the ball inflow port 341 is closed by the stored game balls, and the award ball contact bar 343 of the tray back plate 340 and the award are awarded. When the game ball stays in the full tank unit 900 disposed between the ball unit 800 and the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900, the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 800 is stopped. The ball launching device 650 stops the game ball launching operation. In particular, when the ball launching device 650 is stopped, the game cannot be interrupted. When the amount of game balls stored in the tray 311 reaches an appropriate amount, the first ball extraction button 351 and the second ball extraction button 361 are operated to dispose the game balls from the storage tray 311 below the tray unit 300. Containers (for example, dollar box) needs to be discharged to. In this example, when the full tank switch 916 is operated, the player is informed that the inside of the storage tray 311 is full, and then the firing operation of the ball launching device 650 is stopped.

  In order to discharge the game ball from the storage tray 311, the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 is operated by operating (pushing) the first ball removal button 351 disposed on the upper surface of the dish unit 300. Slides to release the closure between the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313, and causes the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c to flow down to the first ball removal path 313. It can discharge | emit to the downward direction of the dish unit 300 from the ball | bowl discharge port 321g via the extraction path | route 393. FIG. By operating the first ball removal button 351, the game balls can be extracted from the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c which is the lowest position in the storage tray 311. Therefore, all the game balls are discharged from the storage tray 311. Be able to. However, in the ball removal by operating the first ball removal button 351, the game balls are aligned in a row on the third inclined surface 311c, so that there is a problem that it takes time to remove the ball.

  Therefore, when the second ball removal button 361 disposed on the left side of the front surface of the dish unit 300 is operated (pressed), the second ball removal shutter 364 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 moves to move the second ball removal shutter 364 in the storage tray 311. The ball outlet 312 is opened, and the game ball upstream of the second ball outlet 312 in the storage tray 311 passes through the second ball outlet 312 and passes from the ball outlet 321g through the ball outlet 393 to the dish unit. It can be discharged below 300 (see FIG. 62B). As shown in the drawing, the second ball outlet 312 has an opening that is several times larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that many game balls can be quickly discharged at once. Accordingly, the presence of the two buttons, the first ball removal button 351 and the second ball removal button 361, allows the player to select the length of time to remove the ball. In addition, when a big hit is made during the game, a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, and if the game is continued with the ball left unattended, the full tank switch 916 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 (see FIG. 111) is activated and the payout operation is stopped or the ballistic operation is stopped and the hitting operation of the game ball is stopped even though the hitting operation is stopped, and the game may not be continued. Yes, in such a case, by operating the second ball removal button 361, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained and the game that is in big hit Can be continued.

  In the dish unit 300 of this example, when the second ball removal button 361 is operated, the second ball removal shutter 364 is held in the open position by the latch unit 366 of the second ball removal mechanism 360, and the second ball removal port 312 can be kept open. In this state, when the game balls on the upstream side of the second ball outlet 312 are discharged and there are almost no game balls on the first inclined surface 311a, the game balls flowing in from the ball inlet 341 are as described above. The second inclined surface 311b, which is reflected from the outer peripheral wall 311h and flows in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e, the fourth inclined surface 311d, the fifth inclined surface 311e, the second inclined surface 311b, A game ball is supplied on the third inclined surface 311c. Therefore, even if the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c is consumed by the launch operation of the ball launcher 650, as long as the game ball flows into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341, the second inclined surface 311b, If the game balls are supplied to the third inclined surface 311c via the fourth inclined surface 311d and the fifth inclined surface 311e, and the number of game balls that flow in by stopping the firing operation of the game balls increases, the second ball Since it will be produced from the outlet 312, a certain amount of game balls can always be secured in the storage tray 311 and the game can be continued even when the second ball outlet 312 remains open. ing. That is, the game can be continued without worrying about the amount of game balls in the storage tray 311 even in a state where game balls are continuously paid out, such as during a big hit game.

  In the dish unit 300 of this example, as shown in FIG. 63 and the like, the storage tray 311 of the dish body 310 has a bottom surface continuously including a first inclined surface 311a, a second inclined surface 311b, and a third inclined surface 311c. The ball inlet 341 of the dish back plate 340 has a rectangular shape extending substantially horizontally in the left-right direction, whereas it becomes lower as viewed in the right direction (sphere supply port 342). Thus, a step is formed between the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341, and the step becomes larger as it goes to the right in the front view. ing. The step between the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341 has almost no step at the left end of the ball inlet 341, and the outer diameter of the game ball at the right end of the ball inlet 341. There is a slightly higher step. As a result, the game balls that have flowed substantially straight in the front-rear direction via the prize ball communication rod 343 flow into the storage tray 311 mainly through the left side portion of the ball inlet 341 with few steps. As a result, the potential energy (falling energy) of the game ball falling from the ball inlet 341 to the storage tray 311 is small due to the small level difference, and the load applied to the storage tray 311 is reduced and the storage tray 311 is damaged. Can be prevented.

  By the way, when the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases and a large number of game balls are stored on the first inclined surface 311a, the ball inflow port 341 is connected via the prize ball contact hole 343. The game balls flowing into the storage tray 311 are shaped so as to push the game balls stored in the storage tray 311 from the side, and the game balls are pressed against each other by applying a lateral force to each game ball. It becomes a state. In this state, when the game balls in the storage tray 311 (third inclined surface 311c) are consumed via the ball supply port 342, the game balls are collected near the upstream side of the third inclined surface 311c (second inclined surface 311b). When the width of the flow path is narrowed, the game balls may be pressed against each other and the fluidity of the game balls may be reduced, resulting in clogging of the balls. However, in this example, as described above, the ball inlet 341 moves in the left-right direction. Since it has an elongated rectangular shape, the game ball from the prize ball contact bar 343 directly flows into the second inclined surface 311b through the shelf 344, and can be supplied to the third inclined surface 311c. (See FIG. 62B).

  In addition, in the portion on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the ball inlet 341, the lower side of the ball inlet 341 is higher than the outer diameter of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface of the storage dish 311. Thus, the game balls flowing into the storage tray 311 flow into the upper side of the game balls stored in the storage tray 311, and the fluidity of the game balls is suppressed by preventing the game balls from pushing sideways. In addition to being able to prevent the lowering, the game balls flowing in from the top promote the lateral movement of the lower game balls (especially the game balls in contact with the front surface of the dish back plate 340), and naturally Ball clogging can be eliminated (see FIG. 63).

  As described above, the storage tray 300 of the present example allows the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to be stored in the shelf of the horizontally long ball inlet 341 even if the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases. Since the game balls stored in the storage tray 311 are caused to flow into the upper side of the storage tray 311 via the portion 344, it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the game balls from clogging in the storage tray 311. The game can be continued without worrying about the game ball in the plate 311 and the interest of the player can be prevented from decreasing.

[1-2D. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 450 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64 is a front perspective view of the glass unit, FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the glass unit exploded and shown from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. As shown in the drawing, this glass unit 450 has an annular, vertically-long octagonal unit frame 451 that has a larger opening than the game window 101 and is molded of synthetic resin, and two front and rear ends of the unit frame 451 are closed. The transparent glass plate 452 of a sheet | seat, and the strip | belt-shaped glass decoration board | substrate 453 arrange | positioned along the inner periphery of the unit frame 451 between the two glass plates 452 are provided.

  The unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 has a substrate insertion groove 451a into which the rear side is opened and the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted, and a plurality of openings 451b that open from the substrate insertion groove 451a toward the inner peripheral side of the unit frame 451. A locking groove 451c formed on the outer periphery of the substantially central portion in the front-rear direction of the unit frame 451, a terminal plate support portion 451d that protrudes leftward from the upper left end in a front view, and an outer periphery that is higher than the vertical center Stop pieces 451e that respectively protrude in the left-right direction from the position, and locking protrusions 451f that protrude outward in the left-right direction from both ends of the lower side are provided.

  In addition, the glass decorative substrate 453 in the glass unit 450 is strip-like and flexible, and has a plurality of color LEDs 453a at positions corresponding to the openings 451b of the unit frame 451 on the front surface side (inner surface side of the unit frame 451). When the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451, the LED 453a faces the inner surface side of the unit frame 451 through the opening 451b.

  Further, the glass unit 450 is connected to the glass decorative substrate and is supported by the terminal plate support portion 451d of the unit frame 451, and the end of the glass decorative substrate 453 is fixed to the glass decorative relay terminal plate 454. And a terminal plate holder 456 that covers the terminal plate support portion 451d of the unit frame 451 that supports the glass decorative relay terminal plate 454.

  In the glass unit 450, glass plates 452 are bonded and fixed to the front and rear of the unit frame 451 in a state where the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451 a of the unit frame 451. In the glass unit 450, the engaging groove 451c formed on the outer peripheral lower side of the unit frame 451 engages with the vertical bent protruding piece 151 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 451 and the stopper piece 451e The locking projection 451f is fitted in the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base body 110 from the rear side, and is detachably attached to the door frame 5 by the stop lever 196. .

  In addition, the glass unit 450 can appropriately decorate the light between the two glass plates 452 by causing the LEDs 453a of the glass decoration substrate 453 to emit light appropriately. A pachinko machine 1 having a gaming window 101 (with a mood) can be provided.

[1-2E. Security cover]
Next, the security cover 470 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. The security cover 470 is provided with a security function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 450 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 450 between the reinforcing metal plates 142 and 143, and the upper side portion thereof is an arc-shaped contact recess 471 along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 603 of the game board 4. And a post-crime prevention protruding piece 474 projecting rearward along the contact recess 471. Further, a crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 is formed in a slanting manner on the back surface of the shaft support side with the crime prevention cover 470 attached. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 470, a crime prevention pre-projection piece 472 along the lower shape of the unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 is projected with the crime prevention cover 470 attached, and U-shaped at both lower ends. A mounting elastic piece 473 is formed so as to project forward.

  The security cover 470 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5 by mounting the mounting elastic piece 473 on the mounting opening 116 formed in the door frame base unit 100. And in the attached state, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the protrusion piece 472 before crime prevention faces the back lower one side of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. FIG. Further, the front end of the crime prevention front protrusion 472 is in contact with the vertical bent protrusion 151. In addition, the post-crime projecting piece 474 and the post-crime end end projecting piece 475 are in a state of projecting rearward, but when the door frame 5 is closed, The bottom side of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 enters and faces the lower side, but the half of the open side of the post-crime projection 474 is rail security formed on the inner rail 603 of the front component 601 The state is inserted into the groove 607, and the crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 is in a superposed position along the upper surface of the crime prevention projection 608 formed on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 76). ).

  Thus, in the state in which the security cover 470 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the security structure by the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 described above, and the security protrusion 166 and the security space 586 described later. In addition to the crime prevention structure by the above, even if it is attempted to intrude an unauthorized tool from below the glass unit 450, the unauthorized device enters from the front lower direction of the security cover 470 due to the polymerization of the pre-crime projection piece 472 and the unit frame 451. The anti-crime piece 474 and the inner rail 603 constituting the front component 601 are superposed to prevent unauthorized equipment from entering from the lower side of the rear face of the security cover 470. In particular, against the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the diagonally lower side of the door frame 5 on the shaft support side, the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the outer rail 602 is prevented by the superposed structure of the security projection 608 and the rear end projection 475. In addition, the overlapping structure of the inner rail 603 and the post-crime protrusion 474 can prevent unauthorized equipment from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4.

  Similarly, in addition to the crime prevention structure by the double bent projecting pieces 153 and 154 of the above-described opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 143, intrusion of unauthorized tools from obliquely below the opening side of the door frame 5, The uneven engagement between the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the post-crime projection piece 474 can further prevent the unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4. Note that a vertical surface between the post-crime protrusion 474 and the rear-end protrusion 475 on the back side of the security cover 470 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball, it also has a function of preventing the hit ball that jumps or reverses the guide path part from colliding with the glass plate 452.

[1-3. Body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. 67 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, FIG. 68 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 69 is a main body frame main body before mounting the parts. FIG. 70 is a perspective view seen from the back side of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. 72 is a perspective view of the state in which the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2, and FIG. 73 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. FIG. 75 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame 3 to which components are attached, and FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional plan view of the pachinko machine cut along the horizontal line in the middle of the pachinko machine 1 (main control board box 624 portion). .

  The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment has a game board 4 that can be detachably mounted from the front side, a hitting ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for delivering a prize ball, a tank rail member 740, and a ball path unit. 770, a prize ball unit 800, a full tank unit 900, a locking device 1000 for locking the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and a door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame excluding the game board 4 Various components such as a substrate unit 1100 in which various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in 3 and a power supply board 1136 are collectively provided, a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580, and the like are mounted. The main body frame main body 500 is provided.

  First, the main body frame main body 500 on which the various parts described above are mounted and the main body frame 3 on which the various parts are mounted will be described. In FIG. 67, an upper shaft support bracket 503 and a lower shaft support bracket 509 (both see FIG. 71) for attaching and closing the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 are attached on one side of the main body frame main body 500. In the state where the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 are mounted on the shaft bracket mounting steps 501 and 502, the upper side and the side of the main body frame main body 500 are formed. The sides are substantially flush with the upper sides and sides of the upper shaft support 503, and the lower and sides of the main body frame main body 500 are substantially flush with the lower sides and sides of the lower shaft support 509 (see FIG. 73). Here, the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 73. The upper shaft support fitting 503 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and its upper end protrudes forward, and a shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed to the upper surface protruding forward. A door shaft support hole 505 is formed on the side.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support 509 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally projected on the lower end side and slightly on the upper side. The lower support plate 506 constitutes a frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 on the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2, and the upper support plate 507 is provided on the door frame 5. A door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft support portion 148 on the main body frame 3 is configured. For this reason, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support protrusion 68 of the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the lower support portion 148 of the door frame 5 is formed in the door support plate 507. A shaft support hole 508 for inserting the projecting shaft pin 147 is formed.

  By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof is a game board installation recess 510 (see FIG. 71) for installing the game board 4. A slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 510 is a plate portion 511. In addition, the front upper side portion and the front open side portion on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are formed with a predetermined width so as to face the rear surface of the door frame 5, An upper crime prevention double groove 581 is formed by a protrusion protruding in parallel with the lateral direction, and a side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the outer side and on the inner side of the front opening side edge on the right side when viewed from the front. A security recess 583 is formed which is formed by an inner wall having an inclined surface that is connected to the first side wall 540 at the rear end. Unlike the side part, it is not formed so as to have a predetermined width that faces the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front shaft support side part of the main body frame main body 500 is more forward than the front upper side part or the front open side part. The shaft support side portion 587 (see FIG. 110) has a large protrusion amount.

  More specifically, the upper crime prevention double groove 581 formed on the upper side of the front surface is bent toward the rear with both long side ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached and fixed to the back side of the upper side of the door frame 5. The bent projecting pieces 155 and 156 are inserted respectively. Further, the side security grooves 582 and the security recesses 583 formed on the front open side edges are folded back at the long side ends of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 attached and fixed to the open back of the door frame 5. The open-side outer bent protrusion 153 and the open-side inner bent protrusion 154 to be bent are respectively inserted. Further, on the shaft support side portion 587 of the front shaft support side portion, the tip end of the shaft support side L-shaped bent protruding piece 157 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 attached and fixed to the shaft support side rear surface of the door frame 5 is provided. The parts come into contact.

  Further, the above-described structure can prevent an illegal act of inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire through the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, and in particular, the open side where the fraudulent act is most likely to be performed. It has a structure that can prevent fraud at the side and then at the upper side where fraud is likely to be performed. Of course, the prevention of fraud by the contact between the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 142 on the support side and the support-side L-shaped bent protrusion 157 also works well, but in many cases the support side is sturdy. Since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected to each other by the support brackets 45 and 66 and the shaft support brackets 503 and 509, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is larger than that of the upper side and the open side. It is difficult to make a gap. For this reason, in this embodiment, not a double crime prevention structure but a single crime prevention structure. These points will be described in detail later.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the front upper side, front open side, and front pivot side on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are arranged on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the front open side. A door hook hole 549 for allowing a door hook portion 1041 (see FIG. 121) provided in a lock device 1000 (described later) attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3 to protrude forward is provided. In addition, a board positioning protrusion 576 for engaging with a positioning recess 611 formed in the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the front shaft support side. Further, the pivot side L-shaped bent projection piece 157 of the pivot side reinforcement sheet metal 142 with the door frame 5 closed on the inner front surface of the lower side position of the panel positioning projection 576 on the front side pivot side side part. Two upper and lower restricting projections 577 into which the distal ends are inserted project. The operation of the restricting protrusion 577 is as described above. In addition, as shown in FIG. 67, a board stopper insertion hole into which an end of a game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the open-side flat portion and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

  Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper surface of the plate portion 511 is a game board placement section 512 for placing the game board 4, and when the game board 4 is placed at the approximate center of the game board placement section 512, the game board 4 is provided with a passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 76) formed in the base plate 4. Further, as shown in FIG. 67, a rail mounting boss 514 protrudes from the central portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the open side end portion at a predetermined interval, and the launch rail 515 ( 71) is fixed with screws. Further, a rail connection member 516 protrudes from the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 is provided. It is adjacent to the connection passage portion 609 (see FIG. 76) which is the downstream end of 603.

  Further, an upper end of an elliptical game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 71) for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 at a side position of the rail connection member 516 (position opposite to the firing rail 515). A fixing tool mounting boss 517 for mounting is protruded, and a stopper 518 is protruded obliquely below. That is, the game board fixing tool 519 is rotatably provided around the fixing tool mounting boss 517, and rotates in the clockwise direction in a state where the game board 4 is placed on the game board mounting portion 512, thereby playing the game board. The fixture 519 is pressed against the front surface of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. Further, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by turning the game board fixture 519 counterclockwise and removing it. In this case, the game board fixture 519 is prevented from being rotated counterclockwise by the stopper 518.

  In addition, the lower part of the open side of the plate part 511 is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 520 that projects in a bulging shape toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A hitting ball launcher 650 is fixed to the mounting portion 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This will be described in detail later. A handle connection window 522 that houses a slide member 710 (see FIG. 95) that is linked to the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 described above is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520 described above. A shaft hole 523 is formed at the position adjacent to the handle connection window 522 so that the end surface of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 91) of the ball striking rod 687 faces. In addition, the upper wall portion of the launching device mounting portion 520 is formed with a notch-shaped through hole opening 521 for projecting the hitting ball rod 687 of the hitting ball launching device 650 upward, and a plate portion 511 obliquely above the saddle through opening 521. Is formed with a cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 passes.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 68, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, a ball discharge passage 524 is formed extending from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 and then going downward. . The ball discharge passage 524 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball connection passage 880 (see FIG. 71), which will be described later, from below the pachinko machine 1 into the island. In addition, a cylindrical guide protrusion 525 protrudes rearward from the above-described launcher mounting portion 520, and a guide hole 1212 (see FIG. 128) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is formed in the guide protrusion 525. The board unit 1100 is easily attached by being inserted. Also, mounting holes 527 for mounting the board unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate part 511, and the mounting pieces 1122 of the board unit 1100 are made to correspond to the mounting holes 527 and fastened with screws. In addition, a launching device mounting boss 529 for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650 is projected rearwardly inside the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 520, and the lowermost end portion on the open side is shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a guide protrusion with a tapered tip and a vertically long shape is provided to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 protrudes rearward.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 511 is formed with a ball removal connection opening 530 which is an opening at the upstream end of the ball removal discharge passage 524 on the upper surface of the end portion on the shaft support side, as shown in FIG. . A downstream end of the ball removal connection passage 880 is connected to the ball removal connection opening 530. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball-opening connection opening 530 is horizontal so that the full unit mounting portion 531 for mounting the full unit 900 (see FIG. 71), which will be described in detail later, is orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engagement groove 532 that engages with an engagement piece 924 (see FIG. 111) of the full tank unit 900 is formed in the front portion of the full unit mounting portion 531. Further, as shown in FIG. 71, an outlet for damming a prize ball discharged from the outlet 921 of the full tank unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened is provided on the front surface of the plate part 511 in front of the full unit mounting part 531. An opening / closing device 579 is provided.

  Although the outlet opening / closing device 579 is not described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening / closing plate is lowered by a lever that contacts the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, the contact with the lever disappears, so that the opening / closing plate rises and closes the outlet 921. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not fall down from the outlet 921. In addition, as shown in FIG. 71, a fastening hole penetrating vertically in a position corresponding to the upper side of the launching portion of the firing rail 515 in the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511. 533 is formed, and a fastening link 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533. The fastening linkage 534 is a mechanism for preventing the game board 4 from being detached from the main body frame 3.

  Next, the structure of the game board installation recessed part 510 is demonstrated. The game board installation recess 510 is provided around a first side wall 540 that is provided in a rearward direction from the inner side surface on the pivot support side, the above-described upper side portion, and the open side surface portion, and a rear side provided from the first side wall 540. The main body frame 3 includes a second side wall 541, a third side wall 542 that is provided rearward from the second side wall 541, and a fourth side wall 543 that is provided rearward from the third side wall 542. The left and right sides and the rear side of the upper side are formed in a concave shape.

  The first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed such that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) are straightly extended rearward with a step when viewed from the back, whereas the left side ( The open side is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 75) that inwardly slopes from the first side wall 540 toward the fourth side wall 543. This is because the rear end of the fourth side wall 543 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the left side (side on the open side) are straightly formed rearward. May be in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 so that it cannot be opened smoothly. Therefore, the first side wall surface 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side can be smoothly opened by inclining inside. It is something that can be done.

  At the same time, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and the attachment is made using a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 117) provided in the rear end side of the first side wall 540. Therefore, in order to form the lock mounting hole 547, the fourth side wall 543 is formed in an inclined step shape from the first side wall 540 on the open side. Furthermore, as for the step size of the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543, the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 needs to be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. For this reason, it is formed with a somewhat large step, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 69, the side walls 540 to 543 are formed so as to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively, and in this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is formed in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, third side wall 542, and fourth side wall 543. The rear projecting portions of various gaming devices provided in 4 are accommodated.

  That is, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the rear surface of the peripheral part of the game board 4. A rear side wall that has a stepped portion that contacts the rear side wall of the gaming device 4 that extends from the first side wall 540 in a rearward direction substantially parallel to the first side wall 540 and that is provided on the game board 4; It constitutes. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the rearward protruding amounts of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are fixed to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. It is formed so as to be at substantially the same position as the rear wall 722 of the storage portion 728 for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 720.

  Thereby, since the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured up to a position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, for example, a game Even in the case where a gaming device is installed in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the board 4, the rearward protruding portion of such a gaming device can be easily stored.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 to the left side (open side), the upper side and the right side (shaft support side) when viewed from the back, the open side rear wall 544, An upper rear wall 545 and a pivot support side rear wall 546 as a rear wall are provided so as to protrude inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. The shaft support side rear wall 546 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 67), and a ball path unit 770 (to be described later) and a prize ball unit 800 constituting a ball payout mechanism are detachably mounted on the rear surface. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the pivot support side rear wall 546 is sufficient if the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 are wide enough to be mounted.

  Further, the front surface of the upper rear wall 545 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 67), and a tank rail member 740, which will be described later, is attached to the rear surface thereof. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 545 to have a height width dimension of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner. Furthermore, the front surface of the open-side rear wall 544 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 67), and a cover body support cylinder portion 575 that pivotally supports a cover body 1250 described later is formed on the rear surface. Accordingly, it is sufficient that the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the open-side rear wall 544 is a width that forms the cover body support cylinder 575.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot-side rear wall 546 that project inward from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat plate portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space formed by 543 is ensured, for example, even when a gaming device is attached such that the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the gaming board 4, The rear projecting portion can be easily stored. Note that the insides of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot support-side rear wall 546 form a rear opening 580 so that the rear opening 580 can be opened and closed by a cover body 1250 described later. It has become.

  Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board mounting recess 510 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 passes is formed on the open side plane portion. There are three places in the middle and bottom, but a lock locking hole 548 (see FIG. 68) into which a locking projection 1004 (described later) of the lock device 1000 is engaged further above, below, and below the upper and lower door hook holes 549. ) Is formed. Further, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 68) for attaching the lock device 1000 with a screw is provided at the rear end of the first side wall 540. It is formed in the upper part and the middle. It should be noted that the locking device 1000 is attached not only at the upper and middle positions, but also at a screw mounting portion 543 formed in a lock mounting piece 1008 described later and a lock mounting hole 547 formed in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 526. And the lower part of the locking device 1000 can be attached.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 70, on the left and right in front of the upper side of the first side wall 540, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 A guide arc projection 552 that abuts is provided, and a relief recess 551 that communicates with a notch 729 of a prize ball tank 720, which will be described later, is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. When the mounting flange 733 of the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the tank attachment groove 550, the notch 729 of the prize ball tank 720 communicates with the escape recess 551 as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the sphere stored in the tank increases, the pressure is released to prevent clogging. When the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear side wall 722 on the back side and the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are substantially coincident when viewed from the front side of the prize ball tank 720 in plan view (FIG. 4). See). The guide arc projection 552 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and the decorative cover plate. 15 is formed to prevent a fraudulent act such as forming a gap with 15 and inserting a fraudulent instrument through the gap.

  Further, the above-described upper rear wall 545 is formed with a rail locking groove 553 for attaching the tank rail member 740 along the opening edge of the rear opening 580, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear wall. A rail locking groove 554 is formed in the bent portion of 545. The tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking protrusions 749, 750 (see FIG. 99) of the tank rail member 740 in the rail locking grooves 553, 554. In addition, a rail latching elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper part of the upper rear wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 553 and 554. When the projecting pieces 749 and 750 are locked and the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rail latching elastic piece 555 is arranged at the upper end on the downstream side of the tank rail member 740 so that the locked state is not released. It comes in contact with the top.

  When the tank rail member 740 is removed, the rail rail elastic member 555 is pressed backward, and then the tank rail is released to release the locking state between the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 and the locking protrusions 749 and 750. The member 740 may be lifted upward. Further, a relief hole 556 is formed on the side of the rail latching elastic piece 555, and a ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 110 and the like) is formed below the rail latching elastic piece 555. The escape hole 556 is formed to escape the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided in the tank rail member 740, and the ground wire connector 557 is provided inside the tank rail member 740. In addition to being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, a wiring connected to a ground connector provided on the power supply board 1136 is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, vertical standing walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the shaft support side rear wall 546 on the shaft support side rear wall 546, and the spherical passage unit is provided between the standing walls 560. 770 and a prize ball unit 800 are attached. In addition, a prize ball guide projection 561 is provided in a bent shape from the most upstream part between the left and right standing walls 560 to slightly above the middle stream part. The award ball guide protrusion 561 is protruded rearward on the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the protrusion height gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and a ball passage unit 770 described later is attached. This corresponds to the ball drop passage 772 (see FIG. 104) of the ball passage unit 770 and guides the winning balls in a line. Further, a path unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball path unit 770 with screws and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are provided on the left and right sides of the prize ball guide projection 561, and a ball break switch described later. A switch-corresponding protrusion 563 is provided so as to face 778 (see FIG. 104). The passage unit mounting boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

  Furthermore, an engaging protrusion 565 as a locking portion that engages with a hook-shaped engaging portion 824 (see FIG. 106) as an engaging portion of the prize ball unit 800 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560, A lock elastic claw 564 that engages with the button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 106) of the prize ball unit 800 is formed, and the rotation shaft 808 (see FIG. 106) of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800 is formed. A clearance hole 566 for receiving the end of the reference is formed. A payout motor escape opening 572 is formed below the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the payout motor 815 as a drive motor of the prize ball unit 800 faces the payout motor escape opening 572. (See FIG. 71). Then, the prize ball unit 800 is engaged with the lower end of the locking groove 573 formed at the lowermost bottom surface of the rear surface of the shaft support side rear wall 546 and the rear of the shaft support side by the engaging protrusion 565 and the lock elastic claw 564. The face wall 546 is detachably attached. This detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

  In addition, a cover body contact groove 567 into which the open side end of the cover body 1250 enters is formed at the open end of the pivot support side rear wall 546 and below the cover body contact groove 567. A locking wall 569 is provided in a protruding manner. The cover body abutment groove 567 is formed with stop holes 568 corresponding to the stop holes 1253 of the cover body 1250 (see FIGS. 74 and 139), and these stop holes 1253 and 568 are not shown in the figure. By fastening with screws, the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover body 1250. The locking wall 569 is provided with a U-shaped locking protruding hook piece 570 in a plan view, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 is attached to the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Only the responsible person having the padlock key can open the cover body 1250 by penetrating the formed through-hole 1254 (see FIG. 74) and hooking a lock such as a padlock on the locking protrusion 570. Can not be.

  As mentioned above, although the structure of the main body frame main body 500 which consists of the game board installation recessed part 510 and the board part 511 was demonstrated, when the door frame 5 was closed to the lowest end side part of the board part 511 other than having demonstrated above. In addition, engagement grooves 584 and 585 (see FIG. 67) into which door frame protrusions 110d and 110e (see FIG. 25) bent downward with the lower side of the door frame base main body 110 bent rearward are formed. Yes. The engagement groove 584 is a groove formed below the firing device mounting portion 520 described above, and the engagement groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engagement groove 584 toward the shaft support side. Note that the door frame protrusion 110d corresponding to the engagement groove 585 protrudes rearward so as to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110e corresponding to the engagement groove 584. However, a door frame protruding piece 110d having a large protruding amount is slightly formed at the lower end of the open end. The door frame protruding pieces 110d and 110e and the engaging grooves 584 and 585 constitute the outer protrusions and engaging portions on the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the launch rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connection member 516 and the launch device attachment portion 520 are formed to project, but the launch device attachment portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are provided. The position of the plate portion 511 is biased toward the open side, and they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, in a state where the door frame 5 is closed, the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 on which the launching device mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are arranged to the open side is the rear surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device mounting portion. 520 and the front surface of the firing rail 515 are in close contact with each other, so that the unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protruding piece 110d and the engagement groove 585 can be removed from the back surface of the door frame 5. It is extremely difficult to make the gap between the launcher mounting portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 even better and reach the front side of the game board 4 or the back side of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, since the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are not arranged to the shaft support side does not have a portion protruding on the surface of the plate portion 511, the door frame 5 is closed. In this case, a space 586 is generated between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement groove 584 can easily open the space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. In order to prevent unauthorized tools from slipping through the space 586 upward, the mounting base 160 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 has a space 586 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed. Crime prevention protrusions 166 are formed to invade. The security protrusion 166 is formed on the mounting base 160 so as to extend from substantially the middle of the plate portion 511 to the end portion on the shaft support side. Therefore, the space below the outer rail 602 attached to the launch rail 515 and the game board 4 constitutes a crime prevention space 586 that receives the crime prevention protrusion 166 protruding from the mounting base 160. The security protrusion 166 and the security space 586 constitute an inner protrusion and engagement portion at the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the main body frame 3 includes the game board 4, the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the lock device 1000, and the board unit. 1100 and the cover body 1250 are attached, and these will be sequentially described below.

[1-3A. Schematic configuration of game board]
A schematic configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 is a perspective view of the game board 4 as viewed from the front, FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 78 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. 79 is a game board 4. 80 is an enlarged perspective view of a removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board 4, and FIG. 81 is a main body frame 3 showing a structure of the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board 4. FIG. FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view of the front component in the game board, the game panel, and the panel holder in the assembled state, cut in the vertical direction, and FIG. 83 is a front component that mainly constitutes the game board. FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the game panel, the panel holder, and the like exploded and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 83 viewed obliquely from the rear. Further, FIG. 85 is a perspective view showing obliquely from behind with the main control board box fixed to the board holder. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view showing the board substrate holder, drawer holder, and main control board box in FIG. FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram of an exploded perspective view of the function display unit in the game board. FIG. 88 is a schematic view of the function display sticker, and FIG. 89 is a partial view of the function display sticker of the game board through the game window.

  As shown in the figure, the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment includes a transparent plate-like gaming panel 600, a panel holder 630 that holds the gaming panel 600 and has a substantially square outer shape, and the gaming panel 600 through the panel holder 630. The front component 601 is attached to the front so as to surround the game area 605, and the function display unit 640 (see FIG. 87 and the like) is fixed to the rear side of the front component 601. On the surface of the gaming panel 600, various gaming devices and a number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the gaming area 605. The front component 601 is attached to the front surface of the panel holder 630 after those gaming devices and obstacle nails are provided. The front component 601 is a hollow cavity that surrounds the outer periphery of the game area 605. And the outer shape is formed in a shape along the outer shape of the panel holder 630, and an arc surface extending from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side past the center of the upper side is formed as the outer rail 602. An inner rail 603 is formed from the lower position of the stopper 620 provided at the end of 602 to the position where the symmetrical backflow prevention member 604 of the upper stopper 620 is provided. The outer rail 602 is formed with a connecting passage portion 609 connected to a rail connecting member 516 provided in an extension shape of the firing rail 515 at the start end portion thereof, and a foul port adjacent to the connecting passage portion 609. 610 is formed. In addition, a metal rail is closely attached to the outer rail 602 from the upstream end of the foul port 610 to the stop portion 620.

  The stopper 620 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so that when a hit ball that has slid on the outer rail 602 collides with force, the hit ball hits the inside of the game area 605. The backflow prevention member 604 prevents the hit ball, which is fired at one end and taken inside the game area 605, from flowing back to the outer rail 602 again. Further, a security protrusion 608 is provided on one side of the lower portion of the outer rail 602 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. The security protrusion 608 overlaps with the rear end protrusion 475 of the security rear end projecting on the security cover 470 in the state in which the door frame 5 is closed, and overlaps with the axis of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. It prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the support side gap.

  Further, an out port 606 is provided at the center of the lower portion of the inner rail 603, and the hit ball hits the game area 605 between the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 602 from the out port 606 to the backflow prevention member 604. Although it constitutes a guided passage to be guided, the hit ball that has flowed back through the outer rail 602 without reaching the game area 605 is taken into the foul port 610 and guided to the foul ball inlet 923 of the full tank unit 900 described later. Then, it is discharged again to the dish unit 300. The game area 605 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 603. In addition, a rail security groove 607 is formed in the front component 601 on the way from the out port 606 of the inner rail 603 to the stop 620. The rail security groove 607 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime projection piece 474 protruding from the security cover 470 enters as described above with the door frame 5 closed. Due to the concavo-convex engagement between the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the post-crime projection piece 474, the piano wire or the like that is inserted from the middle of the gap on the open side of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 overlaps vertically. This will ultimately prevent the tool from entering.

  By the way, a positioning recess 611 is formed on one side of the game board 4 to be fitted into a board positioning protrusion 576 formed on the main body frame 3, and a board formed on the main body frame 3 is formed on the other side of the game board 4. A game board stopper 614 to be inserted into the stopper insertion hole 578 is provided. An end of the game board stopper 614 is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 when the game board stopper 614 is pressed and fixed. Thus, in order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, after inserting the positioning recess 611 from the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be fitted to the board positioning protrusion 576, The whole is pushed into the first side wall 540 of the main body frame 3, the game board stopper 614 that is free in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end portion is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 and fixed. . Thereafter, the game board fixing tool 519 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, the game board 4 may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure.

  In addition, the game board 4 in the present embodiment has a configuration that prevents unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3 very easily. That is, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 80, a mounting notch 616 that penetrates the gaming board 4 in the front-rear direction is formed at the lower end opposite to the passage notch 613 below the gaming board 4 (more precisely, A mounting notch 616 is formed in the front component 601.) A fastening bar 617 is stretched and fixed in the horizontal direction below the mounting notch 616. The fastening bar 617 is formed with a band groove-like fastening portion 618 for latching the fastening band 619 at the approximate center thereof. On the other hand, as the removal preventing mechanism provided in the main body frame 3, as described above, it is the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 below the main body frame 3, and the firing rail 515 is fired. A fastening hole 533 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the portion, and a fastening linkage 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 (see FIG. 81). reference).

  When the game board 4 configured as described above is housed and arranged in the game board installation recess 510 of the main body frame 3, the fastening bar 617 is placed in contact with the game board placement part 512 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 are in a matched state. In this state, the tip of a fastening band 619 that is generally marketed from above the fastening bar 617 is inserted into the mounting notch 616 with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 coincide. Then, it is inserted downward into the fastening hole 533 and guided forward, and its tip is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 619. And the unnecessary front-end | tip part which protruded ahead from the fastener of the fastening band 619 is cut | disconnected. In this way, unless the fastening band 619 is cut, the game board 4 cannot be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the game board stopper 614 and the game board fixture 519 are released. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main body frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 619, for example, if different fastening bands are fastened by using a fastening band 619 unique to a pachinko parlor, It can be easily understood that the board 4 has been removed and some sort of fraud has been performed. Thus, illegal removal from the main body frame 3 of the game board 4 can be prevented by an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism.

  Further, the game board 4 has an outer shape in which notch portions 612 are formed on the upper left and right sides, and a part of the front guide passage 920 portion of the full tank unit 900 described later is inserted obliquely below the side of the foul port 610. A passage notch 613 is formed. In addition, on the lower left and right sides of the front component member 601, a certificate sticking unit 615 for attaching a certificate check certificate is provided. Further, a function display seal 649 is affixed to the upper side of the lower right certificate stamp affixing portion 615 of the front component 601.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the game board 4, the balls won in various game devices (for example, general winning ports 2004, 2101, starting ports 2001, 2002, grand winning ports 2003, etc.) provided in the gaming area 605 are located downstream. A liquid crystal control board 4500 for controlling the display of a liquid crystal display device 1400 (see FIG. 151, etc.) as a display device arranged at the approximate center of the game area 605 on the back surface of the back box 621 which can be guided in alignment with A peripheral board box 622 in which the peripheral control board 4140 is accommodated is attached.

  Further, a board substrate holder 623 is fixed to the back of the game board 4 below the back box 621. This board substrate holder 623 has a space part (this space part has a width in the front-rear direction that is relatively wider than the width of the back box 621 so as to collect the winning balls aligned and guided by the back box 621 in front of it. Formed), and a drop port 629 (see FIG. 75) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. The drop port 629 joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 606 and communicates with an out ball passage 1119 (see FIG. 128) formed in the substrate unit 1100 described later.

  The board substrate holder 623 has a main control board box 624 for storing a main control board 4100 for controlling a game operation on the back surface thereof, a payout control board 1186, a power board 1136, and the like provided in a board unit 1100 described later. A relay terminal plate 625 for connection is attached. The relay terminal plate 625 is provided with drawer connectors 626 and 627 that are automatically connected to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 only by mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3.

  Furthermore, the board substrate holder 623 is formed with a joint guide protrusion 628 that protrudes backward from between the drawer connectors 626 and 627 so as to penetrate the relay terminal plate 625. The joint guide protrusions 628 are provided on the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 side and on the game board 4 side when an operation of mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3 is performed as will be described in detail later. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 are inserted into the joining guide holes 1213 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 of the substrate unit 1100 so as to be naturally connected (see FIG. 128). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

[1-3A-1. Front component / game panel / panel holder / panel back plate]
Next, the holding structure of the game panel 600 in the game board 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 of the present embodiment includes a plate-like game panel 600 made of a transparent synthetic resin having a size corresponding to the game area 605, and a synthetic resin that detachably holds the game panel 600 from the front. A frame-shaped panel holder 630, and an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603 for guiding the game ball into the game area 605 and defining the outer periphery of the game area 605 disposed on the front side of the panel holder 630. It mainly includes a front component member 601 and a plate-like panel back plate 635 disposed in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630.

  As shown in the drawing, the front component member 601 is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses 601a and positioning protrusions 601b protruding rearward on the rear surface side. Although the positioning boss 601a and the positioning projection 601b will be described in detail later, the positioning boss 601a and the positioning projection 601b can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 630, the board substrate holder 623, and the game panel 600 disposed on the rear side.

  The gaming panel 600 in the gaming board 4 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 605, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin. . The gaming panel 600 is thinner than the panel holder 630 and has a necessary minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when a failure nail (not shown) is implanted.

  The gaming panel 600 includes a plurality of fitting holes 600a that are formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery and are formed of round holes that penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 600b that is disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction. Each is provided. The fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b are disposed outside the game area 605 and are positioned with respect to the panel holder 630. Further, the game panel 600 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 600c each having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engagement step portion 600c is formed by cutting out substantially half of the thickness of the game panel 600, and is disposed outside the game area 605, like the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b. This is for engaging and fixing the game panel 600 to the panel holder 630.

  The game panel 600 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 600d at predetermined positions. The inner rail 603 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 601b protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 603 into the inner rail fixing hole 600d.

  Further, the gaming panel 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 600e having a predetermined inner shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction so as to be provided with the center accessory 2300, the attacker unit 2000, and the like (see FIGS. 159 and 160). In addition, fixing holes for fixing them are formed at appropriate positions. Note that the openings 600e are shaped so as not to penetrate the outer periphery of the gaming panel 600 in the vertical and horizontal directions, and since the outer periphery of the gaming panel 600 is connected, the strength of the gaming panel 600 is determined by the opening 600e. Is designed to suppress the decrease.

  The panel holder 630 in the game board 4 has a size that includes the game panel 600 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape. The panel holder 630 has a thickness of a member (for example, a game board base) made of wooden plywood in the game board of a conventional pachinko machine. It is made of a thermoplastic synthetic resin having substantially the same thickness (in this example, about 20 mm). The panel holder 630 includes a holding step portion 630a that holds the gaming panel 600 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 605 inside the holding step portion 630a. It mainly includes a through-hole 630b penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the gaming panel 600, and the front surface of the gaming panel 600 held in the holding step portion 630a is the front surface of the panel holder 630. It is designed to be almost the same surface. In addition, the holding inner side 630a has a front inner peripheral surface of a size that allows a predetermined amount of clearance C (see FIG. 82) to be formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the game panel 600. This clearance C can absorb the expansion and contraction even if the game panel 600 expands and contracts relatively due to a temperature change or a change with time. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance C.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b formed in the game panel 600 held by the holding step portion 630a, and forwards from the front surface of the holding step portion 630a. A plurality of projecting pins 630 c that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 600 a and the long holes 600 b of the game panel 600 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 630c into the fitting holes 600a and the long holes 600b of the gaming panel 600, the panel holder 630 and the gaming panel 600 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with an engaging claw 630d and an engaging piece 630e that are engaged with the engaging step portion 600c at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 600c of the game panel 600. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 82, the engaging claw 630d is disposed on the upper holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630, and corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 600c of the game panel 600. The holding step 630a protrudes forward from the front surface and is elastically engaged with the engagement step 600c. The engaging claw 630d is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 630. On the other hand, the engagement piece 630e is disposed in the lower holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630, corresponds to the lower engagement step portion 600c of the game panel 600, and is played between the front surface of the holding step portion 630a. In a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 600c of the panel 600 to be inserted is formed, the panel 600 extends along the front surface of the panel holder 630 toward the upper side (center side) by a predetermined amount. The game panel 600 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 630 by engaging the engagement step portion 600c of the game panel 600 with the engagement claws 630d and the engagement pieces 630e.

  Further, the panel holder 630 includes a boss insertion hole 630f that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the positioning boss 601a provided in the front component 601 can be inserted, and the positioning boss of the front component 601 is inserted into the boss insertion hole 630f. By inserting 601a, the panel holder 630 and the front component 601 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 630 has a mounting support portion 630g that is recessed by a predetermined amount on the rear side so that the center in the vertical direction is slightly below the lower side and the outer peripheral edge. Is provided. The mounting support portion 630g causes the rear surface of the panel holder 630 to be recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of depression ( The depth (depth is about 2.5 mm in this example) that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 621a (see FIG. 155) of the back box 621 of the back unit 2000 attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 630g. And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 630g, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 621a from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 630, and the panel holder 630, that is, the game board 4 is connected to the pachinko machine 1. The game board can be securely installed in the game board installation recess 510.

  Further, the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 is formed below the position where the mounting support portion 630g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and is recessed toward the front side to accommodate the panel back plate 635. And a locking portion 630i that is disposed so as to penetrate through the receiving recess 630h in the front-rear direction and that can lock a locking claw 635c formed on the panel back plate 635. The housing recess 630h detachably accommodates the panel back plate 635 by engaging the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 with the locking portion 630i, and the rear surface of the received panel back plate 635 is a panel. The holder 630 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 630 has a plurality of mounting holes 630j which are arranged in the mounting support portion 630g on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recess 630h and into which a predetermined screw can be screwed. Arranged in a predetermined arrangement. Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 630k arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 630j. The positioning hole 630k is a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (not shown) protruding forward from a fixing portion 621a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 621) formed on a member to be mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 630j. Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 630k is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  The mounting hole 630j has a large diameter and a small diameter so that the inner diameter of the hole is mixed, and depending on the size, weight, etc. of a predetermined member to be fixed, 630j may be used.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 630 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 630l that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 630 is reduced by the thinned portions 630l. It has become. As shown in FIG. 83, these thinning portions 630l are not formed in a predetermined range from the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 630 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 630 becomes a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the connection passage portion 609 of the front component member 601 disposed on the front surface becomes a substantially flat surface. The launched game ball is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 630 is formed with a thinned portion 630 l, so that the mounting holes 630 j and the like are formed in a boss shape, and support them and maintain the strength of the panel holder 630. For this reason, lattice-shaped ribs are formed.

  The panel holder 630 is formed with a obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and a positioning portion 630m corresponding to positioning means such as an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 600 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, an opening 630n that communicates with the out port 606 of the front component 601 and a communication hole 630o that communicates with the foul port 610 of the front component 601 are further provided at the lower portion of the panel holder 630.

  Next, the panel back plate 635 is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 so as to cover the thinned portion 630l within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the rear surfaces of the housing back portion 635 are accommodated in the housing recess 630h of the panel holder 630. A plurality of screw holes 635a that can be accommodated so as to be substantially on the same surface, are arranged in a predetermined arrangement on a flat rear surface and can be screwed with a predetermined screw, and a plurality of screw holes 635a are arranged to correspond to the screw holes 635a A positioning hole 635b, a locking claw 635c that can be locked to the locking portion 630i of the panel holder 630, and a weight-reducing concave portion 635d that is recessed so as not to penetrate from the front surface side are provided.

  The screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b in the panel back plate 635 have substantially the same configuration as the mounting hole 630j and the positioning hole 630k in the panel holder 630. Similarly to the panel holder 630, the panel back plate 635 is formed into a boss-like portion where the screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b are formed by the recessed portion 635d, and supports the panel back plate. In order to maintain the strength of 635, lattice-shaped ribs are formed. Further, the panel back plate 635 is provided with an opening 635e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 630n of the panel holder 630, the communication hole 630o, and the boss insertion hole 630f.

  The panel back plate 635 is housed in the housing recess 630h of the panel holder 630, and the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 is locked to the locking portion 630i of the panel holder 630, thereby being integrated with the panel holder 630. In this state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 635 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel holder 630. By integrating the panel holder 630 and the panel back plate 635 in this way, the mounting holes 630j and screw holes are arranged on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 in a predetermined arrangement on the outer peripheral side of the through-hole 630b over substantially the entire circumference. An attachment hole made of 635a and the like and positioning holes 630k and 635b are arranged, and the presence of these attachment holes allows a predetermined member to be attached and fixed at an arbitrary position.

  As described above, according to the holding structure of the gaming panel 600 in the present example, the gaming panel 600 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 from the front, and the engaging claws 630d and the engaging pieces 630e, By engaging the engagement step portion 600c, the panel holder 630 can hold the gaming panel 600, and the gaming panel 600 and the front side of the panel holder 630 are substantially flush with each other. It becomes possible to set the game panel 600 in the state where the game panel 600 is held in the panel holder 630 without modifying the used obstacle nail planting apparatus, and to install the obstacle nail planting apparatus. An increase in the cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the game board 4 having the game area 605 is divided into the game panel 600, the panel holder 630, and the front component member 601, the position of the obstacle nail, the prize opening, etc. is changed depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1. The changing gaming panel 600 can be used as a replacement part, and the panel holder 630 and the front constituent member 601 can be used as common parts. The panel holder 630, the front constituent member 601 and the like can be made recyclable and the gaming panel 600 can be recycled. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 equipped with a game board 4 that can be used for various types of machines by simply replacing them.

  Further, since the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 630j in a predetermined arrangement in advance, various mounting units such as the back unit 2000 and the board substrate holder 623 mounted on the rear side of the panel holder 630 depending on the model. Even if the mounting and fixing positions of the predetermined members are different positions, the panel holder 630 is designed so as to correspond to the position of the mounting hole 630j, so that the panel holder 630 is common to the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model. It can be made into parts.

  In the present embodiment, in the game board 4, a transparent game panel 600 that forms the rear surface of the game area 605 is held by the panel holder 630. However, in the same manner as a conventional pachinko machine, 600 may be integrated with the panel holder 630 and may be formed of wooden plywood such as a veneer board.

[1-3A-2. Board holder for panel]
Next, the detailed configuration of the board substrate holder 623 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. This board substrate holder 623 is attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 630. As shown in the figure, the board holder 623 has a box shape with the front and upper sides open, and the bottom is the front side at the approximate center in the left-right direction. In this case, the game ball discharged to the rear side of the game panel 600 can be received and discharged downward from a substantially central position in the left-right direction. A main control board box mounting portion 623a for mounting the main control board box 624 is formed on the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623, and beside the main control board box mounting portion 623a (on the right side in the rear view). A sealed portion 623b corresponding to the sealed portion 624a provided in the main control board box 624 is formed. A drawer holder 636 that supports the relay terminal plate 625 and the drawer connectors 626 and 627 is fixed to the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623.

  The main control board box 624 of this example is supported by the main control board box mounting portion 623a on the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623, and the sealing portion 624a of the main control board box 624 is the main control board box mounting portion 623a. It is sealed to the horizontal sealed portion 623b. When the main control board box 624 is removed from the board substrate holder 623 in this state, an opening mark is left on the sealed portion 623b of the main control board box mounting portion 623a, and the main control board box 624 It can be visually confirmed whether or not it has been illegally removed.

[1-3A-3. Function display unit]
First, as shown in FIG. 87, the function display unit in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a function display board 640a and a cover member 640b. As shown in the figure, the function display board 640a includes segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, and LED1 to LED12. A first special symbol indicator 641 is assigned to the segment indicator SEG1, and a second special symbol indicator 641 is assigned to the segment SEG2. A symbol display 642 is assigned. The segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 can display alphanumeric characters and graphics, etc., and by displaying these alphanumeric characters and graphics as special symbols, the first start of the attacker unit 2000 described later When a game ball wins in the mouth 2001 (see FIG. 158), the segment indicator SEG1 variably displays a predetermined special symbol, and when a game ball wins in the second starting port 2002 (see FIG. 160), the segment indicator SEG2 A predetermined special symbol is variably displayed.

  LED1 is assigned a first special symbol memory indicator 643a, LED2 is assigned a first special symbol memory indicator 643b, LED3 is assigned a second special symbol memory indicator 644a, and LED4 is assigned a second special symbol memory indicator. A display 644b is assigned to each. When the game ball won in the first starting port 2001 is not used in the special symbol fluctuation display, the first special symbol memory display 643 lights up or blinks with the number of the game balls won as the holding number. Yes. Specifically, the first special symbol memory display 643a is turned on when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the first special symbol memory display 643b is turned off, and the first special symbol memory display 643b is turned off when the holding ball is two balls. When both the symbol memory display 643 are lit, the first special symbol memory display 643b is flashed when the number of the holding balls is three, the first special symbol memory display 643b is lit, and when the number of the holding balls is four, the first The special symbol memory display 643 blinks together. On the other hand, when the game ball won to the second starting port 2002 is not used in the special symbol variation display, the second special symbol memory display 644 is turned on or blinking with the number of the game balls won as the holding number. It has become. Specifically, the second special symbol memory display 644a is turned on when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the second special symbol memory display 644b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory display 644b is turned off when the holding ball is two balls. Both the symbol memory display 644 are lit, the second special symbol memory display 644a flashes when the number of the holding balls is three, the second special symbol memory display 644b is lit, and the second when the number of the holding balls is four The special symbol memory display 644 blinks together.

  Further, a normal symbol display 645 is assigned to the LED 5. The LED 5 is an LED capable of lighting red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange. The LED 5 displays the lit color as a normal symbol so that when a game ball passes through a gate 2201 of a gate member 2200 described later, a predetermined normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Further, a normal symbol storage display 646 is assigned to each of the LEDs 6 to 9. The game ball that has passed through the gate 2201 is not used in the normal symbol fluctuation display (when the normal symbol display is performed on the normal symbol display 645 and when the blade 2337 is opened and closed) The game symbol that is not used for the normal symbol fluctuation display immediately after passing the symbol) is turned on by the symbol symbol display 646 with the number of the game balls passed as the holding number. Specifically, the normal symbol memory lamp 646a is turned on when the holding ball is one ball, and the normal symbol memory lamps 646b to 646d are turned off. When the holding ball is two balls, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a and 646b are turned on. The normal symbol memory lamps 646c and 646d are turned off, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a to 646c are turned on when the holding ball is three balls, the normal symbol memory lamp 646b is turned off, and the normal symbol memory indicator is displayed when the holding ball is four balls. All 646 lights up.

  Further, a gaming state indicator 647 is assigned to the LED 10. The LED 10 is an LED capable of lighting red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange. The LED 10 displays the color to be lit as a gaming state, thereby notifying that the gaming state has a probability variation or a small hit.

  Further, the LEDs 11 and 12 display two times for displaying the number of times the open / close pattern of the big prize opening 2003 is repeated (number of rounds) when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit (special hit)”. A round indicator 648 consisting of two LEDs is assigned. That is, the round indicator 648 is a portion where two LEDs are lit to indicate the number of rounds in the big hit game when the accessory continuous operation device operates.

  Thus, the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 mounted on the function display board 640a are the first special symbol indicator 641, the second special symbol indicator 642, the first special symbol memory indicator 643, A second special symbol memory display 644, a normal symbol display 645, a normal symbol memory display 646, a game status indicator 647, and a round indicator 648 are assigned to each segment display SEG1, which displays various functions. SEG2, LED1 to LED12, that is, the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage The display 646, the game status display 647, and the round display 648 are integrated on the function display board 640a. That. In addition, these LEDs 1 to LED may be assigned different functions depending on the specifications of the gaming machine.

  In addition, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 each variably display the jackpot gaming state as a special symbol, so the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, Differentiating from the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage display 646, the gaming state display 647, and the round display 648, segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 different from the LED1 to LED12 assigned to them are used to display alphanumeric characters and graphics. Etc. are variably displayed as special symbols.

  The sum of the number of LEDs 6 to 9 assigned to the normal symbol memory display 646 and the number of LEDs 11 and 12 assigned to the round display 648 is a fixed value 6.

  By the way, the function display board 640a is fixed to the cover member 640b with screws (not shown), and the cover member 640b is attached from the back surface of the front component member 601 of the game board 4 with screws (not shown). The front component 601 is provided with segment indicator openings 601c at positions corresponding to the segments SEG1 and SEG2 of the function display board 640a, and the contents displayed by these segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 can be visually recognized. ing.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 87, the front component member 601 is provided with LED insertion holes 601d at positions corresponding to the LEDs 1 to 12 of the function display board 640a, and the cover member 640b is connected to the front component member 601. LED1 to LED12 do not interfere with the game board 4 when being attached to the back surface of the game board. These LED insertion holes 601d are formed in a cylindrical shape so that the lights of the LEDs 1 to 12 that are turned on or blinking are not mistaken for the lights of the adjacent LEDs that are turned on or blinked. The contents displayed by the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 and the contents displayed by turning on or blinking the LEDs 1 to 12 are printed on a function display sticker 649 described later. The front component member 601 is provided with a function display seal pasting portion 601e to which the function display seal 649 is pasted. In addition, a concave portion 601f is formed in the function display seal pasting portion 601e. The function display seal 649, which is pasted by inserting a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver, into the recess 601f, is easily peeled off. Here, in order to make it easy to peel off the function display seal 649, it is conceivable to provide a protrusion on the function display seal 649. However, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3, the protrusion is pulled for some reason. The function display sticker 649 may be peeled off from the function display sticker pasting portion 601e. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the function display sticker 601e is formed in the function display sticker 601e so that the function display sticker 649 does not peel from the function display sticker 601e when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3. ing.

[1-3A-4. Function display sticker]
Next, as shown in FIG. 88, the function display sticker 649 in the gaming machine 4 is printed on the surface by being grouped into groups Grp1 to Grp3 for each function display. It is affixed to a function display seal affixing part 601e formed on a certain front component 601.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp1 includes a first special symbol display 641 and a first special symbol storage display 643. The first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 is divided and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by a solid line SL1. The area surrounded by the solid line SL1 is displayed in the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol memory so that the display by the first special symbol display 641 and the lighting or blinking by the first special symbol memory display 643 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 643 is transparent. In the group Grp1, various kinds of information related to the special symbol change display by winning the game ball to the first start port 2001 are displayed. For example, when a winning prize is received at the first starting port 2001, the first special symbol display 641 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, or the first special symbol memory display 643 sets the number of winning game balls as a holding number. Lights up or flashes. Thus, by grouping the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 into one group Grp1, the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 Can indicate to the player that various types of information related to the display of variation of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball at the first start port 2001 are shown. As a result, the player sees the group Grp1 that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by the solid line SL1, and changes the special symbol due to the start winning of the game ball to the first start port 2001. Various information related to the display can be easily confirmed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp2 includes a second special symbol display 642 and a second special symbol storage display 644. These second special symbol display 642 and second special symbol storage The display unit 644 is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by a solid line SL2. The area surrounded by the solid line SL2 is the second special symbol display 642, the second special symbol storage so that the display by the second special symbol display 642 and the lighting or blinking by the second special symbol storage display 644 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 644 is transparent. In this group Grp2, various types of information related to the special symbol variation display by winning a game ball to the second starting port 2002 are displayed. For example, when a game ball starts winning a prize at the second start opening 2002, the second special symbol display 642 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, or displays the number of winning game balls as the number of reserves in the second special symbol memory display. The device 644 lights up or flashes. Thus, by grouping the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 into one group Grp2, the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 are combined. Can indicate to the player that various types of information related to the special symbol variation display due to the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 2002 are shown. As a result, the player can visually observe the group Grp2 partitioned and surrounded by the solid line SL2 and printed on the function display sticker 649. Various information regarding can be easily confirmed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp3 includes a normal symbol display 645 and a normal symbol storage display 646, and a solid line SL3 that allows the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 to be visually recognized. And is printed on the function display sticker 649. In the area surrounded by the solid line SL3, the positions corresponding to the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are transparent so that the lighting by the normal symbol display 645 and the lighting by the normal symbol storage display 646 can be visually recognized. It has become. As described above, the normal symbol display unit 645 variably displays whether or not the blade 2337 is opened or closed as a predetermined normal symbol. When the blade 2337 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the game ball wins the second starting port 2002. It becomes easy. Therefore, the normal symbol display 645 includes a first special symbol display 641, a first special symbol storage display 643, a second special symbol display 642, a second special symbol storage display 644, and a normal symbol storage display. Stars are printed so that they can be distinguished from the game display 646, the game status display 647, and the round display 648. In this group Grp3, various information related to the gate 2201 can also be displayed. For example, when a game ball passes through the gate 2201, the normal symbol display unit 645 displays a predetermined normal symbol in a variable manner, or the normal symbol storage display unit 646 lights up with the number of game balls passed as a holding number. As described above, the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are grouped into one group Grp3, so that the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 can perform various operations related to the normal symbol variation display. The player can be informed that the information is shown. As a result, the player can easily confirm various information regarding the variation display of the normal symbol by visually observing the group Grp3 which is partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid line SL3 and printed on the function display sticker 649.

  Furthermore, at the positions corresponding to the game status display 647 and the round display 648, as shown in FIG. 88, the game status display 647 and the round display 648 are surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be visually recognized. It is partitioned and printed. In the area surrounded by the solid lines SL4 to SL6, the positions corresponding to the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 are transparent so that the lighting by the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 can be visually recognized.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the groups Grp1 to Grp3 are partitioned and surrounded by solid lines SL1 to SL6 and printed on the function display sticker 649. The position corresponding to 648 is partitioned and printed in a state surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be visually recognized by the game status display 647 and the round display 648.

  As described above, the function display seal 649 is grouped so that the functions of the segment display units SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, which are collectively mounted on the function display board 640a shown in FIG. 87, are grouped as groups Grp1 to Grp3. The contents are printed and partitioned. In addition, a star symbol is printed on the normal symbol display 645 or the like, and even if the contents displayed by the segment displays SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 are collectively printed on the function display sticker 649, their meanings are displayed. It can be easily understood.

  The correspondence between such functions and the printed contents is printed on the function display sticker 649 as a sticker management number 649a as shown in FIG. 88 and 89, this seal management number 649a is printed at a position that is difficult to see from the game window 101 through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. It is designed not to convey unnecessary information to the player. In addition, the concave portion 601f provided in the function display sticker pasting portion 601e is also formed at a position that is difficult to see through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIGS. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the recess 601f.

  Further, the seal management number 649a is used to prevent a worker of a manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 from erroneously attaching a function display seal of another specification when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The seal management number 649a is also used for inventory management of the function display sticker 649, and modes such as the group Grp1 to the group Grp3 are managed in association with the seal management number 649a. Thereby, when the seal management number 649a is examined, the stock of the function display sticker 649 corresponding to the seal management number 649a can be known.

  Here, with the recent shortening of the life cycle of the pachinko machine, the development period of the pachinko machine has been shortened. For this reason, in the present embodiment, for example, a 2-round display lamp and a 15-round display lamp for lighting and informing that the number of times (rounds) that the winning prize opening 2003 is changed from the closed state to the open state is 2 times and 15 times. When the number of starting ports is reduced from two to one, the specification change of the pachinko machine 1 can be dealt with by using a common function display board 640a. . In order to change the contents printed on the function display sticker in accordance with the specification change of the pachinko machine 1 as described above, the functions of the segment display units SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, the contents printed on the function display sticker, Is printed on the function display sticker as a sticker management number. Thereby, for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 determines whether the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 correspond to the function display sticker 649 before the line operator attaches the function display sticker 649 to the game board 4. The seal management number 649a can be confirmed by visual observation, and the function display seal 649 that does not correspond to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being attached. Note that the function display seal 649 is a seal, and there is no work process for applying an adhesive or the like to the back surface of the function display seal 649, which contributes to improvement in productivity.

[1-3B. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the ball hitting device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 is an overall perspective view (A) of the hit ball launching device 650, a perspective view (B) with the launch motor portion removed, and FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the hit ball launching device 650, FIG. These are the front view (A) which shows the relationship between the hit ball launcher 650 and the launch rail 515, and the perspective view (B) of the launch motor part, and FIG. 93 is the hit ball launch in the state where the operation handle 410 is not operated. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 650 and the firing rail 515, and FIG. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball hitting device 650 and the firing rail 515 in a state where the operation handle portion 410 is being operated. 95 is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C) from the front, and a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A (D) of the front view (B) of the slide member 710 provided in the ball hitting device 650. It is.

  The hitting ball launching device 650 pivotally supports a hitting ball rod 687 on the firing base frame 651 and attaches a shot motor 695 for reciprocating rotation to the hitting ball rod 687 to the firing base frame 651, and further hits the hitting ball rod 687. The firing base frame 651 is provided with a slide rod 677 and a slide member 710 that adjust the urging force of the urging spring 684 that imparts the urging force that returns to the position.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91, the launch base frame 651 is molded into a horizontally long rectangular shape with a synthetic resin, and a bearing in which a bearing 689 of a ball striking rod 687 is fitted at the approximate center thereof. A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653 and 654 for restricting the firing origin position of the hitting ball 687 are attached and fixed to the upper part and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 returns to the firing origin position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684. In addition, a slide guide hole 655 having a horizontally elongated groove is formed on the rear side of the firing base frame 651 (on the opposite side of the portion corresponding to the lower side of the firing rail 515), and a slide member storage space is formed below the slide guide hole 655. 656 is formed.

  The slide guide hole 655 is inserted with a guide locking piece 678 projecting from the upper rear end of a slide rod 677, which will be described later, and guides the slide movement of the slide rod 677. The slide member 710 is accommodated so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is guided by a guide bush 681 fixed to a guide hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 in a stop hole 662 formed in the firing base frame 651 by a set screw 682. This is done by penetrating through. In addition, a rectangular connection opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG.

  Further, a hook portion is formed on the front portion of the upper side of the firing base frame 651 with respect to the main body of the firing base frame 651, and an operating piece opening 657 is formed in the hook portion above the bearing cylinder 652. Yes. In this working piece opening 657, a weight 173 of a ball feeding member 172 (see FIG. 18) provided facing the hitting ball supply port 171b (see FIG. 18) on the downstream side of the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. An operating piece 658 that comes into contact with the mounting piece 660 is swingably provided by a stop pin 659 on a mounting portion 660 that projects from the rear upper part of the opening edge of the opening 657 for the operating piece. The operating piece 658 is formed in a “te” shape, the rear end portion of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by a stop pin 659, and the base plate rotates integrally with the ball striking rod 687 from the pivotal support portion to the arc portion below. 690 is in contact with the operating piece abutting portion 693 provided in a projecting manner at 690, and the upper side portion swings the ball feeding member 172 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the hitting ball rod 687. One hit ball that flows out from 171b is supplied to the launch position of launch rail 515 one by one.

  Further, on the firing base frame 651, motor mounting bosses 661 for fixing a motor cover 694 containing the firing motor 695 are projected in a total of three locations, two at the rear lower part and one at the front upper part. At the same time, a swinging piece boss 663 into which a shaft hole 673 at the lower end of the swinging piece 672 connected to the slide member 710 is inserted in a protruding manner is provided at the lower rear of the slide member storage space 656. ing.

  A metal plate 665 is attached to the above-described launch base frame 651 so that the hit ball launcher 650 has high rigidity. Therefore, the metal plate 665 has through-holes 666, 667, 668, 669, which correspond to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the swing piece boss 663, respectively. A horizontal oblong through hole 670 through which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 passes is also formed. In the metal plate 665 configured as described above, after the slide member 710 is stored in the slide member storage space 656, each of the through holes 666 to 671 has corresponding members 652, 653, 655, 681, 712, 663. It is fixed to the firing base frame 651 by being brought into close contact with the firing base frame 651 so as to penetrate or match with the screws.

  The tip of the swing piece boss 663 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 671, and the shaft hole 673 of the swing piece 672 is inserted into the head portion. The swing piece 672 is pivotally supported so as to be swingable about the lower end. As shown in FIG. 91, the swing piece 672 is formed in a vertically long bowl shape, a shaft hole 673 is formed at the lower end thereof, and the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted in the middle thereof. The connecting hole 674 is formed. The front surface above the connection hole 674 is an abutting portion 675 that abuts one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Accordingly, the rocking piece 672 is inserted into the rocking piece boss 663 and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin 676 with washer. The rocking piece 672 is attached to the firing base frame 651 by being fixed to the convex portion 712. The attached swinging piece 672 swings at the upper part around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

  Further, a horizontally long bowl-shaped slide bar 677 is attached to the upper front surface of the metal plate 665 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. That is, an L-shaped guide locking piece 678 projecting from the rear upper part of the slide rod 677 is engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665, and the guide elongated hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 is engaged. The guide bush 681 having the set screw 682 is passed through, and the set screw 682 is fixed to the set hole 662. The slide hook 677 is slidably mounted on the firing base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide long hole 680 and the guide bush 681. The slide rod 677 is formed with a contacted portion 679 that contacts the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672 described above at one end (rear end), and one end of the biasing spring 684 at the other end (front end). A spring locking portion 683 for hooking the locking ring 685 is projected.

  A bearing cylinder 652 of the launch base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 666, and the bearing cylinder 652 is fitted so that the bearing 689 of the hitting ball rod 687 does not fall off. The lower end portion of the hit ball 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689 and, at the same time, the base plate 690 is fixed. An operating piece abutting portion 693 that abuts against the operating piece 658 protrudes from the front back surface side of the base plate 690, and a spring for latching the locking ring 686 at the other end of the biasing spring 684 on the front front surface thereof. A locking portion 692 is projected, and a motor contact projection 691 that engages with and disengages from the motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is projected from the rear front surface thereof. A synthetic resin rivet tip 688 is fixed to the upper end of the hitting ball 687, and the firing position formed by the lower end portion of the firing rail 515 and the firing position stopper 702 secured above the tip 688. I am going to rush into.

  On the other hand, a firing motor 695 housed in a motor cover 694 is attached to the above-described motor mounting boss 661 of the firing base frame 651. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), the motor cover 694 includes a cylindrical portion formed so as to accommodate the firing motor 695 therein, and an enlarged motor mounting boss 661 that extends forward of the cylindrical portion. And an anti-rotation preventing cam 698 and a motor cam 697 at the tip of the motor shaft 696 of the firing motor 695 that are integrally formed and are accommodated inside the cylindrical portion. Is fixed.

  A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer periphery of the reverse rotation prevention cam 698, and engages with a stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 93) fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701 so as to be swingable. The reverse rotation of 695 is prevented. This is to prevent the motor cam 697 from rotating in the reverse direction so that the motor cam 697 and the motor abutting protrusion 691 mesh with each other to prevent a failure in which the ball striking device 650 cannot be driven. Further, the motor cam 697 is formed in a ball shape, and reciprocates the hitting ball rod 687 while being engaged with and disengaged from the motor abutting protrusion piece 691 as the firing motor 695 rotates. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor attachment boss 661, as shown in FIG. 90A, the main structure of the ball hitting device 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 95, the slide member 710 housed in the slide member housing space 656 and slidably moving is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with the rear open, and an elliptical oval convex portion 711 projects on the front surface thereof. Further, a circular connecting convex portion 712 is projected from the rear position of the elliptical convex portion 711. Further, on both the upper and lower surfaces, slide contact protrusions 713 having an arc cross section are provided at both ends so as to easily slide in the slide member storage space 656. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape is an insertion space 714 into which the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 provided in the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 is inserted.

  The insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the front side of the side wall in the sliding direction, and protrudes from the inside of the upper surface and the lower surface to the inside slightly behind the first inclined surface 715. In addition, a clamping piece 716 is formed in which a predetermined interval is formed between the tips of each other. A second inclined surface 717 is also formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 716 so as to incline in a C shape when viewed from the side. Thus, in the state where the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), one end of the slide protrusion 183 on the inclined side 183a side abuts against the front side wall in the slide direction. In this state, it is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716. In addition, although the space part 718 is formed in the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, this space part 718 is not necessarily playing a function.

  Thus, the slide member 710 configured as described above is an ellipse formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG. 92A in the state of being stored in the slide member storage space 656. The insertion space 714 is formed so as to face the connection opening 664 having a shape, and the slide member 710 is in contact with one space inner wall of the slide member storage space 656 (in FIG. 92A, the left space inner wall Although it is illustrated as being in contact, in a normal state, it is in a state of being in contact with the inner wall of the right space.

  First, the relationship of adjusting the strength of the urging spring 684 of the slide member 710 and the ball hitting device 650 will be described. The slide member 710 is positioned at the right of the initial position in the slide member storage space 656 (FIG. 92A). 93, the swing piece 672 connected to the connecting projection 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state. For this reason, the slide rod 677 in contact with the swing piece 672 is also urged in one direction (left side in FIG. 93) by the biasing force of the bias spring 684 and the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672. The contacted portion 679 of the slide rod 677 is in contact. In this state, since the urging spring 684 is not tensioned, even if the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 is weak, and the hit ball at the firing position is not elastic. Even if issued, the game area 605 of the game board 4 is not reached.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (when moved toward the left inner wall in FIG. 92A), as shown in FIG. Since the swing piece 672 swings and tilts about the shaft hole 673 at the lower end, the slide rod 677 is moved in the other direction (right side in FIG. 94) by the contact between the contact portion 675 and the contacted portion 679. Slide towards you. Then, the biasing spring 684 locked to the spring locking portion 683 of the slide rod 677 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695 is increased, and the hit ball at the firing position is increased. The game is strongly ejected and reaches the game area 605 of the game board 4. The strength of the impact force of the hit ball can be adjusted according to the slide amount of the slide member 710 in the slide member storage space 656.

  As described above, by moving the slide member 710, it is possible to adjust the resilience by the ball striking device 650. This is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 that moves in accordance with the turning operation of the moving operation member 414. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, when the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is rotated, the slanting cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 is also rotated, so that the slide body of the joint unit 180 182 slides in one direction inside the joint unit mounting recess 110c. For this reason, the slide protrusion 183 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 182 also slides in the same direction. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 passes through the connection opening 664 formed in the launching device mounting portion 520 of the main body frame 5 and inserts the slide member 710. It is inserted into the space 714. The insertion state in this case is a state where one end side on the inclined side 183a side of the slide projecting piece 183 is in contact with the side wall on the front side in the sliding direction and is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716 as described above. . Therefore, when the slide protrusion 183 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, since the slide rod 677 also slides as the slide member 710 slides, the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, by rotating the rotation operation member 414 of the handle device 400, the resilience of the hit ball of the hit ball launching device 650 can be adjusted.

  By the way, in this embodiment, since the handle device 400 is provided on the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 is provided on the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the handle device 400 is opened each time the door frame 5 is opened and closed. And the slide member 710 of the ball striking device 650 are linked or separated. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 183 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, and the handle device 400. The ball striking device 650 is linked, and conversely, by opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 is separated from the insertion space 714 to separate the handle device 400 and the ball striking device 650. Therefore, the handle device 400 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can be linked and separated very easily as the door frame 5 is opened and closed. In particular, when the slide projecting piece 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, even if the position of the slide projecting piece 183 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 716 projecting into the insertion space 714 is provided. The slide protrusion 183 is smoothly inserted into the clamping position by the surface 717.

  In some cases, the player may stuff the padding operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 and fix it at a position rotated to some extent, but the store clerk at the game hall knows the padding without knowing the padding. 5 may be opened and closed. Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem because the slide projecting piece 183 is merely separated from the insertion space 714. However, when the door frame 5 is closed, the position of the slide projecting piece 183 is determined. Is slightly displaced in one direction, but the sliding member is accompanied with the closing operation of the door frame 5 by the cooperative action of the inclined side 183a of the sliding protrusion 183 and the first inclined surface 715 of the sliding member 710. The slide protrusion 183 and the slide member 710 are finally engaged with each other while moving 710 in one direction. In other words, in the present embodiment, the operation handle device 400 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can be linked regardless of the rotation position of the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410. It is.

[1-3C. Prize ball tank]
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 720. As described above, the prize ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 550 (see FIG. 70) formed in the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the prize ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a notch 729 is formed in the front wall 721, and the bottom surface thereof is formed from the upstream side wall 724 to the downstream side wall 723. A storage portion 728 is formed by a first inclined bottom surface 726 inclined toward the bottom and a second inclined bottom surface 727 inclined from the front wall 721 toward the discharge port 730 described below.

  Further, a discharge port 730 is formed at the inclined lower end of the second inclined bottom surface 727, and this discharge port 730 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In this manner, the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 are formed so as to be surrounded by a discharge port protruding wall 725 that connects in a U-shape. Further, on both outer sides of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, attachment flanges 733 that engage with the tank attachment groove 550 are formed, and the main frame 3 is arranged on the back side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 720. Placement contact pieces 731 and 732 for placement and contact with the four side walls 543 project, and a ball for attaching a ball leveling member 744 described later to the lower part of the rear surface wall 722 on the upstream side of the prize ball tank 720. A leveling attachment shaft 735 is protruded. Further, an overflow preventing member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the prize ball tank 720 excluding the discharge port 730.

  In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting flange 733 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 are attached to the main body frame 3. It abuts on the fourth side wall 543. As a result, the prize ball tank 720 is placed and attached to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. In this attached state, as shown in FIG. 74, the prize ball tank 720 is stored through the notch 729 of the front wall 721. The portion 728 and the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3 communicate with each other, and as shown in FIG. 4, the discharge port 730 faces the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 to be described next. ing. Accordingly, in the prize ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 for storing the sphere (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. It forms so that it may become substantially the same as the width | variety of the front-back direction to -4th side wall 543, and is mounted in the upper part to those side walls 541-543.

  Further, as described above, the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are deeply formed so as to cover the rear projecting space of the peripheral part of the game board 4, so that the side walls 541 to 541 are formed. Although the depth of the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper part of the 543 is shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, the prize ball tank 720 is stored even if the prize ball is stored and increases in weight. Is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the stored sphere can be smoothly guided to the discharge port 730 without the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727 being deformed. Further, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, the flow of the sphere stored in the storage portion 728 flows outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. It is configured. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank in which a part of the inclined bottom surface is provided with an opening as a discharge port as in the prior art, a spherical break-up protrusion for eliminating the clogging is formed in the storage portion near the discharge port. In addition, it is possible to obtain a structure in which ball clogging hardly occurs.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the award ball tank 720 is placed on the outside of the upper portion of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that accommodates the rearward projecting portions of the gaming apparatus, and the award is given. Since the discharge port 730 of the ball tank 720 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the storage unit, the tank rail member 740 is disposed outside the storage unit of the prize ball tank 720 (as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). Since the tank rail member 740 and the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 do not overlap in the vertical direction, the rear protrusion of the gaming device provided on the back surface of the gaming board 4 is stored. The upper sides of the rear side walls 541 to 543 can be projected rearward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, so that even if the rearward protruding portion of the gaming device protrudes at the upper side portion of the game board 4. It can be comfortably accommodated in the interior of the side walls 541 to 543.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the storage part 728 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that house the rearward projecting part of the gaming apparatus, the discharge port 730 has the Only the configuration of being provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 provides a unique effect that is not found in the conventional prize ball tank. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a plan view showing the pressure state of the sphere at the discharge port portion of the conventional prize ball tanks (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the figure, normally, the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored and retained in the storage part of the prize ball tank 720. In this case, when the discharge port 730A is formed by opening a part of the inclined bottom surface of the storage portion as in the conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of a prize-ball tank in which a discharge port 730A is formed on the opposite side of FIG. 97, or a discharge port 730B is formed adjacent to the ball collapse projection 736B as shown in FIG. 97B, the discharge port 730A , 730B, the ball pressure is always applied to the discharge ports 730A, 730B from four directions by the pressure of the stored sphere and the reaction from the side wall of the prize ball tank based on the pressure.

  For this reason, the pressure between the spheres happens to be balanced due to the degree of sphere overlap, and even when the sphere on the downstream side flows out, a sphere-engaged state may occur at the outlets 730A and 730B, and the sphere may be clogged. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 720 according to this embodiment, the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, so as shown in FIG. The pressure of the stored sphere in the discharge port 730 is a pressure from only two directions, that is, an action force directed from the storage portion toward the discharge port 730 and a reaction thereof, and does not receive pressure from four directions as in the prior art. For this reason, even if the sphere on the downstream side flows out, it is difficult to generate a sphere-engaged state at the discharge port 730 portion, and an excellent effect that sphere clogging does not occur can be achieved.

[1-3D. Tank rail member]
Next, the tank rail member 740 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900 as seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. FIG. 100 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900, as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of the member 740, and the upstream part of the ball passage unit 770.

  As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 (see FIG. 70) of the upper rear wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 740 is provided with a plurality of locking protrusions 749 that are inserted from above into the rail locking groove 553 on the left and right sides and the lower side of the rear side surface, and the upper side of the rear side surface. At the center, a hook-shaped locking protrusion 750 is provided so as to be hooked on the rail locking groove 554 from above. Thus, the tank rail member 740 is formed in a slanted bowl shape having an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 forms a ball passage unit 770 described in detail later. I'm here. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the tank rail member 740 serves as a passage 742 through which spheres flow down in two rows by a partition wall 741.

  The bottom surface of the passage 742 is notched with a narrow groove, and foreign substances that roll along the passage 742 together with the ball fall downward from the narrow groove. Further, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742, and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the above-described ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 68). ing. For this reason, static electricity charged in the sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded from the metal plate to the outside via the ground wire connector 557 via the ground connector of the power supply board 1136.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 744 having a weight on the slightly downstream side of the midstream region of the tank rail member 740 is swingably provided. The ball leveling member 744 is pivotally supported by the ball leveling mounting shaft 735 of the award ball tank 720 described above, and moves toward the two paths 742 in the tank rail member 740. The spheres that are suspended and flow down the respective passages 742 flow down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction so as to be rectified so as to become one stage. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 744 is covered with a ball pressing plate 745. The ball holding plate 745 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the ball that has not been made one step by the ball leveling member 744 is forced to one step.

  Further, a pair of alignment gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 so as to face the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 747 is shifted by a half pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the sphere that has flowed down each passage 742 of the tank rail member 740 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the spheres in the two rows of passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. become. In this case, as shown in FIG. 100, the spheres flowing through the respective passages 742 are guided in the central direction along the inclined surfaces 743 formed at the lower portions of the two rows of passages 742 while meshing with the alignment gears 747. During the guidance, the spheres from the two rows of passages 742 fall in a row alternately to the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 described below. The alignment gear 747 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 746 on its upper surface.

[1-3E. Ball passage unit]
Next, the ball path unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped from the tank rail member 740 in a line to the prize ball unit 800 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 101 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 102 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. 103 is a perspective view of the ball path unit 770 as viewed from the back, FIG. 104 is a front view of the ball path unit 770, and FIG. 105 is a connection structure of the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. It is a side view for demonstrating. In FIG. 102 and FIG. 103, the prize ball unit 800 portion is drawn with the gear cover 866, the aluminum heat sink 841, and the unit sub plate 825 removed, and the ball passage portion formed in the unit base body 801 is drawn in an easy-to-understand manner. is there. However, the gears and the like are indicated by alternate long and short dash lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the ball passage.

  In the spherical passage unit 770 of this example, a spherical drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent to the back surface (the surface seen from the back surface) of a substantially rectangular plate material. As shown in FIG. 100 (A), the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front / rear bent passage portion 772a whose upstream is bent in the front / rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back) and the front / rear bent passage portion 772a. Left and right bent passage portions 772b bent in the direction (left and right direction when viewed from the back), and a vertical passage portion 772c communicating with the left and right bent passage portions 772b and having a substantially vertical shape.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (A), the front / rear bent passage 772a is located at the center of the two rows of passages 742, as described above, because the position of the upper end inlet 773 dropping from the tank rail member 740 is the main body. Since it is in a position away from the surface of the upper rear wall 545 of the frame 3 and the shaft support side rear wall 546 to the back surface side, a winning ball guide projection protruding from the front / rear bent passage 772a and the shaft support side rear wall 546 561 and the ball dropping passage 772 are bent in the front-rear direction so as to be positioned close to the surface of the shaft-supporting rear wall 546. Further, as shown in FIG. 104, the left and right bent passage portions 772b are formed in a U-shape so as to be almost full of the width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the momentum of the sphere that has fallen from the tank rail member 740 to the front and rear bent passage portions 772a. It is formed by bending.

  Further, although the vertical passage portion 772c is formed in a substantially vertical shape, the vertical passage portion 772c is slightly curved and formed, and a notch portion 775 is formed in one bent passage wall 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c. A ball breakage detecting piece 776 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 777 is attached to 775 so as to be swingable. A ball break switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 776, and an actuator 779 of the ball break switch 778 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 776. The ball break detection piece 776 and the ball break switch 778 constitute a ball break detection mechanism for detecting a ball break in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Thus, when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball piece detection piece 776 is pressed by the ball present in the vertical passage portion 772c and the actuator 779 is pushed to turn on the ball piece switch 778. When no ball is present in the portion 772c due to clogging or ball deficiency, the ball piece detecting piece 776 swings into the vertical passage portion 772c, and the actuator 779 turns off the ball piece switch 778. When the ball break switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, stops and the payout of the prize ball is stopped.

  A stopper protrusion 780 is formed at the lower end of the notch 775 to prevent excessive swinging of the ball breakage detection piece 776 to the opposite side of the passage, and the ball passage unit 770 has a ball. A ball clogging insertion groove 781 is formed in the vertical passage portion 772 c corresponding to the cut detection piece 776. The ball clogging insertion groove 781 inserts a pin from the rear surface side of the ball passage unit 770 to prevent clogging of the ball breakage detection piece 776 when it is difficult to swing the ball breakage detection piece 776 due to ball clogging or the like. This is provided to eliminate the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 771 facing the ball piece detecting piece 776 is formed in a bulging shape slightly toward the ball piece detecting piece 776 side. This is because when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball break detection piece 776 is surely pressed to turn on the ball break switch 778.

  Further, a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 are formed in the ball passage unit 770 at a position avoiding the above-described ball drop passage 772. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with a positioning pin 574 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is similarly a passage unit formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546. This corresponds to the mounting boss 562. Thus, in order to attach the ball passage unit 770 to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, the passage unit mounting boss 562 and the stop hole 782 are made to coincide with each other while the positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574. In this state, the screw 784 can be screwed from the stop hole 782. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 785 that engages with an engaging piece of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side, and is connected to the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. A connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the connecting lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting in a circular arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate member, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 770 The projecting shaft 789 as the rotating shaft projecting from the tip of the support piece 788 extending from the both ends of the connecting lid member 786 is fitted into the supporting projecting piece 787 serving as the shaft support projecting from the left and right ends of the connecting lid 786. Thus, it is pivotally supported. In addition, the connecting lid member 786 is extended below the spherical passage unit 770 by closing and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the spherical drop passage 772 communicate with each other (see FIG. 105B). The state shown in FIG. 105 and the state where the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball drop passage 772 do not communicate with each other (the state shown in FIG. 105A). A guide projection 791 that guides the support piece 788 of the connecting lid member 786 when projecting from the opened state to the closed state projects from the lower end of the rear surface of the ball path unit 770.

  Thus, in a state where the ball passage unit 770 is fixed to the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as described later (FIG. 105). In the state shown in (A)), the connecting lid member 786 is closed and the rear surface thereof is locked by the locking elastic claw 820 provided in the prize ball unit 800, so that the ball drop path 772 of the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball The bent passage 803 of the unit 800 is communicated with the passage wall 790 so that a ball falling on the ball dropping passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800. The reason why the rotatable connecting lid member 786 is provided in the ball passage unit 770 is that the award ball unit 800 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as will be described later, and the attachment and detachment thereof is possible. This is to prevent the space formed between the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 from being hindered from falling smoothly.

  Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 projecting from the ball passage unit 770, the projecting height is provided on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 so as to gradually decrease toward the downstream side. By inserting the award ball guide protrusion 561, the upstream portion of the ball drop passage 772 is placed on the rear side so that the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 is positioned substantially at the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front / rear bent passage portion 772a that bends in the front / rear direction when viewed from the side. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the balls flowing down in two rows by the pair of alignment gears 747 are alternately sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 side, the balls are smoothly sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 through the ball drop passage 772. Can do. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to form the ball drop passage 772 from an assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced, and the ball drop passage 772 can be assembled. Workability can be improved.

  In addition, the sphere that has fallen from the tank rail member 740 in the front / rear bent passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left / right bent passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the winning ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. . In addition, the vertical passage portion 772c into which the ball is fed in a state where the momentum is weakened is provided with a ball break detection mechanism (a ball break detection piece 776 and a ball break switch 778) for detecting the ball break. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably detect a break in the ball drop passage 772, in other words, a break in the ball supplied to the winning ball unit 800 (a ball break).

[1-3F. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 800 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball path unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the back side of the prize ball unit 800, FIG. 107 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a payout member, and FIG. FIG. 109 is a rear view for explaining the path and drive relationship of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  106, a prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 in which a bent path 803, a prize ball path 810, and a ball extraction path 811 forming a ball path by a pair of bent path walls 802, and a unit base body 801. A unit sub-plate 825 covering the rear surface of the unit sub-plate, an intra-prize ball relay terminal plate 830 attached to the upper surface (rear side) of the unit sub-plate 825, and a substantially central surface region (rear side region) of the unit sub-plate 825. And a gear cover 866 that covers the detection disk 850 (rotation transmission member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub plate 825 side. A bent passage 803 is formed by the wall 802. The bent passage wall 802 protrudes from the center of the upper part of the unit base body 801 to a substantially middle position on the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both ends of the unit base body 801 from the downstream end to the downstream end. In addition, the middle bent passage wall 802 is largely divided into left and right portions to form a distribution space 805 in which a sprocket 807 serving as a ball feed rotating body is arranged, and a unit base body 801 from the lower portion of the distribution space 805. A passage partition wall 809 is formed in a projecting manner so as to form a pair of bent passage walls 802 divided to the left and right until the downstream end.

  That is, the right and left bent passage walls 802 and the passage partition wall 809 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 805, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 810, The other passage forms a ball passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. In other words, the payout motor 815 is stored in a motor storage space 814 that is located at a position avoiding the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and within the depth width dimension of the ball passage. Fixed. The bent passage 803 is formed in a meandering shape so as to weaken the pressure applied to the sprocket 807 of a sphere staying in the passage 803 and reaches the distribution space 805, but on the upstream side of the distribution space 805. An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface. The opening 804 stores small dust or the like that has entered the bent passage 803, and can collect dust or the like that is collected when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3.

  Further, in the distribution space 805 described above, a sprocket 807 as a payout member having a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits on the outer periphery is rotatably disposed. A bearing cylinder 806 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotary shaft 808 to which the 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 809 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and in the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one side thereof The counting switch 812 is detachably attached.

  The counting switch 812 is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor having a circular passage hole through which a sphere passes, and a switch fitting recess 865 that matches the shape of the rear end is formed by a bent passage wall 802. By doing so, it can be easily attached and detached. A wiring (not shown) from the counting switch 812 is connected to a prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 to be described later. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 802 constituting the prize ball passage 810, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 860 formed on a passage lid plate portion 859 formed integrally with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality of 813 are formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 that engages with one locking portion 860 at the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

  In addition, a circular motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball removal passage 811. This motor storage space 814 The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 815 is accommodated in the inside. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed to the back side of the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 with a pair of mounting pieces 816 formed on the front surface thereof with screws 817. Then, in a state where the payout motor 815 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub-plate 825, the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 passes through the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. The gear 843 is fixed.

  In addition, a space in the depth width direction in which the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball removal passage 811 described above are formed by covering the rear side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat sink 841. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is also accommodated in the inside. Since the motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 and the distribution space 805 in which the sprocket 807 described above is arranged are formed in an extremely close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the unit base body 801 in the vertical direction The length can be shortened, and as a result, the prize ball unit 800 can be made compact.

  Further, the unit base body 801 is provided with a guide protrusion 819 that guides the ball extracted at the lowermost end of the above-described ball extraction path 811 to the back side of the prize ball unit 800, and the guide protrusion 819 The guided sphere is guided to a ball outlet connecting passage 880 described later, and finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a collection basket provided below the island platform). A locking elastic claw 820 that locks the connecting lid member 786 of the above-described ball passage unit 770 protrudes from the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and the prize ball unit 800 is mounted on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the button insertion engagement hole 821 and the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 for removably attaching to the rear wall 546 and the gear cover 866 with the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween. Is provided.

  The button insertion engagement hole 821 is provided on one side of the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and a rod-like attachment / detachment button 822 is slidably attached in the depth width direction. Corresponds to the locking elastic claw 564 formed on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 has a concave shape so that the distal end portion of the lock elastic claw 564 enters. The hook-shaped engaging portion 824 engages with an engaging protrusion 565 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the shaft support side rear wall 546. By pushing down downward, the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 are engaged. In this engaged state, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 engage with each other, so that the upward movement of the winning ball unit 800 is not possible.

  Note that the hook-shaped engagement portions 824 are formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 801. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched therebetween is long and protrudes toward the rear surface, and is a through hole formed in the unit sub-plate 825. After passing through 858, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are coupled with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched by fitting the screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866 to correspond to the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866. doing.

  The configuration of the unit sub-plate 825 that covers the unit base body 801 will be described. The unit sub-plate 825 is a composite that covers the bent passage 803 portion, the distribution space 805 portion, and the prize ball passage 810 portion of the unit base body 801. A payout motor 815 is attached to a resin plate, and an aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 that covers the downstream portion of the ball extraction passage 811 is attached. On the front side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 825, a relay board region 826 for attaching the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is formed in the upper part, and a plurality of gears 843 are provided below the relay board area 826. A gear region 840 to which 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 are attached is formed.

  The relay board region 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 for placing the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 are projected along the square shape. An engaging groove portion 828 that engages with an engaging protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is formed, and a locking claw portion 829 that engages with a locking protrusion 837 of the substrate cover 835 is formed at the center of the other side vertical side. Yes. The relay board region 826 is formed with a button insertion hole 834 through which the attach / detach button 822 is inserted and a mounting boss portion 832 for fixing the in-prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 with screws (not shown). .

  The prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached to the relay board area 826 is connected to the above-described counting switch 812, payout motor 815, and rotation angle switch 855, which will be described later, provided in the prize ball unit 800, as will be described later. It relays the wiring from the payout control board 1186 (see FIGS. 71 and 126). For this purpose, a plurality of connectors are provided, and the button insertion hole 833 through which the detachable button 822 is inserted and the mounting boss portion 832 are provided. Corresponding mounting holes 831 are formed. The award ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is placed on the placement rib 827 of the relay board region 826, and the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are aligned with each other and fastened with screws (not shown). The intra-sphere relay terminal plate 830 can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the unit sub-plate 825.

  Further, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached as described above is covered with the substrate cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape having a substantially square front side open, and an engagement protrusion 836 is formed on the upper and lower bases of one vertical side, and a locking projection 837 is formed on the substantially central side surface of the other vertical side. ing. A button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Thus, after the engagement protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is inserted into the engagement groove portion 828 of the relay substrate region 826 and engaged, the engagement protrusion 837 and the engagement claw portion 829 are engaged with each other. The baseball unit relay terminal plate 830 can be covered with the substrate cover 835. On the other hand, when removing, the latching claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the latching projection 837 and the substrate cover 835 is pulled diagonally forward to engage the engagement projection 836 and the engagement groove 828. The engagement with can be released. In the state where the substrate cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 passes through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838. Yes. Further, the wiring connected to the inward prize unit relay terminal plate 830 is drawn out from the connection opening 839 to the outside.

  Next, the gears 843, 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 provided in the gear region 840 formed in the unit sub plate 825 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 projects through the shaft insertion hole 842 formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825 and protrudes to the surface (rear side) of the unit sub plate 825. The first gear 843 (drive gear) is fixed to the protruding portion. Above the first gear 843, a second gear 844 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the first gear 843 is press-fitted at one end to the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 866 and a shaft that is formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. A third gear 847 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the second gear 844 is provided on the unit sub-plate 825 above the second gear 844. A shaft 848 press-fitted into the formed shaft hole 849 is rotatably provided. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (driven gear) that meshes with the third gear 847 is rotatably provided on a rotary shaft 808 that supports the sprocket 807.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the tip end of the motor shaft 818 is loosely fitted in a receiving hole formed in the gear cover 866. The rotating shaft 808 is supported by being pressed into a bearing cylinder 806 formed on the unit base body 801 and supported at the other end by a bearing hole formed on the gear cover 866. The sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in the distribution space 805 through a shaft through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of the 840, and the detection disk 850 is formed in the space formed by the unit sub plate 825 and the gear cover 866. Is pivotally supported. However, as shown in FIG. 109, since the rear end portion of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the center front surface portion of the detection disk 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disk 850 are integrated with each other about the rotation shaft 808. It is designed to rotate. Accordingly, when the dispensing motor 815 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850.

  The outer periphery of the detection disk 850 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 807 (in the illustrated case). 3) detection notches 851 are formed. This detection notch 851 is detected by a light projection / reception type rotation angle switch 855 (rotation position detection means) provided on a sensor substrate 854 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 825. It is. The rotation angle switch 855 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 851 within a predetermined interval during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the rotation angle switch 855 (in many cases, the ball is engaged with the sprocket 807), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, the ball engagement state). To do. Note that the number of balls actually paid out is detected by the counting switch 812 provided in the prize ball passage 810 and used for counting. As shown in FIG. 109, the other end side of the sensor substrate 854 is also sandwiched between substrate mounting portions formed on the gear cover 866.

  As described above, of the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 840, only the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 845 that is press-fitted to the gear cover 866 side. As a result, the gear cover 866 that covers the gear region 840 is provided. A mounting hole 867 is formed at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 that protrudes from the unit base body 801 and passes through the through hole 858 of the unit sub-plate 825. The mounting hole 867 and the mounting boss 823 are aligned with each other while meshing the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side with the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub-plate 825 side. In this state, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed in a state where the unit sub plate 825 is sandwiched by screwing with the screw 868 from the rear surface of the gear cover 866. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, wiring connected to the prize ball unit relay terminal board 830 (for example, wiring connecting the prize ball unit relay terminal board 830 and a payout control board 1186 described later) is provided. A wiring processing piece 869 that is hooked up and gathered is projected.

  The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above. In the state where the unit base body 801, the unit sub board 825, the prize ball unit relay terminal board 830, the board cover 835, and the gear cover 866 are assembled, FIG. As shown, the cylindrical body portion of the payout motor 815 is positioned below the bent passage 803 through which the ball to be paid out is guided. Further, the unit base body 801 includes a sprocket 807 arranged in a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and a depth width dimension of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. A payout motor 815 housed in a motor housing space 814 formed therein, and the rotation of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825 is rotated by the sprocket 807. A rotation transmission member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844, 847, and a gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) for transmitting to the shaft 808 is provided, and in the distribution space 805 of the dispensing motor 815 and the bending passage 803. A plurality of gears 843, 844, 84 provided in the gear region 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 825 with the sprocket 807 serving as a payout member disposed. It has become a consolidated structure to be driven to rotate by 850 (852). That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are accommodated within the depth width of the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. In addition, the rotation transmission members (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844 and 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that connect the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are connected to the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 can be made thinner than the one in which a payout motor and a part of the sprocket are arranged outside the ball passage.

  In addition, such a prize ball unit 800 is further thinned by forming the ball passages (the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 in a single passage shape. It is planned. That is, unlike the conventional case in which the payout motor 815 protrudes to the front side, the rear side or the side of the prize ball unit, when attached to the rear side of the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, Any part of the prize ball unit 800 can be structured not to protrude further rearward. In FIG. 109, the front end portion of the payout motor 815 is configured to slightly protrude from the rear surface of the unit base body 801. This protruding portion is formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as shown in FIG. Since it faces the front portion of the main body frame 3 from the lower discharge motor escape opening 572, as a result, it protrudes by a dimension obtained by subtracting the thickness of the shaft support side rear wall 546 from the protruding dimension. Thus, the amount of protrusion toward the front side relative to the shaft support side rear wall 546 is small. In addition, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game board 4 is provided between the pivot side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 800 is attached and the back surface of the game board 4. A storage space for storing the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus can be increased in the depth width direction.

  Furthermore, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the pivotal support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, a hook-shaped engaging portion 824, an engaging protrusion 565, After the alignment, the lower end of the prize ball unit 800 is hooked in the locking groove 573, and the prize ball unit 800 is pivotally supported to engage the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565. The lower side wall 546 is pressed down while being in close contact with the side rear wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging protrusion 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. When the prize ball unit 800 is moved upward, the respective engagement states are easily released. To prevent this, the lock elastic claw 564 is engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821. It is supposed to be.

  That is, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged to prevent the prize ball unit 800 from moving upward in the attached state. Thus, after the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball path unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claw 820, so that the ball path of the ball path unit 770 drops. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 can be communicated with each other through a passage constituted by a pair of passage walls 790. When the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is connected to the prize ball inlet 927 of the full tank unit 900 described in detail later, and the downstream end of the ball removal path 811 is connected to the ball removal connection path. Connected to the upstream end of 880.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 800 is removed, the engagement by the latching elastic claws 820 is released and the connecting lid member 786 is rotated forward, and then the detachable button 822 is pressed to release the locking elastic claws 564. It is moved to the front side to release the engagement between the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821, and then the prize ball unit 800 is pulled upward with the detachable button 822 pressed, and the prize ball unit 800. By releasing the engagement between the lower end portion of the lens and the locking groove 573 and the engagement between the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 and pulling out the prize ball unit 800 to the front side, Easy to remove.

[1-3G. Full tank unit]
Next, the full tank unit 900 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 to 116. 110 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 112 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. 113 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 114 is a partially broken perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610, 115 is a cross-sectional view taken along the bottom rocking plate 907 provided in the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full unit 900 and the foul port 610.

  As described above, the full tank unit 900 is mounted and fixed on the full tank unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 112, the main body of the box is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. 901 and a lid body 926 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. The box main body 901 is configured such that the sphere that has flowed in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and discharged from the outlet 921. Therefore, a side guide passage 902 that guides a sphere that has flowed in from a prize ball inlet 927 formed in the lid 926 to the side from one end to the other end is formed in the upstream portion. A side guide receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the sphere toward the side is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 902 directly below the prize ball entrance 927, and the side guide passage is provided. A buffer member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of 902 to receive the impact of the sphere flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guide the sphere downstream.

  In addition, the sphere that collides with the buffer member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 902 is guided to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of the sphere in the side guide passage 902 after changing the direction to the downstream side. A reverse side guide passage 905 is formed. The sphere that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 905 is then guided to the front guide passage 920 formed toward the front, and the award of the dish unit 300 described above from the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the ball contact 343.

  By the way, a bottom surface opening 906 is formed on the bottom surface on the upstream side of the reverse side guide passage 905 so as to open over the entire bottom surface. Yes. The bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape having an open top surface, and a pair of shaft projections 911 project from the side walls in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside. A circular spring mounting recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom surface opening 906. On the other hand, the bottom rocking plate 907 that closes the bottom opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is a semicircular bearing that is pivotally supported by being fitted to a pivot support protrusion 911 when viewed from the front on the downstream side of the back surface. A portion 908 is formed to project.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 115, a spring locking projection 910 that locks the upper end of the spring 913 projects downward from the center of the bottom surface of the bottom rocking plate 907. Therefore, the bottom rocking plate 907 is biased in the direction in which the upstream side is always rocked upward by the biasing force of the spring 913. The spring 913 does not swing the bottom rocking plate 907 downward even when the number of normal prize balls paid out (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom rocking plate 907 at a time. A predetermined number of balls equal to or greater than the payout number is formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when placed on the bottom swing plate 907. Further, a detection protrusion 909 protrudes forward on the upstream side of the bottom rocking plate 907. The detection protrusion 909 passes through the communication hole 929 and is positioned in a switch storage space 914 described below when the bearing portion 908 of the bottom rocking plate 907 is fitted and supported on the shaft support protrusion 911. It has become.

  In addition, a switch storage space 914 for storing the full tank switch 916 is integrally formed on the outer side of the upstream end side wall of the reverse side guide passage 905. In order to mount the full switch 916 in the switch storage space 914, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 905 above the switch storage space 914. A mounting piece 917 of the switch holder 915 that holds the full switch 916 is fixed to the portion 918 by a screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch composed of a projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

  Further, a foul ball passage 922 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 905. As shown in FIG. 114, the foul ball passage 922 is bent and formed so that the foul ball inlet 923 communicates with the foul port 610 described above and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 920. Has been. For this reason, the foul ball taken into the foul port 610 is guided from the foul ball inlet 923 through the bent foul ball passage 922 to the front guide passage 920, and further through the outlet 921 and the prize ball connecting rod 343 to the dish unit. Returned to 300.

  The box main body 901 has engaging pieces 924 that are engaged with unit engaging grooves 532 formed in the full unit mounting portion 531 on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923. A latching protrusion 925 that engages with a latching piece 928 formed on the lid 926 is formed. The latching protrusion 925 is appropriately formed on the upper left and right side walls of the box main body 901.

  On the other hand, the lid 926 is formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the side guide passage 902, the reverse side guide passage 905, the front guide passage 920, and the foul ball passage 922 of the box main body 901. A square prize ball entrance 927 is opened at a position corresponding to the upstream end at 902. In addition, a latching piece 928 for engaging with a latching protrusion 925 of the box main body 901 is provided around the lid 926 so as to project downward.

  In the full tank unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 110, the balls paid out from the prize ball path 810 of the prize ball unit 800 are moved upstream from the prize ball entrance 927 to the upstream side of the side guidance path 902. It enters and is guided toward the side by the side guide receiving portion 903 and collides with the buffer member 904. The ball colliding with the buffer member 904 is guided in the reverse side guide passage 905 toward the downstream side in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 902 and guided to the front guide passage 920. The exit 921 is led to the dish unit 300 through the prize ball communication rod 343. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul ball entrance 923 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 922 and joined to the front guide passage 920, and passes through the prize ball connection rod 343 from the outlet 921 of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the dish unit 300.

  In normal times, when the sphere naturally flows in the full tank unit 900, when the sphere moves from the side guide passage 902 to the reverse side guide passage 905, it falls to the bottom rocking plate 907. When the number of payout balls is about the normal, the spring 913 has a strong resilience, so that the bottom rocking plate 907 does not rock. As shown by the solid line in FIG. The full tank switch 916 is placed between the projector and the light receiver, and the switch is not conductive (OFF). On the other hand, when the prize balls are stored in the dish unit 300 and the full tank unit 900 is also filled with balls, the bottom fluctuations formed in the entire upstream area of the front guide path 920 and the reverse side guide path 905 are formed. The bottom rocking plate 907 rocks downward against the urging force of the spring 913 due to the pressure of the sphere stored on the moving plate 907, and the detection protrusion 909 is projected as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The light receiving full tank switch 916 is disconnected from the light projector and the light receiver, and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned on, the rotational driving of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 is stopped (if the ON signal is derived while the predetermined number of prize balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of prize balls). Will be stopped after it has been paid out).

  As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is operated by the bottom rocking plate 907 having substantially the same width as the width of the bottom of the path of the path through which the ball flows (in the illustrated case, the reverse side guide path 905). 916 is actuated and biased by a biasing member (spring 913) so that the bottom rocking plate 907 swings when a certain amount of balls are placed without swinging due to the normal flow of the balls. Therefore, compared to the conventional case where a ball is placed on the bottom surface of some passages or the like to detect a clogged ball, the placement of the balls in that portion of the passage is not detected due to the clogging. It can be surely prevented. This can reliably detect a full tank.

  Moreover, in the full unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the full unit is formed on the main body frame as in the prior art because it is detachably attached to the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3. It is not necessary to form a passage for a full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the dispensing passage. Further, by making the inside of the full tank unit 900 a zigzag passage, it is possible to guide to the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. The awarded ball does not jump out of the dish unit 300. Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 922 that guides the foul ball joins the ball in the middle of the front guide passage 920 that pays out the award ball. The foul sphere can be merged without hindering the flow of the sphere.

[1-4. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 that is attached in the vertical direction along the back side edge of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 117 to 125. 117 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the locking device 1000 and the main body frame 3, and FIG. 118 is an enlarged side sectional view showing a latching structure of the locking device 1000 to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 120 is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the vertical center of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 120 shows a detailed relationship between the lock device 1000 and the side walls 540 and 541 of the main body frame 3. 121 is an enlarged cross-sectional view, FIG. 121 is a side view (A) of the locking device 1000, a perspective view (B) viewed from the front side, and FIG. 122 is a perspective view (A) viewed from the back side of the locking device 1000. ) Are perspective views (B) and (C) of a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000, and FIG. Fig. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 1000, and Fig. 124 is for a door frame. Is a front view for explaining the action of Do杆 1040 and the main frame for sliding rod 1050, FIG. 125 is a front view for explaining the action of the anti-fraud members 1023,1032.

  The locking device 1000 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first side wall 540 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. A plurality of (three in the illustrated example) lock locking holes 548 formed in the middle and middle of the upper and lower ends between the rising portions of the first side wall 540 and the upper part of the vertical surface of the first side wall 540 The U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000 described below is supported by the lock mounting hole 547 formed by being cut out in the middle and the lock mounting hole 547 formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 1000 will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIGS. 121 to 123, a locking device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a locking base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and slidably providing a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 therein. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device that is concentrated on a base body having an L-shaped cross section. As described above, the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is greatly increased, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased. A mounting structure that allows the locking device 1000 to be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3 by reducing the width of the locking device 1000 according to the present embodiment by making the dimension between the outer periphery and the outer periphery extremely small. It is because it improved as. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base body 1001 is mounted so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 have a tamper-proof structure in which the U-shaped base 1001 is completely covered except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065.

  First, a rectangular hook penetration opening 1002 through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 pass is opened on the closed side opposite to the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 and on the closed side. A screwing portion 1003 protrudes horizontally in the upper and middle sides 1001b (see FIG. 123) that is in close contact with the first side wall 540 and is not in close contact with the first side wall 540 on the open side. Locking projections 1004 are formed so as to project from the upper end portion and the intermediate portion (see FIG. 123) and the lower end portions of both open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b.

  The screw stoppers 1003 and the locking protrusions 1004 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The locking protrusions 1004 are inserted into the lock locking holes 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. (See FIG. 118) Since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 coincide with each other in this state, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. Can be fixed. The locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can be attached by fixing the lock attachment hole 547 to a corresponding screw with a screw (not shown).

  In addition, when mounting, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked, and the U-shaped Screw fixing portions 1003 formed at two positions on the closed side (rear portion) of the base body 1001 and screw fixing portions 1003 formed on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are formed in the lock mounting holes 547. Since the structure is fixed with screws, the front portion of the locking device 1000 is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the locking locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw locking portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. In addition, since the lower portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base body 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It can be firmly fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure (or a fixed structure) at the front portion protrudes from the side surface 1001 a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. On the other hand, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. Therefore, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the locking structure of the front portion is not loosened as compared with the case where the front side locking structure is formed on the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. is there.

  Further, insertion holes 1005 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided in the U-shaped substrate 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 in the stored state. it can. That is, one rivet slot 1042 is formed in each of the upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are respectively formed in the main frame sliding rod 1050. By passing the rivet 1006 through the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can move upward, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can move downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the rivet 1006 passes through the lower ends of the rivet slots 1055 and 1061 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and as shown in FIG. A rivet 1006 passes through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 of the sliding rod 1040.

  Further, a tamper-proof notch 1007 is formed on the closed side of the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001, and at the front end of the side 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the body frame 3 on the open side. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 is provided projecting sideways, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are provided on a side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540. Each is formed. The fraud prevention notch 1007 is configured such that a stopper piece 1027 of a first fraud prevention member 1023 described later advances and retreats. This will be described in detail later. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 has a front end of the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board installation recess 510 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The lock mounting piece 1008 is formed with a lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and a mounting hole formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010. Mounting holes 1014 for mounting 1013 with screws 1012 are formed in two upper and lower positions, and further, screw fixing portions 1003 for mounting the lower part of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The insertion vertical opening 1020 is an opening through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. The spring locking piece 1021 is for locking the spring 1035 provided on the tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032, and the clearance lateral hole 1022 constitutes a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It is. This point will be described in detail later.

  The cylinder lock 1010 attached to the above-described lock attachment piece 1008 will be described. In the cylinder lock 1010, a cylindrical cylinder lock body is fixed in front of the lock attachment board 1011. The lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body is a lock attachment board. The engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 with a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement projection piece 1017 that engages with the lowering engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating. The cylinder lock 1010 configured as described above has a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 and mounting holes 1013 and lock mounting pieces 1008 formed at two positions on the lock mounting substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by making the mounting holes 1014 coincide with each other and screwed with screws 1012.

  Next, fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 are for preventing the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally lowered by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key. . Therefore, each of the anti-tamper members 1023 and 1032 has a structure in which the first anti-tamper member 1023 and the second anti-tamper member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is swingable around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end, and the swing shaft hole 1025 is formed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 described above. Of the insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050, the lowermost insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 1026 that overlaps the insertion vertical opening 1020 on the plate-like surface, and the second engaging protruding piece 1018 is inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026. It has come to be able to do. That is, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the upward engagement hole 1045 of the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The second engagement protrusion 1018 is engaged. In addition, a slanting portion 1024 is an outline line obliquely above the opening position of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. The inclined portion 1024 contacts the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, and the first engaging protrusion 1017 and the inclined portion 1024 are rotated when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. , The first fraud prevention member 1023 swings about the swing shaft hole 1025 (clockwise direction in FIG. 125B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a stopper piece 1027 protruding on the outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a restricting protrusion 1031 protruding below the stopper piece 1027. A pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 are formed vertically on the front portion of the protruding piece 1031. The stopper piece 1027 enters and engages with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. It is intended to prevent sliding. Further, in the restricting protruding piece 1031, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected by a spring 1035, and the second tamper-proof member 1032 is biased when connected by the spring 1035. The movement to is restricted. The pin hole 1029 is for fixing the guide pin 1028. With the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the vertical opening 1020. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end. Further, the connection hole 1030 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 with a connection pin 1034.

  The second tamper-proof member 1032 connected to the first tamper-proof member 1023 is formed of a reverse “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 is formed at an upper end, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end. A stop hole 1036 is formed, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 1033 is for connecting with the connection pin 1034 so as to coincide with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and one end of the spring locking hole 1036 is a spring locking piece of the U-shaped base body 1001. The other end of the spring 1035 locked to 1021 is locked. Further, the abutting portion 1037 abuts on a closing projection 41 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 will be described in detail later.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 which are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described. First, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 1041 are integrally formed forward and downward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the one side. Projected. The door frame hook portion 1041 protrudes forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and when the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, 3 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 549 (see FIGS. 67 and 68) formed on the door 3 and engages with a hook cover 158 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 158 are locked by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. It can be canceled.

  Further, a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The uppermost rivet slot in the rivet slot 1042 A guide protrusion 1043 is provided below 1042 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet long hole 1042 is a hole through which the rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 passes, and the rivet 1006 does not interfere with the ascending operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040. It is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 is in contact with the upper end portion of the rivet slot 1042. The guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted. And the sliding motion 1050 for the main body frame are guided.

  Further, a spring hook portion 1046 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, one end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1046, and the other end of the spring 1048 is the main body frame sliding rod 1050. The upper hook member 1051 is engaged with a spring hook portion 1057. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 1040, a contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape. This abutting elastic piece 1047 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be internally used for the door frame. This prevents the sliding rod 1040 from rattling.

  Further, a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 are formed in the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1044 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation. It constitutes a space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 1045 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. An escape notch 1049 that is a larger notch in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 is formed at the rear of the lower part of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The escape notch 1049 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 so as to be surely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and It is composed of That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  By the way, the upper hook member 1051 is provided with a hook portion 1054 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet long hole 1055 and a projecting piece moving hole 1056 are formed on the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 1057 and a connecting hole 1058 are formed at the lower end of the vertical side, and contact portions 1059 are formed at the upper and lower sides thereof. The hook portion 1054 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing projection 38 provided on the inner side on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed.

The rivet slot 1055 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and in a normal state in which the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1055. The rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055. Thereby, the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. As described above, the guide piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1056 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The spring hook portion 1057 is for locking the other end of the spring 1048 as described above. Also, the connecting hole 10
58 is inserted with the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053 bent. Further, when the abutting portion 1059 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1059 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding motion of the upper hook member 1051 is smooth and smooth. It is for making.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward at the lower end portion thereof, and protrudes from the upper portion to the lower portion of the plate surface portion with the elongated rivet hole 1061, the lower engagement hole 1062, and the play hole 1063. One moving hole 1064 is sequentially formed, a connection hole 1060 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side, an engagement notch 1066 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side, and the upper side and the lower side are contacted. A contact portion 1067 is formed. The hook portion 1065 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing protrusion 41 provided on the lower part on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 1061 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1061, The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061.

  As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the lowering engagement hole 1062 is engaged so that the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. belongs to. Further, the play hole 1063 has a tip portion of the second engagement protrusion 1018 that does not interfere with the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. As described above, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1064 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. Further, the connecting hole 1060 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1067 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1067 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the lower hook member 1052 can be smoothly performed without rattling. It is for making.

  The members constituting the locking device 1000 have been described above. To attach the locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053. In this state, the guide protrusion 1043 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long hole 1042 and the rivet length The holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and in the overlapped state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001. However, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are placed in the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001. You type. Thereafter, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

  At this time, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet slots 1055, 1061, 1042. However, when the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connection pin 1034 and the guide pin 1028 is illustrated in the pin hole 1029. The guide pin 1028 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking pieces (holes) 1021 and 1036, and the second fraud prevention member 1032. Is in contact with the restricting protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with screws 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement projection piece 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip end portion is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the locking device 1000 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, as described above, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed on the main body frame 3. While being inserted into the hook hole 549, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the locking locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward, and in this state the screw fixing portion 1003 and screw fixing protruding horizontally By aligning the portion 1003 with the lock mounting hole 547 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. . In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, while the rear portion Since the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the U-shaped base 1001 are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Compared to the case where the locking structure is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the backlash does not occur.

  By the way, the operation of the lock device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In a state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), the closing protrusions 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 The hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 are locked. Yes. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 124 (B). The tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 which are connected are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, since the locking projections 38, 41 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are released, the main body frame 3 is pulled by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are raised by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as that shown in FIG. 124A), but the hook portion 1054 is in the raised state. , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is forced into the closing projections 38, 41 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered downward, the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are locked again. The body frame sliding rod 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state. Therefore, the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 124A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, the door frame 5 is forcibly pressed against the main body frame 3, so that the lower side inclined part of the door frame hook part 1041 becomes the hook cover 158. The door frame sliding rod 1040 rises upward, and finally the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 158 are locked again. The sliding rod 1040 moves down and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. For this reason, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are securely locked in the entire length in the vertical direction. There is also the advantage that it cannot be done.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to this embodiment releases the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. In this case, an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like to the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering the same may be performed. Are not allowed to perform such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state in which the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. It is in a contact state. In this state, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is tamper-proof notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. Therefore, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and the stopper piece 1027 also moves away from the tamper-proof cutout 1007. For this reason, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the locking state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, and thus the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing protrusion 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 125 (A) is obtained. . For this reason, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. Since the sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, they are completely covered. Even if an attempt is made to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, the both sides 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 close the closed space Since the intrusion is prevented, fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

  As described above in detail, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has an extremely thin U-shaped base 1001 for a door frame, compared with a lock device whose lateral width is concentrated on a conventional L-shaped base. The sliding hook 1040 and the main body frame sliding hook 1050 are slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is lower than the lower end side of the game board. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 can be 3 can be firmly attached to the back side. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside and the main body Since the frame sliding rod 1050 is completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hooks 1041, 1054, and 1065, the main body provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. Unauthorized acts such as lowering the frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be easily performed.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked. Screw fixing portions 10 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001.
03 and the screw fixing portion 1003 are fixed to the lock mounting hole 547 with screws, the front portion of the locking device 1000 is locked by the locking projection 1004 and the locking locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 are fixed to the lock attachment hole 547, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

  In the embodiment described above, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the cylinder lock through hole 526 of the main body frame 3 are formed near the upper portion of the lock mounting piece 1008 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. However, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 penetrates the lock attachment piece 1008. A structure may be employed in which the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 526. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 only by fixing the screwing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in close contact with the first side wall 540 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 The L-shaped base (lock base) is omitted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a and the first side wall 540 of the L-shaped base (lock base). It is good also as a structure which accommodates the sliding rod 1050. FIG. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.

[1-5. Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 1100 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 to 134. 126 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back side, FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back side, and FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the front side. FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front side of the substrate unit, FIG. 130 is a front view as seen from the front side of the substrate holder for the frame which is the main body of the substrate unit, and FIG. 132 is a rear view of the board unit, FIG. 133 is a rear view of the board unit with the dispensing control board box and the terminal board box removed, and FIG. FIG. 135 is a plan view showing the connection relationship between the boards provided in the board unit, FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram showing the electrical connection between the board unit and the game board, and FIG. 136 shows the payout control board and the board unit. of FIG. 137 is a game board for explaining a cross-sectional portion of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 138 (however, this game board is removed as shown in FIGS. 76 to 80). FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 137.

  The substrate unit 1100 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) formed in the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIGS. Various substrates such as a door relay substrate 1102, a power supply substrate box 1103, a terminal substrate box 1104, a payout control substrate box 1105, a main drawer relay substrate 1107, and a sub drawer relay substrate 1108 are attached to the resin-molded frame substrate holder 1101. It is comprised by. Among the above boards, the door relay board 1102, the power board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, and the payout control board box 1105 are attached to the rear side of the frame board holder 1101 so as to overlap in the front-rear direction. The substrate 1107 and the sub drawer relay substrate 1108 are attached to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. As will be described later, since the power supply board 1136 creates and supplies + 34V, + 18V and + 9V, it becomes a very high-temperature heat source, and the heat generated from the power supply board 1136 rises. For this reason, the payout control board box 1105 that houses the payout control board 1186 is attached to the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 so as not to receive the rising heat. A metal shield heat dissipating plate 1106 is attached to the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like and to dissipate heat generated from the power supply board 1136. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are covered and attached to the board cover 1109. Hereinafter, each member constituting the substrate unit 1100 will be described in detail.

  It should be noted that the shield heat dissipation plate 1106 according to the present embodiment is particularly shielded as shown in FIGS. 127 and 129 in order to radiate heat generated from the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 to the outside (outside air). The plate surface of the plate 1106 is formed as an uneven surface 1106a. Heat transmitted to the payout control board 1186 by the shield heat sink 1106 can be kept small. The uneven surface 1106a increases the contact area with the outside (outside air) to enhance the heat dissipation effect. The uneven surface 1106a is desirably formed in a vertical or inclined shape so that heat can be easily dissipated when installed. Of course, even if the uneven surface 1106a is formed on the shield heat sink 1106, the shielding effect against electromagnetic waves is not impaired. The shield heat sink 1106 prevents the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like. Thereby, since the influence of the noise by electromagnetic waves can be suppressed, the malfunctioning of the payout control board 1186 accommodated in the payout control board box 1105 by the influence of noise can be prevented. Further, the shield heat dissipation function of the shield heat sink 1106 is not only between the power supply board box 1103 and the payout control board box 1105 but also when a plurality of other board boxes are attached to the frame board holder 1101 in an overlapping manner. Is also achieved by providing the same shield heat dissipating plate 1106 as in the present embodiment between the lower and upper substrate boxes.

  First, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a horizontally long synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 127 and 130, a wiring opening 1124 is formed on one side of the rear surface side (right side in FIG. 130). A relay board portion 1110 for attaching the door relay board 1102 is formed inside the wiring opening 1124. The relay substrate recess 1110 is formed as a square recess so as to match the outer shape of the substantially square door relay substrate 1102, and on the upper and lower sides of the relay substrate recess 1110, the back surface of the door relay substrate 1102 is formed. And a retaining claw 1111 that is engaged with the surface of one vertical side of the door relay board 1102 in a state where the door relay board 1102 is stored in the relay board recess 1110. ing. In addition, on the upper and lower sides of the relay board recess 1110, there are mounting bosses 1112 that are engaged with engagement locking holes 1135 formed on one end side of the power supply board box 1103 and fixed with screws (not shown). Projected.

Further, on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101, two wiring processing pieces 1114 are formed for locking and collecting wirings passing through the inside closer to the center than the above-described relay substrate recess 1110. The wiring processing piece 1114 is formed so as to project in an L shape when viewed from the side with respect to the vertical surface, and the wiring is hung between the vertical surface and the L-shaped projecting piece. ing. Further, the area from the upper part of the relay board recess 1110 of the frame board holder 1101 to a part slightly closer to the other end side than the center is an area for attaching the power supply board box 1103 (the lower area on the right side described below). Abutting protrusions 1115 that abut against the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 are provided on the upper and lower sides. Therefore, in a state where the power supply board box 1103 is attached to the power supply board box attachment area so as to contact the contact protrusion 1115, there is a space between the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 and the vertical surface of the frame substrate holder 1101. Formed,
Wirings for connecting the substrates to each other are stored in this space, and the two wiring processing pieces 1114 hold and lock the stored wirings together.

  Note that a large amount of rearward protrusion is formed from the other end side of the region to which the power supply board box 1103 is attached to the other end side of the frame substrate holder 1101 (left side in FIG. 130). In other words, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a stepped shape slightly higher on the left side and lower on the right side at a position slightly left of the center when viewed from the back, and the lower region on the right side is for attaching the power supply board box 1103. (Hereinafter sometimes referred to as “power supply board box mounting region”). An insertion port 1115a is formed on the other end side of the power supply board box mounting region. Therefore, in order to attach the power supply board box 1103, after inserting the insertion protrusion 1134 into the insertion slot 1115 a, the engagement locking holes 1135 formed on the upper and lower ends of one end side of the power supply board box 1103 are formed on the attachment boss 1112 from above. The power supply board box 1103 can be fixed to the frame board holder 1101 by being inserted and fastened with screws (not shown).

  Further, on the back side of the frame substrate holder 1101, the above step-like high region is one of regions for attaching the payout control board box 1105 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “payout control board box attachment region”). A horizontal L-shaped concave wiring routing space 1116 is formed in a part of the step-like high region. A wiring opening 1121 (see FIGS. 129 to 132) is formed in the bottom surface of the wiring routing space 1116, and the wirings hung on the two wiring processing pieces 1114 in the power supply board box mounting region are connected. The wiring routing space 1116 and the wiring opening 1121 are pulled out to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. In addition, a locking projection 1117 for engaging with the engagement elastic piece 1184 of the dispensing control board box 1105 is formed to project from the other end side (the left end side in FIG. 127) of the dispensing control board box mounting region. ing.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 128, 129, and 131, the out-ball path 1119 is inverted at the approximate center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. It is formed in an L shape. The out-ball passage 1119 is located above the outlet 606 (see FIG. 78), the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 68), and the drop opening 629 (see FIG. 75). Is formed wide, and the downstream side is formed narrow so that the spheres are discharged in a row. Therefore, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 71, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 1119 is positioned behind the passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606. ing. Then, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball without ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119 toward the outside of the pachinko machine (generally, an island recovery basket).

  In addition, on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 corresponding to the payout control board box mounting area, a main drawer relay board 1107 and a sub drawer relay board 1108 are laterally spaced at a predetermined interval in the upper area. A drawer mounting area 1120 is formed to be spaced and mounted in parallel. In the drawer mounting area 1120, support holes 1204 and 1205 formed in the respective relay boards 1107 and 1108 are penetrated, and drawer mounting bosses 1118 for supporting the relay boards 1107 and 1108 are projected and provided. Bonding guide holes 1126 and guide holes 1125 are formed above and below the intermediate positions of the relay boards 1107 and 1108. As shown in FIG. 138, the joint guide holes 1126 are connected to drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 (holder side connectors) provided on the board unit 1100 side and the game board 4 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. Insertion guide protrusions 628 (see FIG. 78) formed on the board substrate holder 623 of the game board 4 are inserted so that the drawer connectors 626 and 627 (game board side connectors) provided on the side are naturally connected. Is. On the other hand, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, the guide hole 1125 is inserted with a guide protrusion 525 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) that protrudes from the main body frame 3. The positioning is performed and the mounting operation is facilitated. Further, on both the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 1101, attachment pieces 1122 for attaching the substrate unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 protrude outward, and the attachment pieces 1122 are attached to the attachment holes 527 of the main body frame 3. The board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to (see FIG. 68). As shown in FIG. 70, the attachment hole portion 527 has an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the attachment piece 1122. Further, a wiring latching piece 1123 for locking the wiring is formed on the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 128) of the frame substrate holder 1101.

  The configuration of the frame substrate holder 1101 is generally as described above, and the configurations of various substrates attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 having such a configuration will be described. First, the door relay board 1102 mounted in the relay board recess 1110 on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 127, the door relay board 1102 has a multi-pin connector type internal connection terminal. 1130 and a door frame connection terminal 1131 are provided. As shown in FIG. 132, the door frame connection terminal 1131 can be seen from the outside as viewed from the back, even when all the substrates are attached to the frame substrate holder 1101, and is provided on the door frame 5. The door frame wiring 1212 (see FIG. 134) such as an electric decoration component and a speaker composed of a lamp and an LED is connected to the door frame connection terminal 1131 through the wiring opening 1124. The internal connection terminal 1130 is connected to a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108 by an internal wiring 1213 (see FIG. 134). However, the internal wiring 1213 is provided inside the frame substrate holder 1101 so that the wiring processing piece 1114, the wiring routing space 1116, and the wiring opening 1124 are laid.

  The power board box 1103 attached to the power board box mounting area on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 includes a box main body 1132 for fixing the power board 1136 (see FIG. 133) and a cover body covering the box main body 1132. 1133. The box main body 1132 is integrally formed with an engagement locking hole 1135 that engages with the mounting boss 1112 at the top and bottom of one end thereof, and the insertion protrusion 1134 that is inserted into the insertion port 1115a at the top and bottom of the other end. Is formed. Further, on the portion of the power supply board 1136 that is not covered with the cover body 1133 (the right side portion and the lower left portion in FIG. 133), as shown in FIG. 133, the power switch 1137, the power line connector 1138, the CR unit power connector 1139, A connector 1140 and a payout control board power connector 1141 are provided. The power switch 1137 is a switch for supplying power to all electrical devices of the pachinko machine 1 and is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is used. In addition, the power line connector 1138 connects the power line from the AC 24V (AC 24V) power line supplied to the island, and grounds the noise charged in the pachinko machine 1 to the outside as a frame ground. It is a connector for. The CR unit power connector 1139 is a connector for supplying power to a card-type ball lending machine (not shown; generally referred to as a CR unit) adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. The grounding connector 1140 is electrically connected to various antistatic grounding wires provided in the pachinko machine 1, and noise or the like that has entered the pachinko machine 1 is grounded to the outside via the power line connector 1138. It is a connector to do. Specifically, a ground wire that removes noise from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214) is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140a as a frame ground, and noise from a sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 The ground wire for removing the noise and the like is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140b as the frame ground FG1, and the ground wire for removing noise from the prize ball unit 800 is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140c as the frame ground FG1. An earth wire for removing noise from the CR unit is electrically connected to the earth connector 1140d as a frame ground. These frame grounds are electrically connected to the frame ground of the power line connector 1138, and are grounded to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the frame ground. Further, as shown in FIG. 134, the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply connector 1141 for the payout control board, and the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply terminal 1192 of the payout control board 1186. Then, by this power supply wiring 1214, another control board (for example, a liquid crystal control board 4500 accommodated in the peripheral board box 622 or a main control board 4100 accommodated in the main control board box 624 via the payout control board 1186. ) Etc. are supplied with power. The power supply wiring 1214 is led from the payout control board power supply connector 1141 to the wiring routing space 1116 and drawn backward from the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 to be connected to the power supply terminal 1192. Yes. That is, the power supply wiring 1214 is also laid inside the frame substrate holder 1101.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 127, the rear surface of the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is formed in a stepped shape, and a region having a high step is an attachment region 1142 for attaching the terminal board box 1104. Is a mounting region 1143 for mounting the dispensing control board box 1105. The attachment area 1143 constitutes an attachment area for attaching the horizontally long delivery control board box 1105 together with the above-described delivery control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101. In addition, an engagement hole 1146 into which an engagement piece 1182 (see FIG. 129) described later of the payout control board box 1105 is inserted is formed substantially at the center of the stepped portion.

  The cover body 1133 constituting the attachment region 1142 for attaching the terminal board box 1104 has a positioning hole 1145 for positioning or engaging with the positioning pin 1148 and the engaging piece 1147 formed on the back surface side of the terminal board box 1104. A mounting engagement hole 1144 is formed. The engagement piece portion 1147 is formed in an L-shaped cross section, while the attachment engagement hole 1144 is formed in a hole shape in which the wide portion and the narrow portion are continuous, so the engagement piece portion 1147 is attached. After being inserted into the wide portion of the engagement hole 1144, the L-shaped engagement piece 1147 and the mounting engagement hole are slid in one direction (in the illustrated case, the center direction of the frame substrate holder 1101). The narrow portion 1144 is engaged. Note that a latching piece 1149 protrudes from the lower part of the other side of the terminal board box 1104, and when the terminal board box 1104 is slidably engaged with the cover body 1133, the latching piece 1149 is disengaged from the payout control board box 1105. The box main body 1180 is engaged with a part of the box main body 1180. This engagement is an engagement state that can be easily released by sliding the terminal board box 1104 in the non-engagement direction with a little force.

  Further, in the terminal board box 1104, as shown in FIG. 132, an external terminal board 1150a provided with a plurality of external information terminals 1151 and payout control board terminals 1156, a frequency indicator terminal 1152, a power ground terminal 1153, Two boards, a CR unit terminal board 1150b provided with a CR unit terminal 1154 and a payout control board terminal 1155, are housed in parallel in the vertical direction. A plurality of external information terminals 1151 provided on the external terminal board 1150a are used for various information signals necessary for the management of the pachinko machine 1 such as a jackpot information output signal and a start opening prize information output signal. The information signal is mainly sent from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the main drawer relay connector 1200 described in detail later. Is transmitted to the payout control board 1186, and is further transmitted to each of the plurality of external information terminals 1151 by connection of the external terminal board terminal 1188 and the payout control board terminal 1156 provided on the payout control board 1186. The The frequency indicator terminal 1152 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b is connected to the wiring of the remaining frequency indicator, a lending switch, and a return switch of the prepaid card provided in the plate unit 300 of the pachinko machine 1, for example. . The power ground terminal 1153 includes two connectors. One connector (left side in FIG. 132) is connected to the wiring from the CR unit power connector 1139 of the power board 1136, and the other connector is the power board 1136. The wiring from one earth connector 1140 of the plurality of earth connectors 1140 is connected. Further, the CR unit terminal 1154 is connected to a wiring from a CR unit (not shown), and the CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 of the payout control board 1186 and the payout control board terminal 1155 are connected. The payout control board 1186 and the CR unit are connected.

  As described above, the terminal board box 1104 connects the external terminal board 1150a for leading game information from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the outside, and the payout control board 1186 and the CR unit. Both the CR unit terminal plate 1150b to be relayed are accommodated, and these are conventionally accommodated in separate substrate boxes and provided at different positions on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, but this embodiment In FIG. 4, the terminal board box 1104 is collectively attached to the frame board holder 1101. For this reason, in particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a have a unique configuration in which the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a are connected via the payout control board 1186 without being directly connected.

  Next, the payout control board box 1105 that can be mounted over the payout control board box mounting area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the mounting area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power board box 1103 will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. Reference will be made to FIG. The payout control board box 1105 includes a box main body 1180 to which a horizontally long payout control board 1186 is fixed with a screw (not shown), a cover body 1181 attached to the box main body 1180 and covering the surface of the payout control board 1186, It is composed of The box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 are engaged with one side (the right side in FIG. 132), and fixed to the other side (the left side in FIG. 132) by a separation cutting portion 1183. Thus, in order to separate the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181, the separation cannot be performed unless the separation / cutting portion 1183 is cut. However, caulking and fixing in the separation / cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (in the illustrated case, four locations indicated by numerals 1 to 4) with a caulking member. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of an illegal separation, a cut trace remains, so that it is possible to immediately know whether there has been an illegal act. In addition, an engagement piece 1182 that is inserted into an engagement hole 1146 formed in the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is projected and formed at the center of one side short side of the box main body 1180, and the other side short side lower portion is formed. An engagement elastic piece 1184 is formed which elastically engages with a locking projection 1117 formed on the frame substrate holder 1101. Therefore, in order to attach the payout control board box 1105 to the frame board holder 1101, the engaging piece 1182 is inserted into the engaging hole 1146, and then the engaging elastic piece 1184 is engaged with the locking protrusion 1117. Can be installed easily. In the state where the payout control board box 1105 is attached across the payout control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the attachment area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103, The payout control board box 1105 is housed in a fixed state so that it cannot move in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. On the contrary, when removing, the engaging elastic piece 1184 is pressed in the direction opposite to the elastic direction to disengage the engaging elastic piece 1184 and the locking projection 1117 and pulling up the dispensing control board box 1105, By pulling out the engagement piece 1182 from the engagement hole 1146, the payout control board box 1105 can be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

  Further, the dispensing control board 1186 covered by the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 has a door frame opening switch terminal 1185a and a body frame opening switch terminal 1185b on one side (the right side in FIG. 132). , A prize ball unit terminal 1187, an external terminal board terminal 1188, a CR unit terminal board terminal 1189, an operation handle terminal 1194, an error LED indicator 4130, an error release switch 4131, and a ball removal switch 4132 are provided. A full switch terminal 1190, an inspection output terminal 1191, a power supply terminal 1192, a firing motor terminal 1193, and an internal connection terminal 1195 are provided on the lower side (the left side in FIG. 132).

  The door frame opening switch terminal 1185a is a connector to which wiring from a door frame opening switch 4133 that detects that the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 is connected. The main body frame opening switch terminal 1185b is a connector to which wiring from the main body frame opening switch 4134 for detecting that the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 is connected. The prize ball unit terminal 1187 is a multi-pin connector to which the wiring from the relay board 480 of the prize ball unit 800 described above is connected. The external terminal board terminal 1188 is a multi-pin connector connected to the dispensing control board terminal 1156 of the external terminal board 1150a as described above. The CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1155 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b as described above. The full tank switch terminal 1190 is a connector to which wiring from the full tank switch 916 of the full unit 900 is connected. The error LED display 4130 displays the state of the pachinko machine such as CR unit connection abnormality. When the error cancel switch 4131 is operated, a guide for a cancel method corresponding to the error displayed on the error LED display 4130 flows from the side speaker 121 or the lower speaker 391. When operated, the ball removal switch 4132 starts discharging the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 (starts ball removal). The inspection output terminal 1191 is a connector for connecting to an inspection device when the dispensing control board 1186 is inspected, and is a terminal for outputting various output signals for inspection. The power supply terminal 1192 is a connector connected to the payout control board power connector 1141 of the power supply board 1136 by the power supply wiring 1214 as described above. The launch motor terminal 1193 is a connector to which the wiring from the launch motor 695 of the hit ball launcher 650 is connected. The operation handle terminal 1194 is a connector to which wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 provided in the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is connected. The internal connection terminal 1195 is a connector connected to the payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107 by the signal power supply wiring 1215.

  In addition, resistors R1194a to R1194d are arranged near the left side of the error release switch 4131 as shown in FIG. These resistors R1194a to R1194d are connected to the ground (GND) when noise or the like from the door frame 5 (the reinforcing plates 211 to 214 shown in FIG. 18) enters the various detection signals input to the operation handle terminal 1194. Is described in detail later.

  Next, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 attached to the drawer attachment area 1120 formed on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 129, the main drawer relay board 1107 is connected to a main drawer connector 626 (game board side connector: see FIG. 78) provided on a relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. A main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector), a payout control board connector 1201 connected via an internal connection terminal 1195 of the payout control board 1186 and a signal power supply wiring 1215 are provided vertically. Further, the sub drawer relay board 1108 is connected to a sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector: see FIG. 78) provided on a relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. (Holder side connector) and a door frame connector 1203 connected via an internal connection terminal 1130 of the door relay board 1102 and an internal wiring 1213 are provided vertically. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are provided with support holes 1204 and 1205 on the left and right sides of each board, and the support holes 1204 and 1205 are provided in the drawer mounting area 1120 so as to protrude. By inserting into 1118, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are positioned and supported in the drawer mounting area 1120, and then firmly fixed by covering with the board cover 1109.

  By the way, the board cover 1109 includes a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107, a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108. Are formed in rectangular connector openings 1206, 1207, 1208, 1209 for projecting outward from the substrate cover 1109, and a pin through which the tip of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted on the back surface side of the substrate cover 1109. Insertion holes 1210 (see FIG. 127) are formed, and stop holes 1211 for fixing the substrate cover 1109 to the frame substrate holder 1101 with screws (not shown) are formed on the left and right ends. For this reason, the support holes 1204 and 1205 of the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are inserted into the drawer mounting boss 1118 protruding from the drawer mounting area 1120, and the leading end of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted into the pin insertion hole 1210. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 can be firmly fixed in the drawer mounting area 1120 by covering with the board cover 1109 while being inserted and fixing with a screw (not shown) in the stop hole 1211.

  Although the configuration of the board unit 1100 has been described above, in the case of the present embodiment, of the various boards necessary for driving and controlling the pachinko machine 1, the main board that is exchanged with the change of the game board 4 is used. Door relay board 1102, which is a board other than the control board 4100 and the liquid crystal control board 4500, a power board 1136 housed in the power board box 1103, an external terminal board 1150 housed in the terminal board box 1104, and a dispensing control board box 1105. The dispense control board 1186 thus assembled is preassembled into a frame substrate holder 1101 to form a unit, and the assembled and unitized board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part on the back side of the main body frame 3 by a simple operation. Improve work efficiency compared to various board mounting work that was attached to the back side of frame 3. It can be. Further, in this case, the wiring between the substrates unitized in the substrate unit 1100 can also be accommodated in the frame substrate holder 1101, so that the wiring connecting the substrates is not messed up and disturbed, and is laid out neatly. can do.

  In the present embodiment, a main drawer relay board 1107 having a main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector) on the front surface of the board unit 1100 and a sub drawer relay board 1108 having a sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector); 138, as shown in FIG. 138, the main drawer connector of the relay terminal plate 625 provided on the back side of the game board 4 as the game board 4 is mounted on the main body frame 3 from the front side. 626 and the sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector) are connected to the corresponding main drawer relay connector 1200 and sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector), respectively. Can be performed simultaneously. For this reason, the exchange work of the game board 4 can be performed skillfully.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the substrate unit 1100 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, a payout control board box 1105 that requires wiring work with various electric devices provided on the main body frame 3, and an external A terminal board box 1104 that needs to be connected to a CR unit or a management computer is arranged in parallel at the rearmost position of the board unit 1100 where it can be easily seen, while a power supply board that requires less external connection work. Since the box 1103 and the door relay substrate 1102 are arranged inside, a plurality of substrates can be efficiently overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the size of the substrate unit 1100 can be designed to a minimum. However, even in the power supply board box 1103 and the door relay board 1102 arranged inside, all the terminal portions connected to the outside can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the connection work becomes a problem. There is no.

[1-5A-1. Electrical connection between board unit and game board (connection using drawer connector)]
Next, electrical connection between the board unit 1100 and the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 are provided on the game board 4 side, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 are provided on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135 (a), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side can be electrically connected by inserting them into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135 (b), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side include terminals 626a and 627a, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are shown in FIG. 135 (c). As shown, contacts 1200a and 1202a are provided. When the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side are inserted into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side, the terminals 626a and 627a push down the contacts 1200a and 1202a as shown in FIG. Is displaced. The repulsive force of the contacts 1200a and 1202a generated by this displacement is brought into an electrically conductive state by strongly contacting the terminals 626a and 627a. As a result, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are mutually controlled by various control boards (for example, by the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186). Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals are formed. The drawer connector 626 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connector 1200 on the board unit 1100 side are further formed with voltage supply lines for supplying various voltages created by the power supply board 1136. In this way, by attaching the game board 4 to the main body frame 3 in a detachable manner, control signal lines and voltages by the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are provided. The supply line can be connected freely.

  In this embodiment, the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a are of the bellows type. In the case of the pin type, there is a risk that the pin may be inadvertently touched and bent during the work, but in the case of the bellows type, there is no such risk. Further, gold plating with a small friction coefficient is adopted for plating of the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a. Thereby, the sliding goodness (goodness of fitting) at the time of attachment and detachment of game board 4 is secured.

  Here, when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, if the operation is performed with the power switch 1137 shown in FIG. 133 being turned on, the contact between the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a, specifically, Since a large current (an inrush current described later) flows at the contact points for various voltage supply lines, welding occurs. If the game board 4 is forcibly pushed into and attached to the main body frame 3 in this welded state, the contact 1200a is bent and broken, or the contact 1200a is removed from the main body frame when the game board 4 is removed from the main body frame. The drawer connector 1200 cannot be used due to being peeled off and damaged.

  Further, when the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a are welded, various control boards may malfunction or electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to breakage of the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a circuit for preventing welding is provided on the main control board 4100 described later. Detailed description thereof will be described later.

[1-5A-2. Wiring with prize ball unit]
Next, wiring and the like between the payout control board 1186 housed in the payout control board box 1105 and the prize ball unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 includes the counting switch connector 830a, the payout motor connector 830b, the rotation angle switch connector 830c, the ball break switch connector 830d, the ground connector 830e, and the payout control. A board connector 830f is provided.

  The counting switch connector 830a is connected to the wiring from the counting switch 812, the payout motor connector 830b is connected to the wiring from the payout motor 815, the rotation angle switch connector 830c is connected to the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855, The ball break switch connector 830d is connected to the wire from the ball break switch 778 of the ball passage unit 770, and the ground connector 830e is connected to the ground wire from the payout motor 815. The payout control board connector 830f is connected to the prize ball unit terminal 1187 of the payout control board 1186 by wiring (harness).

  The wiring from the counting switch 812, the wiring from the payout motor 815, the ground wire from the payout motor 815, and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, excluding the wiring from the ball break switch 778 and the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855, The harness is assembled by being hooked by a wiring processing piece 869.

  As described above, the balls supplied from the island are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740, taken into the ball path unit 770, and guided to the prize ball unit 800. When the spheres rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge occurs to generate noise. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment.

  As described above, the rotation angle switch 855 is provided on the sensor substrate 854 of the prize ball unit 800, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 855 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the sphere. The harness connecting the payout control connector 480f and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, that is, the harness connecting the prize ball unit 800 and the payout control board 1186, is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the ball. Cheap.

[1-6. Cover body]
Next, the cover body 1250 will be described with reference to FIGS. The cover body 1250 covers the rear surface opening 580 of the main body frame 3, and is inserted from above into a cover body supporting cylinder portion 575 formed on one side of the back surface of the main body frame 3 at one of the upper, middle, and lower sides on one side. A shaft support pin 1251 is formed, and an engagement piece 1252 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the spherical passage unit 770 is formed in the approximate center on the other side. Thus, by inserting the shaft support pin 1251 of the cover body 1250 into the cover body support cylinder portion 575, the cover body 1250 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the engagement piece 1252 is inserted into the cover body engagement groove 785. By locking, the cover body 1250 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the back of various components provided on the game board 4 can be protected. In the case of releasing, the engagement between the engagement piece 1252 and the cover body engagement groove 785 may be released.

  Further, in the cover body 1250 in the illustrated case, a locking hole 1253 is formed on the upper and lower sides of the engagement piece 1252 on the open side, and a locking protruding hook piece 570 protruding from the locking wall 569 of the main body frame 3 is provided. A through hole 1254 to be penetrated is formed, and although not shown in detail, a connection operation opening 1255, a standing wall, an abutting protrusion, and a reinforcing rib are formed in the same manner as a cover body 1270 according to a second embodiment described below. Has been. The connection operation opening 1255, the standing wall, the contact protrusion, and the reinforcing rib are provided at the same position as the connection operation opening 1303, the standing wall 1304, the contact protrusion 1305, and the reinforcing rib of the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment. It performs the same function. Then, in a state where the cover body 1250 is closed, the stop hole 1253 of the cover body 1250 and the stop hole 568 on the main body frame 3 side are matched and fixed with a screw (not shown), whereby the cover body 1250 is attached to the main body frame 3. The rear opening 580 can be closed and fixed. Since the locking protrusion 570 passes through the through hole 1254 of the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, for example, a lock such as a padlock is locked. The cover body 1250 can be opened only by the person in charge having the padlock key.

[1-6A. Other embodiments of cover body]
The cover body 1250 (hereinafter referred to as “the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment”) shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 74 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the game board 4 as is apparent from FIG. Although it is formed so as to cover the back surface of the game board 4 excluding the main control board box 624, it may be a cover body that covers the entire back surface of the game board 4 including the main control board box 624. A pachinko machine to which such a cover body 1300 (hereinafter referred to as “cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment”) is attached will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine with the cover body according to the second embodiment, viewed from the back in a state in which the cover body is opened, and FIG. 140 is attached with the cover body according to the second embodiment. FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached, and is a perspective view seen from the open side of the cover body, and FIG. 142 is the second embodiment. FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the present invention is attached and is viewed from the shaft support side of the cover body. FIG. 143 is a rear view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached. 144 is a rear view of the pachinko machine with the cover body according to the second embodiment removed, and FIG. 145 is a perspective view of the dispensing control board box that is in contact with the lower side of the cover body according to the second embodiment. FIG. 146 shows the second It is the perspective view seen from the inside of the cover body which concerns on embodiment, FIG. 147 is a rear view for demonstrating the effect | action of the cylinder lock provided in the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, FIG. 143 is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 143, FIG. 149 is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 143, and FIG. 150 is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. Note that in FIGS. 139 to 150, the same reference numerals are given to configurations that exhibit the same functions as the configurations displayed in the previous drawings.

  As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the outer frame 2A of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached is the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment described above, and is attached to the door frame 5. The shape of the provided dish unit 300 is also slightly different. Furthermore, the structure of the main body frame 3 is also a point of a locking wall 569 having a later-described retaining hole 568, locking hole 569a, and guide hole 569b formed on the open end side of the pivot support side rear wall 546 (see FIG. 144), and The third side wall 542 and the fourth side wall 543 constituting the rear side wall are different in that the positions of the cutout portions 221 extend downward (see FIG. 140). Also in the configuration, the only difference is that the contact lower step surface 1181a is formed on the cover body 1181 (see FIG. 145). However, the main control board box 624 displayed in FIG. 139 and FIG. 144 is attached to the board substrate holder 623 attached to the lower back of the game board 4 as in the embodiment shown in FIG. In FIG. 139 and FIG. 144, illustration of the game board 4 is omitted.

  First, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The cover body 1300 is formed of a synthetic resin in a dish shape in which a peripheral wall of a slightly vertically long rectangular shape rises (a large number of air holes are formed in the upper half of the side wall portion and the rectangular plate portion). A plurality of (four in the illustrated case) pivot pins 1301 are integrally formed on the side wall on one side of the vertical side and inserted into the cover body support cylinder portion 575 formed on the main body frame 3 and pivotally supported. An engagement piece 1302 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the spherical passage unit 770 is integrally formed slightly closer to the upper side of the side wall on the other side of the vertical side. As with the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment, the shaft support pin 1301 and the engagement piece 1302 are inserted into the cover body support cylinder 575 to insert the cover body 1300 into the main body. The cover body 1300 can be closed to the main body frame 3 by being pivotally supported by the frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the engaging piece 1302 is locked in the cover body engaging groove 785. The back surface of various components including the main control board box 624 can be protected. The difference between the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment and the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment is that the cover body 1300 is not simply provided to be openable and closable, but cannot be illegally opened in the closed state. Since the cylinder lock 1309 is provided on the main control board box 624 and the back surface of the main control board box 624 is covered, the RAM clear switch 624a provided exposed to the outside of the main control board box 624 is connected to a test terminal for testing. The contact operation opening 1303 is provided at a position corresponding to 624b and 624c, and the surface of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 is contacted with the front end side of the lower side wall of the cover body 1300 closed. It is a point of contact. Therefore, a characteristic configuration of the cover body 1300 according to these second embodiments will be described below.

  First, the connection operation opening 1303 will be described. The connection operation opening 1303 is formed in a rectangular shape at the upper part of the lower contact side wall 1306 of the lower side of the cover body 1300, and the size thereof is as shown in FIG. The RAM clear switch 624a provided exposed to the outside of the main control board box 624 and the test terminals 624b and 624c to which the inspection equipment is connected are opened. In addition, a standing wall 1304 and an abutting protrusion 1305 that project against the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 in a closed state project from the inside of the connection operation opening 1303. The standing wall 1304 is formed to be relatively high along the left and right opening edges of the connection operation opening 1303, and the contact protrusion 1305 is provided to be relatively low along the one side opening edge from the upper opening edge of the connection operation opening 1303. As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, the standing wall 1304 and the contact protrusion 1305 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 (the surface of the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624). In order to prevent unauthorized actions on the main control board box 624 by inserting an unauthorized tool from the connection operation opening 1303.

  Next, the contact lower side wall 1306 formed on the lower side of the cover body 1300 will be described. When the cover body 1300 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact lower side wall 1306 is shown in FIGS. As described above, the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101 is brought into contact. Therefore, on the upper side of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101 of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached, as shown in FIG. A contact low step surface 1181a is formed which is formed to be lower than the surface. Accordingly, the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in the payout control board box mounting region of the frame board holder 1101 and the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 as shown in FIG. In a state of being attached over the attachment region 1143, the payout control board box 1105 is housed in the attachment region 1143, and is fixed so as not to move in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. For this reason, the abutting low step surface 1181a which is a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 is abutted and covered by the abutting lower side wall 1306 of the cover body 1300, so that the cover body 1300 is not opened. As long as the payout control board box 1105 cannot be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

  Next, a configuration related to the cylinder lock 1309 will be described. In FIG. 146, an elliptical lock hole 1308 for penetrating the cylinder lock 1309 is opened near the lower side of the cover body 1300. A threaded portion 1310 having an elliptical cross section of the cylinder lock 1309 is passed through the lock hole 1308, and a nut 1312 is screwed into the threaded portion 1310 from the inside to fix the cylinder lock 1309 in the lock hole 1308. The cylinder lock 1309 has a lock shaft 1311 projecting from the center of the screw portion 1310 toward the inside of the cover body 1300, and the lock shaft 1311 is a screw that is drilled in a lower portion of the elliptical locking piece 1313. The locking piece 1313 is fixed to the rear end of the cylinder lock 1309 by passing through the hole 1314 and fastening with a nut 1315. With this configuration, the locking piece 1313 can be rotated within a range of 90 degrees by inserting and rotating a key (owned by a manager in charge of the game hall) into the cylinder lock 1309. Yes. In addition, a guide projection 1316 for guiding opening and closing when the cover body 1300 is closed is provided on the lower portion of the lock hole 1308 so as to project inward. Furthermore, a screwing hole 1307 for screwing a screw is formed in the upper part on the open side of the cover body 1300 and above and below the engagement piece 1302.

  On the other hand, a stop hole 568, a lock hole 569a, and a guide hole 569b are formed on the main body frame 3 side so as to correspond to the above-described screw stop hole 1307, lock piece 1313, and guide protrusion 1316. This configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 144. As described above, the cover body contact groove 567 is formed in the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Stop holes 568 corresponding to the screw holes 1307 are formed in the upper and lower portions of 567 (up and down with the cover body engaging groove 785 of the ball passage unit 770 sandwiched). Further, as shown in FIG. 147, a locking wall 569 extends in the vertical center line direction of the main body frame 3 at a lower portion of the pivot side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the locking wall 569. A locking hole 569a and a guide hole 569b are formed on the upper and lower sides. The locking hole 569a is formed in an elliptical shape so that the locking piece 1313 passes therethrough, and the reinforcing wall 569 around the front side of the locking hole 569a is provided with a reinforcing rib.

  Thus, by rotating the cover body 1300 from the open state to the closed state, the guide protrusion 1316 is inserted into the guide hole 569b and the lock piece 1313 of the cylinder lock 1309 is locked as shown in FIG. It will be in the state which penetrated the hole 569a. In this state, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1309 and turning it, as shown in FIG. 147 (B), the locking piece 1313 rotates 90 degrees, and one end of the locking piece 1313 is connected to the front side of the locking wall 569. Engage. For this reason, the cover body 1300 is locked to the main body frame 3. Further, since the cover body 1300 is locked by the cylinder lock 1309 at the lower portion of the cover body 1300, the screw holes that match in the closed state are used to fix the upper portion of the cover body 1300 to the main body frame 3. The upper portion of the cover body 1300 is also fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing screws (not shown) in 1307 and the retaining holes 568. In addition, a cylinder lock may be provided also in the upper part of the cover body 1300, and the cover body 1300 may be locked to the main body frame 3 by the cylinder lock up and down.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 140, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is in a closed state, and the back side is the rearmost end portion of the prize ball tank 720 (in the case of this embodiment, the rear of the discharge port 730). The surface wall) and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740 and the same vertical surface when viewed from the side. For this reason, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower part on the back side, and the shape is extremely refreshing. It is easy to grasp, so it is easy to load and stack, and when it is actually installed on the island base of the amusement hall, it protrudes from the back of the opponent's pachinko machine on the back of the pachinko machine 1 lined up It can be installed very smoothly without worrying about wiring to be performed. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 using the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment has the same effect as shown in FIG.

  In the second embodiment described above, the reason why the cover body 1300 is closed by both the upper screw and the lower cylinder lock 1309 is that the cover body 1300 is the same as the first embodiment. Since the covering area is larger in the vertical direction than the cover body 1250, the upper and lower portions may be deformed by heat if the closed state is maintained only at the center of the cover body 1300. It was configured to hold. As the second reason, as described above, since the lower side wall 1306 of the cover body 1300 is brought into contact with the upper side portion of the dispensing control board box 1105, the lower side portion of the cover body 1300 cannot be particularly opened. In addition, it is necessary to firmly maintain the closed state of the lower part of the cover body 1300, and as a result, the upper part of the cover body 1300 must be closed. For this second reason, in order to maintain the closed state of the lower side portion in particular, a locking device such as the cylinder lock 1309 (not limited to the cylinder lock, any locking device that can be unlocked only by a game hall administrator may be used. ) Is desirable.

  The cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment has been described above. The cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is configured such that the lower side portion of the cover body 1300 when the cover body 1300 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Since the abutting lower side wall 1306 abuts and covers the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the dispensing control board box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101, the dispensing control is performed unless the cover body 1300 is opened. The substrate box 1105 cannot be removed from the frame substrate holder 1101. Further, since the cover body 1300 is locked by the cylinder lock 1309, not only an illegal act on the main control board box 624 covered by the cover body 1300 but also an illegal action on the dispensing control board box 1105 not covered by the cover body 1300 is prevented. be able to. Even when the cover body 1300 is closed and the cylinder lock 1309 is locked, since the connection operation opening 1303 is opened in the cover body 1300, the test terminals 624b and 624c for testing are inspected. The RAM clear switch 624a can be operated when a device is connected or when software or the like runs out of control and recovers. Further, a standing wall 1304 and a contact protrusion 1305 are formed inside the connection operation opening 1303 so that no gap is formed between the connection operation opening 1303 and the main control board box 624. A piano wire or the like can be inserted to prevent fraudulent acts on the back of the game board 4.

  Furthermore, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is in a closed state, and the back side thereof is the same vertical plane when viewed from the rear end wall of the prize ball tank 720 and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740. Therefore, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower part on the back side, and the shape is extremely refreshing. Because it is uniform and easy to grasp, it is easy to load and superimpose, and when it is actually installed on the island base of the amusement hall, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that is lined up behind the back of the opponent's pachinko machine It can be installed very smoothly without worrying about the wiring that protrudes from the top.

[2. Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 156. 151 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the diagonally right front, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the diagonally left front, and FIG. FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from the left rear, FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main component and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from.

  As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and a frame-shaped front component 601 that defines an outer periphery of a game area 605 into which a game ball is driven. A gaming panel 600 arranged to close the gaming area 605 on the rear side of the front constituent member 601, and a function display arranged on the outer side of the gaming area 605 and below the front constituent member 601 on the right side of the out port 606. A unit 640, an attacker unit 2000 that is disposed approximately at the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 605, above the out port 606 and supported by the front surface of the gaming panel 600, and along the outer periphery of the gaming area 605 on the left side of the attacker unit 2000 A side decoration member 2100 that is disposed and supported on the front surface of the gaming panel 600, and a gaming pad that is disposed in the right area within the gaming area 605. Each gate (gate member 2200, special figure gate 2500) supported on the front surface of the game table 600, a frame-shaped center accessory 2300 which is disposed at a substantially central portion of the game area 605 and supported by the game panel 600, and a game panel The back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the 600, and the effect display capable of displaying a predetermined effect image attached to the back side of the back unit 3000 so as to be visible from the player side through the frame of the game panel 600 and the center accessory 2300 And a liquid crystal display device 1400 as means. Hereinafter, the configuration of each device mounted on the game panel 600 will be described in detail. The center accessory 2300 can also be called a frame-shaped decorative body.

[2-1. Attacker unit]
First, the attacker unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158. FIG. 157 is a perspective view in which each device mounted on the game panel is disassembled for each member and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 158 is a perspective view of the attacker unit viewed from the oblique front. The attacker unit 2000 of this example is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600 after being inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 600e formed at the lower portion of the game panel 600 at the center in the left-right direction. The attacker unit 2000 has a plurality of entrances (winning ports) through which game balls that have been driven into the game area 605 can be received. Specifically, a first start port 2001 disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction, a rectangular large winning port 2003 disposed on the right side of the first start port 2001 and extending greatly in the left-right direction, and a large winning port 2003 And three general winning ports 2004 arranged on the left side of the first start port 2001 and the left side of the first start port 2001, respectively.

  The first start port 2001 is open on the upper side, and game balls can be received (winning) at all times. The special winning opening 2003 can be opened and closed by a horizontally-long rectangular opening and closing member 2006 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2006 is pivotally supported at the lower side, and in a substantially vertical state, closes the special winning opening 2003 to make it impossible to receive a game ball, and rotates so that the upper side is inclined forward ( In the state shown in FIG. 158, the special winning opening 2003 is opened so that game balls can be received. The opening / closing member 2006 is in a state in which the big prize opening 2003 is closed in the normal gaming state, and the game ball is received (starts winning) at the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2002 described later. Depending on the result of the special lottery (big hit lottery) to be performed (when the result of the special lottery is “big hit” or “small hit”), the attacker solenoid 2016 (see FIG. 220) is driven to open and close. However, as will be described later, when the result of the special lottery is “big hit (special hit)”, the opening / closing member 2006 according to this embodiment moves to the special gate 2500 (specific reception port) after the condition device is activated. On the condition that the game ball has been received, it can be opened and closed by driving the attacker solenoid 2016. Further, as shown in the figure, the general winning opening 2004 is opened upward so that game balls can be received (winned) at all times.

[2-2. Side decoration member]
The side decoration member 2100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 159. FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the side decorative member as viewed obliquely from the front. The side decoration member 2100 is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e formed on the left side of the opening 600e in which the attacker unit 2000 is inserted and fixed at the lower left side from the center in the left-right direction of the game panel 600. Thus, the game panel 600 is fixed to the front surface. In addition, a decorative portion 2103 having a light transmissive (semi-transparent) window portion is provided on the front side (player side) of the side decorative member 2100, and a light emitting decorative substrate (not shown) disposed behind the decorative portion 2103 is provided. ) Can be decorated with light.

[2-3. Gate]
As shown in FIG. 157, among the gates (gate member 2200, special figure gate 2500), the gate member 2200 is formed at a position slightly above the center in the vertical direction on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction in the game panel 600. The opening 600e is inserted from the front side and fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600. The gate member 2200 has a gate 2201 having a width through which only one game ball can pass, and a game ball passed through the gate 2201 can be detected by a gate sensor 2202 disposed in the gate 2201. It is like that.

  Similarly, the special figure gate 2500 is also in front of the game panel 600, and is formed in an opening 600e formed in the game area on the right side of the game area on the left side and the game area on the right side of the center accessory 2300. On the other hand, it is fixed by being inserted from the front side. Similarly, the special figure gate 2500 has a gate 2501 having a width through which only one game ball can pass, and a game that has passed through the gate 2501 by a special figure gate sensor 2502 disposed in the gate 2501. A sphere can be detected.

  However, in this embodiment, in the vicinity of the special figure gate 2500, to the gate 2501 so that almost all the game balls flowing down the game area on the right side of the center accessory 2300 are received by the special figure gate 2500. Guide members such as a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) and a guide wall 603a (see FIG. 151) are provided. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area on the right side passes through the special-purpose gate 2500 with a higher probability (a probability exceeding at least 50%) than the probability of passing through the gate member 2200. In addition, the probability that the game ball flowing down the right game area passes through the gate member 2200 is that the game ball flowing down the left game area when in an external disadvantageous game state is the start port (first start port 2001, second It is higher than the probability of entering the starting port 2002). As will be described later, the special figure gate 2500 according to this embodiment delays the timing at which the accessory continuous operation device operates when the jackpot is won (relative to the end timing of the first closed control period). The pachinko machine 1 is provided with functions that can be performed.

[2-4. Center character]
Next, the configuration of the center accessory 2300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 157 and 160 to 182. FIG. 160 is a perspective view of the center accessory as seen from diagonally forward, FIG. 161 is a perspective view of the center accessory as seen from the diagonally front exploded for each main member, and FIG. FIG. 163 is a perspective view of an object frame member disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front; FIG. 163 is a perspective view of a base plate of the center accessory viewed obliquely from the front; FIG. 165 is a perspective view of the starting port unit disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 166 is an exploded perspective view of the driving mechanism of the starting port unit. FIG. 167 is a perspective view of the main part of the drive mechanism section viewed obliquely from behind.

  In addition, FIG. 168 is a perspective view of the sub liquid crystal unit as viewed obliquely, FIG. 169 is a side view of the sub liquid crystal unit as viewed from the right side, and FIG. 170 is an exploded view of the sub liquid crystal unit. FIG. 171 is a front view showing a state in which the front of the sub liquid crystal unit is shielded by the first accessory unit and the second accessory unit, and FIG. 172 is a sub liquid crystal unit. It is a front view which shows the state by which the front of was opened.

  Further, FIG. 173 is a perspective view of the first accessory unit as seen from an oblique front, FIG. 174 is an exploded perspective view of the first accessory unit as seen from an oblique front, and FIG. FIG. 176 is a perspective view of the right movable unit of the single-function unit being disassembled and viewed from an oblique front; FIG. 176 is a perspective view of the second functional unit from an oblique front; and FIG. FIG. 178 is a right side view showing the movable unit of the second accessory unit, and FIG. 179 is an exploded front view of the drive unit. 180 is a perspective view in which the movable part of the second accessory unit is disassembled and seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 181 is a perspective view in which the drive part is seen obliquely from the rear. FIG. 182 is a right side view showing the operation of the movable unit with respect to the sub liquid crystal unit. .

  As shown in FIG. 157, the center accessory 2300 is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 600, and then fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600. As shown in the figure, the frame occupies most of the game area 605 and is formed in a frame shape. The gate member 2200 and the special figure gate 2500 described above are arranged between the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center accessory 2300 and the outer periphery of the game area 605.

  As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the center accessory 2300 includes a frame-shaped decorative frame unit 2310, a start port unit 2330 having a second start port 2002 disposed at the lower right thereof, and a decorative frame unit 2310. A frame shape having a sub liquid crystal unit 2350 mounted on the upper surface of the rear surface and visible through the opening window 2310a, and a left movable unit 2378 and a right movable unit 2379 disposed on the rear side of the decorative frame unit 2310 and visible through the opening window 2310a. Display of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 in cooperation with the first accessory unit 2370, the transparent protective plate 2360 for closing the back side of the first accessory unit 2370, the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379. And a second accessory unit 2400 capable of shielding the screen.

  As shown in FIG. 162, the decorative frame unit 2310 includes a frame-shaped base plate 2311 and a plurality of decorative members 2309 arranged on the front surface or the back side of the base plate 2311. As shown in FIG. 163, the base plate 2311 has a substantially annular shape, and a game ball that has entered the inside of the base plate 2311 through a warp passage, which will be described later, is rotated in the left-right direction on the lower inner peripheral surface. A lower rolling surface 2311a that can be moved is formed. Further, below the lower rolling surface 2311a, a game ball that has entered a chance opening 2372a (see FIG. 173) formed in the lower part of the first accessory unit 2370 is placed in a game area 605 below the center accessory 2300. A chance outlet 2311b is provided penetrating in the front-rear direction. Further, a pedestal portion 2311c for mounting the start port unit 2330 is provided on the lower right side of the base plate 2311 so as to protrude obliquely downward to the right, and the start port unit 2330 is provided at a portion above the center of the pedestal portion 2311c. A passage 2311d for guiding the game ball won in the second starting port 2002 to the rear is formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. An arc-shaped upper base plate 2322 (see FIG. 162) is provided on the upper portion of the base plate 2311 so as to protrude to the upper left.

  162, the decorative member 2309 disposed on the base plate 2311 includes a central front ornament 2312 disposed on the upper front surface of the base plate 2311 and a lower side of the lower rolling surface 2311a (the back side of the base plate 2311). Shelf left decoration 2313 and shelf right decoration 2314 arranged on the left side, a blue left blue decoration 2315 arranged on the left front surface of the base plate 2311, an upper left covering decoration 2316 arranged on the upper side, and a warp to be described later A warp passage decoration 2317 arranged on the lower front side of the passage, a shelf right decoration 2318 arranged on the lower right front of the base plate 2311, an upper right decoration 2319 arranged on the upper right front of the base plate 2311, and a shelf right decoration 2318 and an upper right blue ornament 2320 arranged on the upper side of 2318. The decorative members other than the back left ornament 2313 and the back right ornament 2314 are on the front of the game panel 600. Also it provided to project the player side. That is, the game ball is configured not to enter the decorative frame unit 2310 from a portion other than the warp passage. The right side surface of the upper right blue ornament 2320 is provided with a second out port 606a into which a game ball rolling in the game area 605 on the right side of the center accessory 2300 can enter. The game ball that has entered the mouth 606a is discharged from the game area 605 in the same manner as the out mouth 606 provided at the lower end of the game area 605. Also, on the upper side of the warp passage decoration 2317, a warp entrance 2321 into which a game ball rolling in the game area 605 on the left side of the center accessory 2300 can be placed is disposed. It is configured to guide backwards.

  In addition, the decorative frame unit 2310 includes a plurality of lenses 2323 arranged in an arc shape and a left LED substrate 2324 that is arranged behind the lens 2323 and emits light in order to illuminate and decorate each decorative member 2309. An LED substrate 2325 and an upper LED substrate 2326 are provided. Further, on the rear side of the upper right LED board 2325, a relay board 2327 for relaying drive signals to these light emitting boards is disposed. In addition, a reflection plate 2328, a diffusion sheet 2329, and the like are also provided so that light is emitted from the entire decorative member 2309.

  Next, the start port unit 2330 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the start port unit 2330 is mounted on a pedestal portion 2311 c of a base plate 2311 (see FIG. 163), and includes a front decoration 2331 having a second start port 2002 opened on the right side. ing. The second starting port 2002 can be opened and closed by a single blade 2337, whereas when the blade 2337 rises substantially vertically, the second starting port 2002 cannot receive a game ball by the blade 2337. When the blade 2337 is expanded rightward (clockwise) (see FIG. 164), the game ball can be received at the second starting port 2002. That is, the second start port 2002 is a variable winning port that can be opened and closed by the blade 2337. A blade decoration 2338 is provided on the front surface of the blade 2337.

  In addition, a decoration base 2332 is provided on the rear side of the front decoration 2331. The decoration base 2332 includes a light transmissive red lens 2334, a base diffusion sheet 2335, and a lens diffusion sheet 2336, and the light emitted from the LED substrate 2333 disposed on the rear side is transmitted to the front decoration 2331. By irradiating, the front decoration 2331 is decorated with light emission. On the rear side of the LED board 2333, a driving mechanism 2339 for guiding the game ball that has entered the second out port 606a (see FIG. 160) and driving the blade 2337 is provided with the pedestal 2311c interposed therebetween. ing. As shown in FIG. 166, the drive mechanism portion 2339 includes an out ball passage base 2340 that forms a passage 2340a of a game ball that has entered the second out port 606a, and an out ball passage cover 2341 that closes the front surface of the passage 2340a. And. Further, on the rear side of the out ball passage base 2340, a start port solenoid 2344 attached by a solenoid base 2342 and a solenoid metal plate 2343, and a transmission portion 2345 for transmitting the operation of the start port solenoid 2344 to the blade 2337 are provided. Yes. As shown in FIG. 167, the transmission portion 2345 is connected to the plunger 2344a of the start port solenoid 2344, and is connected to the crank 2345a whose one end is rotatably supported, and a link connected to the other end of the crank 2345a. 2345b and a blade shaft 2345c supported rotatably and provided with a rotational force by the link 2345b. The blade 2337 attached to the tip of the blade shaft 2345c is rotated within a predetermined range. It is possible to make it. As shown in FIG. 166, the rear side and the lower side of the transmission portion 2345 are covered with a back cover 2346, and the left side of the start port solenoid 2344 is covered with a lower decoration 2348.

  Further, a substrate cover 2347a is suspended from the lower front surface of the drive mechanism portion 2339, and a relay substrate 2347b is disposed on the back surface of the substrate cover 2347a. In addition, a second start port sensor 2349 is disposed in front of the out ball passage base 2340 so that a game ball won in the second start port 2002 can be detected.

  Next, the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 includes a rectangular frame-shaped frame portion 2351a, and a liquid crystal composed of a support rod portion 2351b that extends in the left-right direction from the upper end of the frame portion 2351b and is attached to the upper back of the base plate 2311. A holder 2351, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped liquid crystal body 2352 which is accommodated from the rear side in the frame portion 2351a and is visible through the opening window 2351c, and a liquid crystal cover 2353 which is disposed on the back surface of the frame portion 2351a and supports the back side of the liquid crystal body 2352. And a liquid crystal fastener 2354 that supports the lower portion of the liquid crystal main body 2352. In addition, a decoration 2355 is provided in the lower part of the front surface of the liquid crystal holder 2351, and a relay board 2356 that relays a drive signal to the liquid crystal main body 2352 is provided on the back surface of the liquid crystal cover 2353. As shown in FIG. 169, the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is disposed so as to be inclined so that the display screen (sub liquid crystal screen PNS) of the liquid crystal main body 2352 faces obliquely downward (player side).

  As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the sub liquid crystal screen PNS of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 includes the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 of the first accessory unit 2370 and the movable of the second accessory unit 2400. It is shielded by the unit 2401. That is, as shown in FIG. 171, in a state where the left movable unit 2378, the right movable unit 2379, and the movable unit 2401 are assembled in front of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350, the sub liquid crystal screen PNS is shielded and the player side On the other hand, when the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 and the movable unit 2401 are separated from each other as shown in FIG. 172, the front of the sub liquid crystal screen PNS is opened and the game It can be seen from the person side. Next, the first accessory unit 2370 and the second accessory unit 2400 will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the first accessory unit 2370 includes a frame-like rear cover 2371 made of a transparent synthetic resin member, and a shelf arranged at the lower part on the front surface of the rear cover 2371. An upper stage 2372, a warp passage 2374 disposed on the upper left side of the upper shelf stage 2372, a left decoration 2375 disposed on the upper side of the warp passage 2374, and a right decoration 2376 disposed on the upper right side of the upper shelf stage 2372. Is provided. Here, on the shelf upper stage 2372, an upper stage rolling surface 2372b capable of rolling the game ball that has entered the inside of the first accessory unit 2370 through the warp passage 2374 in the left-right direction, and the upper stage rolling surface A substantially arc-shaped middle-stage rolling surface 2372c that is located on the front side of 2372b and is one step lower is formed. That is, the shelf upper stage 2372 forms a so-called stage. The middle rolling surface 2372c is higher than the lower rolling surface 2311a of the base plate 2311 (see FIG. 163) arranged on the front side thereof, and rolls on the upper rolling surface 2372b or the middle rolling surface 2372c. It is possible to make the game ball after flowing down to the lower rolling surface 2311a. Further, a chance opening 2372a into which a game ball can enter is provided in the wall portion on the back side of the interrupted rolling surface 2372c, and the game ball that has entered the chance opening 2372a is a chance outlet 2311b of the base plate 2311. Is to be released from. Further, an LED substrate 2373 that irradiates light toward the shelf upper stage 2372 is disposed on the back side of the shelf upper stage 2372, and the shelf upper stage 2372 can be decorated with light emission. The warp passage 2374 communicates with the warp inlet 2321 (see FIG. 161), and is configured to feed game balls that have entered the warp inlet 2321 from the left end side of the upper rolling surface 2372b.

  Also, a substantially arcuate cylindrical guide portion 2371a projecting forward is formed on the upper portion of the rear cover 2371 so as to face the left and right, and the left movable portion unit 2378 and the right movable portion unit are formed by the pair of guide portions 2371a. 2379 are supported so as to slide in an arc along the inner peripheral edge of the rear cover 2371, respectively. A flat protective plate portion 2371b is formed on the rear cover 2371, and the liquid crystal main body 2352 is protected by covering the sub liquid crystal screen PNS from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 175, the right movable unit 2379 disposed on the upper right side of the rear cover 2371 is provided with a front ornament 2384 having a pointed tip toward the center of the rear cover 2371 and a rear side of the front ornament 2384. Back cover 2387, lens 2385 and diffusion sheet 2386 housed inside back cover 2387, lower member 2389 disposed below back cover 2387, and LED attached to the back surface of back cover 2387 And a substrate 2390. In other words, the back cover 2387 is provided with a plurality of openings (not shown), and light emitted from the LED substrate 2390 irradiates the front decoration 2384 through the diffusion sheet 2386 and the lens 2385, and thereby the front decoration 2384. Can be decorated with light emission. Further, an arc-shaped rack 2387a is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the back cover 2387, and a shaft portion 2387b protruding in the front-rear direction is formed on the inner side thereof. In particular, the rearward extension portion of the shaft portion 2387b is fitted and inserted into a guide portion 2371a formed on the upper portion of the rear cover 2371 (see FIG. 174), and movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the push 2388. That is, the right movable unit 2379 is supported so as to move in an arc shape by sliding the shaft portion 2387b of the back cover 2387 along the inner peripheral surface of the guide portion 2371a. Note that the left movable unit 2378 has a symmetrical shape with the right movable unit 2379, but the configuration is the same, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 174, the rear cover 2371 is engaged with the rack 2387a of the left movable part unit 2378 and the right movable part unit 2379 on the outside of the guide part 2371a, and is supported rotatably in the axial direction. The gears 2381 are connected to motors 2380 fixed to the upper back surface of the rear cover 2371, respectively. That is, when the motor 2380 is operated, power is transmitted to the rack 2387a of the back cover 2387 through the gear 2381, and the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 can be moved individually. Note that the front decoration 2384 in the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 has a sloping slope on the inner side surface, and when it moves to the shielding position (upper stop position), the sub liquid crystal in the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 The vicinity of the lower corner of the screen PNS is shielded (see FIG. 171). Moreover, the upper part of these inner side surfaces protrudes toward the inner side, and has a "<" shape when viewed from the front.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the second accessory unit 2400 includes an appearance position (indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 182) in front of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 (see FIG. 182), and the sub liquid crystal unit. A movable unit 2401 that is supported so as to be rotatable between a retreat position (shown by a solid line in FIG. 182) above 2350, and a movable unit that houses the drive mechanism of the movable unit 2401 and has moved to the retreat position. A motor cover 2402 that can accommodate the latter half of the unit 2401, a drive unit 2403 that is a drive mechanism of the movable unit 2401, and a relay board that is disposed on the rear side of the motor cover 2402 and relays a drive signal to the drive unit 2403 2404.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the movable unit 2401 has a generally flat shape, and a front decoration 2406 having a decorative surface 2406 a on the front surface (the upper surface in the retracted position), A decorative frame 2407 in which a fitting recess 2407a for the front decoration 2406 is formed on the front surface, and a substrate cover 2410 disposed on the rear side (lower side in the retracted position) of the decorative frame 2407; Between the board cover 2410, there are an LED board 2409 that irradiates light toward the decorative frame 2407, and a reflector 2408 that limits the light emission direction so that the light emitted from the LED board 2409 does not leak from the surroundings. Is provided.

  A pair of arms 2411 are disposed on the back surface 2410 a of the substrate cover 2410. As shown in FIG. 178, these arms 2411 include an attachment portion 2411a attached to the upper end portion (the rear end portion in the retracted position) of the back surface 2410a, and a first arm portion extending perpendicularly to the back surface 2410a. 2411b, a second arm portion 2411c that is continuous with the first arm portion 2411b and bends with respect to the first arm portion 2411b to form a "<" shape, and an inner side from the tip (lower end) of the second arm portion 2411c. And a rotating shaft portion 2411d protruding toward the direction. In addition, a through-hole penetrating in the left-right direction is provided at the center of the rotating shaft portion 2411d, and a pin 2420 (see FIG. 180) of the driving unit 2403 described later is inserted therein. Further, an engaging shaft 2411e that protrudes outward is formed at a boundary portion (that is, a bent portion) between the first arm portion 2411b and the second arm portion 2411c, and the second arm portion 2411c has a length that penetrates in the left-right direction. A hole 2411f is formed along the second arm portion 2411c.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180 and FIG. 181, the drive unit 2403 includes a motor holder 2415, a motor 2416 attached to the motor holder 2415, and a gear 2418 coupled to a rotation shaft of the motor 2416 via a shaft portion 2417. A pin 2419 fitted in a through hole 2418a provided at a position eccentric from the center of the gear 2418, a long pin 2420 provided through a cylindrical part 2415a provided at the lower part of the motor holder 2415, It is configured with. Here, the pin 2419 is inserted into the long hole 2411f of the arm 2411, and the pin 2420 passes through the rotating shaft portion 2411d and the push 2421 of the arm 2411 and is provided on both sides of the motor cover 2402 (FIG. 177). The hole 2402a is inserted from the inside. As a result, when the motor 2416 operates, the gear 2418 rotates, and the arm 2411 (the entire movable unit 2401 including the arm 2411) is rotated around the pin 2420 by the pin 2419 provided eccentrically to the gear 2418. It is like that. Note that the engagement shaft 2411e formed on the arm 2411 is inside the arc-shaped long hole 2402b (arc-shaped long hole centering on the hole 2402a) provided on both side surfaces of the motor cover 2402 (FIG. 177). Thus, the arm 2411 is smoothly rotated, and the rotation range of the arm 2411 is restricted. Note that the gear 2418 is provided with a protruding piece 2418b protruding outward, and the position of the protruding piece 2418b is detected by the photosensor 2422 so that the movable unit 2401 is the appearance position (origin position). It is possible to grasp.

  By the way, as a general pachinko machine equipped with a movable decorative body, the movable decorative body is arranged behind the game panel, and an appearance position where the movable decorative body is visible through the opening window of the center frame and the outside of the opening window of the center frame ( Conventionally, a movable decorative body is moved up and down between a retreat position that is shielded by a game panel and disappears. However, according to this, it is necessary to secure a large space for shielding or retracting the movable decorative body in the game panel outside the center frame. As a result, the opening of the game panel, and the center frame inserted into the game panel are inserted. The size becomes relatively small, and for example, it becomes difficult to visually recognize various effects through the opening window of the center frame.

  On the other hand, in the second accessory unit 2400 of the present example, the movable unit 2401 is formed in a flat shape, the arm 2411 is extended from the back surface 2410a of the movable unit 2401, and the end of the arm 2411 It is configured to move (that is, rotate) along an arc around a rotation shaft portion 2411d formed on the side. For this reason, even if the size of the movable unit 2401 is relatively large, when the movable unit 2401 is moved to the retracted position (see the solid line in FIG. 182), the movable unit 2401 becomes long in the front-rear direction, and is a relatively thin surface. The lower surface (tip surface) portion of the unit unit 2401 faces the game panel 600. Therefore, it is possible to greatly reduce the area necessary for shielding the movable unit 2401.

  In addition, when the movable unit 2401 moves from the appearance position (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 182) to the retracted position, the decorative surface 2406a changes from the front side to the upper side, that is, the movable unit 2401 It changes to lie down from the suspended state. Therefore, the player's viewing angle with respect to the decorative surface 2406a (that is, the angle at which the decorative surface 2406a is viewed) changes relatively gradually, and the visual interest can be enhanced.

  In addition, the pair of arms 2411 extended from the back surface 2410a of the movable unit 2401 is located at the rear end side of the movable unit 2401 when the movable unit 2401 is in the retracted position, and Since it is located at the end on the moving direction side (retreat position side), the arm 2411 is shielded by the movable unit 2401 during the rotation of the movable unit 2401 and is difficult to see from the player side, and the arm 2411 is exposed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in appearance due to the fact.

  The shape of the decorative surface 2406a of the movable unit 2401 is a curved shape along the movement locus of the movable unit 2401. For this reason, the movement (rotation) of the movable unit 2401 becomes a movement that matches the shape of the decorative surface 2406a, and unnaturalness is not aroused with respect to the rotation operation of the movable unit 2401.

  By the way, in the case where the movable unit 2401 is disposed horizontally in the retracted position, the back surface 2410a of the movable unit 2401 and the arm 2411 extending from the back surface 2410a may be visible from the player side. According to the above, there is a concern that the appearance of the movable unit 2401 at the retracted position may be impaired. On the other hand, according to this example, the movable unit 2401 is arranged so as to be inclined so that the decorative surface 2406a can be seen at the retracted position, and thus it is difficult to see the back surface 2410a and the arm 2411 of the movable unit 2401. Is possible. In particular, since the decorative surface 2406a of the movable unit 2401 is formed in a curved surface shape, the shape and pattern of the decorative surface 2406a can be seen relatively clearly even in an inclined state, and the decorative effect can be maintained. It is.

  Further, since the sub liquid crystal screen PNS faces obliquely downward, when the movable unit 2401 is moved to the appearance position, the decorative surface 2406a of the movable unit 2401 can also be directed obliquely downward in accordance with the sub liquid crystal screen PNS. (Refer to the two-dot chain line in FIG. 182) As a result, the rotation range of the movable unit 2401 between the retracted position and the appearance position can be increased. That is, the movement of the movable unit 2401 is increased, and the impact when moving the movable unit 2401 can be increased.

  In addition, the rotation shaft portion 2411 d of the arm 2411 is disposed behind the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. Therefore, the movable unit 2401 can be brought close to the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 regardless of whether the position of the movable unit 2401 is the appearance position or the retracted position. Therefore, it becomes easier to secure a space necessary for disposing the movable unit 2401, and the sense of unity between the movable unit 2401 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is further enhanced.

  Further, the arm 2411 has a substantially “<” shape, and a first arm portion 2411 b extending substantially perpendicularly from the back surface 2410 a of the movable unit 2401 and a first arm portion 2411 b bent with respect to the first arm portion 2411 b. Since the second arm portion 2411c is provided, the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 can be avoided and disposed. That is, the movable unit 2401 can be rotated without interfering with the sub liquid crystal unit 2350.

  Further, since the sub liquid crystal screen PNS is shielded by the cooperation of the movable part unit 2401, the left movable part unit 2378, and the right movable part unit 2379, the sub liquid crystal screen PNS is surely shielded even when the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is relatively large. Is possible. In particular, when the front surface of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is opened, the movable unit 2401, the left movable unit 2378, and the right movable unit 2379 move in different directions, so that they are formed in front of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. It is possible to arouse an image in which a single shielded wall is dispersed, and it is possible to further enhance visual fun.

  In particular, the movable unit 2401 has a pentagonal shape with the left and right side surfaces protruding outward, and at the appearance position, the protruding portions are “ku” in the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379. It joins so that it may fit with the character-shaped side surface (refer FIG. 171). For this reason, the image in which the movable part unit 2401, the left movable part unit 2378, and the right movable part unit 2379 are integrally formed can be aroused. Therefore, when opening the front of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350, the player can be surprised by an unexpected operation in which the plurality of members are dispersed, and the impact can be further increased.

  Next, the configuration of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 183 to 219. FIG. 183 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from an oblique front. FIG. 184 is a perspective view of the rear unit as seen from an oblique front. FIG. 185 is a perspective view of the shutter-type accessory of the back unit as seen from an oblique front. FIG. 186 is a perspective view of the shutter-type accessory as seen from an oblique front. FIG. FIG. 188 is a perspective view of the left inner shutter of the shutter-type accessory disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 188 is a perspective view of the left inner shutter viewed from the oblique rear, and an enlarged view of the main part thereof, and FIG. FIG. 190 is a perspective view of the decorative plate of the left inner shutter as viewed obliquely from the front and an enlarged view of the main part thereof. FIG. 190 is a perspective view of the right inner shutter of the shutter-type accessory as viewed from diagonally forward. FIG. 192 is a perspective view of the left outer shutter of the shutter-type accessory disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front; FIG. 192 is a perspective view of the right outer shutter of the shutter-type accessory viewed obliquely from the front; The perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the drive part of the shutter type | mold accessory and was seen from diagonally forward There, FIG. 194, the shutter-type combination thereof, is a perspective view of the opened state of each shutter obliquely from the front.

  Further, FIG. 195 is a perspective view of the lower accessory unit as seen from an oblique front, FIG. 196 is an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory unit as seen from an oblique front, and FIG. FIG. 198 is a perspective view of the lower driving unit of the side accessory unit disassembled and viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 198 is an exploded perspective view of the lower drive unit and the distribution effect device viewed from diagonally forward; FIG. 199 is a perspective view of the distribution effecting device as seen from an oblique front view, and FIG. 200 is a perspective view of the swing drive portion of the distribution performance device as seen from an oblique front. FIG. 201 is a perspective view of the swing drive unit as viewed obliquely from behind, FIG. 202 is an exploded perspective view of the lower drive unit unit ascending and descending, and FIG. 203 is an elevation mechanism. FIG. 204 is a perspective view seen obliquely from behind, and FIG. 204 shows a state in which game balls are supplied to the distribution effect device 205 is a front view of the lower drive unit, FIG. 205 is a front view of the lower drive unit showing the state where the distribution effect device is raised, and FIG. 206 is a left view of the distribution unit of the distribution effect device. FIG. 207 is a front view of the lower drive unit showing an inclined state, FIG. 207 is a front view of the lower drive unit showing a state where the distribution unit of the distribution effect device is inclined to the right, and FIG. FIG. 209 is a perspective view of the lower accessory unit game medium supply mechanism as viewed from diagonally forward, FIG. 209 is an exploded perspective view of the game medium supply mechanism as viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 210 is a game medium. FIG. 211 is a perspective view of the supply mechanism disassembled and viewed obliquely from the rear, FIG. 211 is a perspective view of the passage forming unit of the lower accessory unit viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 212 is an oblique rear view of the passage forming unit. FIG. 213 is a perspective view of the passage forming unit. Is a perspective view showing the operation of the over down passage, FIG. 214 is a perspective view showing an operation of the discharge passage of the passage forming unit.

  Further, FIG. 215 is a perspective view of another configuration of the back box unit as viewed from an oblique front, FIG. 216 is an exploded perspective view of the other configuration as viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. FIG. 218 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative unit as seen from the diagonal front, FIG. 218 is an exploded perspective view of the movable decorative portion of the horizontal decorative unit as seen from the diagonal, and FIG. 219 is an exploded perspective view of the horizontal base member. And it is the perspective view seen from diagonally forward.

  As shown in FIGS. 183 and 184, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 600, and mainly supports the liquid crystal display device 1400 at a position away from the game panel 600 to the rear side by a predetermined distance. In the back box 3001, in the back box 3001, a shutter-type accessory 3002 disposed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400, a lower accessory unit 3003 disposed in front lower side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and a liquid crystal display A horizontal decoration unit 3004 disposed on the front left side and the front right side of the device 1400.

  As shown in FIG. 184, the back box 3001 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end. The game panel 600 is fixed to the rear side. Further, the back box 3001 has a rectangular opening 3001c formed substantially at the center of the rear wall 3001b, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 supported on the rear side can be seen through the opening 3001c. . Further, the back box 3001 is formed with an attachment portion for attaching and fixing the shutter-type accessory 3002, the lower-side accessory unit 3003, each substrate, and the like at appropriate positions.

  The shutter type accessory 3002 will be described in detail. The shutter-type accessory 3002 is a sliding door-like accessory arranged in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400. The shutter type accessory 3002 is in a closed state (see FIG. 183) and an open state (see FIG. 194). It is possible to switch.

  As shown in FIGS. 185 and 186, the shutter-type accessory 3002 includes four shutters, that is, a left inner shutter 3010, a right inner shutter 3030, a left outer shutter 3050, and a right outer shutter 3070, and above these shutters. And a drive unit 3090 that individually moves each shutter, and a lower support unit 3110 that slidably supports each shutter.

  As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the left inner shutter 3010 includes a decorative plate 3011 made of a transparent synthetic resin member and having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and an upper power supply disposed separately on the upper and lower portions of the decorative plate 3011. A decorative body 3012 and a lower electrical decoration body 3013.

  By the way, as described above, if the left inner shutter 3010 that is a shielding member is constituted by the transparent decorative plate 3011 and the electric decorations 3012 and 3013 arranged on the front surface or the back surface thereof, a liquid crystal display is provided by the shielding member. Even in the state where the front of the device 1400 is shielded, the electric bodies 3012 and 3013 and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be viewed in the front-rear direction, and a three-dimensional and realistic presentation can be enjoyed. Is possible. However, in the case where a transparent decorative plate 3011 is used as a shielding member, it is difficult to separate and provide the upper electric body 3012 and the lower electric body 3013. This is because an electric wire for electrically connecting the upper electric body 3012 and the lower electric body 3013 is required. However, when a light-transmitting plate is used as the decorative plate 3011, the electric wire is decorated. This is because even when wiring is performed on the back side of the plate 3011, the electric wire can be visually recognized from the player side through the decorative plate 3011, and the appearance may be impaired.

  On the other hand, in this example, a belt-like flat cable 3014 (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 189) is used as the electric wire, and the flat cable 3014 is wired along the left side surface of the decorative plate 3011. For this reason, the thickness portion (that is, the side surface) of the flat cable 3014 faces the player, and the thickness portion overlaps with the left edge of the decorative board 3011, so that it is extremely inconspicuous when viewed from the player side. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in appearance due to the electric wire. In particular, the width of the flat cable 3014 is shorter than the thickness of the decorative plate 3011 (that is, the width of the side surface) so that the widthwise end of the flat cable 3014 does not protrude forward from the front surface of the decorative plate 3011. It has become.

  Moreover, the upper side electrical decoration body 3012 and the lower side electrical decoration body 3013 are arrange | positioned so that the left edge part of the decorating board 3011 may be touched, and, thereby, the flat cable 3014 wired along the left side surface is connected to the decorating board. It is possible to connect to the upper electrical body 3012 and the lower electrical body 3013 without passing through the front surface or the back surface of the 3011.

  Further, the upper electrical decoration body 3012 and the lower electrical decoration body 3013 include an upper LED board 3015 and a lower LED board 3016 disposed on the back surface of the decorative board 3011, and the upper LED board 3015 and the lower LED board 3016 Are connected by a flat cable 3014. In particular, the flat cable 3014 is connected to the back surface of the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016 (see FIG. 188). Thereby, even if the flat cable 3014 is connected to any part of the upper LED board 3015 and the lower LED board 3016, the flat cable 3014 at the connection part can be shielded. The decorative plate 3011 in front of the upper LED board 3015 and the lower LED board 3016 is provided with a diffusely reflecting surface 3018a, and the light emitted from the upper LED board 3015 and the lower LED board 3016 is diffused so that the surface is substantially the same. It is possible to decorate the light uniformly. Moreover, according to this, the external appearance of the upper LED board 3015 and the lower LED board 3016 also becomes unclear, and it is possible to enhance the production effect by the light emitting decoration.

  As shown in FIG. 188, a recess 3017 for accommodating the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016 is formed on the back surface of the decorative plate 3011, and light is emitted from the interior of the decorative plate 3011. It is like that. That is, it is possible to make the decorative plate 3011 itself appear to shine. Further, on the surface of the decorative plate 3011 corresponding to the upper LED board 3015 and the lower LED board 3016, a protrusion 3018 protruding toward the player side is formed, and an upper frame shape surrounding the protrusion 3018 is formed. A decorative body 3019 and a lower frame-shaped decorative body 3020 are provided. For this reason, even when the plate thickness of the decorative plate 3011 is relatively thin, it is possible to form the concave portion 3017 for accommodating the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016 on the back side, and the upper frame-shaped ornament. By the body 3019 and the lower frame-shaped decorative body 3020, it is possible to emphasize the light emitting portion and enhance the effect of the light emission effect.

  By the way, when the flat cable 3014 is wired along the left side surface of the decorative plate 3011, the flat cable 3014 is a portion (bent portion) extending from the left side toward the upper electric body 3012 and the lower electric body 3013. Since the direction of the surface of the flat cable 3014 changes, the flat cable 3014 is twisted. For this reason, there exists a possibility that the flat cable 3014 may be conspicuous in the twisted part. On the other hand, in this example, as shown in FIG. 188, the end portions of the upper frame-shaped decorative body 3019 and the lower frame-shaped decorative body 3020 protrude outward from the left side surface of the decorative plate 3011. Thus, the twisted portion of the flat cable 3014 is shielded.

  By the way, if the flat cable 3014 leaves | separates from the left side surface of the decoration board 3011, the flat cable 3014 will be in the floating state and there exists a possibility that it may stand out. On the other hand, in this example, as shown in FIG. 189, a groove forming portion 3021 for holding the flat cable 3014 is formed on the left side surface of the decorative plate 3011. The groove forming portion 3021 is formed integrally with the decorative plate 3011. By forming the groove-shaped gap S between the side surface of the decorative plate 3011, the groove forming portion 3021 is flat simply by inserting the flat cable 3014 into the gap S. The cable 3014 can be held. By the way, when adopting a configuration in which the flat cable 3014 is inserted into the gap S formed by the groove forming portion 3021, it is necessary to pull out the end side portion of the flat cable 3014 from the gap S to the outside. If the flat cable 3014 is pulled out toward the front or rear of the 3011, the flat cable 3014 is twisted at that portion, so that a relatively large gap S is required to accommodate the flat cable 3014. However, when the width of the gap S increases, it becomes difficult to stably hold the flat cable 3014 and the appearance of the flat cable 3014 may be conspicuous. On the other hand, in this example, since the outlets 3021a of the flat cable 3014 are formed at both ends of the groove, the flat cable 3014 can be drawn straight, and the width of the gap S is adjusted to the thickness of the flat cable 3014. It is possible to set it to the minimum size. In addition, the gap S into which the flat cable 3014 is inserted has an open front side and a closed back side. For this reason, it becomes possible to insert the flat cable 3014 into the gap S from the front, and when wiring the flat cable 3014 after assembling the decorative plate 3011, it is possible to perform wiring work from the front. Further, the back surface side of the gap S is closed, and the flat cable 3014 can be wired to the correct position by simply pushing the flat cable 3014.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 187, a rack 3023 is arranged above the decorative plate 3011 with an upper holder 3022 in the longitudinal direction in the horizontal direction. In addition, a cable presser 3024 for supporting a cable (not shown) for supplying electricity from above the left inner shutter 3010 to the upper electrical decoration 3012 is provided on the back surface of the upper holder 3022. The upper electric body 3012 is formed so as to be in contact with the upper end of the decorative plate 3011, so that a cable connected to the upper electric body 3012 from the outside is not visible from the player side. In addition, a pair of lower rollers 3026 is provided below the decorative plate 3011 via a lower holder 3025 so as to be rotatable with the axial direction as a vertical direction.

  On the other hand, the right inner shutter 3030 is disposed on the right side of the left inner shutter 3010 and can have its side face abutted against the left inner shutter 3010. Note that the configuration of the right inner shutter 3030 is the same as that of the left inner shutter 3010, and as shown in FIG. 190, a transparent decorative plate 3031 and an upper electric body arranged separately above and below the decorative plate 3031. 3032 and the lower electric body 3033, and the flat cable 3034 which electrically connects the upper electric body 3032 and the lower electric body 3033 are comprised. In addition, the upper electrical ornament 3032 and the lower electrical ornament 3033 include an upper LED substrate and a lower LED substrate (both not shown) disposed on the back surface of the decorative plate 3011. Further, on the decorative plate 3031 in front of the upper LED substrate and the lower LED substrate, a protrusion 3038 having a diffusely reflecting surface 3038a is formed, and an upper frame-shaped decorative body 3039 and a lower frame surrounding the protrusion 3038 are formed. A shaped decorative body 3040 is provided. Note that the upper electric body 3032 and the lower electric body 3033 are arranged on the decorative plate 3011 of the left inner shutter 3010 when the left inner shutter 3010 and the right inner shutter 3030 are brought into contact with each other. In addition, a series of patterns is formed on each of the lower electrical ornament 3013.

  A rack 3043 is arranged above the right inner shutter 3030 via an upper holder 3042 with the longitudinal direction as the horizontal direction. In addition, a cable presser (not shown) for supporting a cable (not shown) for supplying electricity from above the left inner shutter 3040 to the upper electrical decor 3032 is provided on the back surface of the upper holder 3042. . A pair of lower rollers 3046 are rotatably provided below the decorative plate 3031 via a lower holder 3045.

  The decorative plate 3031 of the right inner shutter 3030 is also provided with a groove forming portion 3041 for holding the flat cable 3034 in the same manner as the decorative plate 3011 of the left inner shutter 3010. It is formed on the right side which is the side opposite to 3011. That is, in the decorative plate 3031 disposed on the right side, the flat cable 3034 is wired along the right side surface, and in the decorative plate 3011 disposed on the left side, the flat cable 3014 is wired along the left side surface. For this reason, even if the left and right decorative plates 3011 and 3031 are abutted with each other, the flat cables 3014 and 3034 can be prevented from being sandwiched between the pair of decorative plates 3011 and 3031. It is possible to prevent.

  On the other hand, the left outer shutter 3050 is arranged on the left side of the left inner shutter 3010 and is provided so as to be able to be pulled with respect to the left inner shutter 3010. The configuration of the left outer shutter 3050 is similar to that of the left inner shutter 3010, but is different in that there is only one electric decoration. Accordingly, the electric wire corresponding to the flat cable 3014 and the groove forming portion 3021 are different. The structure corresponding to is unnecessary. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191, a transparent decorative plate 3051 and a zigzag-shaped electric decoration 3052 provided on the decorative plate 3051 are provided. The electrical decoration body 3052 includes an LED substrate 3055 accommodated in a concave portion 3057 on the back surface side of the decorative plate 3051, a protrusion 3058 protruding from the surface of the decorative plate 3051, and a frame-shaped decorative body 3059 provided therearound. It is configured. Further, an upper front cover 3061 and an upper holder 3062 and a rack 3063 extending in the horizontal direction are provided on the upper side of the decorative plate 3051. Note that a cable (not shown) for supplying power from above the left outer shutter 3050 is connected to the LED board 3055, and the cable is supported by a cable presser 3064 attached to the front surface of the upper front cover 3061. ing. Further, a pair of lower rollers 3066 are provided below the decorative plate 3051 via a lower holder 3065.

  By the way, the decorative plate 3051 forms a continuous partition surface with respect to the decorative plate 3011 of the left inner shutter 3010 when the left inner shutter 3010 and the left outer shutter 3050 are in the closed position, and the end of the decorative plate 3051 has an end portion. The flat plate 3014 is arranged so as to overlap the front of the side surface portion (groove forming portion 3021) of the decorative plate 3011 on which the flat cable 3014 is wired. For this reason, the flat cable 3014 can be shielded by the decorative plate 3051. Since the decorative plate 3051 is also transparent, the flat cable 3014 can be visually recognized through the decorative plate 3051. However, the appearance of the flat cable 3014 becomes unclear through the decorative plate 3051, and the flat cable 3014 becomes more conspicuous. It is possible to avoid it.

  On the other hand, the right outer shutter 3070 is disposed on the right side of the right inner shutter 3030 and is provided so as to be able to be pulled with respect to the right inner shutter 3030. The configuration of the right outer shutter 3070 is the same as that of the left outer shutter 3050 and has a line-symmetric shape. That is, as shown in FIG. 192, a transparent decorative plate 3071 and a zigzag-shaped electric body 3072 provided on the decorative plate 3071 are provided. LED board (not shown) housed in the (not)), a protrusion 3078 protruding from the surface of the decorative plate 3071, and a frame-like decorative body 3079 provided in the periphery thereof. Further, an upper front cover 3081 and an upper holder 3082 and a rack 3083 extending in the horizontal direction are provided on the upper side of the decorative plate 3071. In addition, a cable presser 3084 that supports a cable connected to the LED substrate is provided on the front surface of the upper front cover 3061. Further, a pair of lower rollers 3086 are provided below the decorative plate 3071 via a lower holder 3085.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 186 and 193, the drive unit 3090 is configured to individually drive the left inner shutter 3010, the right inner shutter 3030, the left outer shutter 3050, and the right outer shutter 3070. More specifically, racks 3023 and 3043 provided on upper portions of shutters 3010, 3030, 3050, and 3070 (hereinafter referred to as “each shutter 3010 etc.”) by a guide lower portion 3091 and a guide upper portion 3092 that are vertically stacked. 3063 and 3083 are slidably supported in the left-right direction, and a mechanism for linearly moving the racks 3023, 3043, 3063 and 3083 left and right is disposed above the upper guide portion 3092. Specifically, on the upper left side of the upper guide portion 3092, a box-shaped left motor base 3093, a left inner motor 3094 attached to the left motor base 3093 and applying power to the left inner shutter 3010, and a left motor base 3093 A left outer motor 3095 that is attached and applies power to the left outer shutter 3050 is disposed. A gear 3096 is connected to the left inner motor 3094 and the left outer motor 3095 so that the rotational force is transmitted to the pinion 3097 meshed with the rack 3023 of the left inner shutter 3010 and the rack 3063 of the left outer shutter 3050. It has become. The pinion 3097 passes through the upper guide portion 3092 and the lower guide portion 3091 and is engaged with the racks 3023 and 3063. The open side surface of the left motor base 3093 is closed by a lid 3098.

  On the upper right side of the upper guide portion 3092 are two right motor bases 3099, a right inner motor 3100 attached to the right motor base 3099 and applying power to the right inner shutter 3030, and a right outer shutter 3070 attached to the right motor base 3099. A right outer motor 3101 for applying power to the motor is disposed. A gear 3102 is connected to the right inner motor 3100 and the right outer motor 3101 so that the rotational force is transmitted to the pinion 3103 engaged with the rack 3043 of the right inner shutter 3030 and the rack 3083 of the right outer shutter 3070. It has become. The open side surface of the right motor base 3099 is closed by a lid 3104.

  Further, four photosensors 3105 for detecting the open state (origin position) of each shutter 3010 and the like are provided in the vicinity of the four corners of the guide upper portion 3092.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 186, the lower support portion 3110 that supports the lower portions of the shutters 3010 and the like includes an intermediate support portion 3111, a left front support portion 3112 disposed on the front left side of the intermediate support portion 3111, and an intermediate support portion. The front right support portion 3113 disposed on the right side of the front surface of the portion 3111 and the rear support portion 3114 disposed on the rear surface of the middle support portion 3111 are configured. A lower roller 3066 of the left outer shutter 3050 is inserted between the left front support portion 3112 and the middle support portion 3111, and a lower roller 3086 of the right outer shutter 3070 is inserted between the right front support portion 3113 and the middle support portion 3111. The left outer shutter 3050 and the right outer shutter 3070 are slidably supported between a closed position (see FIG. 185) and an open position (see FIG. 194). Further, a lower roller 3026 of the left inner shutter 3010 and a lower roller 3046 of the right inner shutter 3030 are inserted between the rear support portion 3114 and the middle support portion 3111, and the left inner shutter 3010. In addition, the right inner shutter 3030 is slidably supported between a closed position (see FIG. 185) where they are abutted with each other and an open position (see FIG. 194) which are separated from each other.

  As described above, each shutter 3010 and the like move in the left-right direction between the open position and the closed position, and is configured in a sliding door shape. Therefore, at the closed position, the liquid crystal display device 1400 behind the decorative plate 3011 and the like. Can be visually recognized, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be visually recognized without the decorative plate 3011 or the like in the open position. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the operation of each shutter 3010 and the like, and it is possible to greatly enhance the production effect. In particular, at the closed position, it is possible to visually recognize a plurality of electric decorations and an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400d, and an effect that is three-dimensional and highly realistic can be performed.

  Next, the lower accessory unit 3003 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 183, the lower accessory unit 3003 is arranged on the lower front side of the shutter-type accessory 3002, and performs a distribution effect using a game ball in an effect area partitioned from the game area 605. It is possible. As shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, the lower accessory unit 3003 includes a lower drive unit 3120 that performs a game ball distribution effect, and a guide member 3131 ( A game medium supply mechanism 3121 for supplying game balls to a later-described), and a passage formation unit 3122 for forming a passage and the like for collecting the game balls flowing out from the lower drive unit 3120 and returning them to the game medium supply mechanism 3121. It can be divided roughly.

  First, as shown in FIG. 197, the lower drive unit 3120 supports the distribution effect device 3125 that distributes the supplied game balls in the left-right direction and the distribution effect device 3125 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The lifting / lowering mechanism 3126 lifts and lowers the distribution effect device 3125 between an upper stop position (also referred to as an application position) and a lower stop position (also referred to as a standby position). As shown in FIG. 198, the distribution effect device 3125 swings the distribution unit 3130 that swings left and right about a pin 3138 (see FIG. 199) provided at the center portion, and the distribution unit 3130. And a swing drive unit 3145 for guiding the distributed game balls. In FIG. 198, for convenience of explanation, a state in which the decorative portion 3146 disposed on the front surface of the swing driving portion 3145 is removed is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the distribution unit 3130 includes a pseudo shelf 3132 having a guide member 3131 at the top, and a decorative member disposed on the front side of the pseudo shelf 3132 and below the guide member 3131. The upper decorative portion 3133 and a lower decorative portion 3137 which is a decorative member disposed on the lower side of the upper decorative portion 3133 are configured. An arcuate rolling surface 3131a capable of rolling the game ball in the left-right direction is formed on the upper surface of the guide member 3131. When the sorting unit 3130 is tilted toward either the left or right side, the rolling is performed. A game ball can flow down along the surface 3131a. Note that a decorative frame 3136 of the upper decorative portion 3133 is disposed on the front surface of the guide member 3131 so that the game ball does not deviate forward from the rolling surface 3131a. The lower part of the pseudo shelf 3132 has a shape in which a central part in the left-right direction protrudes downward, and a cylindrical action part 3132a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a lower end part of the pseudo shelf 3132, 3139 is inserted. In addition, a cylindrical shaft portion 3132b protruding in the front-rear direction is formed at the center of the pseudo shelf portion 3132 in the left-right direction and above the action portion 3132a, and the swing driving portion 3145 (FIG. 200) is formed via the pin 3138. (See Fig. 1) and the central shaft 3151a. In other words, the pseudo shelf 3132 is supported so as to be swingable about the shaft 3132b, and can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by applying a force to the action portion 3132a. Yes. In addition, a plurality of bushes 3140 and bush pressers 3141 are provided on the back surface of the pseudo shelf 3132, and arc-shaped guide portions 3151b formed on the left and right sides of the rear plate 3151 of the base member 3150 (see FIG. 200). As a result, the pseudo shelf 3132 can be smoothly swung and the swing range (rotation angle) can be limited.

  The upper decoration part 3133 includes a front decoration 3135 in the shape of a decorative character and a decoration frame 3136 provided on the back side thereof, and an LED substrate and a lens (both shown) that irradiate light toward the front decoration 3135 therein Not) is housed. Further, the lower decoration part 3137 has a shape imitating the appearance of the character.

  As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the swing drive unit 3145 includes a base member 3150, a left rack 3160 disposed on the left side of the base member 3150, and a right rack 3161 disposed on the right side of the base member 3150. The left relay board 3163 and the right relay board 3164 disposed at the lower back surface of the base member 3150, and the light toward the guide member 3131 of the pseudo shelf 3132 disposed slightly above the lower front surface of the base member 3150. Left LED substrate 3165 and right LED substrate 3166. In addition, the base member 3150 is formed with the above-described central shaft 3151a projecting forward at the center position of the rear plate 3151, and a pair of guide portions 3151b confront each other around the center shaft 3151a. Is formed. In addition, a plurality of wall portions 3152 project forward from the outer side of the guide portion 3151b in the left-right direction, and the first transport passage 3153 is formed on the left end side of the rear plate 3151 by these wall portions 3152. In addition, a second transport passage 3154 is formed on the right end side of the rear plate 3151. A first inflow port 3153a that opens toward the right side (inner side) is formed at the upper end portion of the first transfer passage 3153, and the lower end portion of the first transfer passage 3153 is bent at a substantially right angle toward the right side (inner side). It has a shape. Note that most of the front surface of the first transfer passage 3153 is closed by a decorative portion 3146 (see FIG. 198), and only the lower end portion is opened. That is, a first outlet 3153b is formed at the lower end portion, and a game ball that enters the first inlet 3153a and is guided by the first transport passage 3153 flows out from the first outlet 3153b forward. The first inflow port 3153a is formed at a height that communicates with the left end of the guide member 3131 of the pseudo shelf 3132 when the above-described pseudo shelf 3132 rotates counterclockwise.

  The second transfer passage 3154 is a substantially linear passage formed in the vertical direction, and a second inflow port 3154a that opens toward the left side (inner side) is formed at the upper end portion, and the lower end portion is formed at the lower end portion. Is formed with a second outlet 3154b that opens forward. Further, the front portion of the second transfer passage 3154 is also closed by a decorative portion 3146 (see FIG. 198). That is, the game ball that enters the second inflow port 3154a and is guided by the second transfer passage 3154 flows out from the second outflow port 3154b. The second inflow port 3154a is formed at a height that communicates with the right end of the guide member 3131 of the pseudo shelf 3132 when the pseudo shelf 3132 rotates clockwise. The second outlet 3154b is formed at a position higher than the first outlet 3153b of the first transport passage 3153.

  In addition, a swing mechanism 3170 is provided below the base member 3150 for applying a rotational force to the operating portion 3132a of the pseudo shelf 3132 (see FIG. 199). This swinging mechanism 3170 is arranged at the lower part of the rear surface of the rear plate 3151 and has a motor 3171 which moves back and forth in the axial direction of the rotating shaft, a rotating shaft of the motor 3171 and a pin 3139 mounted on the pseudo shelf 3132 (see FIG. 199). ), And the rotation direction of the motor 3171 can be changed to switch the rotation direction of the pseudo shelf 3132. A flexible presser 3174 for supporting the wiring is provided on the lower front surface of the base member 3150. Here, it can be said that the swinging mechanism 3170 is a driving means for operating the pseudo shelf 3132.

  On the other hand, the lifting mechanism 3126 includes a motor base 3127 as shown in FIGS. 202 and 203. The motor base 3127 includes a substantially flat rear plate 3127a, a left sliding portion 3127b formed on the left side thereof and slidably supporting the left rack 3160 of the swing driving unit 3145 (see FIG. 197), and the rear plate 3127a. A right sliding part 3127c slidably supporting the right rack 3161 of the swing driving part 3145, a left motor housing part 3127d formed on the left side of the left sliding part 3127b, and a right sliding part. Right motor housing portion 3127e formed on the right side of 3127c. Further, a left relay board 3128a and a right relay board 3128b are disposed on the rear surface of the rear plate 3127a. The left motor 3176 accommodated in the left motor accommodating part 3127d and the right motor accommodated in the right motor accommodating part 3127e. The drive signal to 3177 is relayed. The left motor housing 3127d is covered with a left motor cover 3176b, and the right motor housing 3127e is covered with a right motor cover 3177b. A gear 3176 a is connected to the left motor 3176, and the gear 3176 a is disposed so as to protrude into the left sliding portion 3127 b and is engaged with the left rack 3160 in the swing driving portion 3145. Similarly, a gear (not shown) is also connected to the right motor 3177, and this gear is disposed so as to protrude into the right sliding portion 3127 c and meshed with the right rack 3161 in the swing drive portion 3145. ing. For this reason, when the left motor 3176 and the right motor 3177 are simultaneously rotated, power is transmitted through the gear 3176a, causing the left rack 3160 and the right rack 3161 to move straight up and down, that is, the distribution effect device 3125 is straightened. It can be moved up and down.

  In addition, on the upper side of the left sliding portion 3127b in the motor base 3127, a game ball supplied from a game medium supply mechanism 3121 (see FIG. 196), which will be described later, is guided to a guide member 3131 (specifically, a game ball guide) of the distribution effect device 3125. A guide passage portion 3178 for guiding to the passage 3155) is provided. The front surfaces of the left sliding portion 3127b, the right sliding portion 3127c, and the guide passage portion 3178 are closed by a guide cover 3179.

  By configuring in this way, when performing the distribution effect by the distribution effect device 3125, the player can easily visually recognize from the lower stop position (see FIG. 204) where it is difficult to visually recognize from the player side. It is possible to raise the distribution effect device 3125 to the upper stop position (see FIG. 205) that enables the game ball K, and to distribute the game balls K in the left-right direction at the upper stop position. That is, as shown in FIG. 206, when the sorting unit 3130 is rotated counterclockwise, the game ball K rolls to the left by the guide member 3131 and can enter the first inflow port 3153a. Become. The game ball K that has entered the first inflow port 3153a flows out of the first outflow port 3153b at the lower end thereof through the first transport passage 3153. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 207, when the sorting unit 3130 is rotated clockwise, the game ball rolls to the right by the guide member 3131 and can enter the second inflow port 3154a. . The game ball K that has entered the second inflow port 3154a flows out from the second outflow port 3154b at the lower end thereof through the second transport passage 3154. Note that the game ball that has flowed out of the first outlet 3153b or the second outlet 3154b is returned to the game medium supply mechanism 3121 by the return passage 3211a (see FIG. 213), and details thereof will be described later.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 208 to 210, the game medium supply mechanism 3121 stores a predetermined number of game balls and supplies the game balls to the guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125 during the distribution effect. A flat box-shaped base body 3180 including a base upper part 3181 and a base lower part 3182; a cylindrical guiding part 3183 as a substantially cylindrical passage forming member for guiding the game ball upward; A screw 3190 disposed in the guiding portion 3183 and ascending the game ball, and a drive mechanism 3199 that rotates the screw 3190 with the axial direction as the vertical direction are configured. The cylindrical guiding portion 3183 is erected on the base upper portion 3181, and includes a front wall forming portion 3184 having a substantially semicircular cross section and a rear wall forming portion 3186 having a substantially semicircular cross section disposed on the rear side thereof. It is configured. In addition, an inflow port 3187 opened rearward is formed in the lower portion of the rear wall forming portion 3186, and the game ball is guided in a cylindrical manner through the lower passage portion 3197 communicating with the return passage 3211a (see FIG. 213). A ball is entered into the portion 3183. In addition, a discharge port 3185 opened forward is formed in the upper part of the front wall forming portion 3184, and a game ball conveyed by the screw 3190 is discharged from the discharge port 3185. The game ball released from the discharge port 3185 is sent to the guide passage portion 3178 (see FIG. 202) via the upper passage portion 3195. Further, in the upper passage portion 3195 and the lower passage portion 3197, passage sensors 3196 and 3198 for detecting the passage of the game ball are provided, respectively.

  The screw 3190 is cylindrical and has a shaft portion 3191 formed with an engagement portion 3191a having a large diameter at the lower end, a spiral portion 3192 formed in a spiral shape around the shaft portion 3191, and an upper portion of the shaft portion 3191. The engaging portion 3191a is erected in a state where the engaging portion 3191a is inserted into the opening 3181a of the base upper portion 3181. The notch 3193a formed in the rotating plate 3193 is for detecting the rotational position of the screw 3190.

  The drive mechanism 3199 includes a motor 3200 mounted on the base upper portion 3181, a motor gear 3201 disposed inside the base body 3180 and coupled to the rotation shaft of the motor 3200, and an intermediate gear 3202 meshed with the motor gear 3201. And a coupling gear 3203 having a projection 3203a engaged with the engaging portion 3191a of the screw 3190 and being engaged with the intermediate gear 3202. Note that the protruding portion 3203a and the engaging portion 3191a are connected by a connecting pin 3204 in a fitted state.

  Thereby, the rotation of the motor 3200 is transmitted to the screw 3190 via the motor gear 3201, the intermediate gear 3202, and the connecting gear 3203, and the screw 3190 is rotated in a certain direction, that is, the game ball that has flowed into the inlet 3187 is changed. It can be conveyed toward the discharge port 3185.

  By the way, in the case of performing the distribution effect after raising the distribution effect device 3125 to the upper stop position as described above, in order to supply the game ball to the guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125, the game ball is moved upward. It must be lifted to a height corresponding to the stop position, and as a result, the height of the game medium supply mechanism 3121, that is, the size in the vertical direction becomes large, which may make it difficult to secure an arrangement space. Although it may be possible to reduce the size by increasing the position of the bottom of the game medium supply mechanism 3121, a return passage 3211a is connected to the inlet 3187 near the bottom of the game medium supply mechanism 3121 so that the game ball can be transferred to it. Since it is necessary to flow down to the part, the bottom of the game medium supply mechanism 3121 has to be positioned downward to some extent, and it is difficult to reduce the size by the above configuration.

  On the other hand, according to the configuration of this example, the game ball is placed on the guiding member 3131 before the distribution effect device 3125 starts to rise (that is, in a state where it stops at the lower stop position (see FIG. 204)). It comes to be supplied. For this reason, the height for lifting the game ball can be made relatively low, and the game medium supply mechanism 3121 can be miniaturized. Even if the game ball is supplied onto the guide member 3131, the rolling of the game ball on the guide member 3131 is restricted until the distribution effect device 3125 reaches the upper stop position. Thus, the game balls can be prevented from being distributed before reaching the upper stop position, that is, before the distribution effect device 3125 becomes visible to the player.

  In particular, in this example, the rolling surface 3131a of the guide member 3131 is formed in a substantially arc shape, and the guide member 3131 is held in a substantially horizontal state until the upper stop position is reached. Therefore, when a game ball is supplied to the rolling surface 3131a of the guide member 3131, the game ball is guided to the central portion in the left-right direction, which is the lowest position on the rolling surface 3131a, and stops at that position. become. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from deviating from the rolling surface 3131a, that is, the game ball being distributed, while the distribution effect device 3125 is rising.

  Further, in this example, since the game ball is fed into the guide member 3131 from the left end side, the supply position of the game ball is lower than that fed from above the guide member 3131, and consequently the height of the game medium supply mechanism 3121. Is even lower. In addition, when the guide member 3131 includes the substantially arc-shaped rolling surface 3131a, even when the game ball is sent from the end side of the guide member 3131, the game ball can be guided to the center position of the guide member 3131 and braked. Is possible.

  In addition, the game ball released from the game medium supply mechanism 3121 is guided to the end side of the guide member 3131 through the game ball guide passage 3155 (see FIG. 200). Since this game ball guide passage 3155 moves up and down integrally with the distribution effect device 3125, the game ball can be smoothly fed even if the stop position of the distribution effect device 3125 is slightly displaced. It becomes. For example, even if the distribution effect device 3125 starts to rise before the game ball is sent to the guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125, if the game ball is supplied to the game ball guide passage 3155, then It can be fed onto the guide member 3131.

  In addition, the guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125 is disposed so as to be positioned behind the rolling surface (so-called stage) of the shelf upper stage 2372 in the first accessory unit 2370 (see FIG. 174) when in the lower stop position. Has been. For this reason, the image that the guide member 3131 is part of the stage can be aroused, and the impact on the stage can be increased. A transparent protective plate 2360 (see FIG. 161) is provided between the shelf upper stage 2372 and the guide member 3131, and a game area 605 in which the shelf upper stage 2372 is arranged and an effect in which the guide member 3131 is arranged. The area is surely partitioned so that game balls do not jump into the effect area.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the passage forming unit 3122 includes a cover member 3210 that covers the front of the lower drive unit 3120 (see FIG. 196), and a return passage that is disposed on the upper surface of the back surface of the cover member 3210. And a forming member 3211. As shown in FIGS. 212 and 213, the return passage forming member 3211 has a return passage 3211 a therein, and directs the game balls distributed by the distribution effect device 3125 toward the inlet 3187 of the game medium supply mechanism 3121. It is possible to flow down. Specifically, the return passage forming member 3211 is formed with a linear portion 3212 arranged obliquely, and a left side protruding portion 3215 and a right side protruding portion 3216 that protrude upward from the linear portion 3212. The left protrusion 3215 is provided with a first communication port 3215a that communicates with the first outlet 3153b of the first transport passage 3153 when the distribution effect device 3125 moves to the upper stop position. When the distribution effect device 3125 moves to the upper stop position, a second communication port 3216a that communicates with the second outlet 3154b of the second transport passage 3154 is provided. That is, the game balls distributed to the first inlet 3153a and the second inlet 3154a are sent to the common return passage 3211a.

  Thus, by combining the game medium supply mechanism 3121 for supplying game balls to the distribution effect device 3125 and the return path 3211a for returning the game balls distributed by the distribution effect device 3125 to the game medium supply mechanism 3121. The circulation path J of the game balls is configured so that the distribution effects can be repeatedly performed while circulating the game balls. However, in the case where the distribution effect is repeatedly performed using the game balls enclosed in the circulation path J, when the surface of the game balls becomes dirty or the surface of the game balls rusts with use. , The appearance of the game ball may be deteriorated, and the production effect may be impaired. In particular, since the effect performed by the distribution effect device 3125 is one that draws attention to the behavior of the game ball, the dirt and rust are conspicuous, which causes a decrease in visual interest. In addition, since the operation of enclosing the game balls is performed at the time of manufacture of the game machine, the game balls roll in the circulation path J during transportation after shipment, and the game balls collide with each other or members in the circulation path J. In some cases, a relatively loud sound may be generated by the collision.

  On the other hand, in this example, the game ball used in the game area 605 is taken in, and the game ball is supplied to the circulation path J. Specifically, the game ball won in the second starting port 2002 is sent to the supply port 3213, which is the upstream end of the return channel 3211a, through the supply channel 3220. Since the second start port 2002 is disposed at a position higher than the upstream end of the return passage 3211a, the game ball won in the second start port 2002 can naturally flow down toward the return passage 3211a. Is possible. In this way, since the game ball won in the second starting port 2002 is supplied to the circulation path J by the supply passage 3220, it is not necessary to enclose the game ball in the circulation path J in advance, and a collision sound is generated during transportation. And damage due to collision can be prevented. In particular, the second start port 2002 is arranged at a position away from the game medium supply mechanism 3121 because it is sent to the return path 3211a through the supply path 3220 and supplied to the game medium supply mechanism 3121 using the return path 3211a. In spite of this, the length of the supply passage 3220 can be made relatively short, and the overall configuration can be simplified.

  By the way, in the case where the game ball won in the second start port 2002 is sent to the return path 3211a through the supply passage 3220, the number of game balls in the circulation path J every time the game ball wins the second start port 2002. However, since there is a limit to the number of game balls that can be stored in the game medium supply mechanism 3121, when the number is exceeded, the game balls are stored in the return path 3211 a and the game balls are stored. It becomes difficult to circulate. In addition, it is further provided with a mechanism for distributing the game balls won in the second starting port 2002 to the return path 3211a and the discharge path (not shown), and is configured to send the game balls to the return path 3211a only when the game balls need to be replenished. However, this requires an additional path switching mechanism for switching between the return path 3211a and the discharge path, which is not preferable because the overall configuration becomes complicated and the size is increased.

  On the other hand, in this example, an overflow mechanism is provided between the game medium supply mechanism 3121 and the return passage 3211a. Specifically, a lower passage portion 3197 (see FIG. 213) is disposed between the inlet 3187 and the return passage 3211a of the game medium supply mechanism 3121. The lower passage portion 3197 has a bottom surface on the rear side. In addition to the downward slope, a discharge port 3197a is provided on the front side. In other words, when the number of game balls stored near the inlet 3187 of the game medium supply mechanism 3121 is within the allowable number, the game balls entering the lower passage portion 3197 follow the inclination of the bottom surface of the lower passage portion 3197. Although it is sent to the inflow port 3187 side, when the number of stored game balls exceeds the allowable number, it overflows and is discharged from the discharge port 3197a on the front surface of the lower passage portion 3197. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a large number of game balls from being stored in the return passage 3211a, and to directly communicate the second start port 2002 and the return passage 3211a with the supply passage 3220 without providing a passage switching mechanism or the like. It becomes possible. The game ball released from the discharge port 3197a rolls to the out ball passage 1119, and from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119, that is, from the lower rear surface of the game machine to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (generally, an island recovery basket ) Is discharged. That is, the game medium supply mechanism 3121 including the supply path 3220 and the circulation path J prevents the game ball received by the second start port 2002 from being discharged from the out ball path 1119 as the game ball discharge mechanism. It can be said that the game ball storage mechanism stores a number of game balls.

  In this example, the game balls in the circulation path J are discharged at a predetermined timing. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 212 and 214, a discharge passage 3218 is provided at the bottom of the back surface of the cover member 3210, and the communication port 3219 of the discharge passage 3218 is positioned at the lower stop position. It is comprised so that it may communicate with the 1st outflow port 3153b of the 1st conveyance path 3153 when it moves to. In addition, when the distribution effect device 3125 is at the lower stop position, the game medium supply mechanism 3121 is controlled at a predetermined timing (for example, immediately after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on), and the guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125 is controlled. A game ball is supplied to the top. In particular, at this time, as shown in FIG. 214, the distribution unit 3130 of the distribution effect device 3125 is rotated counterclockwise so that the game ball enters the first inflow port 3153a. As a result, the game balls in the circulation path J can be discharged from the pachinko machine 1 by supplying the game balls to the distribution effect device 3125 at the lower stop position. Thus, since the passages (return passage 3211a and discharge passage 3218) communicating with the first outlet 3153b are switched according to the height of the distribution effect device 3125, a complicated configuration for switching each passage becomes unnecessary. The overall size can be reduced. In particular, when the game ball is discharged, the game ball on the guide member 3131 is guided toward the first inflow port 3153a, so that the discharge path of the game ball is specified, and the discharge path for the second transfer passage 3154 is unnecessary. Become. Therefore, the discharge mechanism can be reduced in size and simplified. The game balls discharged from the discharge passage 3218 roll to the out ball passage 1119, and from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119, that is, from the lower rear side of the game machine, outside the pachinko machine 1 (generally, the island recovery basket). ) Is discharged.

  Next, the side decoration unit 3004 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 215 and 216, the side decoration unit 3004 is arranged on the left side and the right side of the back box 3001, respectively, and performs a light emitting decoration and a part thereof is movable. 217 and 218 will be described in detail. The horizontal decoration unit 3004 includes a decorative base 3250, a movable decorative portion 3251 disposed on the rear side thereof, and upper electric decorations disposed on the upper and lower sides of the movable decorative portion 3251. A part 3253 and a lower electric decoration part 3254. The decoration base 3250 includes upper and lower electrical decoration support parts 3250a and 3250b that support the upper electrical decoration part 3253 and the lower electrical decoration part 3254, and a notch 3250c is formed between the electrical decoration support parts 3250a and 3250b. ing. The upper electric decoration part 3253 and the lower electric decoration part 3254 have a lens and an LED substrate (both not shown) inside, and can be decorated with light emission.

  On the other hand, the movable decorative portion 3251 includes a back base 3256, a solenoid 3257 disposed on the back base 3256, a link 3260 that is rotatably supported with the axial direction as a vertical direction, and is driven by a plunger 3258 of the solenoid 3257. The inner base 3256 is rotatably supported by the projecting piece 3256a of the back base 3256 and connected to the link 3260 via the pin 3259 and the shaft portion 3262. In addition, a middle lens 3265 and an LED substrate 3266 are disposed inside the inner decoration 3261, and a red lens 3263 and a blue lens 3264 are provided through the side surface of the inner decoration 3261. That is, by operating the solenoid 3257, the inner decoration 3261 can be rotated via the link 3260, and the front of the inner decoration 3261 (the lighting state of the intermediate lens 3265) can be visually recognized. The side surface of the decoration 3261 (the lighting state of the red lens 3263 and the blue lens 3264) can be switched to a visible state.

  As shown in FIG. 215, a pair of horizontal base members 3240 are disposed on the rear side of the horizontal decoration unit 3004. As shown in FIG. 219, the horizontal base member 3240 arranged on the right side of the back box 3001 is arranged to return the cover member 3270 and the game ball which is arranged on the lower right side of the cover member 3270 and wins the second starting port 2002 to the return passage 3211a. Replenishment passage 3220, upper right LED board 3273 and upper decoration 3276 arranged at the top of cover member 3270, large right LED board 3274 and small lower right LED arranged at the front center of cover member 3270. And a substrate 3275. The cover member 3270 is embedded with a magnetic sensor 3277 for detecting an illegal act using a magnet or the like.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 216, on the rear side of the back box 3001, a left relay board 3241 and a right relay board 3242 that relay drive signals to the horizontal base member 3240, and a liquid crystal guide 3243 that supports the liquid crystal display device 1400. A lamp driving board 3245 for driving the LEDs mounted on each decorative board, a panel relay board 3247 for relaying signals to the game panel 600, and a resistance board 3248 are attached. The lamp driving substrate 3245 is provided in a state of being accommodated in the substrate case 3246.

[3. Main board / peripheral board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 220 is a block diagram of the main board and the peripheral board. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls game operations (game progress), and a payout control board 1186 that controls payout of game balls and the like. The peripheral board 4010 includes a peripheral control board 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1400 and sub-liquid crystal based on commands from the peripheral control board 4140. And a liquid crystal control board 4500 for controlling the display of the effect image in the unit 2350.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 220, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 4100a as a microprocessor, a main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), and the above-described components. RAM clear switch 624a. The main control MPU 4100a includes a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and preventing fraud. It also has built-in functions.

  The main control MPU 4100a includes a first start port sensor 2011 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2001, a second start port sensor 2349 that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2002, and a part thereof Detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 2014 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, or to the gate sensor 2202, special figure gate sensor 2502, general winning opening sensor 2014, count sensor 2013 and back unit 3000, respectively. A detection signal from the attached magnetic sensor 3277 is input via the panel relay board 3247 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs drive signals to the start port solenoid 2344, the attacker solenoid 2016, and the big prize port solenoid 2315 via the main control I / O port 4100b and the panel relay board 3247. Through the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3247, and the function display board 640a, the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage display 643, the first Two special symbol memory display 644, normal symbol display 645, normal symbol memory display 646, game state display 647, round display 648, and a driving signal is output to the hold state display unit 3152 of the center accessory 2300 .

  As described above, the main control MPU 4100a executes a control program stored in the ROM based on such detection signals, so that drive signals are appropriately sent to various actuators such as the start-up solenoid 2344 and the attacker solenoid 2016. As a result, various games played in the pachinko machine 1 proceed according to a predetermined procedure.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107 described above, and the pachinko machine from the payout control board 1186. Various commands relating to the state of 1 are received via the main drawer relay board 1107. Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4140 of the peripheral board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b ( The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). The main control MPU 4100a, which will be described in detail later, receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 1186, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 1136, as will be described in detail later. The power supply board 1136 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply that supplies power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various types of information in its built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 624a is also output to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the reduction of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 1136, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning signal when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 1186 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 220, a payout control board 1186 that controls payout of game balls, etc. includes a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls related to payout, a firing control unit 4120 that performs firing control of the above-described firing motor 695, and the above. The error LED display 4130, the error release switch 4131, and the ball removal switch 4132 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 220, a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 1186, a payout control MPU 4110a as a microprocessor, a payout control I / O port 4110b as an I / O device, and a payout control. An external watchdog timer 4110c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4110c”) that monitors whether the MPU 4110a is operating normally, a payout motor drive circuit 4110d that outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 described above, It is configured with. The payout control MPU 4110a includes a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and also has a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU 4110a receives various information (game information) related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100, and operates the RAM clear switch 624a from the main control board 4100. In addition to receiving a signal (detection signal), a detection signal from the full switch 916 is input, or detection signals from the ball break switch 778, the count switch 812, and the rotation angle switch 855 are connected to the relay terminal in the prize ball unit. Or input via the plate 830.

  When the payout control MPU 4110a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 based on the received various commands related to payout, or a ball removal switch. When the 4132 is operated, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d is used to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 based on this operation signal (detection signal). When a driving signal is output to the payout motor 815 or a ball rental request signal from a CR unit (ball lending machine) (not shown) is input via the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, payout is performed based on the ball rental request signal. A drive signal is output from the motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815, When the detection signal from the switch 916 is input, or stop the dispensing motor 815 stops driving signal to the payout motor 815 from payout motor drive circuit 4110d based on the detection signal.

  Further, the payout control MPU 4110a displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display 4130, transmits various commands indicating the state to the main control board 4100, or receives a detection signal from the counting switch 812. Based on this detection signal, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 1150a. The external terminal board 1150a is a portion that is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall), whereby the hall computer can play the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine. It is possible to grasp the game information of 1 and monitor the game of the player.

  According to such a payout control MPU 4110a, a control signal stored in the ROM is executed based on various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100, so that a drive signal is output to the payout motor 815 as described above. As a result, game balls are paid out by the number of prize balls indicated by the received payout command.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 220, a launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control of the launch motor 695 on the payout control board 1186 includes an input circuit 4120a to which various signals are input, and a transmission circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. 4120b, a firing control circuit 4120c that outputs a reference pulse for determining the rotational speed of the firing motor 695 based on the clock signal, and a drive signal is output to the firing motor 695 based on the reference pulse from the firing control circuit 4120c. And a firing motor drive circuit 4120d. The launch control circuit 4120c controls the rotation speed of the launch motor 695 so that about 99.95 game balls per minute are launched toward the game area 605 based on the clock signal from the transmission circuit 4120b. .
That is, the movement of the hitting ball 687 described above is controlled.

  Note that the handle device 460 (operation handle unit 410) includes the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 as described above, and touching the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle unit 410 touches the touch sensor. When the single button 421 is operated, it is detected by the firing stop switch 422. Although these detection signals will be described in detail later, they are input to the input circuit 4120a via the handle relay terminal plate 194 described above. When the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, a CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 4120a via the CR unit terminal plate 1150b.

  Various voltages are supplied to the payout control board 1186 from the power supply board 1136 in the same manner as the main control board 4100. The power supply board 1136 includes a capacitor that supplies power to the payout control board 1186 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4110a can store various payout information related to payout in the built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored payout information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 220, a peripheral control board 4140 that performs effect control on the peripheral board 4010 performs a high-quality performance with a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and the like. A sound source IC 4140c and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored are configured. The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates various input / output ports such as a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and a watchdog timer (WDT). When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the various commands. The door frame side lighting / flashing command for outputting a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 5 is output to the lamp driving board 3167 or each light emitting decorative board 3606 provided in the game board 4. A game board side lighting / flashing command for outputting a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the LED of the LED is output to the lamp driving board 3167, or the left rotating lamp motor 245 and the right rotating lamp of the top lamp lighting unit 200 provided in the door frame 5 Motor drive the door frame side motor drive command to output the rotation drive signal to the motor 265 and the central rotary lamp motor 285 A game board side motor drive command that outputs to the board 3013a or outputs a rotation drive signal to the left / right drive motor 3042, drive motor 3061, drive motor 3108, drive motor 3112, and drive motor 3200 provided in the game board 4 Is output to the motor drive board 3013a, a control signal (sound command) indicating sound information extracted from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c, and a display command indicating a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 Is output to the liquid crystal control board 4500.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control board 4500 is performed by the serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 kilo (k). BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, door frame side motor driving command, game board side motor driving command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp driving board 3167 and the motor driving board 3013a. This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp driving board 3167 sends a lighting signal or a blinking signal to the decorative boards 126, 190, 206, and 224 provided on the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108 based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command. , 225, 296, etc., and each lighting decoration board 3606 provided in the game board 4 or a glass unit 450 of the door frame 5 based on the received game board side lighting / flashing command. To the LED 453a of the glass decorative substrate 453. On the other hand, the motor drive board 3013a sends a rotation drive signal based on the received door frame side motor drive command to the left rotation lamp motor 245 and right rotation lamp motor 265 provided in the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108. In addition, the motor 2380, 2416, 3094, 3095, 3100, 3101, 3171, and the like provided on the game board 4 based on the received game board side motor drive command are output to the central rotary lamp motor 285. 3176, 3177, 3200.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is a position detection sensor (photo) for detecting the movable positions of the first accessory unit 2370, the second accessory unit 2400, the shutter-type accessory 3002, and the lower accessory unit 3003 of the game board 4, respectively. Detection signals from the sensors 2382, 2422, 3105, etc.) are inputted via the motor drive board 3013a, and the original position is grasped based on these detection signals. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives detection signals from the left rotation position detection sensor 250, the right rotation position detection sensor 270, and the center rotation position detection sensor 290 that detect the rotation positions of the rotary lights 244, 264, and 284 of the door frame 5, respectively. Are input via the sub-drawer relay board 108 and the motor drive board 3013a, and the rotational positions of the rotary lamps 224, 264 and 284 are grasped based on these detection signals. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control board 4500 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control board 4500, or the operation button unit 370 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. An operation detection signal from the main button sensor 376 or the sub button sensor 378 for detecting the operation of the main button 371 or the sub button 372 is input via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board 3167. The main button 371 includes a vibrating body 371c, and a driving signal is sent from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the vibrating body 371c via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board 3167. Yes.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the side speaker 121 and the lower speaker 391 of the door frame 5 via the lamp driving board 3167 and the sub drawer relay board 1108. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various productions flow.

  The peripheral control board 4140 also includes an external watchdog timer (external WDT) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs peripheral control using the built-in watchdog timer (internal WDT) and the external WDT together. It is diagnosed whether the system of the MPU 4140a is running out of control.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control board 4140 according to this embodiment includes a real-time clock control unit 4190 (hereinafter also referred to as an RTC control unit 4190). FIG. 221 (a) is a diagram for explaining a real-time clock function among the functions of the peripheral control board 4140, and a part of the configuration is omitted for convenience of explanation. FIG. 221 (b) is a diagram for explaining the backup power supply function of the RAM among the functions of the peripheral control board 4140, and a part of the configuration is omitted for convenience of explanation.

<Real time clock function>
The peripheral control MPU 4140a in the peripheral control board 4140 includes a built-in real-time clock 4140aa (hereinafter, built-in RTC 4140aa), as shown in FIG. 221 (a). The built-in RTC 4140aa may be included in a timer function for measuring a time such as a change time set in the change display pattern in the peripheral control board 4140 of the present embodiment described later.

  The RTC control unit 4190 includes a real-time clock 4192 (hereinafter referred to as RTC 4192), a battery 4194, and a RAM 4196. The RTC 4192 includes a register circuit, a clock input circuit, a clock output circuit, an interrupt output circuit, a data input / output circuit, a control circuit, and the like. The RTC 4192 can output current calendar information and time information. The calendar information includes information related to the date, for example, information such as “year”, “month”, “day”, “day of the week”, and the like. The time information includes information about time, for example, information such as “hour”, “minute”, “second”, and the like. The RAM 4196 stores information necessary for the operation of the RTC 4192. The battery 4194 is connected to the RTC 4192 and the RAM 4196 and functions as a backup power source for these. As the battery 4194, a primary battery such as a button battery, a rechargeable secondary battery, or a large-capacity capacitor may be used.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes a power supply board (not shown) for supplying power to each board such as a main board 4000 and a peripheral control board 4140 described later. When the power supply board is turned on, power is supplied to each board, and when the power supply board is turned off, the supply of power to each board is stopped.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is ON (when the power supply board is ON), the RTC 4192 operates by receiving power from the power supply board. On the other hand, the RTC 4192 cannot receive power from the power supply board when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off (when the power supply board is turned off). The operation can be continued even at times.

  The built-in RTC 4140aa is a part that manages information related to the current date and time, and can output current calendar information and time information. Since the built-in RTC 4140aa is a part that operates upon receiving power supply from the power supply board 851, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (when power supply from the power supply board 851 is stopped), current calendar information and time Information is lost. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives calendar information and time information from the RTC 4192 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up (when the power is turned on) or when a failure occurs in the power supply board (for example, when an instantaneous power failure occurs). To the built-in RTC 4140aa. Thereafter, when using the calendar information and the time information, the peripheral control MPU 4140a does not use the calendar information and the time information of the RTC 4192, but uses the calendar information and the time information of the built-in RTC 4140aa.

  If the peripheral control MPU 4140a cannot acquire calendar information and time information from the RTC 4192, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that the RTC 4192 has caused a malfunction and performs error processing. As error processing, a predetermined initial value may be set as the calendar information and time information, and the operation may be performed. The initial value may be, for example, “Saturday, January 1, 2011, 12:00”.

  Here, in the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, a RAM of the peripheral control RAM 4140a described later), a “special date and time (for example, date and time after a predetermined period elapses from the delivery date)” is set in advance. The peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control board 4140) may perform “special processing” when it is in the “special date and time”. However, even if the current time corresponds to the “special date and time”, if the RTC 4192 malfunctions and the error processing is performed, the calendar information and time information are reset to the initial values. “Special processing” may not be performed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the peripheral control board 4140), a store clerk (such as a pachinko hall or a game center) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed switches the “special date and time” to a suitable date and time. You may have the function which can.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the RTC control unit 4190 operates even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off. In this way, the calendar information and time information output by the RTC control unit 4190 can be made accurate. Further, even if the calendar information and time information are lost when the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the built-in RTC 4140aa is newly set with the calendar information and time information output from the RTC control unit 4190 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. The In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can perform control based on accurate calendar information and time information without inquiring of the RTC 4192 each time.

  In the present embodiment, the RTC controller 4190 is provided on the peripheral control board 4140. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is provided on another board (for example, the lamp driving board 3167). Also good. Further, the RTC control unit 4190 may include a GPS update unit that periodically acquires current calendar information and time information from GPS satellites in order to make the current calendar information and time information accurate. .

<RAM backup power supply function>
As shown in FIG. 221 (b), the backup power supply function of the RAM (peripheral control RAM) will be described using the peripheral control MPU 4140a. In the peripheral control MPU 4140a of FIG. 221 (b), configurations other than the functional blocks described below are omitted. As shown in FIG. 221 (b), the peripheral control board 4140 includes a capacitor BC2, a diode SD0, and a RAM (peripheral control RAM) as storage means in addition to a CPU (peripheral control CPU) as calculation means. I have.

  The RAM (peripheral control RAM) is a memory for storing information that is to be retained without being lost even when the pachinko machine 1 (power supply board) is turned off. The diode SD0 is connected to the + 5.25V generating circuit of the power supply substrate on the anode terminal side, and a voltage of + 5.25V can be applied. The diode SD0 has a cathode terminal side connected to the RAM and the capacitor BC2.

  The capacitor BC2 is an electric double layer capacitor and functions as a backup power source for a RAM (peripheral control RAM). The capacitor BC2 has a negative terminal grounded to the ground, while a positive terminal is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0. The power from the + 5.25V generating circuit is supplied to the RAM (peripheral control RAM) and also to the capacitor BC2. Thereby, the capacitor BC2 is charged. Therefore, when the power from the + 5.25V generating circuit is not supplied to the peripheral control board 4140, the charge charged in the capacitor BC2 is supplied to the RAM (peripheral control RAM) and stored in the RAM (peripheral control RAM). Content is preserved. In this case, the diode SD0 can prevent electric charges from being supplied from the capacitor BC2 to the power supply substrate side.

  The CPU (peripheral control CPU) stores the information that it wants to keep without being lost even if the pachinko machine 1 (power supply board) is turned off, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned off. When the power is turned on again, continuous control is possible using the information stored in the RAM (peripheral control RAM) before the power is turned off.

  In this embodiment, the diode SD0, the capacitor BC2, and the RAM (peripheral control RAM) are provided on the peripheral control board 4140. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the diode SD0, the capacitor BC2, and the RAM (peripheral control RAM) may be provided on the liquid crystal control board 4150. Good. A RAM (peripheral control RAM) may be shared by the peripheral control board 4140 and the liquid crystal control board 4150.

[3-4. LCD control board]
Next, a liquid crystal control substrate 4500 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 on the peripheral substrate 4010 includes, as shown in FIG. A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b for storing the above, a VDP (abbreviation of video display processor) 4150c for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350, and various screens displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. A character ROM 4150d for storing data, and a character RAM 4150e to which various data stored in the character ROM 4150d are transferred and copied are provided.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and the like. When the display command is received from the peripheral control board 4140, the detailed description thereof will be described later. The VDP 4150c is controlled to perform drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, as described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350, a plurality of schedule data corresponding to display commands, non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to display commands, and the like. I remember it. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to a non-resident area (to be described later) of the character RAM 4150e. . In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 according to the progress of the schedule data. Yes.

  Upon receiving a display command from the peripheral control board 4140, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts schedule data corresponding to the display command, extracts the top screen data of the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c. . Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data following the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data, and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data (to be described later) from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data, and displays the sprite data on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is held in a line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is held. This is a method of outputting to the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. If the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, if the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, which affects the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. It becomes. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state. Here, the “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. For example, when various persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the sub liquid crystal unit 2350, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Accordingly, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the sub liquid crystal unit 2350, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set in the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 by setting the position on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as “the order of sprite superimposition”). Is displayed. Note that the sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1400 has 800 pixels in the horizontal direction and 600 pixels (SVGA) in the vertical direction, and displays each pixel in one direction along the pixels sequentially from the left to the right of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is driven by main scanning for setting a state and sub-scanning for repeatedly performing main scanning in a direction crossing one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control board 4500 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1400, the liquid crystal drive circuit 1315b performs the main scanning on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the drawing data for one line. Are sequentially output from the left to the right for pixels for one line. When the output for one line is completed, the process proceeds to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, liquid crystal display is performed as main scanning based on the drawing data for the next line. In order from the left to the right of the device 1400, the data is output to pixels for one line.

  The liquid crystal display device 1400 has a built-in backlight (cold cathode tube) that is turned on by the inverter substrate 3017a.

  Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the lower accessory unit 3003, the game ball is supplied onto the guide member 3131 before the sorting effect device 3125 starts to rise. Therefore, the height for lifting the game ball can be made relatively low, and the game medium supply mechanism 3121 can be downsized. Even when the game ball is supplied onto the guide member 3131, the rolling of the game ball on the guide member 3131 is restricted until the distribution effect device 3125 reaches the upper stop position. It is possible to prevent the game balls from being distributed before reaching, that is, before the distribution effect device 3125 becomes visible to the player.

  In particular, the rolling surface 3131a of the guide member 3131 is formed in a substantially arc shape, and the guide member 3131 is held in a substantially horizontal state until the upper stop position is reached. When a game ball is supplied to the moving surface 3131a, the game ball can be guided to the central portion in the left-right direction, which is the lowest position on the rolling surface 3131a, and can be stopped at that position. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from deviating from the rolling surface 3131a, that is, the game ball being distributed, while the distribution effect device 3125 is rising.

  Further, since the game ball is sent to the guide member 3131 from the end side, the supply position of the game ball is lower than that of the guide ball 3131 that is sent from above the guide member 3131, and thus the height of the game medium supply mechanism 3121 is further reduced. can do. In addition, when the guide member 3131 includes the substantially arc-shaped rolling surface 3131a, even when the game ball is sent from the end side of the guide member 3131, the game ball can be guided to the center position of the guide member 3131 and braked. it can.

  In addition, the game ball released from the game medium supply mechanism 3121 is guided to the end side of the guide member 3131 through the game ball guide passage 3155, and the game ball guide passage 3155 Since it moves integrally, even if the stop position of the distribution effect device 3125 is slightly displaced, the game ball can be smoothly fed.

  Moreover, since the upper decoration part 3133 and the lower decoration part 3137 are provided on the front surface of the distribution effect device 3125, the design of the distribution effect device 3125 can be improved. In particular, since the upper decorative portion 3133 and the lower decorative portion 3137 that are hidden and cannot be seen appear at the time of the distribution effect, it is possible to enhance the visual fun and increase the expectation for the distribution effect.

  In addition, since the guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125 is disposed at the rear of the stage (the shelf upper stage 2372) and is visible at the lower stop position, the guide member 3131 is part of the stage. Can be aroused and the impact on the stage can be increased.

  Further, the base member 3150 that supports the pseudo shelf 3132 including the guide member 3131 so as to be swingable is provided with a left rack 3160 and a right rack 3161 on both the left and right sides. Since the gear 3176a to which the rotational force is applied by the 3176 and the right motor 3177 is engaged, when the pair of motors 3176 and 3177 is driven, a force that moves the racks 3160 and 3161 in the vertical direction acts, and the pseudo shelf 3132 Can be moved up and down together with the base member 3150. Thus, by arranging the lifting means on the left and right sides of the distribution effect device 3125, the distribution effect device 3125 can be moved smoothly, and the space for moving (for example, swinging) the pseudo shelf 3132 is provided. Can be secured.

  Further, in the game medium supply mechanism 3121, by rotating the screw 3190 in a certain direction, the game ball entered from the lower side (inflow port 3187) of the cylindrical guiding portion 3183 is raised by the screw 3190, and the cylindrical guiding is performed. It can be discharged from the upper side (discharge port 3185) of the portion 3183. Since the game balls are conveyed by the screws 3190 in this manner, the game balls can be lifted with a relatively simple structure, and the game can be placed at a predetermined position in the cylindrical guiding portion 3183 even when power is not supplied to the game machine. A sphere can be stored.

  The preferred embodiments have been described above, but the embodiments can be variously improved and changed in design.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the game balls are distributed to the first inlet 3153a and the second inlet 3154a. However, the game balls may be distributed to more inlets.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when raising the distribution production | presentation apparatus 3125 from a lower side stop position to an upper side stop position, what showed the rolling of a game ball by maintaining the guide member 3131 in a horizontal state was shown. The rolling may be restricted by repeatedly swinging the guide member 3131 in small increments within a predetermined rotation range.

[3-5. Control processing on main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 to 234. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 223 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing upon occurrence of power interruption. FIG. 224 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 225 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special control process. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the start opening winning process. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the change start process. FIG. 228 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. FIG. 229 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process.

  FIG. 230 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the round number lottery process. FIG. 231 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game start process. FIG. 232 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit game process. FIG. 233 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game process. The timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100. FIG. 234 is an explanatory diagram showing a table configuration in the special symbol random number storage means.

[About main processing]
As shown in FIG. 222, in the main process, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a process at power-on (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (is the set value when a power failure occurs). If the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the CPU peripheral device settings (normal initial settings) are executed. , Setting interrupt timing, etc.).

  If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored as backup data in the RAM. If the RAM clear switch 624a that instructs to clear the backup data stored in the RAM is turned on in the power-on process, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed. In addition, when backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) during the power-on process, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed.

  In the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been activated to the peripheral control board 4140 when normal initialization is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 4140 of the progress of the game, such as the activation of the main control board 4100 and the game state when the power is cut off. Note that the backup data is stored in the RAM even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is again stored. When the supply is started, a power-on process is executed.

  When this power-on process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process in which each game process is repeatedly executed. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Supplying to the device. Therefore, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 is stopped. Sent. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S2, a process at the time of occurrence of power interruption is executed (step S4).

  This process at the time of power interruption occurs when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after a power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery) In this process, the state at the time of the occurrence of a power failure is stored as backup data in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence processing is not interrupt processing, but as branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  By the way, when the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S2). S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

[Processing when a power failure occurs]
Next, as shown in FIG. 223, the process at the time of power-off occurrence is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. First, the main control MPU 4100a performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, a checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM before the power failure is retained at the time of power recovery.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4c). When the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”), the process at the time of the occurrence of a power interruption has started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop in the above processing. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed. However, the watchdog timer enters the process when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even when a power interruption occurs due to a momentary power failure and an infinite loop is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

[About timer interrupt processing]
Next, in the timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during the execution of the main process. As shown in FIG. After executing the register saving process (step S10), the control MPU 4100a executes the processes from step S11 to step S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signal of the above-described switches (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 in step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1 as well. In the payout operation process in step S13, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  In the normal control process of step S14, the normal symbol is changed based on the progress of the game, and the normal electric accessory (that is, the blade 2337 that opens and closes the second start port 2002 by the start port solenoid 2344) is controlled. Then, a process of changing the open / close state of the second start port 2002 is executed. In the special control process in step S15, the first special symbol (first identification symbol) and the second special symbol (second identification symbol) are variably displayed on the special symbol indicators 641 and 642 based on the progress of the game. The special electric accessory (that is, the opening / closing member 2006 that opens and closes the winning prize opening 2003 by the attacker solenoid 2016) is controlled, and the opening / closing state of the winning prize opening 2003 is changed.

  In the subsequent output data setting process in step S16, a process for outputting a state signal indicating a gaming state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer), and a drive signal is output to a special figure start memory display (not shown). The process to perform is performed. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting the effect command to the peripheral control board 4140 is executed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control board 4140 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the process from step S11 to step S17 is executed, a register restoration process (step S18) is executed, and the process ends.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, the big hit determination random number used for the determination of whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state (also called the big hit determination or big hit lottery), the big hit gaming state in the big hit determination A big hit symbol random number used to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be generated, reach production when it is determined that neither a big hit nor a small hit is lost in the big hit lottery, etc. In order to determine the reach determination random number used for the determination (reach determination) as to whether or not to perform the high expectation effect, and the special symbol change display patterns (change time etc.) displayed on the special symbol displays 641 and 642 Variation display pattern random numbers (variable time random numbers) used in the game, and the opening mode of the big winning opening 2003 in the jackpot game (special bonus game) ( Round determination random number used to determine the number of rounds, etc., and normal hit determination used to determine whether or not the blade 2337 that opens and closes the second start port 2002 is controlled to be open (determination per normal lottery) There are random numbers, etc.

  As will be described later, the jackpot determination random number according to this embodiment is also used to determine whether or not a specific condition to be performed when it is determined that the jackpot is lost (lost) is satisfied. Is done. Also, the jackpot symbol random number is also used for the determination related to the jackpot state type (whether the probability variation function or the time shortening function is activated) performed when it is determined that the jackpot is won.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, a big hit determination random number related to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, a big hit symbol random number, a round decision random number, and a normal symbol related to whether or not the blade 2337 is controlled to be opened. Update the random number for hit determination. That is, the random number used for the determination regarding whether or not the big hit gaming state is generated and whether or not the blade 2337 is controlled to be opened is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing in this way, the probability (probability to determine that the big hit gaming state is generated, probability to determine that the blade 2337 is to be opened) in a predetermined period with each random number can be made constant, and the player Can be prevented from being disadvantageous. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the generation of the big hit gaming state and the reach determination random number not related to the normal lottery and the variable display pattern random number are updated.

[About special control processing]
Next, the special control process will be described based on FIG. FIG. 225 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special control process.

  In this special control process, first, first and second start opening prize winning processes (step S110) are performed. In the first / second start opening winning process, a determination is made as to whether or not a game ball has won the first start opening 2001 or the second start opening 2002. Then, after the first / second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process according to the state of the process flag is selectively selected from the plurality of processes (steps S120 to S230) shown in the figure. Will be done.

  More specifically, when the first and second start opening winning processes (step S110) are completed, it is first determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120), and if the processing flag is 0 ( YES in step S120), a fluctuation start process (step S130) is executed. In this variation start process (step S130), after setting for starting the variation display of the special symbol is made based on the result of the lottery for the big hit, etc., the processing flag is updated to “1”. .

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol indicator 641 or the second special symbol indicator 642 (the first special symbol indicator 641 or the second special symbol indicator). After the change display of the special symbol (identification symbol) from the start to the stop display is determined in any one of 642, the processing flag is updated to “2”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). As a result, if the processing flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the changing process (step S180) is executed. In this changing process, the change time set in the change pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and the special symbol display unit 641 or the second special symbol display unit 642 uses the special time indicator based on the time-out. Stop changing the symbol display. Thereafter, when it is determined in the fluctuation start process (step S130) that the big hit is won, the process selection flag is updated to “3”. On the other hand, if it is determined that a specific condition is satisfied even though the big hit is lost (the win is won for the small hit), the processing selection flag is updated to “4”. However, the process selection flag is updated to “0” when the big hit is lost and the specific condition is not satisfied (pure loss). That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process (step S130) is performed again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S170), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 3 (step S190). As a result, if the processing flag is 3 (YES in step S190), a round number lottery process (step S200) is executed. In this round number lottery process, before the big hit game is started, the number of rounds for execution of the big hit game is determined, the determined round number is set, and the processing flag is updated to “5”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S190), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210). As a result, if the process flag is 4 (YES in step S210), a small hit game start process (step S220) is executed. In this small hit game starting process, after the opening mode (opening number and opening time for controlling the opening operation of the opening and closing member 2006) at the big winning opening 2003 according to the small hit is set, the processing flag is set to “6”. Is updated.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 5 (step S230). As a result, if the process flag is 5 (YES in step S230), the big hit game process (step S240) is executed. In the jackpot game process, the opening / closing operation applied to the opening / closing member 2006 is controlled based on the number of rounds set in the round number lottery process (step S200). In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing flag is updated to “0” after determining whether or not to operate the probability variation function or the time reduction function. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process (step S130) is performed again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 5 (NO in step S230), the processing flag is 6 and the small hit game processing (step S250) is executed. In this small hit game process (step S250), the opening / closing operation applied to the open / close member 2006 is controlled based on the opening mode at the big winning opening 2003 set in the small hit game start process (step S220). In addition, when the small hit game process ends, the process flag is updated to “0”, that is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process (step S130) is performed again.

  As described above, when any one of the processes of Step S130, Step S150, Step S180, Step S200, Step S220, Step S240, and Step S250 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag, the special control process is performed. Is terminated.

[About the 1st and 2nd starting entrance prize process]
Next, the first / second start opening winning process (the process of step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 226 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first and second start-up prize winning processes.

  In the first / second start opening winning process (step S110), the process is mainly related to a process for determining whether or not a game ball has been won at the first start opening 2001 or the second start opening 2002, and the winning. On the condition that it is determined that there has been, the process related to the update of the hold state of the corresponding special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is performed.

  Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 2349. As a result, when it is determined that a detection signal is output from second start port sensor 2349, it is determined that a game ball has been won at second start port 2002 (YES in step S201), and then The process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second big hit lottery (the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and the second holding is provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). It is determined whether or not the value of the number counter is less than 4 which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a, first, as the second start hold storage process (step S203), various data obtained by winning a game ball at the second start port 2002 (a jackpot determination random number, a jackpot symbol use) A random number or the like) is stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with a special symbol type or a reservation order. Next, as a hold history update process (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM.

  In the process of step 203, a winning notification command is set to indicate that a game ball has been won at the second starting port 2002 (more precisely, the type of special symbol or the order of holding). The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, when the suspension display on the second start port 2002 side is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like through the control by the peripheral control board 4140, this can be quickly updated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S201 that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2349 is not output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second hold number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the detection signal is 4, next, as a process of step S205, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 2011. As a result, when it is determined that a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 2011, it is determined that a game ball has been won at the first start port 2001 (YES in step S205), and the next Then, the process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first jackpot lottery (such as the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and the value of the first holding number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is the upper limit. A determination is made as to whether the value is less than 4. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data (random hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) acquired by winning a game ball at the first start port 2001 as the first startup hold storage process (step S207). Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) in association with the types of special symbols and the order of suspension. Next, as a hold history update process (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM.

  Also in the process of step 207, a winning notification command is set, which indicates that a game ball has been won at the first starting port 2001 (more precisely, the type of special symbol or the order of holding). The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, it is possible to update the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the like on hold on the first start port 2001 side through the control by the peripheral control board 4140 quickly.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S205 that no game ball has been won at the first start port 2001, or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first holding number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the number has reached 4, at this point, the first and second start opening winning processes are terminated.

  As will be described later, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002, it is rounded together with a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number, and the like. The random number for determining the number is not acquired. Therefore, the random number for determining the number of rounds is not acquired in this way, and the open mode at the big prize opening 2003 is not yet determined (the middle stage of a series of lottery processes for the execution of the big hit game), and the special symbol changes. A game is advanced by determining a pattern, a stop symbol, and the like. Note that the round number determination random number is obtained when the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 after the special symbol is stopped, and is used for the round number determination process (see FIG. 230).

  In this embodiment, after the winning process (step S201 to step S204) for the second starting port 2002 is executed, the winning process (step S205 to step S208) for the first starting port 2001 is executed. Yes. However, instead of this, after the winning process for the first starting port 2001 is executed, the winning process for the second starting port 2002 may be executed.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a may execute a preceding determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and may further transmit a command representing the result of the preceding determination process to the peripheral control board 4140 as a winning notification command. The advance determination process is performed prior to lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, determination of big hit lottery, probability variation lottery, small hit lottery, and variable display pattern described later), and the lottery result is preliminarily determined. It is a process to determine. The preceding determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the preceding determination table. The preceding determination table is a table similar to the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the preceding determination process, by comparing the random number with the preceding determination table, the lottery result when the lottery is performed using the random number (whether the big hit or the small hit, the type of the big hit, the variation display pattern, etc.) (The determination made in this way prior to the lottery is also called “prefetch determination”). The peripheral control board 4140 may realize an effect reflecting the received winning notification command (predetermined determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (the effect is “read ahead”). Also called “Direction”).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the preceding determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the preceding determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

  The main control MPU 4100a transmits a winning notification command indicating the result of the advance determination process only when the gaming state satisfies a specific condition. When the game condition does not satisfy the specific condition, the main control MPU 4100a A winning notification command that does not represent a result may be transmitted. For example, when the variable display resulting from winning at the first starting port 2001 is not started immediately after winning, but is put on hold, the main control MPU 4100a displays a winning notification command indicating the result of the preceding determination process related to the winning. You may send it. Here, in the big hit gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the main control MPU 4100a does not transmit a winning notification command indicating the result of the preceding determination process, but transmits a winning notification command that does not indicate the result of the preceding determination process. May be. The specific conditions regarding the second start port 2002 may be the same.

[About variation start processing]
Next, the variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process.

  In the fluctuation start process (step S130) executed when the process flag is “0”, the main control MPU 4100a firstly sets the values (first start memory) of the two reserved number counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 641 and 642. It is determined whether or not both the number and the second start memory number) are “0” (step S301). Here, the values in the two reserved number counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 641 and 642 are storage areas for the first start memory and the second start memory (special symbol random number storage means 4515 and 4532 (see FIG. 234). )) Indicates the number of random values stored. Therefore, if the value of the hold number counter is “0” in this step S301 (YES), it is determined that none of the start conditions for the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery are satisfied, and then the next step As the process of S318, the change start process is terminated when the process flag is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if both the first start memory number and the second start memory number are not “0” (NO in step S301), the special symbol is used to update the order of execution of the big hit lottery that is in the hold state. Shift processing is performed in the random number storage means 4515 and 4532 (steps S302 to S310).

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 234 (a), the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 is provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [4] 4515d), These storage areas are respectively associated with the values of the first starting storage numbers (“1” to “4”). Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (b), the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 is also provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [4] 4532d). These storage areas are respectively associated with the values of the second starting storage numbers (“1” to “4”). In each of the storage areas 4515a to 4515d and 4532a to 4532d, a big hit determination random number storage area 4580 in which a big hit determination random number is stored, a big hit symbol random number, a reach determination random number, a variable display pattern random number, and the like are stored. A jackpot symbol random number storage area 4581 is provided.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a appropriately operates the random numbers stored in the storage units 4515 and 4532 as a shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area when the special symbol changes. However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery process on the first special symbol side and when the jackpot is won in the lottery process on the second special symbol side Although there is no difference in the expected value of the benefits (such as the number of winning balls that can be earned) given to the player in the lottery process on the first special symbol side, On the other hand, in the lottery process on the second special symbol side, there is a chance that it will be won, and the probability of winning on the small hit is “0%”, so only the lottery process on the second special symbol side is executed As much as possible, the small hit gaming state is not generated.

  In this regard, in the shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, the lottery of the first special symbol is always postponed, and the winning (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device is not won. The random numbers stored in the storage means 4515 and 4532 are manipulated so that all the lotteries (the lottery of the second special symbol) based on the winning at the second starting port 2002 are digested first. As a result, until the number of holds for the lottery on the second special symbol side is interrupted and becomes “0”, only the game (the lottery on the second special symbol side) that is not won in the above-mentioned small win is sequentially performed. Will be able to. In addition, as will be described later, in the game state in which the so-called time-shortening function is activated, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, which is the side to be digested, is not interrupted. Since the control is performed to increase the frequency of changing the game ball to the state where the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 2002, which is the trigger for the execution of the second special symbol side, only the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side is continuously executed. This makes it difficult for the player to notice that a small hit is mounted on the pachinko machine 1.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 227 and FIG. 234, in the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, first, as the process of step S302, the second special symbol that is preferentially digested. Whether or not the value of the holding number counter (second starting storage number) corresponding to the display 642 is “0”, that is, the random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532. Judge whether or not. As a result, if it is determined that the random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 (NO in step S302), the second storage area [1] 4532a stores the second random number. A random number related to the special symbol is read out and acquired (step S303). In other words, as will be described later, the random numbers read in this way (random number for jackpot determination, random number for jackpot symbol, random number for reach determination, variation display pattern random number) are not limited to the process related to jackpot lottery, but the variation pattern (variation) Games for setting the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2006, processing for setting the gaming state, and so on. The second starting game can be progressed with the winning of the ball.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a updates each of the nth (n is a natural number greater than or equal to 2) storage areas (storage area [2] 4532b to storage area) in order to update the digestion rank for the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side. [4] Various random numbers stored in 4532d) are shifted to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [3] 4532c), respectively (step S304). Accordingly, at least the storage area [4] 4532d is vacant, and new start information (holding) for the second special symbol can be stored in the storage area [4] 4532d.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a sets “1” to the special symbol variation flag so as to indicate that the game on the second special symbol side (second start game) is in progress (step S305). ). Furthermore, in order to update the number of holds for the lottery (fluctuation) on the second special symbol side, “1” is subtracted from the number-of-holds counter corresponding to the second special symbol (step S306). Also, at this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp 644 so that the updated number of holdings for the lottery (fluctuation) on the second special symbol side is also reflected in the lighting mode in the second special symbol memory display 644. Is done. Note that the special symbol variation flag set to “1” in this way is reset, for example, when the processing flag is updated to “0” after the variation start processing is completed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 227 and 234, when it is determined in the process of step S302 that no random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 (YES in step S302), the random number relating to the first special symbol is read out from the storage area [1] 4515a of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 and obtained (step S307). That is, as will be described later, the random number read out in this way is not only the process related to the jackpot lottery, but also the process related to the setting of the special symbol variation pattern, the process related to the setting of the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2006, and the setting of the gaming state As a result, the first start game can be progressed by winning the game ball at the first start port 2001.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a updates each of the nth (n is a natural number greater than or equal to 2) storage areas (storage area [2] 4515b to storage areas) in order to update the digestion rank for the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side. [4] Various random numbers stored in 4515d) are respectively shifted to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [3] 4515c) (step S308). As a result, at least the storage area [4] 4515d is vacant, and new start information (hold) for the first special symbol can be stored in the storage area [4] 4515d.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a sets “2” in the special symbol variation flag so as to indicate that the game on the first special symbol side (first start game) is in progress (step S309). ). Furthermore, in order to update the number of holds for the lottery (fluctuation) on the first special symbol side, “1” is subtracted from the hold number counter corresponding to the first special symbol (step S310). Also, at this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp 643 is reflected so that the number of reservations for the lottery (fluctuation) on the first special symbol side updated in this way is also reflected in the lighting mode in the first special symbol memory display 643. Is done. Similarly, the special symbol variation flag set to “2” is reset when the processing flag is updated to “0” after the variation start processing is completed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not the probability variation state has a high probability (step S312). If not the probability variation state (NO in step S312), the probability variation is not activated. Jackpot determination table, that is, a table set with a low probability of being a jackpot, on the other hand, in the case of a probability variation state (YES in step S312), the table at the time of probability variation operation, that is, the probability of being a jackpot Select a highly set table. In this example, the probability of winning a big hit is set to 1/400 when the probability fluctuation is not activated (that is, normal), and the probability of being a big hit is 10 when the probability fluctuation is activated (that is, when the probability is high). / 400.

  After any table is selected in the process of step S313 or step S314, the big hit determination random number for any special symbol acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307 based on the table is a big hit. It is determined whether or not the random number (big hit value) corresponds to (step S315). If it is a big hit value (YES in step S315), the big hit is a probability based on the big hit symbol random number for any special symbol acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307. A determination is made as to whether the type is a type that activates the variable function or the short-time function (a state type related to the gaming state) (step S316). As a result, the flag corresponding to the jackpot state type determined in step S316 is turned on (set) (step S317), and the process proceeds to step S318.

  However, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment leaves the lottery relating to the execution mode (number of rounds) of the big hit game as a process that has not yet been performed in the process of step S316. As will be described later, after the special symbol (identification symbol) is stopped and displayed, the lottery is in an unexecuted state until the game ball passes through the special symbol gate 2500 and the round number determination random number is acquired. In this way, some lottery processing (lottery for the number of rounds) in the series of lottery processing (game lottery for the progress of the game) related to the execution of the big hit game has not yet been performed In this stage, the special symbol change is started and stopped.

  In such a configuration, the lottery process for the number of rounds that can affect the profits that the player can enjoy is not performed until the special symbol is stopped based on the winning of the big win (special win). It is left in an unexecuted state. That is, in this case, even if the special symbol is stopped based on the winning of the big hit, a series of lottery processing (game lottery relating to the progress of the game) is not completed and the processing stage is still in progress (after winning) Since the game execution mode is not yet determined, the game is maintained in a state where the game cannot be executed after winning. In addition, the midway processing stage as the game lottery described above can be maintained until a new game ball is launched by the player and the game ball is received by the special gate 2500. Even after the special symbol is stopped based on the above, until the big hit game is started, for example, the information about the result of the above game lottery can be performed without exposing information by the round indicator 648 or the like. As a result, it is possible to favorably maintain the game interest until the jackpot game is actually executed.

  On the other hand, if the acquired random number is a loss that is not a big hit value (NO in step S315), it is determined whether or not the random number is a random number corresponding to a small hit (small hit value) (step S319). If it is a small hit value (YES in step S319), the small hit flag is set to “ON” (step S320), assuming that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S318. However, if it is not the small hit value (NO in step S319), the process proceeds to step S318 without going through step S320, assuming that the predetermined specific condition is not satisfied. In step S318, the process flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start process is terminated. In this example, the probability of winning a small hit is set to 3/400 regardless of the gaming state.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regardless of the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, random numbers generated with a random number range of, for example, 0 to 99 as the jackpot symbol random number. Numeric values are prepared, and in the processing of step S303 or step S307, one of these random values is acquired as the value of the random number for the big hit symbol. The acquired random number value is subjected to a process for determining whether or not it is a jackpot state type that activates the probability variation function and the time-shortening function in the process of step S316. For example, If the random number value is 0 to 57, it is determined as a big hit A, 58 to 63 is determined as a big hit B, 64 to 81 is determined as a big hit C, and 82 to 99 is determined as a big hit D. Determined.

  According to such a determination method, as shown in FIG. 236, the probability that the state type of big hit (hit involving the operation of the condition device) is determined as “big hit A” is “58%”, and the big hit The probability that the state type is determined to be “big hit B” is “6%”, and the probability that the big hit state type is determined to be “big hit C” and “big hit D” is “18%”, respectively.

  Here, when “hit A” is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the corresponding win, after the big hit game corresponding to the win of that big hit A is performed, the probability variation function and the short-time function (open) Both of these are controlled to a probabilistic external advantageous gaming state in which both of them are activated.

  On the other hand, if “big hit B” is won, the big hit game corresponding to the big win B is won only if the gaming state at the time of the win is “external advantageous gaming state in which the time reduction function operates”. After being performed, it is controlled to a probability changing external advantageous gaming state in which both the probability changing function and the time shortening function (open extension function) are activated. However, if the game state at the time of the selection is not the “external advantageous game state in which the time reduction function operates”, after the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit B is performed, the probability variation function and the short time function (open extension extension) Function) is controlled to a high probability gaming state (probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state) in which only the probability variation function is activated.

  On the other hand, when “big hit C” is won, regardless of the game state at the time of the hit, after the big hit game corresponding to the win of the big hit C is performed, the probability variation function and the short time function (open) (Extended function), and the high probability gaming state (probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state) in which only the probability variation function operates is controlled.

  On the other hand, when “big hit D” is won, regardless of the game state at the time of the win, after the big hit game corresponding to the win of the big hit D is performed, the probability variation function and the short time function (open extension function) The game is controlled to a normal game state (normally an external disadvantageous game state) in which none of the functions is activated.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine according to this embodiment, “big hit A” to “big hit D” are prepared as hit (big hit) state types accompanied by the operation of the condition device. Accordingly, the processing of step S317 will be described in further detail. When the big hit state type is “big hit A”, the big hit flag A is turned on (set), and when it is “big hit B”, the big hit flag B is turned on ( The big hit flag C is turned on (set) when it is “big hit C”, and the big hit flag D is turned on (set) when it is “big hit D”.

  However, as will be described later, in the round number lottery process (step S200), the opening / closing member 2006 is repeatedly opened / closed many times (in this embodiment, 16 times) in a long-time opening / closing pattern, and the opening / closing member 2006 is opened / closed. The game is determined to be a game per middle opening which is repeated several times (9 times in the present embodiment) in a long-time opening / closing pattern. As a result, for the type of big hit, "big hit A" to "big hit D" ”Is further classified.

  More specifically, “big hit A” is divided into two types (round hit A1) in which a game per long release is executed as a big hit game and “big hit A2” in which a game per middle release is executed as a big hit game (round) The number of rounds related to the number is different, and the expected value (number of rounds) of the number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player in the jackpot game is different between the round types. Similarly, for “big hit B” to “big hit D”, “big hit B” is a “big hit B1” in which a long hit game is executed as a big hit game, and a middle open game is executed as a big hit game. There are two round types of “big hit B2”. “Big hit C” is a “big hit C1” in which a game per long release is executed as a big hit game, and a middle hit per game is executed as a big hit game “ The jackpot C2 has two round types. The jackpot D is a jackpot game in which a long hit game is executed as a jackpot game, and a jackpot game is executed in a middle hit game as a jackpot game. D2 ”has two round types.

  The long-time opening / closing pattern means that a predetermined long time (for example, 26 seconds to 33 seconds) elapses after the opening / closing member 2006 is opened from the closed state, or a predetermined large number (for example, 10). This is a pattern in which the opening / closing member 2006 is returned to the closed state when any of the following conditions is satisfied: In the long-time opening / closing pattern, the time for which the opening / closing member 2006 is opened is longer than the time for which the opening / closing member 2006 is opened in the small-time opening / closing pattern described later. That is, in the game per long opening, a large amount of prize balls (about 1750 in the present embodiment) can be obtained by the player as a privilege. In the present embodiment, approximately 1000) can be substantially acquired by the player.

  Incidentally, when such a big hit A to D (hit with the operation of the condition device) is selected as a small hit (hit without the operation of the condition device), the opening / closing member 2006 is opened and closed for a short time. The game is only played per small opening (small hit game) repeated a small number of times (in this embodiment, twice in this embodiment), and the same game was played before the small opening game (small hit game) was played. There is no such thing as a different gaming state. Note that the small time opening / closing pattern means that a predetermined small time (for example, 3 to 6 seconds) has elapsed after the opening / closing member 2006 is opened from the closed state, or a predetermined small number (for example, two) of games. This is a pattern in which the opening / closing member 2006 is returned to the closed state when any of the winning conditions is satisfied in the big winning opening 2003. In other words, in the game per small opening (small winning game), since only a small amount of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment) can be obtained by the player as a privilege, the opening / closing member 2006 operates. In spite of this, it can be said that attention should be paid to the handling (positioning) of the game design in that the game interest may decrease.

[About variation pattern setting processing]
Next, the variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is set based on the result of the lottery (Step S315) for winning the big hit will be described. FIG. 228 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  As shown in FIG. 228, in the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the process flag is “1”, the main control MPU 4100a first sets the big hit flag “ON” as the process of step S401. It is determined whether or not. As a result, when it is determined that the big hit flag is “ON” (YES in step S401), the big hit fluctuation pattern table setting process described later is performed in order to set the fluctuation pattern when the big hit is won. This is performed (step S402).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S401 that the big hit flag is not “ON”, it is next determined in step S403 whether the small hit flag is “ON”. As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is “ON” (YES in step S403), it is determined that the small hit is won because the specific condition is satisfied although it is lost. In order to set the fluctuation pattern at the time, a small hit fluctuation pattern table setting process described later is performed (step S404).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S403 that the small hit flag is not “ON”, then in step S405, a high expectation effect (for example, a reach effect, etc.) with a high degree of expectation for winning the big hit is obtained. Judge whether or not to perform. In the process of step S405, for example, when the reach determination random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 227) is a predetermined hit value, it is determined that the high expectation effect is performed, and the acquired reach When the determination random number is not a predetermined hit value, it is determined that the high expectation effect is not performed. As a result, if it is determined that a high expectation effect should be performed (YES in step S405), a high expectation loss variation pattern table setting process described later is performed so that a variation pattern for performing the high expectation effect is set. This is performed (step S406).

  Regarding the number of predetermined hit values prepared for the random numbers for reach determination, the normal external disadvantaged game state (the probability variation function and the time reduction function are both inactive), the normal external advantageous game state (only the time reduction function operates) It is also possible to make the game state different for each of the game states of the probability change external disadvantage game state (only the probability change function is activated) and the probability change external advantage game state (both the probability change function and the time reduction function are activated). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal external disadvantageous game state, the probability that it is determined that a high expectation effect should be performed based on the reach determination random number being a predetermined hit value is Although it is “1/12”, in the normal external advantageous game state and the probabilistic external advantageous game state, the degree of expectation at the time of reach is further increased (or efficient holding and digestion is performed). Alternatively, it may be determined that the high-expected performance should be performed with a lower probability. On the other hand, in the probable external disadvantaged game state, it is determined that a high-expected performance should be performed with a higher probability so that the possibility of a big hit can be made more conscious. Also good.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S405 that a high-expected effect with a high degree of expectation for winning the big hit should not be performed (NO in step S405), the loss variation pattern when the high-expected effect is not performed. In order to set (a normal loss variation pattern), a low-expected loss variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S407).

  Here, the table set in the low expectation loss variation pattern table setting process is prepared in association with each of a plurality of gaming states. For example, in the normal gaming state, the number of holds is a predetermined value. When this is the case, the shortening variation is performed.

  However, in the gaming state in which the short-time function is activated, the fluctuation time is set so that the number of holds for the lottery (fluctuation) on the second special symbol side where the probability of winning a small hit is “0” is difficult to break. Is set. More specifically, when the number of reserves on the second special symbol side is less than or equal to the predetermined value, the shortened variation is not used in spite of the gaming state in which the time reduction function operates, and the shortened variation is employed in the normal gaming state. Only the variation time (variation time longer than the shortening variation in the normal gaming state) having a length equal to or longer than the variation time when not being played is selected. In addition, the variation time on the first special symbol side will not adopt the shortened variation regardless of the number of reserves, only the variation time having a length equal to or longer than the variation time when the shortened variation is not adopted in the normal gaming state. Is to be selected. As a result, when the gaming machine is in a game state in which the short-time function is activated, it is possible to suppress the holding of the first special symbol side where the small hit can be won, so that the pachinko machine 1 has a small hit. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that it is installed.

  As will be described later, as shown in FIG. 228, when the selection table for the variation pattern is set in any of the processes of step S402, step S404, step S406, and step S407, the main control MPU 4100a In step S410, a special symbol variation pattern is determined based on the set selection table. Next, in step S411, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol determined in this way is set as an effect command, and the winning information is based on the state of the big hit flag (step S317) or the small hit flag (step S320). A command (a type information indicating whether “hit A” to “hit D” or a command indicating a win of a small hit, etc., or a command indicating a win of a small hit) is set.

  Furthermore, the value of the variation time according to the determined variation pattern is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is set to ON (step S413). When the special symbol LED operation flag is set to ON, the first special symbol indicator 641 or the second special symbol is displayed based on the value of the special symbol fluctuation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. Variation display according to the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as the display 642 is started. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S414), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  By the way, the variation pattern set in the variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 224 as an effect command set in the process of step S411. . Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the result of the big win lottery is shown based on the variation pattern shown by the effect command and the information shown by the winning information command through the control described later on the peripheral control board 4140 side. Thus, the display effect is performed.

  However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is set as described above when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device. Without ending within the variation time of the variation pattern, the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 is extended to the period after the stop of the variation display related to the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs. The time is extended), and it can be executed to show that it has been lost in the hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device (the extended effect pattern in FIG. 245 (b)). That is, in this case, after the special symbol is stopped, when the game per small opening is executed, the display effect that encourages the acquisition of the prize ball will not appear, and it will be relatively early after it is shown that the big win is lost. It becomes possible to shift to fluctuations (reservation of special symbols), and it is possible to suitably avoid the extension that may give some expectation as an effect until the opening / closing member 2006 operates. .

  In addition, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a special effect is provided with respect to the display effect at the time of the above-mentioned small hit (extended loss effect) that is indicated that the big hit is lost after the special symbol is stopped. There is also a display effect (extended jackpot effect) that shows that the winner is won after the symbol stops. That is, when the result of the big hit lottery is a win (hit) with the operation of the condition device, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 does not end within the fluctuation time of the set fluctuation pattern, and the first special The symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 is won for winning (big hit) with the operation of the condition device after extending to the period after the stop of the variable display concerning the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs. (Extended effect pattern in FIG. 245 (a)).

  That is, in this case, the display effect at the time of the small hit is positioned as a simple loss effect (highly expected loss variation pattern) that appears when the big hit is lost. As a result, it becomes difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device. Can be suppressed.

  However, as the function display unit 640 of the pachinko machine 1, instead of the form (7 segment LED) shown in FIG. 87, the form (eight LED groups not forming a specific symbol) as shown in FIG. 235 is adopted. You may do it. In this example, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 configured by 7 segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. Further, the first special symbol memory display 643 and the second special symbol memory display 644 are each configured by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory display 646 is configured by two LEDs.

  The function display unit 640 can achieve the same effects as described above, and the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 are configured by eight LED groups that do not have any symbols. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player as compared with the case where the 7-segment LED having the meaning by the numerical symbols is used. Therefore, since the contents displayed on the function display unit 640 are difficult to understand, it is possible to suppress the display of the function display unit 640 from being concerned and difficult to concentrate on the game during the game, The game can be more enjoyed by devoting itself to movable effects and effects images.

  When the function display unit 640 shown in FIG. 235 is adopted, the lighting state (when the special symbol is stopped) of the plurality of LEDs (special symbol) at the time of winning the small hits, the plurality of LEDs at the time of winning the big hit It is desirable to perform control so that it appears as an aspect similar to each other, for example, a difference from the lighting state of the (special symbol) (when the special symbol is stopped) only whether one LED is lit or not. That is, in this case, when the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the special symbol is stopped, it is immediately determined which result is obtained (at least after the effect is extended). It will be difficult to grasp until a short time has elapsed until the winning is clearly indicated. Therefore, it is possible not only to concentrate on the extended display effect (extended effect), but also to the period after the special symbol is stopped by reducing interest in the special symbol (multiple LEDs). Even a display effect that has been made can be made difficult for the player to recognize. As a result, it is possible to suppress the guessing that a small hit is mounted on the pachinko machine 1 due to the particularity when the extended effect appears, and as a result, according to the winning of the small hit It is possible to suppress a decrease in game entertainment due to the opening / closing member 2006 operating.

[Fluctuation pattern determination process for big hits]
Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of big hit will be described based on FIG. FIG. 237 is a table showing an example of the normal big hit fluctuation pattern table T1, the normal small hit fluctuation pattern table T2, and the normal high expected loss fluctuation pattern table T3. In addition, ○ in the winning column in FIG. 237 means a big hit, △ means establishment of a specific condition at the time of loss (small hit), and × means failure of a specific condition at the time of loss (pure loss). means.

  As described above, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON in the process of step S401 (see FIG. 228), the main control MPU 4100a is won as a jackpot as the process of step S402 (see FIG. 228). The big hit variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the variation pattern at the time of the change is set.

  In this big hit variation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function and the time reduction function are not activated), the normal external advantageous gaming state (only the time reduction function is activated), the probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function only) Operation) and a probability change external advantageous game state (both the probability change function and the time shortening function are activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different big hit variation pattern table (not shown) is prepared for each gaming state, and usually the external disadvantageous gaming state (probability changing function and time-saving function are both disabled). When it is determined that the state is in the operation), the normal big hit fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 237 is selected regardless of the big hit state type.

  Then, as described above, when the normal big hit fluctuation pattern table T1 is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a is acquired by the process of step S303 (see FIG. 227) while referring to the selected table T1. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 (LED) is also determined.

  Here, assuming that values from “0” to “99”, for example, can be acquired as the random display pattern random numbers for the special symbols, these values from “0” to “99” are obtained in the normal jackpot variation pattern table T1. Among them, nine specific values are allocated to the fluctuation number 1 (variation time Ta1) (selection rate at the time of big hit 9%), and 20 specific values are allocated to the fluctuation number 5 (variation time Tb1). (Selection rate at big hit 20%), 30 specific values are assigned to variation number 9 (variation time Tc1) (selection rate at big hit 30%), and 40 specific values are It is assigned to the fluctuation number 12 (fluctuation time Td1) (selection rate at big hit 40%), and one specific value is assigned to the fluctuation number 15 (fluctuation time Te) (selection rate 1 at big hit) %). Thus, except for the big hit fixed variation number 15, the number of specific values (hit values) allocated tends to increase as the variation number increases.

  As will be described later, when variation number 1 (variation time Ta1) is selected, it is shown that the big hit is won with the effect content “a (or a ′)” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the display effect is performed and the change number 5 (change time Tb1) is selected, the winning content is won with the effect content “b (or b ′)” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Is displayed, and when the variation number 9 (variation time Tc1) is selected, the big win is won with the content “c (or c ′)” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the display effect indicating that the change number 12 (change time Td1) is selected, the effect content “d (or d ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the event that a display effect indicating that the player has won the jackpot is performed and the change number 15 (change time Te1) is selected, the effect content “e” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. A display effect is shown to indicate that the winner is won. Incidentally, the production content a, the production content a ′, the production content b ′, the production content b ′, the production content c, the production content c ′, the production content d, the production content d ′, and the production content e are all in the liquid crystal display device 1400. The types of display effects that appear (for example, the types of reach effects and the types of story effects) are different.

  As will also be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Tb1 is longer than the fluctuation time Ta1, the fluctuation time Tc1 is longer than the fluctuation time Tb1, and is longer than the fluctuation time Tc1. The fluctuation time Td1 is longer, and the fluctuation time Te is longer than the fluctuation time Td1.

  Then, as described above, in such a normal big hit variation pattern table T1, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number obtained in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 227). The effect command associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the command “01H” if the variation number is 1) and the winning information command (when winning a big hit or when winning a big hit, Type information about which of “A” to “Big D” and a command indicating winning of a small hit) are set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the variation time associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the variation time Ta1 if the variation number is 1) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned ON. It is set (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S414).

  On the other hand, when performing the big hit variation pattern table setting process, if it is determined that the game state is different from the normal external disadvantageous game state, the big hit variation pattern table associated with the determined game state is selected. Then, a variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined variation pattern, but this description is omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal external disadvantaged game state, which of the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side and the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side was won? Regardless of whether or not the normal big hit variation pattern table T1 is selected, when the first special symbol side lottery (variation) is performed, and when the second special symbol side lottery (variation) is performed Thus, display effects with different contents may appear by selecting the big hit variation pattern table having different contents.

  When it is determined that the game is in the normal external disadvantageous game state (the probability variation function and the time reduction function are both inactive), the normal big hit variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 237 is selected regardless of the big hit state type. However, based on the state of the big hit flag corresponding to the big hit state type, any of the normal big hit variation pattern tables prepared for each big hit state type may be selectively used.

  That is, in this case, the variation pattern selection rate can be made different according to the state of the jackpot, and when a specific variation pattern appears, there is a bias such as increasing the probability of being a jackpot of the particular state type. It will be held. Also, even if the variation time is the same, the variation number (production command) can be made different according to the jackpot state type. In this case, the variation pattern can be changed by simply confirming the production command. Of course, the status type of the jackpot can be grasped. Therefore, if the appropriateness is determined by comparing the effect command and the winning information command on the peripheral control board 4140 side, the reliability of communication with the main control board 4100 is improved. Will be able to.

[Change pattern determination process for small hits]
Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of a small hit will be described based on FIG.

  As described above, if it is determined that the small hit flag is ON in the process of step S403 (see FIG. 228), the main control MPU 4100a performs the small hit as the process of step S404 (see FIG. 228). A small hit variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the variation pattern when winning is set.

  In this small hit variation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function and the time reduction function are not activated), the normal external advantageous gaming state (only the time reduction function is activated), the probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function) Only) and a probability-variable external advantageous gaming state (both probability-changing function and time-shortening function are operating). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different small hit variation pattern table (not shown) is prepared for each gaming state, and usually the external disadvantageous gaming state (probability changing function and time reduction function) When it is determined that it is inactive), the normal small hit variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 237 is selected.

  Then, as described above, when the normal small hit fluctuation pattern table T2 is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a obtains by the process of step S303 (see FIG. 227) while referring to the selected table T2. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator 1186 (LED) is also determined.

  Here, assuming that a value from “0” to “99” can be acquired as the random display pattern random number of the special symbol, in the normal small hit variation pattern table T2, these values from “0” to “99” are obtained. Among the values, 35 specific values are allocated to the variation number 2 (variation time Ta2) (selection rate at small hit 35%), and 30 specific values are the variation number 6 (variation time Tb2). (Selection rate at small hit 30%), 30 specific values are allocated to variation number 10 (variation time Tc2) (selection rate at small hit 20%), 5 A specific value is assigned to the fluctuation number 13 (fluctuation time Td2) (selection rate at the time of small hit 5%). In this way, the number assigned to a specific value (small hit value) tends to decrease as the variation number increases.

  As will be described later, when variation number 2 (variation time Ta2) is selected, a display that shows the result of the big hit lottery while the effect content “a (or a ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the effect is performed and the variation number 6 (variation time Tb2) is selected, the display of the result of the big hit lottery is shown while the effect content “b (or b ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the production is performed and the variation number 10 (variation time Tc2) is selected, the display of the big hit lottery result is displayed with the production content “c (or c ′)” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the effect is performed and the variation number 13 (variation time Td2) is selected, the effect “d (or d ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Display performance the result of the lottery is shown is carried out. By the way, as such a display effect in which the result of the big hit lottery is shown, for example, a display effect showing that the big hit is lost, or a game state in which a winning ball can be obtained by the operation of the opening and closing member 2006 is transferred. A display effect (display effect that appears even when a big win is won) or the like is appropriately adopted.

  As will also be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Ta2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) according to the fluctuation time Ta1 as a reference. When the time Ta1 (variation number 1) or the variation time Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, any result is obtained as a big hit lottery with the production content “a (or a ′)” appearing. A directing of what was done appears. The fluctuation time Tb2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) corresponding to the fluctuation time Tb1 based on the fluctuation time Tb1, and the fluctuation time Tb1 (fluctuation number 5) or the fluctuation time Tb2 (fluctuation time) When the number 6) is selected, the production contents “b (or b ′)” appear, and a production of a pair appears as to what result was obtained as the big hit lottery. Further, the fluctuation time Tc2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) corresponding to the fluctuation time Tc1 based on the fluctuation time Tc1, and the fluctuation time Tc1 (fluctuation number 9) or the fluctuation time Tc2 (fluctuation time). When the number 10) is selected, the production contents “c (or c ′)” appear in each case, and a pair of productions appear as to what results were obtained as the big hit lottery. The variation time Td2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) of the variation time Td1 based on the variation time Td1, and the variation time Td1 (variation number 12) or the variation time Td2 (variation time). When the number 13) is selected, the production contents “d (or d ′)” appear in each case, and a pair production of what kind of result is obtained as a big hit lottery appears.

  Then, as described above, in such a normal small hit variation pattern table T2, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 227). And an effect command (for example, command “02H” for variation number 2) associated with the determined variation pattern, and a winning information command (the winning type including winning and winning hits per win) Are set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the variation time associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the variation time Ta2 for variation number 2) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned ON. It is set (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S414).

  On the other hand, in performing the small hit variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the game state is different from the normal external disadvantageous game state, the small hit variation pattern table associated with the determined game state Is selected, a variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined variation pattern, but this description is omitted. However, when a small win is won in a gaming state in which the short-time function is activated (external advantageous gaming state), a single variation pattern is determined, and display processing (for example, pure loss) It is desirable that the same display process as the low-expected effect at the time).

[Variation pattern determination process for highly expected performance]
Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of high expectation effect will be described based on FIG.

  As described above, if it is determined that the high expectation effect should be performed in the process of step S405 (see FIG. 228), the main control MPU 4100a performs high expectation as the process of step S406 (see FIG. 228). In order to set a variation pattern when performing an effect, a highly expected loss variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S406).

  Even in this high-expected loss variation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (both the probability variation function and the time reduction function are not activated), the normal external advantageous gaming state (only the time reduction function is activated), the probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state ( It is determined whether the game state is one of the probability variation function only) and the probability variation external advantageous game state (both the probability variation function and the time reduction function are activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different high expectation loss variation pattern table (not shown) is prepared for each gaming state, and the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (probability changing function, time reduction function) ) Is selected, the normal high-expected loss variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 237 is selected.

  As described above, when the normal high-expected loss variation pattern table T3 is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a refers to the selected table T3 and performs the process of step S303 (see FIG. 227). Based on the obtained variation display pattern random number, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 (LED) is also determined.

  Here, assuming that values from “0” to “99”, for example, can be acquired as the random display pattern random numbers for the special symbol, these values from “0” to “99” are obtained in the normal high-expected loss variation pattern table T3. 40 specific values are allocated to variation number 3 (variation time Ta3) (selection rate 40% at the time of high expectation loss), and 17 specific values are variation number 4 (variation time) Ta4) (selection rate at high expectation loss 17%) and 25 specific values are assigned to change number 7 (change time Tb3) (selection rate at high expectation loss 25%) , 13 specific values are allocated to variation number 8 (variation time Tb4) (selectivity 13% at the time of high expectation loss), and 3 specific values are allocated to variation number 11 (variation time Tc3). (Selection rate at the time of high expectation loss) %), Selectivity of 2% during the two specific values are assigned to the change number 14 (variable time Td3) (High disappointing). In this way, the number of specific values (loss values) allocated tends to decrease as the variation number increases.

  As will be described later, when variation number 3 (variation time Ta3) is selected, the winning content was lost on the liquid crystal display device 1400 with the effect content “a, no development (or a ′)” appearing. When the display effect is displayed and the change number 4 (change time Ta4) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 has been defeated in the big win while the effect content “a, with development” appears. Is displayed, or a display effect indicating that the player has been defeated in a big win with the effect content “c ′” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed, and the variation number 7 (variation time Tb3) is selected. When the effect is displayed, a display effect indicating that the player has been defeated with a big hit is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 with the effect content “b, no development (or b ′)” appearing. When the variation number 8 (variation time Tb4) is selected, a display effect or a liquid crystal display indicating that the player has lost the jackpot with the effect content “b, with development” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the display effect is displayed on the display device 1400 and the winning effect is “d ′” and the winning effect is shown, and the change number 11 (change time Tc3) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed. When the production content “c (or c ′)” is displayed, the display production is performed to indicate that the player has lost the jackpot. When the variation number 14 (variation time Td3) is selected, the liquid crystal display In the device 1400, a display effect is shown which indicates that the player has lost the jackpot while the effect content “d (or d ′)” appears. By the way, as will be described later, when the variation number is 4 or 8, it appears as a loss production pattern with different production contents depending on the control mode on the peripheral control board 4140 side. Since the variation number of the jackpot effect pattern which is a pair of variation numbers 4 and 8 is changed between the variation numbers 1 and 5 and the variation numbers 9 and 12, the control mode on the peripheral control board 4140 side is set. In response to this, it is possible to cause production patterns having different jackpot expectations.

  Further, as will be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Ta3 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) according to the fluctuation time Ta1 as a reference. When the time Ta1 (variation number 1), the variation time Ta2 (variation number 2), or the variation time Ta3 (variation number 3) is selected, the production content “a” appears, A production of a pair about whether the result was obtained appears. However, when the variation time Ta1 (variation number 1) or the variation time Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, the production content “a” is displayed until the opening period before the opening / closing member 2003 is opened / closed by the opening / closing member 2006. Since such an effect may be extended, a variation time Ta4 (variation number 4) longer than the variation time Ta3 (variation number 3) is prepared as a loss effect pattern to be paired when such an extension effect is performed. ing. The variation time Ta4 (variation number 4) is also set as a time (same or approximate time) according to the variation time Tc3 (variation number 11) as a reference. Depending on the control on the control board 4140 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern of the variation time Tc3 (variation number 11). As a result, the variation number of the jackpot effect pattern that becomes the pair of the variation number 4 of the lost effect pattern is changed between the variation number 1 and the variation number 9 as described above.

  Furthermore, the fluctuation time Tb3 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) corresponding to the fluctuation time Tb1 based on the fluctuation time Tb1, and the fluctuation time Tb1 (fluctuation number 5) or the fluctuation time Tb2 ( When the variation number 6) and the variation time Tb3 (variation number 7) are selected, the production contents “b” appear, and a pair of productions appear as to what result was obtained as a big hit lottery. However, when the variation time Tb1 (variation number 5) or the variation time Tb2 (variation number 6) is selected, the effect content “b” is displayed until the opening period before the opening / closing member 2003 is opened / closed by the opening / closing member 2006. Since such an effect may be extended, a variation time Tb4 (variation number 8) longer than the variation time Tb3 (variation number 7) is prepared as a loss effect pattern to be paired when such an extension effect is performed. ing. The fluctuation time Tb4 (fluctuation number 8) is also set as a time (same or approximate time) in accordance with the fluctuation time Td3 (variation number 14) as a reference. Depending on the control on the control board 4140 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern of the variation time Td3 (variation number 14). As a result, the change number of the jackpot effect pattern that is the pair of the change number 8 of the lost effect pattern is changed between the change number 5 and the change number 12 as described above.

  As described above, in such a normal high-expected loss variation pattern table T3, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 227). Then, an effect command associated with the determined variation pattern (eg, command “03H” for variation number 3) and a winning information command (including winning and winning points for winning and winning the winning combination) The command indicating the seed is set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the variation time associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the variation time Ta3 for variation number 3) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned ON. It is set (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S414).

  On the other hand, when performing the big hit variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the game state is different from the normal external disadvantageous game state, the high expectation variation pattern table associated with the determined game state is displayed. A selection is made, a variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined variation pattern, but this description is omitted.

  According to such a normal big hit fluctuation pattern table T1, a normal small hit fluctuation pattern table T2, and a normal high expectation loss fluctuation pattern table T3, the big hit expectation degree is a display effect b rather than a display effect a. The display effect c is higher than the display effect b, the display effect d is higher than the display effect c, and the display effect e is higher than the display effect d. In particular, since the display effect e can appear only when the jackpot is won, it is determined that the jackpot is won when the effect e appears.

[About change processing]
Next, the changing process (step S180) executed when the process flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 229 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process.

  As shown in FIG. 229, in the changing process (step S180), the main control MPU 4100a first sets the change time set in the timer in the process of step S412 (see FIG. 228) as the process of step S501. It is determined whether or not the time is up. If the variation time set in the timer is not up (NO in step S501), the variation processing is terminated.

  If the variation time set in the timer has expired (YES in step S501), the special figure LED operation flag set to ON in the process of step S413 is set to OFF (step S502). When the special symbol LED operation flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol indicator 641 or the second special symbol is displayed based on the value of the special symbol fluctuation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The variation display (variation of special symbol) related to the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as the indicator 642 is ended. In addition, when the display effect for the big hit lottery is being performed in the liquid crystal display device 1400, a confirmation stop command indicating that the effect result in the display effect should be confirmed and displayed on the peripheral control board 4140 in order to end the display effect. Is set (step S503). This fixed stop command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the effect result in the display effect is confirmed and displayed through the control described later on the peripheral control board 4140 side. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, depending on the control mode in the peripheral control board 4140, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not ended despite the reception of the definite stop command, and the subsequent opening period As described above, the display effect may be controlled so that the display effect is extended.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S504). If the big hit flag is ON (YES in step S504), the processing flag is updated to “3” on the assumption that the special symbol is in the processing stage where the special symbol is suspended, as indicated by the fact that the big win is won (step S505). Then, the changing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not ON but the loss is a big hit (NO in step S504), it is next determined in step S506 whether the small hit flag is ON. If the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S506), the processing flag is updated to “4” on the assumption that the special symbol is in the process stage where the special symbol is suspended as indicated by winning the small hit (step S506). S507), the process during change is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not ON but is a pure loss (a loss that does not satisfy the specific condition) (NO in step S506), it is special to indicate that both the big hit and the small hit are lost. The processing flag is updated to “0” on the assumption that the symbol is in the processing stage where the variation is stopped (step S508), and the variation processing is terminated. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation relating to the special symbol is performed on the condition that the processing is suspended in the process of step S130.

[Round lottery processing]
Next, the round number lottery process (step S200) executed when the process flag is “3” will be described. FIG. 230 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the round number lottery process.

  As shown in FIG. 230, in the round number lottery process (step S200), the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the condition device is in operation as a process of step S601.

  Here, this condition device is in a non-operating state when it is in a processing state immediately after shifting to the round number lottery process (step S200). Therefore, when the process is in the process status immediately after shifting to the round number lottery process (step S200), it is determined that the condition device is not yet operated (NO in step S601), and then the process of step S612. I do.

  That is, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, a predetermined time from when the special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the winning of the jackpot is determined although the condition device is operating. The big hit game is controlled as a period (a first closing control period in which the opening / closing member 2006 is maintained and controlled in the closed state) for a certain period of time that is not started. Therefore, first, in the process of step S612, the condition device is activated. Next, as a process of step S613, a function (probability variation function) that increases the winning probability of winning (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device than when in the normal external disadvantageous game state or the normal external advantageous game state is in operation ( It is determined whether the state is a probability variation state. As a result, when it is determined that the game state is one of the probability variation external disadvantageous game state and the probability variation external advantageous game state and the probability variation function is in operation (YES in step S613), the probability variation function The operation is stopped (step S614).

  Then, as a process of step S615, a function (time-short function) that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the second start port 2002 is in operation (time-short game state) while the operation of the probability variation function is thus stopped. It is determined whether or not. If it is not determined in step S613 that the probability variation function is in operation, the process proceeds to step S615 without executing step S614. As a result, when it is determined that either the normal external advantageous gaming state or the probable variation external advantageous gaming state is in effect and the time reduction function is active (YES in step S615), the time reduction function is activated. Stop (step S616).

  According to the processing in steps S613 to S615, the game state is changed when the lottery process for the number of rounds is in the middle of the process in which the lottery process has not yet been performed. It will be possible. In other words, in this case, the game state is changed by changing the game state from the process stage where the lottery process has not been finished yet, thereby favorably maintaining the gaming interest until the big hit game is actually executed. Will be able to. In this embodiment, the game is controlled to a predetermined specific gaming state (usually external disadvantaged gaming state), whereby the round number determination process is controlled to the normal external disadvantaged gaming state. It can only be executed under the circumstances.

  Then, after the operations of the probability variation function and the time shortening function are both stopped in this way, as the processing of step S617, an interval effect (for example, “ Opening of congratulations, etc., and special bonus games (big hit games) will start when the special symbol is stopped so that it can be executed. An interval effect command at the time of the big hit indicating the time until the game is displayed is set (step S617). Next, when an interval effect timer (for example, 8 seconds) associated with the interval effect command set in the process of step S617 is set (step S618), the round number lottery process is temporarily ended.

  Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when the big hit is won, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to a period after the special symbol is stopped (as described above. Therefore, the interval effect command set in this way is also prepared based on this. That is, only the interval effect command indicating a specific fixed time (for example, 8 seconds) is set regardless of the state type of the big hit, in relation to the time required for the extended effect that appears even when winning the small hit. . Then, the interval effect command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 224, so that the specific effect time indicated by the command is set (for example, 8 seconds). Through the later-described control by the peripheral control board 4140 side, either the interval effect as described above or the extended effect as described above is selectively performed in the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  Then, the processing for generating such a period of time (step S612 to step S618) is performed, so that the round number lottery processing (step S200) is performed in the next interrupt control. When starting, it is determined in the process of step S601 that the condition device is in operation. That is, in this case, the processing from the following step S602 for performing the lot number lottery is performed without performing the processing of steps S612 to S618.

  In the process of step S602, whether or not the above-mentioned interval effect (opening effect for determining the big hit, challenge bonus effect for determining the opening of the big prize opening 2003 (confirming the execution of the bonus game), or extension effect) has been completed, that is, the above step. A determination is made as to whether or not the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) set in the process of S618 has expired. The interval effect timer (8 seconds here) has not expired, and the above-mentioned interval effect (opening effect for determining the big hit, challenge bonus effect for determining the opening of the big prize opening 2003, or extension effect) is still being executed. In such a case (NO in step S602), the number-of-rounds lottery process (step S200) is temporarily terminated, and the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) waits for time-up through the processes in steps S601 and S602 (discount). Repeat processing).

  As a result of such processing, when the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has expired (YES in step S602), the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is set as the process of step S603. After the time is up, a determination is made as to whether or not the game ball has passed through the special figure gate 2500 (specific reception port) (whether or not a predetermined progress condition is satisfied). Although illustration is omitted, when it is determined in the processing of step S602 that the interval effect timer has timed out, the game ball passes through the special-purpose gate 2500 even though the condition device is operating. Unless otherwise, the special flag indicating that the game progress is stagnant and the big hit game is not started is in a special game situation (specific game mode) is turned ON.

  As a result, if it is not determined in the process of step S603 that the game ball has passed through the special figure gate 2500, the round number lottery process (step S200) is temporarily ended, and the special figure gate 2500 is executed in the process of step S603. By waiting until it is determined that the game ball has passed (repeating the interrupt process), the time specified in advance by the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is up to the special-purpose gate 2500. Until the game ball is received, the opening / closing member 2006 is controlled to be extended and maintained without being operated. According to such extended control over the closing control period of the big winning opening 2003, the round number determination process (step) which is one of the lottery processes related to the execution of the big hit game, even though the condition device is operating. By setting S605) to be unprocessed, it is possible to enjoy the time until the big hit game is executed while leaving the lottery process related to the outgoing ball such as the round number determination process (step S605).

  That is, during the closed control period (the period during which the opening and closing member 2006 is maintained and controlled) from when the special symbol is stopped based on the winning of the big hit until the big hit game is started, the special symbol is When the time until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) expires after being stopped is the “first closed control period having a predetermined length after the special symbol is stopped and displayed” (Step S602) After the first closing control period has elapsed, a “second closing control period as an indefinite length closing control period” further appears (Step S603). Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel effect that mutually uses an attribute as a closing control period having a predetermined length and an attribute as a closing control period having an indefinite length. .

  More specifically, for the first closed control period (here, 8 seconds), for example, as described above, it is used as an addition time with the change time of the set special symbol change pattern. As one unit, it is possible to realize an effect using an attribute as a closed control period having a predetermined length, such as performing a display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 by extending the display of special symbols. become able to. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the display effect for the big hit lottery may be executed with the effect content for the time obtained by adding the variation time of the special symbol and the first closing control period. Yes. On the other hand, for the second closing control period (here, the time until the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500), for example, a long movie until the opening / closing member 2006 operates using the same period is used. An effect using an attribute as a closed control period having an indefinite length, such as flowing in the liquid crystal display device 1400, can be realized. That is, for the second closed control period (here, the time until the game ball passes through the special-purpose gate 2500), it is possible for the player to terminate the synchronization period as appropriate. Even in the case where the redundant production is realized, it is possible to expand the range of the production without causing a bad effect such as a decrease in the entertainment interest by the extension of the production.

  As a result of such processing, if it is determined in the processing of step S603 that the game ball has passed through the special figure gate 2500 (a predetermined progress condition is satisfied) (YES in step S603), When the item continuous operation device is operated, the state is shifted to a state in which the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 (big hit game) according to the winning of the big hit (hit involving the operation of the condition device) is possible. Thus, by performing the following round number determination process that is left as a lottery process that has not yet been performed in a series of lottery processes (game lottery according to the progress of the game) related to the execution of the big hit game, The lottery process (game lottery) comes to an end. Although not shown in the drawing, when it is determined in the processing of step S603 that the game ball has passed through the special figure gate 2500, the special flag indicating that the game is in a special game situation (specific game mode). Is operated in the OFF state.

  That is, first, a round determination random number used to determine the number of rounds in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is controlled in the big hit game is acquired (step S604). The round decision random number is obtained, for example, from any one of random number widths 0 to 255, and the main control MPU 4100a uses the round decision random number based on the obtained round decision random number. Round number determination processing for determining the number is performed (step S605). In this embodiment, if the obtained round determination random number is any one of 0 to 153 in the random number range 0 to 255, the round number in the big hit game is determined to be 16 times, and the random number range If it is any of 154 to 255 out of 0 to 255, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is determined to be 9 (that is, it is determined to be 16 rounds with a probability of about 60%, and 9 with a probability of about 40%) Determined in a round).

  When the number of rounds is determined in this way, the main control MPU 4100a determines the number of rounds determined in the process of step S605 (the maximum number of round games in which the big winning opening 2003 is repeatedly opened in the big hit game), The upper limit number (predetermined large number) at which a game ball can enter the grand prize opening 2003 in each round game, and the opening / closing operation limit time of the opening / closing member 2006 in each round game (predetermined long time of long open / close pattern) ) And the like in the big hit game are set (step S606). Next, set a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is to be started, a round information command indicating the number of rounds determined above, a flag in the jackpot game indicating that the jackpot game has already been performed, and so on. (Step S607). Thereafter, when the processing flag is updated to “5” (step S608), the lot number lottery process is terminated.

  As will be described later, the jackpot start command and the round information command set in this way are transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Through the later-described control by the peripheral control board 4140 side, the display effect during the big hit game can be selectively executed as an effect associated with the determined number of rounds.

  As described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, even if the interval effect timer is up, the progress of the game is stopped unless the passing of the game ball to the special-purpose gate 2500 is detected. However, it does not proceed to the next process. That is, a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the big hit game is not executed smoothly until the end, but is temporarily stopped in the middle stage of the series of lottery processes related to the execution of the big hit game.

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the lottery process related to the execution of the big hit game includes a lottery process (FIG. 227: Step S315) for winning a special hit (big hit) using a big hit determination random number, It is composed of a probability variation lottery process using random numbers (FIG. 227: step S316) and a round number determination process using random numbers for round determination (FIG. 230: step S605). When the result of the lottery process for winning the big hit is a big win, the series of processing is unilaterally (i.e., automatically controlled by the gaming machine side, regardless of the player's intention, as in conventional gaming machines). Rather than proceed to (), only a part of the series of processes is performed by the control of the gaming machine side, and the intention of the player is countered for the remaining processes. So that it is possible to.

[About small hit game start processing]
Next, the small hit game start process (step S220) executed when the process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 231 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game start process.

  As shown in FIG. 231, in the small hit game start process (step S220), the main control MPU 4100a first performs the same small hit game as a process in step S701 so that a small open game (small hit game) is performed. The number of times that the grand prize opening 2003 is repeatedly opened in the game (in this embodiment, twice), the upper limit number (predetermined small number) that allows the game balls to enter the big prize opening 2003 at the time of opening, The opening mode in the small opening game (small hit game) such as the opening / closing operation restriction time (small time opening / closing pattern) of the opening / closing member 2006 is set.

  After that, prior to the small opening game (small winning game) being performed, an interval effect before the small game is performed (for example, a challenge bonus effect such as “Chance to get a chance!”) Can be executed. As described above, an interval effect command at the time of small hit indicating the time from when the special symbol is stopped until the small bonus game (small hit game) is started is set (step S702). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the special symbol is stopped when the small hit is won (as described above. Therefore, the interval effect command set in this way is also prepared based on this. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, due to the relationship with the time required for the extension effect that appears even when the big hit is won, a specific fixed time (for example, the random number for the big hit symbol) regardless of the symbol random number (big hit symbol random number) Only the interval effect command indicating 8 seconds) is set. Such a time setting when the extended effect appears is prevented from being presumed to be a small hit, and as a result, the opening / closing member 2006 is operated in response to the winning of the small hit, and the game entertainment is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Next, an interval effect timer (for example, 8 seconds) associated with the interval effect command set in the process of step S702 is set (step S703), and the process flag is updated to “6” (step S704). Then, the small hit game start process is terminated.

  As will be described later, the interval effect command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission processing (step S17) shown in FIG. 224, so that the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the peripheral control board 4140 side. Through the control described later, the interval effect is performed for the time indicated by the interval effect command.

[About jackpot game processing]
Next, the jackpot game process (step S240) executed when the process flag is “5” will be described. FIG. 232 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit game process.

  As shown in FIG. 232, in the big hit game process (step S240), the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the big winning opening 2003 is being opened as the process of step S801. If it is open (YES in step S801), then as the processing in step S802, the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the special winning opening 2003 is set in the processing in step S606 (see FIG. 230). It is determined whether or not the open / close operation limit time (predetermined long time or predetermined middle time) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation limit time has elapsed (YES in step S802), the winning opening 2003 is closed by closing the opening / closing member 2006 (step S804).

  However, even if it is determined in the process of step S802 that the set opening / closing operation restriction time has not yet elapsed (NO in step S802), the same processing is performed after the special winning opening 2003 is opened. If the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2003 is equal to or greater than the upper limit (for example, 10) set in the process of step S606 (YES in step S803), step S804 is performed. Then, the process proceeds to the above process and closes the special winning opening 2003. On the other hand, when the set opening / closing operation limit time has not yet elapsed (NO in step S802), and the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening 2003 has not yet reached the upper limit number. (NO in step S803), the big hit game process is terminated while maintaining the big winning opening 2003 in the open state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S801 that the big prize opening 2003 is not being opened, the number of times the big prize opening 2003 is opened by the opening / closing member 2006 (the number of round games) is set in step S606 (FIG. 230). It is determined whether or not the maximum number of times (16 times or 9 times) set in the processing of (see) has been reached (step S805). If it has not been reached (NO in step S805), the opening / closing member 2006 is operated to open the special winning opening 2003 (step S806), and the big hit game process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of step S805 that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of times, the big action (hit with the action of the condition device) is caused by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device being stopped. Accordingly, the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 (big hit game) corresponding to the winning of the game will be disabled. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processing of step S807 to step S813, so that, for example, in the processing of step S317 (see FIG. 227), the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) separately from the big hit flag. The game state after the big hit game is set based on the winning type of the big hit, which is stored as a trigger for the execution of the big hit game, and then the big hit game process is terminated. Here, the winning type refers to whether or not the winning type activates the probability variation function and the time-shortening function. For example, when the big hit that is the trigger for executing the big hit game is the big hit B The content of the information about whether or not to activate the time-saving function depends on the gaming state when it is determined that the jackpot is the big hit.

  That is, first, the big hit flag and the big hit game flag are each set to the OFF state (step S807), and the winning type of the big hit that is triggered by the big hit game is determined (step S808, step S810). Here, in the process of step S808, it is determined whether or not the winning type (big hit A to C) that activates the probability variation function. As a result, when it is determined that the winning type that activates the probability variation function is determined, the process proceeds to step S810 without operating the probability variation function. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S808 that the selected type is to activate the probability variation function, the probability variation function is activated (step S809), and then the process proceeds to step S810. To do.

  Further, in the process of step S810, it is determined whether or not the winning type that activates the time-shortening function is a big hit A (a big hit B that is won in the short-time gaming state). As a result, when it is determined that it is not the winning species that activates the time-shortening function, the operation of the condition device is stopped without activating the time-shortening function (step S812), and when the processing flag is set to “0” ( In step S813), the big hit game process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S810 that the winning type activates the time reduction function, the time reduction function is activated (step S811), and then the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S812). ), When the process flag is set to “0” (step S813), the big hit game process is terminated.

  According to such a round number lottery process, until it is determined in the process of step 805 that the round game has reached the maximum number of times, the big winning opening 2003 is opened according to the type of the big hit (step S802). In step S803 and step S805), the game is repeatedly released, and as a result, a player can obtain a winning ball according to the type of jackpot.

[About small hit game processing]
Next, the small hit game process (step S250) executed when the process flag is “6” will be described. FIG. 233 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game process.

  As shown in FIG. 233, also in the small hit game processing (step S250), the main control MPU 4100a first displays the small hit game indicating that the small hit game has already been performed as the processing of step S901. It is determined whether the in-game flag is in an ON state (set).

  Here, the small hit game flag is operated to be OFF when the small hit game process (step S250) is in progress and the processing status is immediately after. Accordingly, when the processing state is immediately after the transition to the small hit game process (step S250), it is determined that the small hit game flag is not in the ON state (set) (NO in step S901), and then step S902. Perform the process.

  In the process of step S902, whether or not the above-described interval effect (challenge bonus effect or extended effect) has ended, that is, is determined in advance by the interval effect timer set in the process of step 703 (see FIG. 231). A determination is made as to whether or not the current time (here, 8 seconds) has expired. If the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has not expired and the interval effect (challenge bonus effect or extended effect) is still being executed (NO in step S902), the small hit game The process is temporarily terminated, and the process waits until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires through the processes of steps S901 and S902.

  However, in the small hit game processing (step S250) according to this embodiment, unlike the case of the big hit, when the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is timed up as a result of such processing being performed, (YES in step S902), in order to start the small hit game only with this, next, in step S903, a small hit start command indicating that the small hit game is started is set, and the small hit game has already been The small hit game in-game flag indicating that the game is being performed is operated (set) to the ON state. That is, in this case, as long as the player confirms that the above-mentioned second closed control period does not appear (there is no extended control from the first closed control period having a certain length), the conditional device After completely removing the expectation that a bonus game may be performed according to the hit (big hit) with the operation of (not a notification by a production with a lot of false information, etc. It is possible to play a game (after removing the expectation by presence or absence).

  As will be described later, the small hitting start command set in the process of step S903 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. In the above, the display effect during the small hit game is performed through the control described later on the peripheral control board 4140 side. Further, by operating (setting) the small hit game flag in the ON state, when the small hit game process (step S250) is started in the subsequent interrupt process, such a step S901 is performed. -The processing from the following step S904 for performing the processing related to the execution of the small hit game is performed without performing the processing of step S903.

  In the process of step S904, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 2003 is open. If it is open (YES in step S904), then as the processing in step S905, the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the special winning opening 2003 is set in the processing in step S701 (see FIG. 231). It is determined whether or not the open / close operation limit time (a predetermined short time of the short time open / close pattern) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation limit time has elapsed (YES in step S905), the winning opening 2003 is closed by closing the opening / closing member 2006 (step S907).

  However, even if it is determined in the process of step S905 that the set opening / closing operation restriction time has not yet elapsed (NO in step S905), the same processing is performed after the special winning opening 2003 is opened. If the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2003 is equal to or greater than the upper limit (for example, two) set in the process of step S701 (YES in step S905), the above step The process proceeds to S907 and the special winning opening 2003 is closed. On the other hand, when the set opening / closing operation restriction time has not yet elapsed (NO in step S905), and the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening 2003 has not yet reached the upper limit number. (NO in step S905), the small winning game process is terminated while maintaining the special winning opening 2003 in the open state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S904 that the big prize opening 2003 is not being opened, the number of times the big prize opening 2003 is opened by the opening / closing member 2006 is determined in the process of step S701 (see FIG. 231). It is determined whether or not the set maximum number of times (two times) has been reached (step S908). If not reached (NO in step S908), the opening / closing member 2006 is operated to open the special winning opening 2003 (step S909), and the small hit game process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S908 that the maximum number of times of opening of the big winning opening 2003 by the opening / closing member 2006 has been already performed, the small hit flag and the small hit game flag are turned off. The state is operated (step S910), and when the processing flag is set to “0” (step S911), the small hit game processing is ended.

  According to such a small winning game process, until it is determined in step 906 that the opening / closing member 2006 has reached the maximum number of times the large winning opening 2003 has been opened, Although it is an open mode in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the grand prize opening 2003 as compared to the open mode, it is possible for a player to acquire a prize ball corresponding to the open mode. Become.

[3-6. Control processing at peripheral control unit]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 238 to 244. FIG. FIG. 238 is a flowchart illustrating an example of sub-main processing, and FIG. 239 is a flowchart illustrating an example of 16 ms steady processing. FIG. 240 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing (step S1100). FIG. 241 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S1200). FIG. 242 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). FIG. 243 is a flowchart illustrating an example of stop symbol determination processing (step S1225a) in the first effect mode, and FIG. 244 illustrates an example of stop symbol determination processing (step S1225b) in the second effect mode. It is a flowchart.

[Sub-main processing]
In the sub main process, as shown in FIG. 238, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs the initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment executes a 2 ms steady process as an interrupt process every 2 ms. That is, in this 2 ms steady process, the counter value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is incremented ("1" is added to the counter value). As a result of repeating the count-up every time 2 ms elapses, when the counter value becomes 8 (when 16 ms elapses), the 16 ms elapse flag T is set and the 16 ms elapse monitoring is performed. The counter value of the counter is reset.

  In this regard, in the process of step 1002, such a 16 ms elapsed flag T is monitored until the 2 ms steady process is set (loop process). As a result, when it is determined that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set (Yes in step 1002), after resetting the 16 ms elapsed flag (step S1003), a 16 ms steady process described later is performed (step S1004). The 16 ms steady process is performed every 16 ms.

  In this 16 ms steady process, based on various production commands received from the main control board 4100, the LEDs of the decorative boards provided in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the door frame 5 and the game board 4, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 Processing for controlling the speaker is executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to the process of step S1002, and this is monitored again until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set in the 2 ms steady process described above (loop process).

[About 16ms steady processing]
As shown in FIG. 239, in the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first analyzes various effect commands received from the main control board 4100 (command analysis process) as the process of step S1100. Next, based on the analyzed effect command, control (effect control processing) related to the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is executed (step S1200). More specifically, the setting of the notice effect that can appear in the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the determination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that can appear in the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the like are performed.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes a sound control process related to the sound output of the speaker for generating a sound effect (for example, BGM) that promotes the effect (step S1300). Furthermore, a light emission decoration control process related to light emission decoration by each decoration board provided in the door frame 5 or the game board 4 is executed (step S1400).

  After this, the commands (in addition to the display commands described later, sound output commands, light emission decoration commands, etc.) set in the above-described processes S1200 to S1400 are transmitted to the lamp driving board 3167 and the liquid crystal control board 4500. Information output processing is performed (step S1500). As a result, an effect corresponding to the set command is performed through the liquid crystal display device 1400, the speakers 121 and 391, the door frames 5 and the decorative boards provided in the game board 4.

  After this information output process (step S1500) is performed, when the random number update process in which the random numbers used for various settings are updated in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed (step S1600), the 16 ms steady state is performed. The process ends.

  It should be noted that such processing in steps S1100 to S1600 (16 ms steady processing) is set as a processing amount that is completed within 16 ms, but it is assumed that when the time of 16 ms has elapsed from the start of 16 ms steady processing, the step is performed. Even if the execution up to the process of S1600 has not been completed, the process in the above-described step S1600 is continued without changing back to the process in step S1100 (from the command analysis process). It will carry out to the processing of. That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set. When it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms elapse process is performed. To start.

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, the random number update process (step S1600) is executed by a 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. Is not limited to this. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub-main processing and the 16 ms steady processing.

[About command analysis processing]
Next, command analysis processing (processing in step S1100) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 240, in the command analysis process, the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a) first receives an effect command from the main control board 4100 as a received command of the peripheral control board 4140 as a process of step S1101. It is determined whether or not it is stored in a storage area (RAM) (step S1101).

  That is, when the peripheral control board 4140 according to this embodiment receives the effect command from the main control board 4100, it interrupts other processes such as the 16 ms steady process and generates a command reception interrupt process. In the embedding process, the effect command from the main control board 4100 is stored in the received command storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140. In the reception command storage area, a plurality of areas are provided corresponding to the order in which the effect commands are received from the main control board 4100. In the command reception interrupt process, these effect commands are associated with the reception order. Each of these areas is memorized separately.

  In this regard, in the process of step S1101, the contents of the received command storage area are confirmed, and if an effect command is stored, the effect command having the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 is read from the reception command storage area. (Step S1102).

  Next, whether or not the read effect command is a pattern command (a command indicating a variation pattern) among the effect commands set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S411 (see FIG. 228). Is determined (step S1103). As a result, when it is determined that the effect command is the same (YES in step S1103), the variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, and the variation pattern reception flag is set. At the time of setting (step S1104), the command analysis process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the read effect command is not a pattern command (command shown in FIG. 237) (NO in step S1103), the read effect command is processed in step S411 (see FIG. 228). Among the production commands set on the main control board 4100 side, the winning information command (winning winning for big hit, winning for small hit, winning type according to big hit A to big hit D), etc. ) Is determined (step S1105). As a result, when it is determined that the effect command is the same (YES in step S1105), when the winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1106), The command analysis process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the read effect command is not a winning information command (NO in step S1105), the read effect command is processed in step S607 (see FIG. 230) in the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not it is a round information command (round information command indicating the number of rounds determined in the round number determination process) of the effect commands set on the side (step S1107). As a result, when it is determined that the effect command is the same (YES in step S1107), when the round information command is stored in the round information storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1108), The command analysis process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the read effect command is not a round information command (NO in step S1107), a flag corresponding to the effect command received in the corresponding storage area (RAM) of peripheral control board 4140 is set. At that time (step S1109), the command analysis processing is terminated. Examples of such effect commands include a fixed stop command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S503 (see FIG. 229), the step S617 (see FIG. 230), and the step S702. An interval effect command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of FIG. 231 and a big hit start set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S607 (see FIG. 230). There is a command, a small hitting start command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S903 (see FIG. 233), and the like.

[About production control processing]
Next, the effect control process (the process of step S1200) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 241, the effect control process is performed based on the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress of the game. Any one of the display process (step S1230) and the small hit display process (step S1240) is selectively performed.

  That is, as will be described later, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the variation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 240) is set. On the condition that the display is performed, a process for starting a display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed, including the display of the decorative symbols. For example, a display effect pattern (decoration pattern stop pattern, presence / absence of the above-mentioned extended effect, etc.) is determined based on the pattern command and the winning information command, and the determined display effect pattern (for the liquid crystal control board 4150) In addition to setting display commands, settings related to the notice effect are also performed.

  Further, the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the process selection flag is “1” basically corresponds to the fixed stop command that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 240). If the flag is set, the winning symbol lottery result (more precisely, the partial result of the jackpot lottery excluding the lottery lottery) will be displayed. Then, processing such as setting a display command (for the liquid crystal control board 4150) for ending the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed. At the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the confirmed stop command is reset.

  Further, in the big hit display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the big hit that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 240), On the condition that the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set, the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays that the big winning opening 2003 is opened, or a display in the big hit gaming state (for example, by a round information command) Controls for effect display according to the number of rounds shown) are performed. At the end of the processing, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of the big hit, the flag corresponding to the big hit start command, and the round information command are reset.

  In the small hit display process (step S1240) executed when the process selection flag is “3”, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the small hit that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 240). In addition, on the condition that the flag corresponding to the small hit start command is set, the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays that the big winning opening 2003 is opened, or the effect display in the small hit gaming state is displayed. Control each. At the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of the small hit and the flag corresponding to the small hit start command are reset.

  However, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, the display effect at the time of big hit or small hit in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not ended within the variation time indicated by the received pattern command. The first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 is extended to a period (interval period) after stopping the variable display concerning the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs, and the display after the extension In the production, there is a case where the result of the jackpot lottery (more accurately, a part of the jackpot lottery excluding the lottery lottery) can be shown.

  That is, in this case, as described later, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the time required for the extension effect in the interval period, which is longer than the variation time indicated by the pattern command received from the main control board 4100, is also included. A display effect pattern is determined, and a display command (for the liquid crystal control board 4150) corresponding to the determined display effect pattern is set. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220), an intermediate stage where the display stage in the liquid crystal display device 1400 has not ended has appeared even though the flag corresponding to the confirmation stop command is set. The process will be terminated.

  In the big hit display process (step S1230) or the small hit display process (step S1240), the display effect extended in this way is indicated by the display command set in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). Processing to be performed continuously as a response to the contents to be processed. Therefore, in the process at the time of extension, even if the flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set, the effect control according to the command (display control indicating that the big prize opening 2003 is opened) Never do.

  As described above, the command set in the processing of steps S1210 to 1230 in the effect control processing is transmitted to liquid crystal control board 4150 by the information output processing (step S1500) shown in FIG. As a result, a display effect of the content (such as a display effect pattern) indicated by the command appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 through the control by the liquid crystal control board 4150 side.

[About decorative symbol variation start processing]
Next, the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0” will be described. FIG. 242 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a decorative symbol variation start process.

  As shown in FIG. 242, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the peripheral control MPU 4140a first performs a variation pattern that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 240) as the process of step S1221. It is determined whether or not the reception flag is in an ON state (set). That is, in the process of step 1221, based on the fact that a predetermined start condition (YES in step S 301) is established on the main control board 4100 side, the variation pattern is processed in the process of step S 1104 (see FIG. 240). It will wait for the reception flag to be turned on.

  Until the fluctuation pattern reception flag is operated to be in the ON state, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs control related to the demonstration effect and the effect mode by the processing of the following steps S1232 to S1237.

  That is, first, it is determined whether or not the demonstration effect is being executed in the liquid crystal display device 1400 (step S1232), and when it is determined that the state is not the same, the display effect such as the previous symbol variation ends. Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed (step S1236). As a result, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, a display command (for the liquid crystal control board 4150) for starting a demonstration effect is set in the liquid crystal display device 1400 (step S1237). The display command thus set is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 240, so that the demonstration effect is produced in the liquid crystal display device 1400 through the control by the liquid crystal control board 4150 side. Will be executed.

  If it is not determined in step S1236 that the predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbol variation start process is temporarily terminated, and the variation pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221). Will wait until either condition is satisfied (YES in step S1236).

  Further, as a result of performing such processing (steps S1236 and S1237), when it is determined in the processing of step S1232 that the demonstration effect is being executed in the liquid crystal display device 1400 (step S1232). In step S1233, it is determined whether or not an operation by the player for the effect mode is permitted.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit without the operation of the condition device (small hit) or a hit with the operation of the condition device (big hit), the liquid crystal The display effects in the display device 1400 are not limited to the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 without ending within the variation time of the variation pattern set on the main control board 4100 side. A display effect pattern (extension) that can be extended to the period after the stop of the variable display on the LED lighting pattern, and whether or not a win (bonus) with the operation of the condition device is won. A first effect mode in which an effect pattern) can be selected and a second effect mode in which a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected are prepared.

  Here, an overview of the extended effect pattern that can be selected when in the first effect mode and the challenge bonus effect pattern that can be selected when in the second effect mode will be described. FIG. 245 (a) is a diagram for explaining an extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit, and FIG. 245 (b) is a diagram for explaining an extended effect pattern at the time of a small hit, and FIG. 245 (c). These are figures for demonstrating the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit, and FIG.245 (d) is a figure for demonstrating the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit.

[Extended production pattern for big hits]
In the first production mode, if the result of providing an opportunity to get a prize ball (bonus game) is obtained by the operation of the opening / closing member 2006, the production is extended until the period after the special symbol fluctuation is stopped. A display effect pattern (extended effect pattern) at the time of extension having contents can be selected.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 245 (a), when the display effect pattern at the time of extension (extended effect pattern) is selected based on the winning of the big hit, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first changes the special symbol. The display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started so as to coincide with the start (based on the fact that the variation pattern reception flag is set). However, after that, even when the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command (when the special symbol changes) or the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (rushing into the opening period) is set, the display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 The production will be continued without ending.

That is, as described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, the closed control period from when the special symbol is stopped to when the big hit game is started based on the fact that the big hit is won,
-The time from when the special symbol is stopped until the time predetermined by the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is up (the first closed control period having a predetermined length), and -Time until the game ball passes through the special gate 2500 (see FIG. 151) after a predetermined time (8 seconds in this case) has expired by the interval effect timer (the time with an indefinite length) 2 closed control period)
To control as.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when the display effect pattern at the time of extension (extended effect pattern) is selected based on the winning of the big hit, as shown in FIG. 245 (a). In addition, the amount of time for the special symbol to be changed is the amount of time (first closed control period with a certain length) from when the special symbol is stopped until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires. In such a way, the display effect for the big hit lottery is performed. Note that such a display effect can be realized, for example, as an effect that shows a situation in which a specific character is challenging a battle with an enemy character.

  Then, when the first closing control period having a fixed length has passed and the second closing control period having an indefinite length is controlled, the contents of the effects appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 Is switched to the winning clarification effect in which the winning information about whether or not the result of the big winning lottery is a winning (big winning) accompanied by the operation of the condition device is specified. Note that here, the winning clarification effect is performed as a big hit effect in which it is clearly shown that the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (hit) with the operation of the condition device. It can be realized as an effect that reflects the appearance of winning the battle. In addition, in view of the fact that one display effect pattern is composed of a display effect related to the big hit lottery and a winning effect that the result of the effect appears, the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit according to this embodiment is It can be said that the production contents are extended to the second closed control period having an indefinite length after the first closed control period ends after the change of the special symbol is stopped. .

  Thereafter, on the condition that the second closed control period having an indefinite length is still continued, the game area on the right side of the center accessory 2300 is produced as an effect in the second closed control period. Control is performed so that the opening effect before the big hit game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 to prompt the player to start the big hit game by causing the game ball to flow down to 605 (performing a right-handed game). As a result, when a right-handed game is performed by the player, the game ball that is driven into the game area 605 on the right side of the center bonus 2300 first passes through the special figure gate 2500, and as a result, a jackpot start command is set. The Rukoto. As a result, when the second closing control period ends, a big hit game in which the big winning opening 2003 is opened is started (see FIG. 232). However, at this time, the lottery process (round number determination process) relating to the number of rounds is performed as described above, and as a result, a series of lottery processes relating to the execution of the big hit game is ended, and the round indicator In 648, lighting is performed so as to indicate the number of rounds. In this sense, various game judgments until the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 and the production contents related to the result of the big hit lottery are undecided (the lottery process for the number of rounds has not yet been performed). The information about the jackpot is naturally incomplete.

  Further, when the second closing control period having an indefinite length ends and a big hit game in which the big winning opening 2003 is opened (a flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set), for example, liquid crystal Even if the content of the effect is in the middle of the effect that appears on the display device 1400 (winning explicit effect or opening effect), a big hit game indicating that the first round game has started This is done by forcibly switching to production. However, on the other hand, as long as the game ball does not pass through the special-purpose gate 2500 after the end of the first closing control period having a certain length, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is Since it does not end (the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is not set), it is not forcibly switched to the big hit game effect indicating that the first round game has started.

  According to such extended production pattern at the time of big hit, if at least the operation handle portion 410 is not operated after the first closing control period having a certain length has elapsed since the stop of the special symbol, Since the game ball does not pass through the gate 2500, the progress of the performance continues to stagnate in the performance before the start of the big hit game (the performance during the second closed control period). That is, in this case, the player does not operate the operation handle portion 410 until the player understands what is meant by the effect before the start of the jackpot game (the effect during the second closed control period). It is possible to continue stagnating the production in the pre-start production. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 by the operation of the operation handle portion 410, the effect before the start of the big hit game is finished and proceeds to the next effect (effect during the big hit game). Therefore, the personal pace production that matches the pace of each player will be realized. In other words, the speed of the production can be realized as a production suitable for a wide range of customers regardless of age or gender. It becomes like this.

  Furthermore, in such an extended production pattern at the time of big hit, as long as the production is not progressed from the production before the big hit game is started (the stagnation control of the production by the peripheral control MPU 4140a), the main control MPU 4100a is indefinite. By controlling so that the second closed control period with the length of the game does not end, the game progresses, and the lottery of the number of rounds and the big hit game (bonus game in which a prize ball can be obtained) are executed. I try to avoid that. Therefore, from the player's side, just adjusting the speed of the production to match the pace of the player, the game will appear to progress to match the adjusted production speed, As a result, the personal pace effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be enjoyed without worrying about the game progress speed.

  As described above, the extended effect pattern at the time of big hit is the second closed control period that appears in such a way that the closed control period is extended after the first closed control period having a certain length is completed. In the second closing control period, part of the contents of the effect (winning effect) and the opening effect before the big hit game (within the second closing control period) By making a right-handed game, an effect that prompts the user to start a big hit game) can be performed. Then, the second closed control period can be ended at an appropriate timing in accordance with the speed of understanding of each player with respect to these effects, and thus the big hit game can be started at an appropriate timing.

  However, on the other hand, the second closing control period is a period that ends at least when the operation handle 410 is operated (a period with an indefinite length). When a game is played so that the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 by operating the operation handle portion 410 immediately after the first closing control period having a certain length is completed, the winning clarification effect is shown as the effect. It is also possible to proceed quickly to the next effect (effect during the big hit game) without causing the cut or the effect itself to appear almost in the middle (effect skipping). Further, as described above, when the performance is advanced early in this way, the game control itself progresses quickly, and the lottery of lots and the big hit game are started at an earlier stage. Therefore, while realizing a personal pace effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a player such as a veteran can enjoy a quick game / production performance that is efficient and stress-free by making the game progress earlier by skipping the production. To be able to.

  In particular, the time (game time) required for the opening effect in which the explanation of the right-handed game is given after the winning effect (big hit effect) is performed is useless for the player in the second and subsequent games. Often only time. However, according to the extended performance pattern at the time of the big hit, if the time (game time) required for such an opening performance is prepared, but this only functions as wasted time for the player, this is appropriately set. The production and the game can be advanced more quickly. As a result, it is possible to provide each player with an effect and game suitable for each player.

  By the way, the production time (game) is also cut by reducing the production time (time of the win clarification production time) for showing the winning information about whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (hit the big game) with the operation of the condition device. If it is advanced earlier, the final performance result in the extended performance pattern at the time of the big hit (for example, whether or not the character wins the battle) does not appear sufficiently, and even the opening performance is performed. There will be a big hit game production (round production etc.) suddenly appear. In other words, in this case, the extended performance pattern at the time of the big hit will be terminated at an intermediate stage before the result of the production sufficiently appears, so that even the opening production can be omitted and the big hit game can be started early. Become.

  By the way, in the production within the second closed control period having an indefinite length, first, a winning clarification production is performed in which it is clearly shown that the result of the big hit lottery is a win (hit) with the operation of the condition device. After that, an opening effect that encourages the player to start the big hit game by performing a right-handed game is performed. However, after the opening effect is performed for a predetermined time (or while the opening effect is being performed), a special feature movie dedicated to the big hit may be played. According to the second closed control period having an indefinite length, even if such a redundant production is realized, the production delay does not cause a bad effect such as a decrease in game entertainment. Can be widened.

  In addition, in the second closing control period, the operation acceptance for the predetermined operation means (main button 371 of the operation button unit 370) is permitted, and the result of the game lottery based on the operation of the main button 371 is permitted. Operation system effects that can indicate the degree of expectation (for example, an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for the number of rounds of the big hit game, the game state after the big hit game, etc.) may be performed. That is, in this case, the player can realize an operation system effect that allows the player to operate at his / her own pace without worrying about the expiration date (operation acceptance is allowed). It becomes like this.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment is the number of rounds in the jackpot game at the time of winning the big hit, when the first closing control period having a certain length from the stop of the special symbol has ended. Is controlled so that even the lottery is not yet executed (halfway through the lottery process). Then, the lottery (round number determination process) for the number of rounds in the big hit game is performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the special figure gate 2500 after the end of the first closing control period. Based on the result, lighting in the round indicator 648 is made executable. As a result, during the second closed control period, the liquid crystal display device 1400 can perform a win-win effect while the round indicator 648 is turned off. Further, it is possible to completely eliminate the possibility that the number of rounds in the big hit game can be grasped by the player regardless of how much stagnant effect occurs in the second closed control period. become.

[Extended production pattern for small hits]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 245 (b), when the display effect pattern at the time of extension (extended effect pattern at the time of small hit) is selected based on the fact that the small hit is won, the special symbol is also displayed. The time that the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) expires after it is stopped (the first closed control period with a certain length) is extended with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Thus, a display effect related to the big hit lottery is performed. Such a display effect can be realized, for example, as an effect in which a state in which a specific character is challenging a battle with an enemy character is displayed.

  However, as described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, the closing control from when the special symbol is stopped based on the fact that the small hit is won until the game per small opening (small hit game) is started. The period (opening period) consists only of the time (first closed control period having a certain length) from when the special symbol is stopped until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires. Is controlling. Therefore, in such an extended performance pattern at the time of a small hit, a first closing control period (here, 8 seconds) having a certain length has elapsed, and a game per small opening (small hit game) At the start, the contents of the effects appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are displayed on the winning clarification effects indicating whether or not the winning information is whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a hit (hit) with the operation of the condition device. To switch to. Note that here, the winning clarification effect is performed as a losing effect in which it is clearly indicated that the result of the big hit lottery is a win lost in the hit (hit) with the operation of the condition device. This can be realized as an effect that shows the appearance of defeat in the battle with the enemy character. In addition, in view of the fact that one display effect pattern is composed of a display effect related to the big hit lottery and a winning effect that the result of the effect appears, an extended effect pattern at the time of the small hit according to this embodiment and Is an effect pattern in which the contents of the effect are extended to the period during which the small opening per game (small hit game) is performed after the first closing control period ends after the change of the special symbol is stopped. I can say that.

  According to such extended effect pattern at the time of a small hit, it is possible to shift to a display effect related to the next change (special symbol hold-up) relatively quickly after it is shown that the loss is a big hit. become. Furthermore, since the content of the production is extended to the period in which the game per small opening (small hit game) is performed, the liquid crystal is displayed during the execution period of the game per small opening (small hit game). The operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is less likely to be noticed as much attention is paid to the display device 1400. That is, in this case, since the contents of the effect proceed in the same manner as when the so-called highly anticipated loss effect (the loss effect where the opening and closing member 2006 does not operate), the loss effect pattern with respect to the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit As a result, the pachinko machine 1 on which a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device is mounted is hardly noticed.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 2006 is similar to or the same as that when the small opening per game (small hit game) corresponding to such a small hit is won. The big hit game that operates the opening / closing member 2006 with the above operation mode, the latent effect state based on this (the so-called latent effect state using the small hit), etc. are not prepared. That is, the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 245 (a)) at the time of the big hit when in the first effect mode and the extended effect pattern at the time of the small hit (see FIG. 245 (b)) are mounted with a small hit to the last. It was made based on the technical idea of making it difficult to grasp the pachinko machine 1 that has been used (technical idea opposite to the conventional one). In consideration of the fact that a series of behaviors at the time of a small hit such as fluctuation and stop, the first closing control period, the opening of the big prize opening will also appear at the time of a big hit, the effect contents in each effect pattern are respectively extended. .

  In addition, in the extended effect pattern at the time of big hit and the extended effect pattern at the time of small hit according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 245 (a) and (b), the interval effect is produced after the special symbol is stopped. Whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a win (hit) with the operation of the condition device only after the time (first closing control period) until the timer (here 8 seconds) expires has passed Information is shown (actual presentation effect). However, with regard to these extended performance patterns, if the display effect related to the big hit lottery is performed in the form of being extended to within the first closing control period, the display effects within the first closing control period are included. In the effect portion that appears, winning information about whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a win (hit) with operation of the condition device may be shown. Even in such a case, it is possible to shift to the display effect relating to the next change (reservation of the special symbol) relatively quickly after it is shown that the loss is a big hit. Note that in this case, in the win-winning effect at the time of the big hit, an exclusive effect at the big hit that congratulates the character that it won the battle based on the fact that it has already been won, or a right strike is urged In addition to the effects for explaining the game, and in the demonstrating the win at the time of the small hit, the character is defeated by the battle and regrets that it is already known that the loss is a big hit A special effect at the time of a small hit will appear.

[Challenge bonus directing pattern for big hits]
As a result, an opportunity to obtain a prize ball (bonus game) by the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is provided in the second effect mode with respect to the extended effect pattern when in the first effect mode. In the case where it is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 may select a challenge bonus effect pattern that indicates that the winning ball is won when winning is possible. The challenge bonus effect pattern is a display effect pattern in which not only a big hit but also a small hit is treated as one type (winning type) as a win that can be obtained by winning the winning prize opening 2003.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 245 (c), when the challenge bonus effect pattern is selected in the second effect mode based on the winning of the big hit, the peripheral control MPU 4140a starts to change the special symbol. The display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started so as to match (based on the fact that the variation pattern reception flag is set). Then, the display effect thus started is ended (based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set) so as to coincide with the end of the variation of the special symbol.

  However, this display effect does not show the lottery result for winning the big hit, but wins when the opportunity to win a prize ball is granted by opening the big winning opening 2003 (big win or small win) It is shown whether or not it has been made (winning effect on the challenge bonus). More specifically, it indicates that when a big win or a small win is won, an opportunity for winning a prize ball is given by opening the big prize opening 2003 within a special symbol fluctuation period. A specific display image will appear. In this case, the lottery process for the number of rounds has not yet been executed, and the player cannot grasp how many prize balls can be obtained by opening the big prize opening 2003, It becomes possible to grasp that a winning ball can be acquired by opening the big winning opening 2003.

  After the specific display image appears in the winning effect related to the challenge bonus in this way, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (at the time of big hit) to set the big prize opening 2003. A pre-start production is performed to start a challenge bonus production about the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player by opening the game. As will be described later, in the challenge bonus effect, the time until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires after the special symbol is stopped (the first closed control period having a certain length) has elapsed. Thereafter, the game is started on the condition that the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500.

  Here, in the pre-start production to start the challenge bonus production, the operation amount of the operation handle unit 410 (using the first closing control period until the interval production timer (8 seconds in this case) expires) ( Aiming at the special figure gate 2500 by the right-handed game) and the operation timing will be described.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, as such a pre-start effect, a countdown effect in which the operation timing of the operation handle unit 410 is indicated by a countdown display in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed. The countdown effect is, for example, a countdown display for about 3 to 5 seconds, for example, while explaining that the right-handed game is aimed at the special-purpose gate 2500, and this countdown display has changed to “0”. When the operation handle 410 is sometimes operated with an appropriate operation amount, the game ball passes through the special-purpose gate 2500 as soon as the first closing control period ends.

  Therefore, according to such a countdown effect, when the operation handle portion 410 is operated according to the instruction of the effect, the setting of the big hit start command is relatively early after the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has expired. As a result, the second closing control period ends, and as a result, the lottery process (round number determination process) for the number of rounds is performed to determine how many prize balls can be obtained by the player. Challenge bonus production and jackpot games (special bonus games) are started early. At this time, the round indicator 648 lights to indicate the number of rounds.

  In other words, according to such progress in the bonus game challenge bonus performance pattern, the time until the game ball passes through the special-purpose gate 2500 after the interval performance timer (8 seconds in this case) expires (indefinite). The second closing control period having a length) is compared with the case of the later-described challenge bonus performance pattern (see FIG. 245 (d)) at the time of a small hit, which does not exist for that time. It can be shortened to a negligible level. In other words, the above-described countdown effect is intended for this purpose, and the second closing control period having an indefinite length is terminated early to cut it, which will be described later. As in the case of the small bonus game challenge pattern (see FIG. 245 (d)), only the first closed control period having a certain length appears as an interval period before the big game (before the challenge bonus performance). The game progresses in a form (progress of production). As a result, not only big hits but also small hits are treated as one type (type of hits) as winnings that can be won by opening the big prize opening 2003, and long-opening in the challenge bonus production In addition to winning games and games per middle opening, it is possible to perform an effect display regarding which game mode appears including games per small opening.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment is the number of rounds in the jackpot game at the time of winning the big hit, when the first closing control period having a certain length from the stop of the special symbol has ended. Is controlled so that even the lottery is not yet executed (halfway through the lottery process). Then, the lottery (round number determination process) for the number of rounds in the big hit game is performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the special figure gate 2500 after the end of the first closing control period. Based on the result, lighting in the round indicator 648 is made executable. Thereby, prior to the challenge bonus effect being displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, the player wins the big win by turning on the round indicator 648 and the number of rounds in the big win game (special bonus game) is given to the player. The possibility of being able to be grasped can be completely eliminated.

  In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, after the countdown display is changed to “0”, the time from when the game ball is launched until it passes through the special-purpose gate 2500 is determined as the following preceding effects (not shown). ), The time until the game ball passes through the special-purpose gate 2500 after the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) has timed up (second with an indefinite length) (Closed control period) can be further concealed in a dramatic manner.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, a place where a game ball is launched into the game area 605 of the outer rail 602 (front component member 601) (of the backflow prevention member 604). A sensor (not shown) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the same portion is provided at a location X). In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, when the detection signal from the sensor indicates that the game ball launched after the countdown display has changed to “0” has passed the same location X, the liquid crystal display device 1400 To start the pre-production. According to such a preceding effect, when the operation handle portion 410 is operated as instructed by the countdown effect, the countdown display immediately changes to “0” without waiting for the passing of the game ball to the special figure gate 2500. When the game ball passes through the above-mentioned location X, the content of the game progresses, and there is no second closing control period with an indefinite length, which will be described later as a small bonus hit challenge bonus performance pattern (see FIG. 245 (d)), it becomes difficult for the content of the effect and the appearance timing to be shifted.

  Although not shown in the figure, in the countdown effect according to this embodiment, the timing at which the countdown display changes to “0” is slightly earlier than the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is timed up (first time) 1 within the closed control period 1). According to such a countdown effect, at least a part of the time from when the game ball is launched by the operation of the operation handle unit 410 until the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 is the first closed control period. Among the second closed control periods, the game is made possible so that it can be included as the time on the first closed control period side. As a result, the second closed control period having an indefinite length is changed to the second closed control period. It is possible to shorten the time by the minute (the amount included as the time on the first closing control period side). In this case, the preceding effect is also started in advance for the second closing control period, and as an effect that may straddle the first closing control period and the second closing control period. Will be positioned.

Here, as a series of production contents that lead from the countdown production to the challenge bonus production through the preceding production, for example,
In the countdown effect, in addition to the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400, “attack the enemy character by starting the right-handed game at the timing when the countdown display becomes“ 0 ”! ”Is displayed.
After the countdown display becomes “0”, for example, an attack such as launching a rocket launcher against an enemy character based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the location X by operating the operation handle 410. In addition to starting the preceding effect to be set, a challenge bonus effect indicating the result of the set attack is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the special figure gate 2500 (a flag corresponding to the jackpot start command is set).
And so on.

  However, with regard to the preceding effect, if the game ball that has passed through the location X passes through the special figure gate 2500 as it is, it can only have a time of about “0.5 seconds”, so the content of the effect can be changed from the countdown effect. It is desirable to prepare it as something to be developed (connection effect until the start of the challenge bonus effect).

  Also, as a challenge bonus effect, for example, as a result of the attack that was set up, when the attack on the enemy character was avoided, it indicated that it was a game per small opening, and although the attack hit the enemy character, it could not be defeated It can be realized by showing that it is a game per middle release, and showing that it is a game per long release when an enemy character falls due to an attack. Or, when an attack hits an enemy character but cannot be defeated, it indicates either a game per medium release or a game per long release. You may make it clearly indicate which is a winning game. According to such a challenge bonus effect, as long as an attack hits an enemy character, not only the amount of prize balls that can be earned but also the advantage to the player is eliminated as much as the possibility of a small hit is excluded. This also makes it possible to dramatically increase the degree of expectation of transition to a new gaming state.

  However, in such a big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern, it may be assumed that there is a situation in which the operation handle 410 is not operated for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect changes to “0”. That is, in this case, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time. In this second closing control period, the countdown display is “0” on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In order to diminish the interest of the player who causes such a situation, it is desirable to prevent a new effect from appearing such as “

  However, in the situation where the challenge bonus performance pattern has appeared, such a situation where the performance progress is stagnant is limited to the case where a big win is won. In the case of FIG. 245 (d)), it cannot occur. That is, in this case, “whether or not an effect stagnant state (no effect state) in which no effect is newly performed appears” can function as a bonus effect as to whether or not the big hit game is executed. Even in the effect mode 2, the bonus effect is performed as to whether the jackpot game is executed during the period in which the bonus lottery (round number determination process) relating to the execution mode of the jackpot game is not performed yet. It can be broken. As a result, it is understood that the player will perform a big hit game (special bonus game) in which an opportunity to obtain a prize ball having a larger quantity expectation value than the small open game (small bonus game) is given. Now, a lottery ball game that allows a game ball to pass through a special gate 2500 (specific entrance) in order to perform a lottery regarding the number of rounds can be performed, and the game entertainment at the time of performing the game is preferably maintained. Will be able to. In addition, the amount of prize balls that can be earned as well as the expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player is dramatically increased by the amount that the possibility of playing a game per small opening is excluded. It becomes like this.

  Note that the countdown effect is realized by a countdown display. However, the countdown effect is not necessarily counted as long as it is performed so that a specific timing for operating the operation handle 410 can be grasped. Also good.

[Challenge bonus performance pattern for small hits]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 245 (d), when the challenge bonus effect pattern is selected based on the fact that the small hit is won in the second effect mode, the peripheral control MPU 4140a has the special effect. A display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started so as to coincide with the start of variation of the symbol (based on the fact that the variation pattern reception flag is set). Then, the display effect thus started is ended (based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set) so as to coincide with the end of the variation of the special symbol.

  Similarly, even in the case of the challenge bonus directing pattern at the time of a small hit, in such an effect (a winning effect related to the challenge bonus) performed during the special symbol change period, a prize ball due to the opening of the big winning opening 2003. A specific display image appears showing that an opportunity for acquisition is given. As a result, the player can not know how many prize balls can be obtained by the player by opening the grand prize opening 2003, but can obtain a prize ball by opening the big prize opening 2003 It becomes possible to grasp what is said.

  In addition, after the specific display image appears in the winning effect related to the challenge bonus in this way, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (at the time of a small hit) is set. A pre-start production is performed to start a challenge bonus production about how many prize balls the player can acquire by opening the big prize opening 2003.

  However, as described above, when winning a small bonus, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special symbol is stopped until the game per small opening (small winning game) is started. The interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is up to the time up (first closed control period with a certain length), and when the timer is up, A game per small opening (small bonus game) is started regardless of whether or not a game ball has passed to 2500 (see FIG. 233).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, in the small bonus challenge bonus effect pattern, the operation of the operation handle unit 410 (passing of the game ball to the special-purpose gate 2500) originally progresses the game and the effect. Although it is not necessary, the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is timed up as a pre-start effect for starting the challenge bonus effect, as in the case of the big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern described above. By using the first closed control period until the operation timing, the operation timing of the operation handle unit 410 performs the countdown effect indicated by the countdown display in the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  Therefore, according to the countdown effect at the time of the small hit performed during the first closing control period, when the operation handle portion 410 is operated as instructed by the effect, an interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) ) (In the case of a small hit start command is set), the outer rail 602 (in front) is started comparatively early (or just before the small open release game is started). The game ball passes through a portion X of the component member 601) where the game ball is launched into the game region 605 (a location near the backflow prevention member 604) X.

  Even in the small bonus challenge bonus effect pattern, the peripheral control MPU 4140a detects from the same sensor that the game ball launched after the countdown display has changed to “0” has passed the same location X. When indicated by the signal, the liquid crystal display device 1400 starts the preceding effect. Similarly, in the countdown effect, the timing at which the countdown display changes to “0” is slightly earlier than the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) times up (within the first closing control period). It is set in. However, when the preceding effect is started, it is necessary until the game ball that has passed through the same location X can pass through the special figure gate 2500 as it is, regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed through the special figure gate 2500. When a predetermined provisional rolling time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is controlled to start a challenge bonus effect.

  According to the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of such a small hit, when the operation handle portion 410 is operated in accordance with the instruction of the same effect, the challenge bonus at the time of the big hit is connected from the countdown effect to the challenge bonus effect through the preceding effect. The challenge bonus effect is started with the same series of effect contents as in the effect pattern. As a result, not only big hits but also small hits are treated as one type (type of hits) as winnings that can be won by opening the big prize opening 2003, and long-opening in the challenge bonus production It is possible to perform an effect display as to which game mode appears, including not only winning games and games per middle opening, but also games per small opening.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the location X can pass through the special gate 2500 as it is regardless of whether or not the special ball has passed through the special gate 2500. When a predetermined provisional rolling time (for example, 0.5 seconds) required for the elapse of time elapses, the challenge bonus effect is started on the liquid crystal display device 1400, but the detection signal of the special-purpose gate sensor 2502 is directly monitored. By doing so, the challenge bonus effect may be started based on the passing of the game ball through the special-purpose gate 2500 even in the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit.

  However, in the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit, the countdown display is performed in the countdown effect even though the game per small opening (small hit game) starts immediately after the end of the first closing control period. It is also assumed that there will be a situation in which the operation handle 410 is not operated for a long time even after the value is changed to “0”. In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to the present embodiment performs the preceding effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when the game ball does not pass through the location X within a predetermined time after the countdown display changes to “0”. Is controlled, and when a predetermined provisional rolling time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the preceding effect was falsely started, the challenge bonus effect is also controlled to be falsely started.

  That is, in this case, in the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the small hit, the liquid crystal display device 1400 starts from the countdown effect to the preceding effect regardless of whether or not an operation system effect that requires an operation on the operation handle unit 410 has been performed. A series of production contents leading to the challenge bonus production will appear falsely (false production). Therefore, the player determines whether or not the operation handle portion 410 is operated, whether or not the game ball passes through the special-purpose gate 2500, and the difference between the passage timing of the location X and the start timing of the preceding effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is possible to grasp that the game is played per small opening ahead of the surrounding field horses who want to check the liquid crystal display device 1400, and thus the game is immediately interrupted. Can be demonstrated.

  Thus, as described above, the extended production pattern in the first production mode is the existence of the small hitting itself by continuing the second closed control period having an indefinite length for a certain amount of time. It is a production pattern aimed at concealment, and after extending the production content to the first closed control period with a certain length that also exists in the production pattern at the time of small hit, In the second closed control period that cannot exist in the effect pattern, the opening effect before the big hit game (the effect that prompts the player to start the big hit game by performing the right-handed game) is performed. On the other hand, the challenge bonus effect pattern in the second effect mode aims to treat the small hit as one of the hits by preventing the second closed control period having an indefinite length from appearing as much as possible. This is a rendition pattern that has a certain length that is also present in the effect pattern at the time of a small hit, as an opening effect before a big hit game (an effect that prompts the player to start a big hit game by playing a right-handed game) This is performed so as to be completed within the first closed control period.

  Such an effect based on the premise that a second closed control period having an indefinite length exists due to the extended effect pattern in the first effect mode and the challenge bonus effect pattern in the second effect mode. According to the structure (the production structure in which the timing for promoting the right-handed game within the second closed control period is different), even if the display production pattern based on one production command (the variation time of the special symbol is the same), It is possible to greatly vary the length of the production time required from the start of the change of the special symbol (decoration symbol) to the start of the big hit game between the first production mode and the second production mode. Thus, it is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with greatly different effect contents without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step.

  By the way, according to such a big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern (see FIG. 245 (c)) and a small hit challenge bonus effect pattern (see FIG. 245 (d)), the win display effect (specific At the time when the display image) appears, in the case of a big hit, at least a specific number (for example, a small number of prize balls (book) In the embodiment, the player knows that an opportunity to obtain a prize ball is provided so that the prize ball of about 40 to 50) can be obtained. It will be performed as a challenge bonus production with a round lottery element such as whether the number of balls can be stacked as a bonus.

  Furthermore, when the number of prize balls is increased, there is a possibility that the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player (a game state in which the probability changing function or the time-shortening function operates). Therefore, in such a challenge bonus effect, a higher probability that the winning probability (3/400) without operation of the condition device is added to the winning probability (1/400) with operation of the condition device. With (1/100), not only that the prize ball can be paid out to the player (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates), but that the game state can be shifted to a game state advantageous to the player. Can also be made aware. As a result, it is avoided that only a monotonous losing effect is repeatedly displayed due to the winning probability of the big hit (special hit) set low, and the decline in the game entertainment is suppressed. .

  In addition, according to such a challenge bonus effect, even when the big win is lost, when the specific condition is satisfied, the display effect (specific display image) at the time of winning appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400. Despite the fact that the player can be conscious of the fact that the player can pay out a prize ball and that the player changes to an advantageous gaming state, The liquid crystal display device 1400 displays a specific image that does not appear when the player is elected (such as an image that appears when a false effect such as a preceding effect or a challenge bonus effect is performed even though the operation handle unit 410 is not operated). I am trying to get it. In other words, in this case, until the special winning opening 2003 is opened according to the winning of the big hit, it can also function as a waiting effect period whether or not a specific image (false effect) appears. In particular, when a specific image (false effect) appears, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player as well as no change to the gaming state advantageous to the player is also the same image (false effect). Since it will be possible to obtain significantly less prize balls than when no appears, this indicates that the big hit was won, combined with the size of the gap of the profit that the player can obtain It is possible to further enhance the game entertainment when an effect (stagnation effect from the first closed control period) appears.

  And according to the structure by which such two production modes are employ | adopted, in the 1st production mode which can select an extended production pattern, when performing the game per small opening (small hit game), with respect to a player In the second effect mode in which a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected, while an effect that does not make the player aware of that the winning ball can be paid out (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates) is small. When the game per opening (small hit game) is executed, an effect can be provided that makes the player aware that the prize ball can be paid out (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates). . As a result, in the second effect mode in which the challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected, a higher probability (a smaller winning hit probability “1/400” is smaller than in the first effect mode in which the extended effect pattern can be selected). With the higher probability “1/100)”, which is the winning probability of winning “3/400”, an effect that makes the player aware that a prize ball can be paid out appears. The probability of executing a bonus game (opening of the big prize opening 2003 by the opening and closing member 2006) in which a prize ball can be paid out to the player without causing a change in the game state accompanied by the operation of the condition device. It will be possible to achieve a deeper effect as if changes in each time. In addition, in the second production mode, the player can hardly realize that such a production is the pachinko machine 1 in which the small hit is mounted in the first production mode. This is because a display effect is provided in which not only big hits but also small hits are treated as one kind of hits where winning balls can be obtained by opening the big winning opening 2003.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4140a) according to this embodiment, a first effect mode in which such an extended effect pattern can be selected and a second effect mode in which a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected. Mode compulsory control means for creating a mode compulsory period that is forcibly determined to any one of the effect modes and that is not allowed to be changed by the player's operation from the compulsorily determined effect mode is provided.

  For example, a first predetermined period after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall (for example, a period until a predetermined date such as one month elapses) is forcibly determined as the first effect mode. The second predetermined period after the first predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the period until a predetermined date such as the next one month elapses) is forcibly determined as the second effect mode. When the control related to the creation of the mode compulsory period is performed, an effect is performed so as to conceal the fact that the small hits are mounted as described above for the first month. It operates as a pachinko machine 1 that can pay out a prize ball to a player with a winning probability. On the other hand, during the next month, the effect that the small hit is treated as one type of winning that can be won by opening the big winning opening 2003 is performed, so that the winning probability of the big win is exceeded. The pachinko machine 1 which can be paid out to a player with a high probability can be operated as a pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with only one game specification. In combination with the fact that it was difficult to notice the presence of small hits during the period, it seems as if another pachinko machine with different game specifications for obtaining the ball as well as the production contents on the liquid crystal display device 1400 was newly operated. Will be able to give the player a unique impression. After the second predetermined period has elapsed, the effect mode can be set according to the player's operation on the operation means during the demonstration effect.

  In this regard, as shown in FIG. 242, in the processing of step S1233, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first performs the first rendering mode and the second rendering based on time information such as calendar information and time information of the built-in RTC 4140aa. It is determined whether or not it is in a mode compulsory period that is compulsorily determined as one of the effect modes. As a result, when it is determined that the first production mode is forcibly determined (for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the first predetermined period after being delivered to the hall), the second production is performed. When it is determined that the mode is forcibly determined (for example, when it is in the second predetermined period after the first predetermined period elapses), it is assumed that the change of the effect mode by the player's operation is not allowed (NO in step S1233), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is temporarily ended. That is, in this case, while the demonstration effect is being executed (YES in step S1232), the process waits for the variation pattern reception flag to be set (YES in step S1221).

  On the other hand, based on the time information such as the calendar information and time information of the built-in RTC 4140aa, it is determined that the mode is not in the mode forcing period that is forcibly determined as one of the first effect mode and the second effect mode. When it is performed (for example, when the second predetermined period has already elapsed), it is assumed that the change of the effect mode by the player's operation is permitted (YES in step S1233), and then step S1234 Perform the process.

  In the process of step S1234, it is determined whether or not there is an operation by the player to change the effect mode. Here, the operation by the player is, for example, an operation on the main button 371 and the sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 (see FIG. 20), and the main button 371 and the sub button are displayed while the demonstration effect is being performed. When the button 372 is operated, it is conceivable to perform display control for causing the effect mode selection screen to appear on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In this case, when such a selection screen appears, when a specific effect mode is selected by an operation on the sub button 372 and the selected specific effect mode is determined by an operation on the main button 371, It is determined that there has been an operation by the player to change the mode (YES in step S1234), and setting processing related to the effect mode is performed to change to the determined effect mode (step S1235).

  Note that the means to be operated by such a player may not be the main button 371 or the sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 (see FIG. 20), but may include a predetermined operation by the player including a proximity operation using a touch panel. Anything that can be operated is acceptable. In addition, as a process when an operation is performed by the player, in addition to control that causes a change in display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 (appearance of selection screen, display at the time of selection, display at the time of determination, etc.), for example, transmission The player is informed that the effect mode has been switched by changing the effect mode of a predetermined decorative member, such as changing the color of light emitted from the back of the game panel 600 having characteristics (such as changing from blue to red). Alternatively, it may be shown.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S1221 that the variation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 240) is in the ON state (set), the main control board 4100 side. Assuming that the predetermined start condition (NO in step S301) is established, the following processes in steps S1222 to 1227 for starting the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 are performed.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first operates (resets) the fluctuation pattern reception flag to the OFF state (step S1222). Then, on this basis, it is determined whether or not the game state flag indicates that the game state is normally in the external disadvantageous game state (step S1223). The game state flag is operated to indicate the type of game state controlled after the big hit game, for example, at the end of the big hit game (for example, the big hit display process (step S1230)).

  Then, when the game state flag indicates that the game state is normally in the external disadvantaged game state (YES in step S1223), next as the process of step S1224, the setting state of the effect mode in the process of step S1235 or the built-in RTC 4140aa Based on the time information such as the calendar information and the time information, it is determined whether or not the first production mode is set. As a result, when the first production mode is forcibly determined or when the first production mode is set in a period in which the change of the production mode by the player's operation is allowed Then, it is determined that the first production mode is set (YES in step S1224), and then the process of step S1225a is performed.

  In the processing of step S1225a, the change display pattern storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a) is stored with reference to the effect pattern table when the first effect mode is set. Based on the information regarding the variation pattern and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a), the effect pattern and the stop symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 are determined.

  Next, a notice selection process is performed in which it is determined whether or not a notice effect is to be executed based on the notice determination random number (step S1226a). That is, when the first production mode and the second production mode are used, the notice pattern execution frequency and the contents of the production of the notice effect change in addition to the effect pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the selection process, in the notice effect table when the first effect mode is set, the effect mode (notice effect pattern) related to the notice effect is determined based on an appropriate notice determination random number.

  Then, display commands (notice commands) associated with the effect pattern, stop symbol, and notice effect pattern in the first effect mode thus determined are set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to “1”. ”(Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. Through the control, a display effect of the content indicated by the display command (extended effect pattern or the like) appears, and a notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S1224, the second effect mode is set in a period in which the second effect mode is forcibly determined or in a period in which the effect mode can be changed by the player's operation. If it is in the state, it is determined that the first effect mode is not set (NO in step S1224), and then the process of step S1225b is performed. In the process of step S1225b, the change display pattern storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a) is stored with reference to the effect pattern table when the second effect mode is set. Based on the information regarding the variation pattern and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a), the effect pattern and the stop symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 are determined. Next, in the notice effect table when the second effect mode is set, the effect mode (notice effect) related to the notice effect based on an appropriate notice determination random number, including the determination as to whether or not to execute the notice effect. The notice selection process for determining the pattern is executed (step S1226b).

  Then, display commands (notice commands) associated with the effect pattern, stop symbol, and notice effect pattern in the second effect mode determined in this way are set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to “1”. ”(Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. Through the control, the display effect of the content indicated by the display command appears, and the notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S1223 that the game state flag does not indicate that the game state is normally in the external disadvantaged game state (NO in step S1223), the detailed description is omitted, but the current game state An effect pattern and a stop symbol are determined based on the corresponding effect table (step S1229), and an appropriate advance notice is included in the notice effect table corresponding to the current gaming state, including whether or not to execute the notice effect. The notice selection process in which the effect mode (notice effect pattern) related to the notice effect is determined based on the determination random number is executed (step S1230).

  Then, a display command (preliminary command) associated with the effect pattern, stop symbol, and notice effect pattern corresponding to the current gaming state thus determined is set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to “1”. ”(Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. Through the control, the display effect of the content indicated by the display command appears, and the notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

  FIG. 243 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect pattern and stop symbol determination process (step S1225a) in the first effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 243, in the process of step S1225a, first, the variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 240) is read, and this variation pattern command is read. The associated production pattern is determined (step S1301). Here, in the effect pattern determination table in the first effect mode, a plurality of effect patterns may be associated with one variation pattern command (see FIGS. 249 and 250). Only one effect pattern may be associated (see FIGS. 246 and 247). When a plurality of effect patterns are associated, one of the effect patterns is determined based on the result of the effect lottery using a predetermined effect random number, or based on the type of jackpot (status type, etc.) One of the production patterns is determined.

  After the specific effect pattern is determined in this way, the stop symbol (the symbol combination at the time of stop) that appears when the decorative symbol is stopped is determined. That is, as will be described later, with respect to the decorative symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1400, including the case where the above-mentioned extended effect pattern in which the display effect is not terminated when the special symbol is stopped is adopted (confirmed). It will stop (based on the stop command being set).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when determining the stop symbol, an “extended effect pattern” and “an effect that is not an extended effect pattern but a pair of the extended effect pattern can be prepared. A determination is made as to whether any of the production patterns “losing production pattern” has been determined in step S1301 (step S1302). As a result, when any one of these effect patterns is determined, when a predetermined stop pattern at the time of extension (specific reach lose symbol or the like) is determined (step S1303), step S1225a (FIG. 242) is determined. The processing of (see) is terminated. That is, in this case, during the opening period, the contents of the display effect centering on the story such as the character are extended (developed) in a state where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the extended stop symbols. It will continue to appear, after which the result of whether or not you won the jackpot will be clearly stated.

  On the other hand, a normal production pattern that is different from any of the production patterns of “extended production pattern” and “losing production pattern that is not an extended production pattern but can be prepared as a production of a pair of the extended production pattern” (FIG. 246 (c), see FIG. 249), the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the big win lottery indicated by the winning information command is determined through the processing of step S1304 to step S1310.

  That is, first, based on the winning information command stored in the winning information storage area in the processing of step S1106 (FIG. 240), it is determined whether or not the result of the big win lottery is a big hit (step S1304). As a result, when the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, when the stop symbol dedicated to the big hit is determined (step S1305), the processing of step S1225a (see FIG. 242) is terminated.

  If the result of the big hit lottery is not a big hit (NO in step S1304), it is determined whether or not the result is a small hit (step S1306), and if the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit. The stop symbol dedicated to the small hit time is determined (step S1307). However, in the first effect mode, since the effect commands are all associated with the extended effect pattern so that the presence of the small hit is concealed, the processing in step S1306 is always performed. Then, it is determined that the result of the big hit lottery is not a small hit, and next, as a process of step S1308, a determination is made as to whether or not it is a display effect (high expectation loss effect) in which reach is formed.

  As a result, when it is a display effect in which reach is formed, the process of step S1225a (see FIG. 242) is completed at the time when the stop symbol of reach loss is determined (step S1309), whereas reach is formed. If it is not the display effect to be displayed, the process of step S1225a (see FIG. 242) is terminated when the irregular stop symbols that do not form reach are determined (step S1310).

  FIG. 244 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect pattern and stop symbol determination process (step S1225b) in the second effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 244, in the process of step S1225b, first, the variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 240) is read, and the variation pattern command is read. The associated production pattern is determined (step S1321). Here, also in the effect pattern determination table in the second effect mode, a plurality of effect patterns may be associated with one variation pattern command, or only one effect pattern is associated. It may be. When a plurality of effect patterns are associated, one of the effect patterns is determined based on the result of the effect lottery using a predetermined effect random number, or based on the type of jackpot (status type, etc.) One of the production patterns is determined.

  After the specific effect pattern is determined in this way, the stop symbol (the symbol combination at the time of stop) that appears when the decorative symbol is stopped is determined. That is, as described above, in the second effect mode, for the decorative symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1400, when a lottery result that enables winning balls is obtained, the special symbols are adjusted to stop changing ( The stop symbol (specific display image) at the time of hit is stopped (based on the fact that the fixed stop command is set).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when determining the stop symbol, a big hit is made based on the winning information command stored in the winning information storage area in the process of step S1106 (see FIG. 240). Judgment is made as to whether or not the lottery result is a hit (big hit or small win) at which a winning ball can be obtained (steps S1322 and S1324). As a result, when the result of the big win lottery is a win (a big hit or a small win) where a winning ball can be obtained (YES in step S1322 or YES in step S1324), the opening of the big winning opening 2003 is confirmed. When a bonus challenge stop symbol that can be grasped is determined (step S1323), the processing in step S1225b (see FIG. 242) is terminated. The bonus challenge stop symbol is realized by, for example, a special symbol that does not become a component of the jackpot symbol combination appearing during the change, and the symbol combination included in the symbol combination at the time of stop, etc. can do.

  In this case, in the opening period after the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, for example, at least a specific number (for example, a small amount of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment)) can be obtained. Round lottery elements such as how many prize balls can be added as bonuses after the player knows that the opportunity to get prize balls will be provided There will be a challenge bonus performance.

  On the other hand, when the result of the big win lottery is not a hit (big hit or small win) where the winning ball can be obtained (NO in any of the processes in steps S1322 and S1324), the process of step S1325 is as follows. A determination is made as to whether or not the display effect is a reach.

  As a result, when it is a display effect in which reach is formed, the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 242) is terminated at the time when the stop symbol of reach loss is determined (step S1326), whereas reach is formed. If it is not the display effect to be displayed, the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 242) is terminated when the irregular stop symbols that do not form reach are determined (step S1327).

  Hereinafter, an example of the display effect that appears when such various processes (steps S1210 to S1240) by the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment are performed will be described. FIG. 246 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 237 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side.

[First production mode, extended production pattern for production command “01H”]
As shown in FIG. 246 (a), the fluctuation time shown in FIG. 237 is based on the fact that the big hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the first production mode is set. Assuming that a change related to a special symbol having Ta1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays a display effect a (for example, a specific mission a) associated with the effect command “01H”. The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern with the content of whether or not can be made successful (whether or not the character A can defeat the enemy) is started. The extended effect pattern (the effect command “01H”) having the content of the display effect a thus started is in a situation where the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the lapse of the variation time Ta1 has arrived. The display effect a is continued without ending (without causing the specific mission a to succeed or fail).

  In addition, in the dynamic display of the extended effect pattern at the time of the effect command “01H”, the variation of the decorative design is also started. However, as described above, the variation of the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the suspension stop mode at the time of extension at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped within the time of the fluctuation time Ta1 in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. The display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped by the elapse of the variation time Ta1 while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the manner of stopping the loss when extending. As for the above, a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not a character A who has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) is performed.

  That is, in this case, the display effect a (not developed, lost) described later associated with the command “03H” shown in FIG. This will function as “development display effect a (effect in which a chance to succeed a specific mission a)”. Therefore, when this “development display effect a” appears, the special symbol is not seen from the player side even though it is in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped. It can be grasped as still being changed. In addition, the decorative symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be grasped as being in a temporarily stopped state despite being in a state after being confirmed and stopped. It will be possible to make it appear that there is still a chance that it will be shown that the big win is won by overturning the lost stop mode.

  However, at this time, the extended effect pattern (the effect command “01H”) having the content of the display effect a is performed in a large display area (the center or the entire display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the above, the variable display of the decorative design is performed only in a small display area (a portion that is hardly noticed such as an end portion of the display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400 with respect to the display effect a. However, the player can grasp the result of the big hit lottery depending on whether or not the specific mission “a” in the display effect “a” can be succeeded without paying attention to the movement of the decorative design (the result is displayed by the character). More desirable.

  In other words, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (big hit) associated with the effect command “01H”, the actual effect is not displayed in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped. However, despite the fact that the decorative symbol has been confirmed and stopped, the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop has succeeded (for example, a character A who has fallen down due to an attack from the enemy) has such an expectation. Under the circumstances, “development display effect a” appears. In this “development display effect a”, a time until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is used, for example, a situation in which the character A again faces the enemy is displayed. An effect is made as to whether or not mission a can be successful.

  However, as will be described later, this “development display effect a (effect regarding whether or not a specific mission a can be successful)” in the first closed control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is shown in FIG. This is also performed in the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the command “02H”. And, as described above, when the player is in the first effect mode, the display effect a (small hit) is a big hit loss in order to make it difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the small hit. It is more desirable to shift to the next fluctuation (special symbol reserved digestion) relatively soon after the is displayed.

  Therefore, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (big hit) associated with the effect command “01H”, a specific period of time until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period arrives. The state of success in mission a (character A defeats the enemy) is not shown, and an effect on whether or not a specific mission a can be successful (character A attacks the enemy and succeeds) Only the production). As a result, the jackpot demonstrative effect a can appear in a manner indicating that the specific mission a has been successful after the end timing t2 of the first closing control period, and is associated with the effect command “01H”. The display effect pattern that is displayed functions as “a hit effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content a”.

  However, as described above, in the extended performance pattern at the time of big hit, after the first closing control period having a certain length is completed, the closing control period is extended to have an indefinite length. Two closing control periods appear further. Then, within the second closing control period, a part of the effect contents in the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit (big hit explicit effect a) and the opening effect before the big hit game (right hit game is started by performing the right hit game) (Prompt to encourage) to be performed. Then, as a result of the operation handle portion 410 being operated at an appropriate timing in accordance with the speed of understanding of each player with respect to these effects, when the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 (timing tx), the second closing control is performed. When the period is over and the lottery process for the number of rounds is performed, the big hit game and the big hit game effect are started based on the result of the lottery process (the determined number of rounds). Details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 245 (a), the second closing control period from the timing t2 to the timing tx is ended based on the operation of the operation handle portion 410. Therefore, for example, the special-purpose gate 2500 is played by operating the operation handle 410 immediately after the end of the first closed control period having a certain length. When the game is played so that the ball passes, the big hit explicit production a and the opening production are cut at that time, or the production itself does not appear almost (production skipping), and the next production (production during the big hit game) It will be forced to proceed.

[First production mode, extended production pattern for production command “02H”]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the first production mode is set, FIG. In the liquid crystal display device 1400, assuming that the variation relating to the special symbol having the variation time Ta2 shown in FIG. 5 (here, it is assumed that it is set to the same time as the variation time Ta1) is started (timing t0). , A display effect a at the time of a small hit associated with the effect command “02H” (for example, whether or not a specific mission a can be successful (whether or not the character A can defeat the enemy)) The dynamic display of the extended production pattern with contents is started. When the extended effect pattern (effect command “02H”) having the content of the display effect a thus started is also the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 246 (a)) associated with the effect command “01H”. Similarly to the above, even when the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the lapse of the variation time Ta2 has arrived, the display effect a is not ended (the specific mission a is not succeeded or failed). ) Continue this.

  In addition, the variation of the decorative design is also started in the dynamic display of the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command “02H”. In addition, with respect to the variation of the decorative symbol, the extended rendering pattern associated with the rendering command “01H” (FIG. 246) also includes a point that the final symbol variation is stopped at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. (See (a)). Note that the lost stop mode at the time of extension is a single display mode regardless of the big win lottery results for the big hit and the small win, and the display mode is distinguished. Has not been.

  Furthermore, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped by the elapse of the variation time Ta2 while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. As for a, a point of continuation expectation about whether or not this is continued (for example, whether or not a character A who has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) This is the same as the extended production pattern (see FIG. 246 (a)) associated with the production command “01H”.

  That is, even in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command “02H”, in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, Actually, despite the fact that the decorative symbol has been confirmed and stopped, such an expectation that the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop has been successful (for example, a character A who has fallen due to an attack from an enemy has risen) is expected. Under the feeling, “development display effect a” appears. In this “development display effect a”, for example, the state until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is used, for example, a state in which the character A faces the enemy again is displayed. An effect regarding whether or not a specific mission a can be successful is performed.

  Furthermore, in the same manner, until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period arrives, there is no indication that the specific mission a has been successful (the character A defeats the enemy). An effect about whether the mission a can be succeeded (an effect such as whether the character A attacks the enemy and succeeds). However, as described above with reference to FIG. 245 (b), the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command “02H” has a certain length. After the first closing control period ends, the second closing control period having an indefinite length does not appear in such a manner that the closing control period is extended. Therefore, after the end timing t2 of the first closing control period, until the end timing t3 of the control related to the opening of the big winning opening 2003 in the small opening per game (small hit game) at the time of the production command “02H” In this way, the losing explicit production a appears in the form of the failure of the mission a. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “02H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content a”.

  For example, the loss explicit effect a is performed as a big hit defeat effect, for example, the attack by the character A is dismissed and the enemy escapes, and then the character A is disappointed.

  According to the extended production pattern associated with such production commands “01H” and “02H”, the opening end timing t3 of the special winning opening 2003 from the special symbol start timing t0 (or the second closing control period). The time until the jackpot explicit presentation a ends) will function as one presentation for winning the jackpot, so the player's gaze can be directed to such a stage, It is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the opening of the big winning opening 2003 when the losing explicit effect a is being performed, and thus the small hit.

  In order to obtain these functions and effects, no information can be obtained even if the player confirms that the grand prize opening 2003 is open (an event that may be a reason for confirming the opening). It is important that the configuration is excluded. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the big hit game that opens the big winning opening 2003 with the same or approximate opening manner as the game per small opening (small hit game) can be executed, by confirming the opening, Then, it becomes possible to recognize that the gaming state may be changed on condition of the operation of the condition device. In addition, since the player can obtain information that can be an opportunity to quit the game, that the player has won a big hit with a few hits that do not match the low winning probability of the big hit, so pay attention to the opening of the big winning opening 2003 It may also be a cause that

[Display effect pattern when the effect command is “03H” in the first effect mode]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (c), when the first production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure loss). ) Is obtained, the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta3 shown in FIG. 237 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timings t0 to t1). If it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect a at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “03H” (for example, whether the specific mission a can be successful (character A) The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of whether or not the enemy can be defeated is started. However, the display effect pattern (the effect command “03H”) having the content of the display effect a thus started is displayed when the timing t1 at which the change of the special symbol is stopped as the change time Ta3 elapses. This is completed without extending the production a (in the form of failing a specific mission a).

  More specifically, the variation of the decorative design is also started in the dynamic display of the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “03H”. In addition, even when the decoration symbol changes, at the timing t1 at which the special symbol change is stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the extension stop state at the time t1 of the extension stop. ing. As for the loss stop mode at the time of extension, a single display mode appears in the case of big hit, small hit, and lost.

  Further, the display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, and until the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped by the passage of the variation time Ta3. As for the point of whether or not this is continued, the point is to perform a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not the character A who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up). This is the same as the extended effect pattern (see FIGS. 246 (a) and (b)) associated with the commands “01H” and “02H”.

  However, in the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “03H”, the continuous expected effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example, from the enemy A state in which the character A who has fallen due to the attack did not stand up is shown), and the player is made aware that the specific mission has failed. By preparing such an effect pattern, the effect pattern that continues after timing t1 shown in FIGS. 246 (a), (b), and (d) can be made to function as an effect pattern with development. become.

[Display effect pattern in the case of the first effect mode and the effect command “04H”]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (d), when the first production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a loses neither a big hit nor a small hit (pure) Based on the fact that the “lost” is obtained, the fluctuation relating to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta4 shown in FIG. 237 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3). Is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect a at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “04H” (for example, whether a specific mission a can be successful (character The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents such as whether or not A can defeat the enemy is started. However, the display effect pattern (the effect command “03H”) having the contents of the display effect a started in this way is the non-extended display effect pattern, but when the effect commands are “01H” to “03H”. Even if the timing t1 has arrived due to the elapse of the special symbol fluctuation times ta1 to ta3, the display effect a is not ended (successful or unsuccessful for the specific mission a). . Furthermore, in the dynamic display of the display effect pattern (effect command “04H”), although the decoration symbol variation is started, this decoration symbol variation is also continued without being terminated at the timing t1. It has become.

  That is, in the case of loss (pure loss), unlike the case of big win or small win, not only the time required for opening control of the big winning opening 2003 but also maintaining it in the closed state prior to the opening of the big winning opening 2003. Since the first closing control period is immediately prepared and the next change is made immediately, it is difficult to extend the time required for the display effect a with respect to the change time of the special symbol.

  In this regard, with respect to the display effect pattern (display effect a) associated with the effect command “04H”, the main control MPU 4100a, from the fluctuation start timing t0 at the time of a small hit to the opening end timing t3 of the big winning opening 2003. It is prepared to be adopted when a variation time Ta4 having a length corresponding to the time is selected as a reference. Therefore, in this display effect pattern (display effect a), as in the case of the display effect pattern (display effect a) associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, the liquid crystal display device 1400 has a display effect a. However, the special symbol is not stopped at the timing t1, but the display effect has a longer time.

  In other words, in this case, regarding the special symbol and the decorative symbol, the variation of any of them is not fixed and stopped at the timing t1 with the suspension stop mode at the time of extension. As in the case of the display effect patterns associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, the extension time at the stage before the passage of the timing t1, which is only an intermediate stage with respect to the change time Ta4. Temporarily stop in the lost stop mode. Then, whether or not the display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is continued until the timing t1 is reached while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the suspension stop mode at the time of extension. A continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not a character A who has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) is performed. It should be noted that the loss stop mode at the time of extension is a single display even though the lottery result and the variation time of the big hit are different between the big hit, the small hit and the lost (pure loss). The mode is adopted, and the display mode is not distinguished.

  And, in this way, the continuation expectation production was successful with the decorative symbol temporarily suspended (for example, a character A who has fallen down due to an attack from the enemy) has such expectation. The “development display effect a” appears. However, after this, the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is not returned to the fluctuation state again, and the display effect a is applied to the display effect a as in the case of the display effect pattern associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”. In the liquid crystal display device 1400, in a small display area (a portion that is difficult to pay attention to, such as an end portion of the display area), the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a stopped state (when it is “01H” to “03H”, temporarily stopped when it is “04H”). Stop) is maintained until timing t2.

  In this “development display effect a”, for example, an appearance as to whether or not a specific mission a can be successful, such as the appearance of the character A again facing the enemy within the time of the fluctuation time Ta4, is shown. Done. However, as in the case of the display effect patterns associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, the state in which the specific mission “a” has been successful (the character A is the enemy) until the timing t2 comes. No effect is shown, and only an effect about whether or not a specific mission a can be succeeded (an effect such as whether Character A attacks an enemy and succeeds) appears. ing.

  After the timing t2, the state where the specific mission a has failed is shown until the end timing t3 of the control related to the opening of the big winning opening 2003 in the small opening per game (small hit game) at the time of the production command “02H”. Lost explicit production a will appear in the form shown. As with the effect command “02H”, for example, the losing explicit effect a shows that the attack by the character A is dismissed and the enemy escapes, and then the character A regrets. This is done as a defeat. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “04H” functions as “a loss effect pattern of effect patterns having the effect content a”.

  In this way, in the first effect mode, based on the fact that the result of the big hit lottery is a loss, a specific lose effect pattern (effect command “ 04H "), when the specific control time (change time Ta4) is determined on the main control MPU 4100a side, within the determined specific control time (change time Ta4). Display control relating to a specific loss production pattern is performed in such a way that specific production content (display production a) appears. Nonetheless, based on the fact that the result of the big hit lottery is a win, a specific effect content (display effect a) appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When performing display control related to all winning effect patterns (effect command “01H”), the main control MPU 4100a side determines a variation time (variation time Ta1) shorter than the specific variation time (variation time Ta4). When setting the effect time, not only the determined short fluctuation time (fluctuation time Ta1) but also a longer time including at least a predetermined interval period (first closing control period, second closing control period) is set. In such a production time, display control for a specific hit production pattern is performed in such a way that specific production content (display production a) appears. It was.

  According to such an effect technique, even in a predetermined interval period after the special symbol is stopped, the liquid crystal display device 1400 performs the winning effect as to whether or not the winning is won and the opening effect. Become. In addition, these effects can be appropriately cut so that the effects and games can be advanced, so that it is possible to realize the effect progress (game progress) with a good tempo. In addition, when a display effect pattern of such specific effect content (display effect a) appears, a notable effect element is added to the point of whether or not the special symbol is stopped in the middle stage, When the stoppage is confirmed, it is possible to grasp that an opportunity to acquire a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 is given, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, by providing the display effect pattern for the effect command “04H” with respect to the extended effect pattern for the effect commands “01H” and “02H”, the “development display effect a” is obtained. The big hit expectation degree when it appears is avoided to have to be set within the range constrained by the appearance ratio of big hit and small hit, and the small hit is installed Even under such an effect system that makes it difficult to recognize this, it is possible to perform an effect design with a higher degree of freedom as shown in FIG.

  Further, in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “04H”, since the special symbol fluctuates after timing t1, there is no problem even when the player confirms the variation state of the special symbol. Absent. And by preparing such a non-extension effect pattern in the form of mixing with the above-mentioned extension effect pattern, even if a special symbol stop state in the extension effect pattern is confirmed, It will be possible to promote awareness that might be mistaken.

  Further, in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “04H”, the big prize opening 2003 is not opened when the losing explicit effect a is being performed, and therefore, when the player confirms the big prize opening 2003. There is no problem even if it exists. Then, by providing such a non-open losing explicit effect a in combination with the losing explicit effect a at the time of the effect command “02H”, the large winning opening 2003 is opened in the losing explicit effect a. Even if this is confirmed, it is possible to encourage the player to be aware of a mistake that may be mistaken.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect commands “01H”, “02H”, and “04H”, a specific mission a is required until the timing t2 arrives. (Whether or not the character A defeats the enemy) is not shown, but prior to the arrival of the timing t2, whether or not the specific mission a is successful (the character A Whether or not to defeat the enemy) may be indicated. That is, in this case, after the same result display appears, the big hit explicit effect or the lose explicit indication effect is performed. Even with such an effect method, the small win time display effect a In addition to the fact that most of the first closing control period is used for the display effect a, after that, a big win defeat effect such as the appearance of the regret of character A appears. It is possible to shift to the next change (special symbol reservation digestion) relatively soon after being broken.

  By the way, as described above, such a display effect appears when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 237 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side in the first effect mode. It is. Then, the player wins the big win with the winning probability of the big hit without being aware of the existence of the small hit that is not particularly necessary for realizing such game performance (rendering performance) in the first production mode. You will enjoy the game about whether or not it will be played.

  However, even if any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 237 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side, the main control MPU 4100a is set when the second effect mode is set. The winning commands 2003 by winning the small hits in spite of the contents of the directing commands “01H” to “04H” from the side, as well as the normal external disadvantaged gaming state. By actively adopting the display effect pattern of the effect content on the premise of opening the game, the opportunity frequency of winning the winning ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 compared to when in the first effect mode The game performance (rendering performance) is realized as if is greatly increased.

[Second Effect Mode, Display Effect Pattern for Effect Command “01H”]
That is, as shown in FIG. 246 (a), based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100a wins the big win when the second production mode is set, the result is shown in FIG. 237. Assuming that the variation of the special symbol having the variation time Ta1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the contents of the display effect a ′ at the big hit time associated with the effect command “01H”. The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern and the variation of the decorative design are started.

  However, the content of the display effect a ′ in the second effect mode is different from the content of the display effect a in the first effect mode. For example, is it possible to make a specific mission a ′ successful? In the form of the display effect pattern (challenge), such as whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with the bonus challenge stop symbol that makes it possible to grasp that the winning prize opening 2003 is confirmed to be open. Bonus performance pattern). Therefore, the decorative symbol variation display is also performed over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (at least in a portion that is easily noticed, such as the central portion of the display area). In this way, in the second performance mode, attention is paid to the movement of the decorative symbol, and the big hit is determined depending on whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line. The player is made to know the result of the lottery.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, the display pattern of the decorative symbols is made different between the first effect mode and the second effect mode. For example, the decorative symbol in the first effect mode is a relatively small symbol image mainly composed of numbers, whereas the decorative symbol in the second effect mode is displayed as a relatively large symbol image mainly composed of characters. In the second effect mode, the decorative pattern is set as a display form that is more likely to be noticed.

  Then, in the non-extended display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “01H”, for example, such a decorative symbol is stopped with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears in the fluctuation time Ta1 until the timing t1 arrives. A display effect a ′ having contents such as an appropriate character struggling so as to be displayed appears, and at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the winning ball 2003 can be opened to obtain a prize ball. In order to make it possible for the player to grasp the fact that the bonus challenge has been stopped, the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “01H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content a ′”.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the liquid crystal display device 1400 uses the first closing control period and is acquired by the player by opening the big prize opening 2003. As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect regarding how many prize balls are possible, the operation timing of the operation handle unit 410 performs a countdown effect a ′ indicated by a countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Like that.

  Here, as described above, the countdown effect a ′ is, for example, a countdown display of about 3 to 5 seconds, while explaining that the special-purpose gate 2500 is aimed by a right-handed game. When the operation handle portion 410 is operated with an appropriate operation amount when the countdown display changes to “0”, the game ball passes through the special-purpose gate 2500 as soon as the first closing control period ends. become.

  Therefore, according to such a countdown effect a ′, when the operation handle portion 410 is operated according to the instruction of the effect, as shown in FIG. 246 (a), the end timing t2 of the first closing control period. As soon as the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500, the end timing tx of the second closed control period arrives earlier than in the first production mode. As a result, the lottery process (round number determination process) concerning the number of rounds relatively early after the end timing t2 of the first closing control period arrives, and further, the result of the lottery process (the determined number of rounds) Based on this, a challenge bonus presentation is made as to how many prize balls can be obtained by the player, and in this presentation, which release mode (game per long release, middle release) Whether or not the big prize opening 2003 is opened with a winning game or a small opening game) is shown. That is, in this case, the player will not only play the big hit game but also play the game ball to the big prize opening 2003 not only when the game is per small opening (small hit game), thereby being in the first production mode. Compared to the above, the game performance (rendering performance) is realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 is greatly increased. Details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 245 (c), in such a big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern, the operation is continued for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect a ′ changes to “0”. It is also assumed that a situation where the handle portion 410 is not operated occurs. That is, in this case, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time. In this second closing control period, the countdown display is “0” on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In order to diminish the interest of the player who causes such a situation, it is desirable to prevent a new effect from appearing such as “

  However, in the situation where the challenge bonus performance pattern has appeared, such a situation where the performance progress is stagnant is limited to the case where a big win is won. In the case of FIG. 245 (d) and FIG. 246 (b), it cannot occur. In other words, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by the amount that the possibility of playing a game per small opening is excluded while there is a stagnant effect (no effect) in which no effect is newly performed. In addition to this, the expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player can be dramatically increased.

[Second Effect Mode, Display Effect Pattern when Effect Command “02H”]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the second effect mode is set, FIG. Assuming that the variation of the special symbol having the variation time Ta2 shown in FIG. 5 (here, described as being set at the same time as the timing t0 to t1) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device In 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of the small hits associated with the effect command “02H” and the variation of the decorative design are started.

  Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “02H”) having the content of the display effect a ′ thus started is also displayed, for example, in such a decorative pattern at the variation time Ta2 until the timing t1 arrives. At the timing t1 when the display effect a ′ having a content such as an appropriate character struggling to stop and display in the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, and at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. The decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line so that the player can grasp that the winning ball can be acquired by opening the winning opening 2003. It becomes. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “02H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among effect patterns having effect contents a ′”.

  However, as described above, when winning a small bonus, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special symbol is stopped until the game per small opening (small winning game) is started. The interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is up to the time up (first closed control period with a certain length), and when the timer is up, Regardless of whether or not a game ball has passed through 2500, a game per small opening (small hit game) is started (see FIG. 233).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, even in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “02H”, the decorative design is the same as in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “01H”. When the game is confirmed and stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player by using the first closing control period and opening the big winning opening 2003 is determined. As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect regarding whether it is a thing, the operation timing of the operation handle part 410 performs a countdown effect a ′ indicated by a countdown display in the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  That is, in the display effect pattern when in the second effect mode, both the big win and the small win are handled in the same way as the big winning opening 2003 is opened, and the variation of the decorative design is started. There is no distinction between the contents of the stage from the timing t0 until the challenge bonus stage is performed, and when the operation handle portion 410 is operated as instructed for the stage, the challenge is performed from the countdown stage a 'through the preceding stage (not shown). The challenge bonus effect is started with the same series of effect contents as in the case of the big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern (effect command “01H”), which leads to the bonus effect. Accordingly, not only big hits but also small hits are treated as one type (per hit type) as a win that can be won by winning the big prize opening 2003. In addition to games and games per mid-open, it is possible to display effects regarding which game modes appear, including games per small open. Thereby, as compared with the case in the first production mode, the game performance (production performance) is realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning the prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 is greatly increased. . Of the games per long opening, games per medium opening, and games per small opening, the game per small opening ends in a relatively short time. As to whether or not the winning is won, the player may be able to grasp by displaying a specific image that does not appear at the time of winning the big hit in the production within the first closed control period.

Thus, the display effect pattern for the effect command “02H” is a display effect pattern based on one effect command,
The extended effect pattern in the first effect mode, which is treated as a no-chance loss that does not give the chance to win a prize ball (similar to the effect pattern in the case of pure loss (the effect command “04H”)), and Non-extended display effect pattern in the second effect mode (similar to the effect pattern at the time of the big hit (the effect command “01H”)) as a hit of the high chance that the opportunity to win the prize ball is given ( Challenge bonus production pattern)
Is selectively executed. That is, in this case, the effect information related to the winning is appropriately reversed on the peripheral control MPU 4140a side, and thereby, a variety of effects with greatly different effect contents can be obtained without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step. Can be realized.

  Furthermore, the game per small opening (small game) means that only a small amount of award balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege. Since the game state is not shifted to a game state that is more advantageous to the player than before the small opening game (small hit game) is performed, the gaming interest is reduced even though the opening / closing member 2006 is operated. It can be said that it is necessary to pay attention to the handling in the game setting in that point. Therefore, in the past, when a small hit is installed, a special hit function is performed in which a big hit game is played with a behavior similar to that of a small open per game (small hit game) and thereafter, a transition is made to an advantageous gaming state. First of all, the winning type is prepared, and in the situation where a game per small opening (small winning game) is performed, the player is made aware of the possibility of being a big hit game according to the winning of the specific winning type Therefore, it has been a major premise to maintain the game entertainment at the time of a small opening game (small hit game). However, even in the case of such a conventional gaming machine, when a specific winning type is won, it is finally won in the big win with a big win probability set in a very low game state. Regardless of this, it is inevitable that there will be a decline in the game entertainment interest (decrease in the game entertainment interest due to the gap between the jackpot probability and the real probability of the jackpot) due to the fact that prize balls corresponding to this low probability cannot be obtained. It was.

  In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is configured so that when hitting a small hit, a big hit game is performed with the same behavior as a small open hit game (small hit game), and thereafter an advantageous gaming state The conventional game machine has a technical idea for suppressing a decrease in the gaming interest when a game per small opening (small game) is performed in that a specific winning species that functions to shift to In the first place, it is very different.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the special figure gate 2500 for executing the jackpot game is executed so that a plurality of types of jackpot games having different prize ball amounts that can be obtained by the player can be executed. When a game ball passes through, a lottery process (round number determination process) for the number of rounds is performed. Until the lottery process for the number of rounds is performed in this way (particularly, the special symbol fluctuation time), the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the middle of the lottery stage where the number of rounds has not yet been determined. In the big hit lottery, a display effect is given as to whether or not a lottery result (big hit or small win) that confirms the opening of the big winning opening 2003 is obtained (regardless of the type of win, the challenge bonus directing pattern) To appear). And as a result, when it is shown that the same lottery result is obtained, it is possible for the player to know that at least a small amount of balls are available. Then, there will be a further challenge bonus effect on how many balls can be added (from a small amount to a medium or large amount). Like that.

  Furthermore, when the number of prize balls is increased, there is a possibility that the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player (a game state in which the probability changing function or the time-shortening function operates). Therefore, in such a challenge bonus effect, a higher probability that a winning probability “3/400” without operation of the condition device is added to a winning probability “1/400” with operation of the condition device. With “1/100”, not only can a prize ball be paid out to a player (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates), but also that a game state advantageous to the player can be entered. Can also be made aware.

  Moreover, according to such a challenge bonus production, since it is positioned as a default production state that a small amount of balls can be obtained, there is a large amount of ball winning according to the winning of the big hit Unlike conventional gaming machines where whether or not a basic game (basic production) is used, even if a small opening per game (small hit game) where a small amount of balls can be obtained is performed, Since the grand prize opening 2003 is only opened in conformity with the default performance state, a decrease in the game entertainment is suppressed. In addition, when in the second production mode, the probability of appearance of the hit production (probability of entering the challenge bonus) is determined by the fact that a small amount of balls can be obtained is positioned as the default production state. ) Is set to a higher probability (higher probability of winning big wins plus higher probability of winning big hits), and as a result, it is not possible to acquire award balls corresponding to the lower probability. It is also avoided that the interest is reduced.

  And in order to be able to have the challenge bonus performance pattern that realizes such games and performance in the second performance mode, not only is the lottery for the small hits performed in the first performance mode, At the time of winning a small hit, the varying times Ta2 to Td2 of the length corresponding to the changing times Ta1 to Td1 of the special symbol at the time of winning the big hit can be selected. However, in the first effect mode, a small win is not originally required, and a display effect is basically performed as to whether or not the big win is won based on the big win probability. Therefore, in the first effect mode, it is convenient to realize a display effect that is not easily noticed by the player if it is a pachinko machine equipped with a small hit, but the liquid crystal display device 1400 has a special symbol variation. If the production method that shows the result of the big hit lottery at the time of stoppage is simply adopted, after the special symbol is stopped, the opening period when the game per small opening (small hit game) is executed or the opening period of the big winning opening 2003 thereafter The existence of the game will be conspicuous, and the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, in the first effect mode, at the timing t1 (at the end of the variation of the special symbol) when the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set. However, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not ended and is continued. In addition, when entering the first closing control period, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set at timing t1, but the peripheral control MPU 4140a indicates that the special winning opening 2003 is opened. The set of the command is ignored without switching to the interval effect, and the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is continued. When the first closing control period ends and the second closing control period starts at timing t2, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is determined based on the result of the big hit lottery accompanied by the operation of the condition device. This is executed in such a manner that it is switched to a win-winning effect in which win-winning information about whether or not it is (big hit) is displayed, and further to an opening effect.

  That is, in this case, the above-mentioned effect at the time of the small hit is positioned as one effect that appears at the time of the loss of the big hit, and after the special symbol is stopped, the first closing at the time of executing the game per small opening (small hit game) By performing it over the control period and the opening period of the subsequent grand prize opening 2003, the display effect on the next change (special symbol hold-up) relatively quickly after showing that it is a big win. Will be able to migrate to. Accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device, because the production proceeds in the same manner as in the so-called highly anticipated loss production. This makes it difficult to notice, and as a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interests due to the opening / closing member 2006 operating in accordance with the winning of the small hit.

  And in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a first effect mode and a second effect mode are prepared, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment is in particular the first effect mode as described above. And a mode forcing control means for creating a mode forcing period that is forcibly determined to be one of the effect modes of the second and the second effect modes and is not allowed to be changed by the player's operation from the forcibly determined effect mode. ing. Then, a first predetermined period (for example, one month) after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall is forcibly determined as the first production mode, and the first predetermined period has elapsed. Then, the control related to the creation of the mode forcing period is performed so that the second predetermined period (for example, the next one month) is forcibly determined as the second effect mode.

  According to such a mode compulsory period, the hall side conceals this from the player even though the small hits are mounted by the appearance of the extended effect pattern as described above during the first predetermined period. In addition, by performing win display in the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the basis of the jackpot winning probability “1/400”, a prize ball is awarded to the player with the jackpot winning probability “1/400”. The first game-specific pachinko machine that can be paid out can be started (first newly opened store). In addition, in the second predetermined period after the first predetermined period elapses in this way, not only the big hit but also the small hit is one kind as a hit where the winning ball can be obtained by opening the big winning opening 2003. The above-mentioned challenge bonus performance pattern to be dealt with is higher than the winning probability “1/400” in the first predetermined period, coupled with the fact that it is difficult to notice the presence of the small hit in the first predetermined period. Based on the probability “1/100”, the winning display is performed in the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  That is, in this case, a prize ball can be paid out to the player with a higher probability “1/100” obtained by adding the winning probability “3/400” of the big hit to the winning probability “1/400” of the big win. The operation of a new pachinko machine with a second game specification can be started (second new store opening). As a result, while the pachinko machine 1 is originally equipped with only one game specification, another pachinko machine that has not only the contents of the effects on the liquid crystal display device 1400 but also the game specifications related to the appearance of the game is newly operated. Such an impression can be given to the player.

  Furthermore, according to such a mode compulsory period, unless a predetermined date (first predetermined period) has not elapsed and it is determined that it is at a specific date (second predetermined period). The change control from the first production mode is not permitted, and some production modes (second production mode) of the plurality of production modes are still hidden without appearing. Will be performed. In other words, in this case, as the month and day have passed since the pachinko machine 1 was delivered to the hall, the production functions that were hidden until then were gradually exposed. Since the rendered performance function can be selectively used by the player's operation, it is possible to maintain the gaming interest for a long period of time.

[Second Effect Mode, Display Effect Pattern at Effect Command “03H”]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (c), when the second production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure loss). ) Is obtained, the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta3 shown in FIG. 237 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timings t0 to t1). When started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “03H” is performed. Then, the variation of the decorative design is started.

  The non-extended display effect pattern (the effect command “03H”) having the content of the display effect a ′ thus started is also displayed, for example, in such a decorative pattern at the variation time Ta3 until the timing t1 arrives. Then, a display effect a ′ having contents such as an appropriate character struggling so as to stop display in a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears. However, at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line without the worth of struggle by an appropriate character. (Challenge bonus performance pattern) Accordingly, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “03H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content a ′”.

  Thus, the display effect pattern for the effect command “03H” is “non-extended display effect pattern” regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, it is between the effect pattern (effect command “01H”) having the content of the display effect a at the time of the big hit in which the “extended effect pattern” is adopted. Since there is a deviation in the production time at, it cannot function as a production pattern at the time of a loss with respect to the production pattern having the content of the display production a at the time of big hit, and the contents of the display production a develop. As described above, it functions only as a halfway effect pattern that ends in the middle stage.

  On the other hand, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of the big hit at the effect command “01H” is “non-extended display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern). ) ”, There is no deviation in the production time with the same production pattern (production command“ 01H ”), and the production pattern (production command“ 01H ") will function as an effect pattern at the time of losing (an effect pattern in which a bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line). As described above, when in the second effect mode, the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a ′ at the time of the small hit at the effect command “02H” is also the effect at the time of the hit. Since the pattern (a bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line) appears, the effect pattern (bonus challenge stop symbol is a predetermined symbol) for this effect pattern (effect command “02H”). It will function as a production pattern that does not appear on the design line).

[Second Effect Mode, Display Effect Pattern for Effect Command “04H”]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (d), when the second production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either the big hit or the small hit. Based on the fact that the “lost” is obtained, the fluctuation relating to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta4 shown in FIG. Is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 dynamically displays a non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “04H”. Is started.

  That is, the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “04H” has the contents of the display effect a at the time of the big hit when the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “03H” is in the first effect mode. In view of the fact that it cannot function as an effect pattern at the time of losing the effect pattern (effect command “01H”), this (effect pattern at the time of losing when in the first effect mode) should be compensated. It is prepared. Therefore, the display effect pattern for the effect command “04H” is the “non-extension effect pattern” when in the second effect mode, contrary to the display effect pattern for the effect command “03H”. The production time with the content of the display effect a ′ at the time of the big hit (the production command “01H”) will be shifted, and the production with the content of the display effect a ′ at the time of the big hit It cannot function as an effect pattern when the pattern is lost.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the fluctuation time Tc1 when the fluctuation number is “9” and the fluctuation time Tc2 when the fluctuation number is “10” shown in FIG. In this case, the variation time having the same length as the variation time Ta4 is prepared. That is, in this case, when in the second effect mode, a display effect pattern described later (see FIG. 247 (a)) having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit at the effect command “09H” is “non-display”. Since it appears as an “extended display effect pattern”, there is no deviation in the effect time with the same effect pattern (effect command “09H”). Therefore, regarding the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “04H”, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c ′ at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “04H” is displayed. By starting the dynamic display of the extended display effect pattern, the effect pattern (bonus) at the time of the loss with respect to the effect pattern (effect command “09H”) having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit The challenge stop symbol is made to function as an effect pattern that does not appear on a predetermined symbol line.

  In the non-extended display effect pattern (the effect command “04H”) having the content of the display effect c ′ thus started, for example, such a decorative pattern is displayed at the variation time Ta4 until the timing t3 arrives. Then, a display effect c ′ appears with a content such as an appropriate character struggling to stop display with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears. However, at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line without the worth of struggle by an appropriate character. Become.

  As described above, the display effect pattern for the effect command “04H” appears when a specific loss variation time Ta4 is selected, but the effect command (variation time) from the main control MPU 4100a is different. It is possible to function as each display display pattern for the big hit display effect patterns of the two types of effect contents a and c ′, and functions as a display display effect pattern for any of the big hit display effect patterns. Whether to do this is selectively set based on whether the first effect mode or the second effect mode is set. As a result, for the two big hit effect commands “01H” and “09H”, the big hit effect commands “01H” are in the first production mode and in the second production mode. , The appearance probability of the loss display effect pattern prepared for the big hit display effect pattern of “09H” can be changed.

  More specifically, regarding the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command “01H”, in the first effect mode, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is adopted as the lose effect pattern. In the effect mode, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is not adopted as the loss effect pattern. Therefore, for the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command “01H”, the appearance probability for the lost effect pattern of the effect command “04H” is higher in the second effect mode than in the first effect mode. In addition, regarding the big hit effect pattern of the effect command “09H”, in the first effect mode, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is not adopted as the loss effect pattern. In the effect mode, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is adopted as the loss effect pattern. Therefore, for the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command “09H”, the appearance probability for the lost effect pattern of the effect command “04H” is higher in the first effect mode than in the second effect mode. As a result, various display effects patterns with different degrees of expectation can be made to appear according to the effect mode without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step (see FIG. 248).

  The reason why such a special effect can be realized is that an effect command in which the length of each effect is adjusted by using the special symbol stop timing t3 as the effect time for one loss variation time Ta4. While having a big hit effect pattern of “09H” and a variation time Ta1 shorter than the loss variation time Ta4, at least the first closed control period after symbol stoppage is added and used as the effect time. A jackpot effect pattern (first effect mode) of the effect command “01H” in which the length of the command is adjusted is prepared. That is, by preparing the big hit effect pattern with the effect time adjusted in this way, one hit change time Ta4 is associated with the big hit effect patterns of the change commands “01H” and “09H” having different change times Ta1 and Tc1. When this loss variation time Ta4 is selected, it becomes possible to determine which production contents a and c ′ appear on the peripheral control MPU 4140a side. Furthermore, even when such a first closing control period added as the production time is won for winning the big winning opening 2003 (big hit or small win), a fixed length regardless of the type. It is important to set the time (for example, 8 seconds) with such a length in order to realize such a special effect especially including an effect pattern at the time of a small hit.

  FIG. 247 is a time chart illustrating an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” illustrated in FIG. 237 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side.

[About the first production mode, extended production pattern for production command “09H”]
As shown in FIG. 247 (a), based on the fact that the big hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the first production mode is set, the variation time shown in FIG. Assuming that a change related to a special symbol having Tc1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays a display effect c (for example, a specific mission c) associated with the effect command “09H”. The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern with the content of whether or not can be made successful (whether or not the character C can defeat the enemy) is started. The extended effect pattern (the effect command “09H”) having the content of the display effect c thus started is in a situation where the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the lapse of the variation time Tc1 has arrived. The display effect c is continued without ending (without causing the specific mission c to succeed or fail).

  That is, as described above, the fluctuation time Tc1 when the fluctuation number is “9” shown in FIG. 237 is not prepared as a fluctuation time having the same length as the fluctuation time Ta4 when the fluctuation number is “4”. However, when the first production mode is set, such an “extended production pattern” is adopted, and the production time with the production pattern (production command “04H”) is shifted. Is to occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when in the first production mode, production relevance (big hit production pattern, loss production) with the display production pattern when the variation number is “4”. Pattern) is not given.

  In addition, in the dynamic display of the extended effect pattern at the time of the effect command “09H”, the variation of the decorative design is also started. However, with respect to the variation of the decorative symbol, the stoppage of the special symbol is fixed and stopped at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped within the fluctuation time Tc1 in the manner of stopping the loss when extended. The display effect c on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped by the elapse of the fluctuation time Tc1 while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. As for the above, a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not a character C that has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) is performed.

  In other words, in this case, a display effect c described later (no development, loss) associated with the command “11H” shown in FIG. 237 is prepared, so that the display effect c even when the timing t3 has elapsed. This will function as “development display effect c (effect in which a chance to succeed a specific mission c)”. Therefore, when this “development display effect c” appears, the special symbol is not seen from the player side even though it is in the first closed control period after the variation of the special symbol is stopped. It can be grasped as still being changed. In addition, the decorative symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be grasped as being in a temporarily stopped state despite being in a state after being confirmed and stopped. It will be possible to make it appear that there is still a chance that it will be shown that the big win is won by overturning the lost stop mode.

  However, at this time, the extended effect pattern (the effect command “09H”) having the content of the display effect c is performed in a large display area (the center or the entire display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the above, the variable display of the decorative design is performed only in a small display area (a portion that is difficult to pay attention to such as an end portion of the display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400 with respect to the display effect c. However, it is more desirable to let the player grasp the result of the big hit lottery depending on whether or not the specific mission c in the display effect c can be successful without paying attention to the movement of the decorative design.

  That is, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (big hit) associated with the effect command “09H”, the actual effect is not displayed in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped. However, despite the fact that the decorative symbol has been confirmed and stopped, the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop has succeeded (for example, a character C who has fallen due to an attack from the enemy has risen). Under the circumstances, the “development display effect c” appears. In this “development display effect c”, for example, using the time until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU 4100a side, for example, a situation in which the character C again faces the enemy is displayed. An effect is made as to whether or not mission c can be successful.

  However, as will be described later, this “development display effect c (effect regarding whether or not a specific mission c can be successful)” in the first closed control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is shown in FIG. This is also performed in the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the command “10H”. As described above, when the player is in the first presentation mode, the display presentation c (small hit) is a big hit loss in order to make it difficult to recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the small hit. It is more desirable to shift to the next fluctuation (special symbol reserved digestion) relatively soon after the is displayed.

  Therefore, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (big hit) associated with the effect command “09H”, a specific time until the end timing t4 of the first closed control period arrives. The state of success in the mission c (character C defeats the enemy) is not shown, and the effect on whether or not the specific mission c can be successful (the character C attacks the enemy and succeeds) Production such as whether or not) appears. As a result, the jackpot demonstrative effect c can appear in such a manner that the specific mission c is successful after the opening effect end timing t4, and the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “09H”. Will function as a “winning effect pattern among effect patterns having effect content c”.

  However, as described above, in the extended performance pattern at the time of big hit, after the first closing control period having a certain length is completed, the closing control period is extended to have an indefinite length. Two closing control periods appear further. Then, within the second closing control period, a part of the effect contents in the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit (big hit explicit indication c) and the opening effect before the big hit game (right hit game is started by performing the right hit game) (Prompt to encourage) to be performed. Then, as a result of the operation handle portion 410 being operated at an appropriate timing in accordance with the speed of understanding of each player with respect to these effects, when the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 (timing ty), the second closing control is performed. When the period is over and the lottery process for the number of rounds is performed, the big hit game and the big hit game effect are started based on the result of the lottery process (the determined number of rounds). Details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 245 (a), the second closing control period from the timing t4 to the timing ty is ended based on the operation of the operation handle portion 410. Therefore, for example, the special-purpose gate 2500 is played by operating the operation handle 410 immediately after the end of the first closed control period having a certain length. When the game is played so that the ball passes, the jackpot explicit effect c and the opening effect are cut at that time, or the effect itself does not appear almost (effect skipping), and the next effect (effect during the jackpot game) It will be forced to proceed.

[First production mode, extended production pattern for production command “10H”]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 200B, based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the first production mode is set, FIG. In the liquid crystal display device 1400, when the fluctuation relating to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc2 shown in FIG. 1 (described here as being set to the same time as the fluctuation time Tc1) is started (timing t0). , A display effect c at the time of a small hit associated with the effect command “10H” (for example, whether or not a specific mission c can be succeeded (whether the character C can defeat the enemy)) The dynamic display of the extended production pattern with contents is started. When the extended effect pattern (effect command “10H”) having the content of the display effect c thus started is also the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 247 (a)) associated with the effect command “09H”. Similarly to the above, even when the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the passage of the variation time Tc2 has arrived, the display effect c is not ended (the specific mission c is not succeeded or failed). ) Continue this.

  In addition, the variation of the decorative pattern is also started in the dynamic display of the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command “10H”. Further, with respect to the variation of the decorative symbol, the extended rendering pattern associated with the rendering command “09H” (FIG. 247) is also determined to stop with a loss stop mode at the time of extension at timing t3 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. (See (a)). In addition, although the lost stop mode at the time of extension is different from the big win lottery result for the big hit and the small hit, a single display mode is adopted, and the display mode is distinguished. What has not been done is as described above.

  Furthermore, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped by the elapse of the fluctuation time Tc2 while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. As for c, a point of continuation expectation about whether or not this is continued (for example, whether or not a character C that has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) This is the same as the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 247 (a)) associated with the effect command “09H”.

  That is, even in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command “10H”, in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, Actually, despite the fact that the decorative symbol has been confirmed and stopped, such an expectation that the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop has been successful (for example, a character C who has fallen due to an attack from the enemy has stood up). Under the feeling, “development display effect c” appears. In this “development display effect c”, for example, a state in which the character C again faces the enemy is displayed using the time until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU 4100a side. An effect is made as to whether or not a specific mission c can be successful.

  Furthermore, similarly, until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period arrives, a specific mission c (successfully defeating an enemy) is not shown, and a specific mission c is not shown. An effect about whether or not the mission c can be successful (an effect such as whether or not the character C attacks the enemy and succeeds) appears. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 245 (b), the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command “10H” has a certain length. After the first closing control period ends, the second closing control period having an indefinite length does not appear in such a manner that the closing control period is extended. Therefore, after the end timing t4 of the first closing control period, until the end timing t5 of the control relating to the opening of the big winning opening 2003 in the small opening per game (small hit game) at the time of the production command “10H” In this way, the losing explicit effect c appears in the form of the failure of the mission c. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “10H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content c”.

  In this losing explicit effect c, for example, as a big hit defeat effect different from the losing explicit effect a, for example, an attack by the character C is dismissed and the enemy escapes, and then the character C is regretted. Done.

  According to the extended effect pattern associated with such effect commands “09H” and “10H”, the opening timing t5 of the special winning opening 2003 from the start timing t0 of the special symbol (or the second closing control period). The time until the jackpot clearing effect c ends) will function as one effect for winning the jackpot, so that the player's gaze can be directed to such an effect, It is possible to make it difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the opening of the big winning opening 2003 when the losing explicit effect c is performed, and consequently the small hits.

[Display effect pattern in the case of the first effect mode and the effect command “11H”]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), when the first production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure loss). ) Is obtained, the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc3 shown in FIG. 237 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timings t0 to t3). If started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect c at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H” (for example, a specific mission c can be made successful (character C) The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of whether or not the enemy can be defeated is started. However, the display effect pattern (the effect command “11H”) having the contents of the display effect c thus started is displayed when the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the lapse of the variation time Tc3 has arrived. This is ended without extending the production c (in the form of failing a specific mission c).

  More specifically, the variation of the decorative design is also started in the dynamic display of the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H”. In addition, even when the decoration symbol changes, at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the suspension stop mode at the time of extension when the stop is fixed and stopped at the extension time. ing.

  Further, the display effect c in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped by the elapse of the fluctuation time Tc3 under the temporary stop in the manner of stopping the loss when the decorative symbol is extended. As for the point of whether or not this is continued, the point is to perform a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not the character C who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up). This is the same as the extended effect pattern (see FIGS. 247 (a) and (b)) associated with the commands “09H” and “10H”.

  However, in the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H”, the continuous expected effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example, from the enemy A state in which the character C that has fallen due to the attack did not stand up is shown) so that the player can know that a specific mission has failed. By preparing such an effect pattern, an effect pattern that continues after timing t3 shown in FIGS. 247 (a) and 247 (b) can be made to function as an effect pattern with development.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, whether or not the specific mission c has been successfully completed until the timing t4 has arrived even in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect commands “09H” and “10H”. Whether or not (character C defeats the enemy) is not shown, but prior to the arrival of timing t4, whether or not a specific mission c was successful (whether character C defeated the enemy) Or not) may be indicated. That is, in this case, after the same result display appears, the big hit explicit effect or the lose explicit indication effect is performed. Even in such an effect method, the small win time display effect c is the small hit time. In addition to the fact that most of the first closed control period is used for the display effect c, a big win defeat effect such as the appearance of the regret of the character C appears. It is possible to shift to the next change (special symbol reservation digestion) relatively soon after being broken.

  By the way, as described above, such display effects appear when any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 237 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side in the first effect mode. It is. Then, the player wins the big win with the winning probability of the big hit without being aware of the existence of the small hit that is not particularly necessary for realizing such game performance (rendering performance) in the first production mode. You will enjoy the game about whether or not it will be played.

  However, even if any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 237 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side, the main control MPU 4100a is set when the second effect mode is set. The winning commands 2003 based on the winning of small hits despite the fact that there is no change in the normal external disadvantaged game state as well as the contents of the production commands “09H” to “11H” from the side 2003 By actively adopting the display effect pattern of the effect content on the premise of opening the game, the opportunity frequency of winning the winning ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 compared to when in the first effect mode The game performance (rendering performance) is realized as if is greatly increased.

[Second Effect Mode, Display Effect Pattern for Effect Command “09H”]
That is, as shown in FIG. 247 (a), based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100a side has won a big hit when the second production mode is set, it is shown in FIG. Assuming that the variation of the special symbol having the variation time Tc1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the contents of the display effect c ′ at the big hit time associated with the effect command “09H”. The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern and the variation of the decorative design are started.

  However, the content of the display effect c ′ in the second effect mode is different from that of the display effect c in the first effect mode. For example, is it possible to make a specific mission c ′ successful? In the form of the display effect pattern (challenge), such as whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with the bonus challenge stop symbol that makes it possible to grasp that the winning prize opening 2003 is confirmed to be open. Bonus performance pattern). Therefore, the decorative symbol variation display is also performed over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (at least in a portion that is easily noticed, such as the central portion of the display area). In this way, in the second performance mode, attention is paid to the movement of the decorative symbol, and the big hit is determined depending on whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line. The player is made to know the result of the lottery.

  Then, in the non-extended display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern) at the time of the effect command “09H”, for example, such a decorative symbol is used as the bonus challenge stop symbol in the variation time Tc1 until the timing t3 arrives. At the timing t3 when the display effect c 'appears, such as the appropriate character struggling to stop display with the stop display mode that appears, and at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the special winning opening 2003 is opened. In order to make it possible for the player to know that an opportunity to acquire a prize ball is granted, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “09H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content c ′”.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the liquid crystal display device 1400 uses the first closing control period and is acquired by the player by opening the big prize opening 2003. As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect c ′ regarding how many prize balls are possible, the operation timing of the operation handle portion 410 is indicated by the countdown effect c ′ indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Like to do.

  Here, as described above, the countdown effect c ′ is, for example, a countdown display of about 3 to 5 seconds while explaining that the special-purpose gate 2500 is aimed by a right-handed game. When the operation handle portion 410 is operated with an appropriate operation amount when the countdown display changes to “0”, the game ball passes through the special-purpose gate 2500 as soon as the first closing control period ends. become. However, as will be described later, since the countdown effect c ′ has a different expectation from the countdown effect a ′ described above, the content of the effect is different from each other (for example, the background color is different). I have to.

  Therefore, according to such a countdown effect c ′, when the operation handle portion 410 is operated according to the instruction of the effect, as shown in FIG. 247 (a), the end timing t4 of the first closing control period. As soon as the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500, the end timing ty of the second closed control period arrives earlier than in the first production mode. As a result, the lottery process (round number determination process) for the number of rounds relatively early after the end timing t4 of the first closing control period arrives, and further, the result of the lottery process (the determined number of rounds). Based on this, a challenge bonus presentation is made as to how many prize balls can be obtained by the player, and in this presentation, which release mode (game per long release, middle release) Whether or not the big prize opening 2003 is opened with a winning game or a small opening game) is shown. That is, in this case, the player will not only play the big hit game but also play the game ball to the big prize opening 2003 not only when the game is per small opening (small hit game), thereby being in the first production mode. Compared to the above, the game performance (rendering performance) is realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 is greatly increased. Details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 245 (c), in such a big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern, the operation is continued for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect c ′ changes to “0”. It is also assumed that a situation where the handle portion 410 is not operated occurs. That is, in this case, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time. In this second closing control period, the countdown display is “0” on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In order to diminish the interest of the player who causes such a situation, it is desirable to prevent a new effect from appearing such as “

  However, in the situation where the challenge bonus performance pattern has appeared, such a situation where the performance progress is stagnant is limited to the case where a big win is won. In the case of FIG. 245 (d) and FIG. 247 (b)), it cannot occur. In other words, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by the amount that the possibility of playing a game per small opening is excluded while there is a stagnant effect (no effect) in which no effect is newly performed. In addition to this, the expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player can be dramatically increased.

[Second Effect Mode, Display Effect Pattern for Effect Command “10H”]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 247 (b), based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the second production mode is set, FIG. If the variation related to the special symbol having the variation time Tc2 shown in FIG. 1 (here, described as being set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device In 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the small hits associated with the effect command “10H” and the variation of the decorative design are started.

  The non-extended display effect pattern (the effect command “10H”) having the content of the display effect c ′ thus started is also displayed, for example, in such a decorative pattern at the variation time Tc2 until the timing t3 arrives. At the timing t3 when a display effect c 'appears with an appropriate character struggling to stop and display in a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears, and at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped The decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “10H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content c ′”.

  However, as described above, when winning a small bonus, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special symbol is stopped until the game per small opening (small winning game) is started. The interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is up to the time up (first closed control period with a certain length), and when the timer is up, Regardless of whether or not a game ball has passed through 2500, a game per small opening (small hit game) is started (see FIG. 233).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, even in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “10H”, the decorative design is the same as in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “09H”. When the game is confirmed and stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player by opening the big winning opening 2003 using the first closing control period. As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect about whether it is a thing, the operation timing of the operation handle part 410 performs a countdown effect c ′ indicated by a countdown display in the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  That is, in the display effect pattern when in the second effect mode, both the big win and the small win are handled in the same way as the big winning opening 2003 is opened, and the variation of the decorative design is started. The contents of the performance from the timing t0 to the time when the challenge bonus performance is performed are not distinguished, and when the operation handle portion 410 is operated as instructed by the same performance, the challenge is performed from the countdown effect c ′ through the preceding effect (not shown). The challenge bonus effect is started with the same series of effect contents as in the case of the big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern (effect command “09H”) that leads to the bonus effect. Accordingly, not only big hits but also small hits are treated as one type (per hit type) as a win that can be won by winning the big prize opening 2003. In addition to games and games per mid-open, it is possible to display effects regarding which game modes appear, including games per small open. Thereby, as compared with the case in the first production mode, the game performance (production performance) is realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning the prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 is greatly increased. . Of the games per long opening, games per medium opening, and games per small opening, the game per small opening ends in a relatively short time. As to whether or not the winning is won, the player may be able to grasp by displaying a specific image that does not appear at the time of winning the big hit in the production within the first closed control period.

Thus, the display effect pattern for the effect command “10H” is a display effect pattern based on one effect command,
・ Extended production pattern in the first production mode, which is treated as a no-chance loss that does not give a chance to win a prize ball, and ・ A small chance to win a chance to win a prize ball ( This is selectively executed as one of the non-extended display effect patterns in the second effect mode to be handled (similar to the effect pattern at the time of big hit (effect command “09H”)). That is, in this case, the effect information related to the winning is appropriately reversed on the peripheral control MPU 4140a side, and thereby, a variety of effects with greatly different effect contents can be obtained without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step. Can be realized.

[Second Effect Mode, Display Effect Pattern for Effect Command “11H”]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), when the second production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure loss). ) Is obtained, the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc3 shown in FIG. 237 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timings t0 to t3). If it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H” is performed. Then, the variation of the decorative design is started.

  The non-extended display effect pattern (the effect command “11H”) having the content of the display effect c ′ thus started is also displayed, for example, in such a decorative pattern at the variation time Tc3 until the timing t3 arrives. Then, a display effect c ′ having contents such as an appropriate character struggling so as to stop display in a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears. However, at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line without the worth of struggle by an appropriate character. (Challenge bonus performance pattern) As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “11H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content c ′”.

  Thus, the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “11H” is “non-extended display effect pattern” regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, it is between the effect pattern (the effect command “09H”) having the contents of the display effect c at the time of the big hit when the “extended effect pattern” is adopted. Since there is a shift in the production time at the stage, it cannot function as a production pattern at the time of a loss with respect to the production pattern having the content of the display production c at the time of the big hit, and the contents of the display production c are developed. As described above, it functions only as a halfway effect pattern that ends in the middle stage.

  On the other hand, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit at the effect command “09H” appears as the “non-extended display effect pattern”. For the effect pattern (the effect command “09H”) having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit without causing any deviation in the effect time with the same effect pattern (the effect command “09H”). It will function as an effect pattern at the time of the loss (effect pattern in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line). As described above, when in the second effect mode, the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the effect command “10H” is also the effect at the time of the hit. Since the pattern (the bonus challenge stop pattern appears as a production pattern that appears on a predetermined design line), the production pattern (the bonus challenge stop design is a predetermined pattern) for this production pattern (production command “10H”). It will function as a production pattern that does not appear on the design line).

  Thus, the display effect pattern for the effect command “09H” corresponds to the display effect pattern for the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 246 (a). The display effect pattern corresponds to the display effect pattern for the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 246 (b), and the display effect pattern for the effect command “11H” is shown in FIG. 246 (c). The production command corresponds to the display production pattern when the production command is “03H”, and although the production contents differ from each other, the production series addressed to itself (production contents a series, production contents) c series) function as production patterns having substantially the same role.

  However, in the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”), a display production pattern corresponding to the production command “04H” in the production content a series (production commands “01H” to “04H”) is prepared. Not. That is, in the production content c series, if a display production pattern corresponding to the production command “04H” is prepared, in the first production pattern, the display production pattern corresponding to the production command “09H” is displayed. Although it can function effectively as a loss display effect pattern, the second effect pattern cannot function as a display loss effect pattern for the display effect pattern when the effect command is “09H”. Therefore, despite being given a relatively long time, there was a display effect pattern dedicated to losing without the jackpot symbol combination appearing, and we were worried that this might reduce the entertainment interest of this game Is.

  Therefore, when in the first effect mode, for the hit effect pattern when the effect command is “09H”, as the lose effect pattern, the effect pattern at the time of losing (pure loss) that does not satisfy a specific condition is adopted. Only the effect pattern when the specific condition is satisfied (the display effect pattern when the effect command is “10H”) functions as the only presence in place of the effect pattern at the time of the loss (pure loss) To come. That is, in this case, in the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”), unlike the production content a series (production commands “01H” to “04H”), “development display production c” appears. The big hit expectation degree at that time must be set within a range constrained by the appearance ratio of the big hit and the small hit. However, the production content c of the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”) has a longer time than the production content a of the production content a series (production commands “01H” to “04H”). As the jackpot expectation degree, it is executed as an effect with a higher expectation than the effect content a. Therefore, the expectation degree of big hit when the “development display effect c” appears, even if it is within the range constrained by the appearance ratio of big hit and small hit, this is required as an appropriate value described later. Setting is relatively easy.

  In addition, regarding the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “04H” in the effect content a series (effect commands “01H” to “04H”), the effect content a is in the second effect mode. By functioning as a loss effect pattern for the hit effect pattern (effect commands “09H”, “10H”) of the effect content c series, not the hit effect pattern of the series (effect commands “01H”, “02H”) As described above, it is avoided that the jackpot symbol combination does not appear as a display effect pattern dedicated to losing. Therefore, in the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”), when in the second production mode, the winning production patterns (production commands “09H” and “10H”) are prepared. The lost effect pattern appears with a higher probability than the ratio of the lost effect pattern (the effect command “11H”) to the extent that the display effect pattern selection probability of the effect command “04H” is added.

  Although details are omitted, each display effect pattern associated with the effect commands “05H”, “06H”, “07H”, and “08H” of the effect content b series shown in FIG. Display having the same mode as each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 246 (a) to (d)) associated with the a series of effect commands “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, and “04H”, respectively. It is set as a production pattern. Furthermore, the display effect patterns respectively associated with the effect commands “12H”, “13H”, “14H” of the effect content d series shown in FIG. 237 are the effect commands “09H” of the effect content c series, It is set as a display effect pattern having the same form as each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 247 (a) to (c)) associated with “10H” and “11H”, respectively. That is, the display effect patterns associated with the effect commands “05H”, “06H”, “07H”, and “08H” of the effect content b series shown in FIG. 237 and the effect content d shown in FIG. The production relations between the display production patterns associated with the series production commands “12H”, “13H”, and “14H” are the production commands “01H”, “02H”, Each display effect pattern (refer to FIGS. 246 (a) to (d)) respectively associated with “03H” and “04H” and the effect commands “09H”, “10H”, “11H” of the effect content c series. Are set so as to have the above-described effect relationship with each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 247 (a) to 247 (c)) associated with each other.

  FIG. 248 (a) is a table showing the jackpot expectation degree when in the first effect mode for each effect content series, and FIG. 248 (b) is a challenge when in the second effect mode. It is a table | surface which shows a bonus rush expected degree etc. according to each production content series, respectively. In addition, about the numerical value which shows a probability, since the 2nd decimal place is rounded off and it has shown as a numerical value to the 1st decimal place, the probability total value of each element may not become 100%.

  According to such a setting aspect relating to the display effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 248 (a), the big hit expectation degree, which is the expectation degree at which the hit effect appears in the first effect mode, The big hit expectation degree when the display effect pattern appears is “0.5%”, and the big hit expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content b appears is “1.5%”. The big hit expectation degree when the display effect pattern appears is “13.7%”, and the big hit expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content d appears is “33.1%”. When the display effect pattern of the effect content e appears, the big hit expectation is “100%”, which is omitted in the table. In the display effect pattern of the effect contents e, a confirmed effect that the big hit is won appears regardless of the effect mode.

  Further, regarding the big hit expectation degree (expectation degree at which the hit effect appears) when each display effect pattern that can appear in the first effect mode is in the developed stage, when the developed effect content a appears The big hit expectation degree of "1.3%", the big hit expectation degree when the development content b after development appears "3.7%", the big hit when the development content c after development appears The degree of expectation is “25%”, and the degree of expectation for jackpot when the production content d after development appears is “72.7%”.

  On the other hand, with respect to the challenge bonus entry expectation degree, which is the expectation degree at which the winning effect appears in the second effect mode, as shown in FIG. 248 (b), when the display effect pattern of the effect content a ′ appears. The challenge bonus entry expectation degree is “7.9%”, the challenge bonus entry expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content b ′ appears is “11.8%”, and the effect content c ′ is displayed. The challenge bonus rush expectation degree when the effect pattern appears is “15.4%”, and the challenge bonus rush expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′ appears is “10%”.

  That is, as described above, only the display effect patterns of the effect contents a and b among the effect contents a to d are the jackpot effect patterns (effect command “01H”, effect command “05H” set as the extended effect patterns. ”), A non-extended display effect pattern (effect command“ 04H ”, effect command“ 08H ”) that can only function as a loss effect pattern when in the first effect mode is prepared. Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (the effect command “04H” and the effect command “08H”) prepared in this way is used in the second effect mode. 09H ”, the production command“ 10H ”) and the effect content d ′ for the hit production pattern (the production command“ 12H ”, the production command“ 13H ”).

  According to the display effect pattern associated with such effect commands “04H” and “08H”, when in the first effect mode, the expectation that a win effect appears including the developed effect contents a and b. Although the degree (expected degree of jackpot) is lowered, the appearance probability of each display effect pattern of the effect contents a and b is increased (for each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d), thereby It can be avoided that only display effect patterns that cannot be expected are repeatedly performed. Furthermore, for each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d, although the appearance probability is low including the effect contents c and d after development, a hit effect appears in each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d. The degree of expectation (expected degree of jackpot) is increased (with respect to each display effect pattern of effect contents a and b), and thereby the game entertainment when a specific display effect pattern (effect contents c and d) appears Can be improved.

  Conversely, the display effect pattern associated with such effect commands “04H” and “08H” is used as a display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d series when in the second effect mode. As a result, the appearance probability of the production contents c and d series is increased by that amount (operation on the appearance probability). As a result, it is possible to reduce the difference between the probability of appearance between the contents a to d and the expectation level at which the hit effect appears, as compared with the first effect mode, and the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side can be reduced. Even if it is not changed one by one, it is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with greatly different effects.

  Moreover, the display effect associated with the effect commands “04H” and “08H” regarding the disparity between the effect contents regarding the expectation level (challenge bonus entry expectation degree) at which the winning effect appears when in the second effect mode. In addition to being used as a display effect pattern for the production contents c and d series, the pattern can be used as a winning combination for winning a winning ball by opening the big winning opening 2003, and one type of small hit is also available. Is further reduced (an operation to reduce the disparity in expectation level where a hit effect appears).

  According to the effect mode when in the second effect mode, the display effect patterns of the effect contents a ′ to d ′ are relatively likely to appear regardless of the type of the effect contents a ′ to d ′. Become. In addition, the entry probability (probability of execution of the winning effect) of the challenge bonus effect in which the granting of the opportunity for winning the prize ball is confirmed is equalized compared to that in the first effect mode (here, the contents of the effect) a) to d ′) (within a range of ± 10%), even if any production content a ′ to d ′ appears due to the above-mentioned gap in the appearance probability being filled It becomes easier for a person to expect that an opportunity for winning a prize ball will be given.

  In this regard, when in the second production mode, when the challenge bonus production is entered (executed), the “big prize opening 2003 is released in any manner (game per long open, game per medium open, game per small open). Since it is characterized by the effect “whether it is done”, it is better to make it appear more easily as a display effect pattern of the effect contents a ′ to d ′ than when it appears to be biased to any one. It is more desirable to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 248 (b), in the display effect pattern of the effect contents a ′ to d ′ according to this embodiment, the appearance probability (the number of rounds depends on the number of rounds, the game per big open game (big hit game)) With regard to the probability of the lottery process being performed), the production content a ′ is the smallest, and the production content b ′, c ′, d ′ is gradually increased in order. In addition, with regard to the appearance probability of the game per small opening, the production content a ′ is the largest, and gradually decreases in the order of the production content b ′, c ′, and d ′. Therefore, when the display effect pattern of the effect content a ′ appears, the possibility that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the game per small opening is certainly high, but at least a small amount of prize balls (in the present embodiment) , About 40 to 50), and the expectation that the big prize opening 2003 will be opened by a big hit game such as a game per long opening or a game per middle opening You will be able to enjoy it as a production of a certain shade. When the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′ appears, the probability that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the game per long opening or the game per middle opening is the probability that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the game per small opening. Therefore, it is determined that at least a small amount of prize balls can be acquired as a privilege. It will function as an effect of shades such as whether or not it is opened. Then, the display effect patterns of the effect contents b ′ and c ′ each function as an effect having a hue between the display effect pattern of the effect contents a ′ and the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′. The display effect pattern of the effect content b ′ is darker in the effect of the display effect pattern of the effect content a ′, and the display effect pattern of the effect content c ′ is darker in the effect of the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′. Is darker. Therefore, the display effect patterns of such effect contents a ′ to d ′ are all relatively likely to appear, so that the player can enjoy the effects of various shades.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the above-described operation for reducing the disparity in expectation level at which the hit effect appears between the contents is smaller than that in the first effect mode is expected to show the hit effect. The degree relationship is to be reversed depending on the production mode. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 248 (a) and 248 (b), when in the first production mode, the expectation levels of production contents b and c are “1.5%” and “ 13.7% ”, which is smaller than the expectation level“ 33.1% ”of the effect content d, but when in the second effect mode, the expectation level of the effect contents b ′ and c ′ Are “11.8%” and “15.4%”, respectively, which are larger than the expectation level “10%” of the production content d ′. Even with such a setting mode, it is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with greatly different effects without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step.

  However, when the production pattern of the production content d ′ appears, the degree of expectation (probability) that the winning production (challenge bonus production) is executed is certainly greater than when the production pattern of the production contents b ′ and c ′ appears. Although it is low, as long as it enters the challenge bonus production, the big winning opening 2003 is opened by a game with a long and middle opening with a higher probability than the production pattern of the production contents b ′ and c ′. It is easy to get a lot of balls. Therefore, the production patterns of the production contents b ′ and c ′ and the production pattern of the production content d ′ are divided according to the player, and such various shades are given depending on the display production pattern. As a result, a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game is suppressed.

  Next, an example of an effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when the control for opening the special winning opening 2003 is performed based on the result of the big hit lottery in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 237, FIG. 246 (a) and FIG. 247 (a), according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first presentation mode, the type of big hit (for example, big hit A˜ Depending on the state type (such as the big hit D), the content of the production does not differ, and the type is not shown, and the control for opening the big winning opening 2003 is performed (in this case, the big hit game is applied) Control) is started. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first presentation mode, the type of jackpot and the period are determined using the period when the control for opening the big prize opening 2003 is performed. An effect that can indicate the gaming state after the end is performed.

  For example, if the result of the big hit lottery in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state is a big hit A, after the big hit game is finished, control is made to a probability changing external advantageous gaming state in which both the time reduction function and the probability variation function are activated. Is done. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit lottery in the normal external disadvantaged gaming state is any of the big hits B to D, after the big hit game is finished, in the external disadvantageous gaming state in which the time reduction function does not operate, A predetermined latent effect is performed in which it is concealed whether or not the probability variation function is in operation.

  Therefore, the effect during the big hit game when in the first effect mode is determined when the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 after clearly indicating that the big hit is won as the big hit explicit effects a to d. Based on the number of rounds and the big hit state types (big hits A to D), one of a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared is selectively executed.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the following four effect patterns are prepared as effect patterns related to the effect during the big hit game when in the first effect mode.
a. It is a production pattern with a length corresponding to the number of round games that are played "9 times", and after the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to a probabilistic external advantageous game state in which both the short-time function and the probability variation function are activated The effect pattern shown in the liquid crystal display device 1400.
b. In the probable external advantageous game state in which both the short-time function and the probability variation function are activated after the big hit game is finished, which is an effect pattern having a length corresponding to “9 times” of the round game. The effect pattern indicated in the liquid crystal display device 1400 that it is not controlled.
c. This is an effect pattern with the length of the round game that is played "16 times", and after the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to a probabilistic external advantageous game state in which both the short-time function and the probability variation function are activated. The effect pattern shown in the liquid crystal display device 1400.
d. In the probable external advantageous game state in which both the short-time function and the probability variation function are activated after the big hit game is finished, which is an effect pattern having a length corresponding to “16 times” of the round game. The effect pattern indicated in the liquid crystal display device 1400 that it is not controlled.

  That is, in the first effect mode, when the result of the big hit lottery in a normal external disadvantageous game state (a series of lottery results for execution of the big hit game) is “big hit A1”, the “c” effect pattern Is selectively executed, and when “big hit A2”, the effect pattern “a” is selectively executed. In addition, when the result of the big hit lottery (a series of lottery results relating to the execution of the big hit game) in the normal external disadvantaged game state is any one of “big hit B1”, “big hit C1”, and “big hit D1” , “D” effect pattern is selectively executed, and when “big hit B2”, “big hit C2”, and “big hit D2” are selected, the “b” effect pattern is selectively executed. Will be.

  In any of these four performance patterns, an effect regarding whether or not the game is controlled to the probability-variable external advantageous game state is once performed until the round game is performed “9 times”. However, it is more desirable to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests during the big hit game. In other words, in this case, only the performance pattern “a” of “a” to “d” is controlled to the probability-changing external advantageous game state within the time until the round game is performed “9 times”. The three effect patterns other than that will be shown as failure effects indicating that they are not controlled by the probability-changing external advantageous game state (the game state most advantageous to the player). However, with regard to the two performance patterns “c” and “d”, the game is continued after the above-mentioned round game has been performed “9 times”, so that a predetermined revival effect is produced after the failure effect appears. In this revival effect, a chance effect is once again given as to whether or not the game is controlled to the probable external advantageous game state within the time until the round game is played “16 times”. Then, the “c” effect pattern is controlled to the probability-changing external advantageous game state as a successful resurgence effect shown within the time until the round game is played “16 times”. It is assumed that the pattern is controlled to the probability-changing external advantageous game state as a revival failure effect that is not shown within the time until the round game is performed “16 times”.

  According to such a big hit game effect, when a successful effect appears within the time until the above-mentioned round game is performed “9 times”, it is determined that the game is controlled to a probable external advantageous game state. Although it is an advantageous effect for the player, there is also a demerit that it is determined at the same time that it is a big hit game with a medium time opening / closing pattern that is smaller than the long time opening / closing pattern. However, when a big hit game is played with a long opening / closing pattern with a large amount of play, first, since the failure production appears, the player has “9 times” round game and is a probable external advantage game. We must be prepared once that it is not controlled by the state. In addition, even when the rebirth effect (big bonus effect) appears after the failure effect appears, and it is determined that the big hit game is performed with a long opening / closing pattern with a large amount of balls, the round game is “ The performance under the consciousness of the possibility that the successful resurgence effect will not appear further within the time period until “16 times” is performed (the possibility that it will not be controlled in the probable external advantageous gaming state) will be performed. Therefore, if a successful performance appears within the time until the above round game is played "9 times", only a moderate amount of play is obtained, but without such a performance risk. The game entertainment can be suitably maintained by notifying the fact that the game is controlled to the probability-changing external advantageous game state after the big hit game.

  The result of the big hit lottery (a series of lottery results related to the execution of the big hit game) when the player is in an external disadvantageous game state is one of the big hits B to D (big hit B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2). In some cases, after the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to an external disadvantageous gaming state in which the time-shortening function does not operate (a normal external disadvantageous gaming state in which the probability variation function is not activated, or a probability varying external disadvantageous gaming state in which the probability variation function is activated) . Then, as the effect state after the big hit game is ended, whether or not the probability variation function is in operation is controlled to a predetermined latent effect state in which it is concealed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 237, FIG. 246 (a), and FIG. 247 (a), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the second presentation mode, the opportunity to open the grand prize opening 2003 is There is no difference in the production contents depending on the type of winning (big hit A to big hit D, small hit), and the control related to the opening of the big winning opening 2003 without being shown is hidden ( Here, the control for the big hit game or the small hit game) is started. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the second production mode, the winning type and the period are determined using the period when the control related to the opening of the special winning opening 2003 is performed. The above-described challenge bonus effect that can indicate the gaming state after the end will be performed.

  In other words, in the opening effect (challenge bonus effect) in the second effect mode, first, the big prize opening 2003 is in any form (game per long opening (big hit A1, B1, C1, D1), game per middle opening (big hit) (A2, B2, C2, D2), a game showing information regarding the amount of balls (big bonus, regular bonus, small bonus, etc.) regarding whether to be released with a game per small opening (small winning)) It becomes. And, as a result, when it is shown that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by either the game per long opening or the game per middle opening (big bonus or regular bonus), winning of the special winning (big winning) Based on the above, the possibility that the change control for the game state from the external disadvantageous game state (the most disadvantageous game state for the player) is performed is naturally realized. On the other hand, when it is shown that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the game per small opening (small bonus), it means that it is a win of the small winning and the game state will not be changed. Will be.

  Further, when it is shown that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by a game per long opening (big bonus), or when the big winning opening 2003 is shown by a game per middle opening ( Regular bonus), a battle effect by a predetermined character is further performed as an effect during opening. As a result, when the character wins in the battle effect, it is shown that the game is controlled to the probability variation external advantageous game state based on the winning of the big hit A (big hit A1, A2). On the other hand, when the character is defeated in the battle production, it is shown that one of the big hits B to D (big hit B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2) is won. After the opening effect (big hit game) is finished, control to an external disadvantageous gaming state where the time-shortening function does not operate (normal external disadvantageous gaming state where the probability variation function does not operate, or a probabilistic external disadvantageous gaming state where the probability variation function operates) Is done. Then, as the effect state after the big hit game is ended, whether or not the probability variation function is in operation is controlled to a predetermined latent effect state in which it is concealed.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined latent production state is limited to a period until a special symbol is changed a specific number of times (for example, 10 times). For example, when a specific enemy character is not encountered until the end of the same period, it indicates that it is in a probable external disadvantaged game state, while when a specific enemy character is encountered during the same period, a predetermined battle effect is performed. I am doing so. And when the character wins in this battle effect, it shows that it is won by big hit, and when the character is defeated, it usually shows that it is in an external disadvantaged game state, and waits for the end of the same period The latent production state is terminated without any problem.

  As described above, according to the latent effect technique in which the current gaming state is indicated until the period until the special symbol is changed a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) at the latest, as a player, It becomes easy to enjoy whether the game state is in the game state, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the game state being kept secret for a long period of time even though the time-saving function is not activated.

  By the way, in the example described above with reference to FIG. 246 (a), the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 237 when in the first effect mode has the “extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a”. ”, But as shown in FIG. 249, in addition to the“ extended effect pattern ”, a“ non-extended display effect pattern ”having the contents of the display effect a is also associated. It may be.

  That is, in this case, when the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 237 is received in the first effect mode, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the “extended effect pattern” having the contents of the display effect a and the display effect a. One of the “non-extended display effect patterns” having the contents is selected, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 starts dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern.

Here, as a technique concerning selection of the “extended display pattern” having the content of the display effect “a” and the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the content of the display effect “a”, for example,
(A) Based on the result of a predetermined effect lottery based on a random number, either an “extended effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a or a “non-extended display effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a How to choose
(B) “Extended effect pattern” having the content of display effect a and “Non-extend display effect pattern” having the content of display effect a based on the status type of the jackpot won in the jackpot lottery In addition to a method for selecting any of the above, a method combining (A) and (B), or the like can be employed. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after the special symbol is stopped, the lottery process for the number of rounds is not executed until the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500. Therefore, it is impossible to select the “extended effect pattern” and the “non-extended display effect pattern” based on the number of rounds (the execution mode of the jackpot game).

  Of these, when the method (a) is adopted, how many random values that can be acquired are associated with the “extended effect pattern” and the “non-extended display effect pattern”, respectively. In the first effect mode, the “extended effect” having the content of the display effect a when the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 237 is received in the first effect mode. The appearance probabilities of “pattern” and “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of display effect a are determined. With regard to the appearance probability setting, it is important that when the “extended effect pattern” appears rather than the “non-extended display effect pattern”, the big hit expectation is higher until the end of the display effect pattern. It is more desirable to entertain.

  Further, when the method (b) is adopted, when a specific winning type (for example, jackpot A) is won, the dynamic of the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of the display effect a The display is started on the liquid crystal display device 1400. According to such a production method, at a timing t1, a winning result for at least a specific winning type (for example, big hit A) is displayed.

  For example, when a jackpot symbol (a jackpot demonstrating effect that clearly indicates a big hit) appears at the stop timing t1 of the special symbol, the “big hit A”, which is the most advantageous for the player. In the first closed control period, the liquid crystal display device 1400 performs an opening effect such as “Congratulations!” To congratulate the player. Then, for example, at the timing t2 when the first closing control period ends and the second closing control period starts, the big hit game by either the big bonus or the regular bonus is made through the lottery for the number of rounds by the right-handed game. If the display is switched to the effect display about whether it is started, the timing tx at which the game ball passes through the special-purpose gate 2500 is likely to arrive relatively earlier than the display effect pattern at the time of extension, and the subsequent big hit In the game, the big hit effect dedicated to the “big hit A” (whether the big hit or the regular bonus is to be performed under the fact that it is confirmed that the game will be controlled in a certain variation external advantageous game state) Production) will be performed. However, when a hit effect (a big hit explicit effect that clearly indicates a big hit) does not appear at the stop timing t1 of the special symbol, the “big hit A, which is the most advantageous for the player” It will be possible to grasp that it is not won. In this case, when the jackpot demonstrative effect appears through the above-mentioned expected continuation effect by the “extension effect pattern”, it is possible to grasp that any of “hit B” to “hit D” is won. It will be.

  In addition, when adopting a method combining (A) and (B), an effect lottery table is prepared for each jackpot state type, and the obtained random number value is referred to while referring to the effect lottery table. Based on this, either an “extended effect pattern” having the contents of the display effect “a” or a “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of the display effect “a” is selected. In other words, by providing an effect lottery table for each jackpot state type, the selection rate between the “extended effect pattern” and the “non-extended display effect pattern” in each table can be made different. Thereby, for example, the expectation level of the winning jackpot state type differs depending on whether it is clearly shown that the big win is won by either the “extended effect pattern” or the “non-extended display effect pattern”. In addition to the fact that the “non-extended production pattern” has a lower jackpot expectation, the expectation of “big hit A”, which is the most advantageous, is higher when it is clearly shown that it is a big hit. However, although the “expansion effect pattern” has a higher jackpot expectation level, when it is clearly shown that it is a big hit, the expectation level of “big hit A”, which has the highest advantage, is lower. It is also possible.

  As for the method for selecting the “extended effect pattern” and the “non-extended display effect pattern”, in addition to the display effect pattern of the above-described effect command “01H”, the effect command “05H” shown in FIG. The display effects patterns “09H” and “12H” can be similarly adopted. However, when the effect commands “01H” and “05H” are used as the display effect patterns, the display effect patterns “03H” and “07H” are lost to the display effect pattern as the winning effect pattern. It can function as a pattern.

  Also, in the example described above with reference to FIG. 247 (a), the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 237 when in the first effect mode has the “extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a”. ”, But as shown in FIG. 250, in addition to the“ extended effect pattern ”, an“ extended effect pattern ”having the contents of the display effect c may also be associated. Good.

  That is, in the “extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c” associated with the effect command “02H”, the display effect is performed by extending the stop timing t1 of the special symbol. The content of the effect is not only the display effect pattern of the effect command “11H” when in the first effect mode (see FIG. 247 (c)), but also the display effect after development in which the expected degree of jackpot is higher. It will be the production contents that do not appear. Therefore, when the production command “02H” shown in FIG. 237 is received in the first production mode, a part of the production command is assigned to the production contents in which the developed display production does not appear. In addition, it is possible to set the winning probability for small hitting higher while keeping the appearance probability of the display effect after development in the first effect mode low. In this case, when in the second production mode, the probability of entry into the challenge bonus production (the expectation level at which the bonus production appears) will be increased by the amount set for the higher probability of winning the small hit. Thus, an opportunity to acquire a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 can be given with a higher probability.

  In this case, when the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 237 is received in the first effect mode, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that the “extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a” and the “display effect”. One of the “extended effect patterns having the contents of c” is selected, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 starts dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern. In addition, as a method for selecting the “extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a” and the “extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c”, for example, as a result of a predetermined effect lottery based on a random number Based on the above, it is possible to adopt a method of selecting either “extended effect pattern having contents of display effect a” or “extended effect pattern having contents of display effect c”. When this method is adopted, how many random values that can be acquired are “an extension effect pattern having the contents of display effect a” and “an extension effect pattern having the contents of display effect c”. The contents of “display effect a” in the case where the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 237 is received in the first effect mode according to the ratio of the random number values previously associated with each other. The appearance probabilities of “extended effect pattern having“ and the extended effect pattern having the contents of display effect c ”are determined.

  In addition, regarding a method related to selection of “extended effect pattern having contents of display effect a” and “extended effect pattern having contents of display effect c”, the display effect pattern of the above-described effect command “02H” is used. In addition, the display effect pattern of the effect command “06H” shown in FIG. 237 can be similarly adopted. When this effect command “06H” is adopted as the display effect pattern, the “extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect b” and the “extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect d” are selected. It becomes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation pattern (variation number “15”, production command “15H”) shown in FIG. 237 for determining the big hit is prepared. You may omit it. That is, in this case, the challenge bonus effect pattern can always appear when the special winning opening 2003 is opened in the second effect mode.

[4. Game contents]
The game content in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 151, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the player rotates the operation handle portion 410 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5, so that the storage tray of the dish unit 300 is stored. The game balls stored in 311 are driven into the upper part of the game area 605 arranged on the front surface of the game panel 600, and the game with the game balls is started. Also, in the game area 605, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 600 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 605 flows down in the game area 605 on the left or right side of the center accessory 2300 depending on the strength of the game. Note that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle 410, and the game ball can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction.

  That is, a game in which a game ball is caused to flow down to the game area 605 on the left side of the center accessory 2300 by hitting the game ball relatively weakly is called a left-handed game. On the other hand, a game that causes a game ball to flow down to the game area 605 on the right side of the center accessory 2300 by hitting the game ball relatively strongly is called a right-handed game. The left-handed game and the right-handed game can be switched by the player adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 410.

  Here, when a game ball enters the first starting port 2001 or the second starting port 2002, a special random number is acquired separately from the starting port that has entered. That is, when a game ball enters the first start port 2001, a first special random number is acquired, and when a game ball enters the second start port 2002, a second special random number is acquired.

  Then, the special random numbers acquired based on the balls entering the starting ports 2101 and 2102 are temporarily held before being subjected to the determination processing. When the start condition is satisfied and the hold is released, the special symbol variation display is started, and the decorative symbol variation is also performed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 so as to synchronize with the special symbol variation display. Display starts. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with this, and when the second special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in synchronization with this. . At this time, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the determination process for the first special random number. Similarly, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with this, and when the second special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in synchronization with this. The At this time, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the determination process for the second special random number. In this way, the decorative symbol functions as a symbol common to both the variation display and stop display of the first special symbol and the variation display and stop display of the second special symbol. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, whether or not to operate the probability changing function based on the design random number (big hit design random number) acquired based on the winning at the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002 is determined. It is determined.

  However, it is difficult to enter the second starting port 2002 in an external disadvantageous game state (normally external disadvantageous game state, probable external disadvantageous game state) in which the time shortening function (open extension function) is deactivated. Therefore, the player plays the game while adjusting the rotation amount of the operation handle portion 410 so that the left-handed game is performed. As a result of such a left-handed game, the result of the success / failure determination for the special random number corresponding to the first start opening 2001 is determined based on the chance of winning a prize ball (big hit or small hit). ), The opening / closing member 2006 operates to open the special winning opening 2003 regardless of the winning type.

  As described above, for special symbols, the lighting mode of a plurality of LEDs (special symbol) at the time of winning a small hit (when the special symbol is stopped) and the lighting mode of a plurality of LEDs (special symbol) at the time of winning a big hit In (when the special symbol is stopped), it appears as an aspect that is similar to each other, such as a difference only in whether one LED is lit or not (see FIG. 235). On the other hand, for decorative symbols, the result of the success / failure determination for the special random number corresponding to the ball entering the first starting port 2001 is the hit (big hit or small win) when the opportunity to win a prize ball is granted. Even in such a case, the handling at the time of big hit and at the time of small hit is greatly different according to the above-mentioned production mode (first production mode, second production mode) (see FIG. 245). ).

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the result of the determination of whether or not the special random number is a hit (big hit or small win) for which an opportunity to win a prize ball is given, When the game is a big hit, the big winning opening 2003 is not opened only by this (the execution of the big win game is not started). That is, as described above, when the big win is won, the closing control period (the opening and closing member 2006 is in the closed state) from when the special symbol (first special symbol) is stopped until the big winning opening 2003 is opened. In addition to the “first closed control period with a certain length” that appears even when winning a small hit, the “second closed control period with an indefinite length” is also included It appears more in the form of extending the closing control period. The second closing control period ends based on the passage of the game ball through the special-purpose gate 2500 after the first closing control period having a certain length has elapsed.

  Therefore, the player can make the game ball pass through the special-purpose gate 2500 after the first closed control period having a certain length has passed at an arbitrary timing at the time of winning the big hit (right-handed game The game is played while adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 410 at an arbitrary timing. As a result, when the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500, the big hit game is started by the end of the second closing control period. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the big hit game is started. In starting the game, the number of rounds is determined by lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the special figure gate 2500. Then, the big hit game is performed in such a manner that the round game is repeatedly performed as many times as the number of rounds thus determined. According to the progress of such a game, the player can continue the operation of the operation handle portion 410 in such a way that such a right-handed game is maintained, and game balls successively enter the opened big winning opening 2003. Will come to be.

  And, when the big hit is a non-specific winning type, after such a big hit game is played, the game under the control of the external disadvantageous game state in which the time-shortening function (open extension function) is not activated is performed again. Become. On the other hand, when the big hit is a specific winning type, after such a big hit game is played, an external advantageous game state (normal external advantageous game state, probable external advantageous game state) in which the time-shortening function (open extension function) is activated ) Will be played under the control.

Here, in the external advantageous game state, the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 2002 that becomes the trigger for the lottery (variation) execution so that the lottery (variation) holding state of the second special symbol is not interrupted. Is controlled to increase the frequency of changing to an easy state. As such control, for example, the following first to third methods can be considered, but the frequency of “normal hits” is increased, and as a result, the blade 2337 that closes the second start port 2002 is expanded for a predetermined time. As long as the frequency of winning can be increased, any method may be adopted.
A first method for setting the probability of determining “normal hit” to be higher when the time reduction function is activated than when the time reduction function is not activated.
・ When the time-shortening function is activated and when the time-shortening function is not activated, the probability of being judged as “normal hit” is the same, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is not changed. The second technique is shortened when the time reduction function is activated.
A third method that employs both the first method and the second method.

  In other words, in an external advantageous game state in which the time-shortening function (open extension function) is activated, the control allows the game ball to enter the second start port 2002 more easily than the first start port 2001. Therefore, the player plays the game while adjusting the rotation amount of the operation handle portion 410 so that the game ball passes through the gate member 2200 (gate 2201) (so that a right-handed game is performed). It becomes. As a result, when the gate sensor 2202 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate member 2200 (gate 2201), the main control board 4100 generates a normal random number as a normal lottery result based on the detection signal. . Based on the normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 645 in the function display unit 640 is displayed in a variable manner, and the normal lottery result is shown after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds). Will be stopped. The normal symbol variation display is performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern selection table.

  As a result, when the normal symbol suggesting the normal hit is stopped and displayed, the blade 2337 is expanded for a predetermined time by the start opening solenoid 2344, thereby being driven into the game area 605 by the right-handed game. A game ball enters the second start port 2002.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol is always postponed, and the second start opening 2002 in which the winning (small hit) not involving the operation of the condition device is not won. As described above, the lottery based on winning the prize (the lottery of the second special symbol) is controlled so as to be digested first (see FIG. 227). Therefore, until the number of holdings for the lottery on the second special symbol side is interrupted and becomes “0”, only the game (the lottery on the second special symbol side) that is not won in the above small winnings is sequentially performed. Thus, when the result of the success / failure determination for the special random number corresponding to the entry to the second start opening 2002 is a chance to win the prize ball, that is, the big win The opening / closing member 2006 is operated so that 2003 is opened.

  However, in the case of such a lottery of the second special symbol, the special winning opening 2003 will not be opened only by winning the jackpot (the jackpot game will not be started), and the special prize will not be opened. As a closing control period (a period during which the opening and closing member 2006 is maintained and controlled) after the symbol (second special symbol) is stopped until the special winning opening 2003 is opened, “having a certain length” A “first closing control period” and a “second closing control period having an indefinite length” appear.

  Therefore, when the player wins a big hit, the player can pass the special ball 2500 through the special gate 2500 after the first closed control period having a certain length has elapsed (so that a right-handed game is performed). ), The game is performed at any timing while adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 410. In this case, in order to further increase the lottery efficiency when the time shortening function (open extension function) is activated, in the first closing control period, the period ends as in the case of the big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern. It is desirable to perform a countdown effect or the like so that the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 immediately.

  As a result, when the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500, the second closing control period ends, and the number of rounds in the big hit game is determined by lottery, and an execution mode corresponding to the determined number of rounds is provided. The player will continue to operate the operation handle 410 in such a manner that the right-handed game is maintained, and game balls are successively placed in the opened big winning opening 2003. Will be entered. And when the big hit is a non-specific winning type, after such a big hit game is played, the game (left-handed game) under the control of the external disadvantageous game state in which the time-shortening function (open extension function) does not operate To be done. On the other hand, when the big hit is a specific winning game, after such a big hit game is played, the game under the control of the external advantageous game state in which the time-shortening function (open extension function) operates (right-handed game) Will be done again.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the main control board 4100 has a backup function, and the game state at the time when the power is cut off (that is, each flag indicating the progress of the game). Is stored as an internal state in the RAM of the main control board 4100. When the power is turned on in the pachinko machine 1, initial processing is performed, and the main control board 4100 refers to each flag managed by the backup function, so that the progress of the game at the time when the power is turned off. It is possible to grasp the game state at the time when the power is cut off, the presence / absence of operation of the condition device, and the like.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after it is determined that the interval effect timer has timed out in the process of step S602 (when it is in the second closing control period), a win is won. In view of the fact that the game progress is stagnated (a specific game mode) as long as the game ball does not pass through the special figure gate 2500 even though the condition device is activated, When the power is cut off in the special gaming situation, the following special effects are realized as effects appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when the power is restored.

  That is, in the above-described power-on process (FIG. 222: step S1), when it is determined that the special flag is operated in the ON state as a result of referring to each flag managed by the backup function, the main control board 4100 First, a power-on command is set to notify the peripheral control board 4140 that the gaming state at the time of power-off is the special gaming situation. Thereafter, in the special control process (FIG. 224: step S15) when the timer interrupt process is performed, the round number lottery process (FIG. 225: step S200) based on the fact that the process flag is “3”. ) Is selectively executed, and within the round number lottery process, the condition device is operating and the interval effect timer is timed up (YES in both processes of steps S601 and S602). Originally, until the game ball passes through the special-purpose gate 2500, game control is performed to stop the game progress (NO in the process of step S603).

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 4140, after the initial setting at the time of power restoration (step S1001), a special game situation by the power-on command from the main control board 4100 in the command analysis process (FIG. 239: step S1100). Is recognized, the jackpot display process (FIG. 241: Step S1230) is selectively executed based on the fact that the process selection flag is “2” in the effect control process (FIG. 239: Step S1200). . However, although illustration is omitted, in the jackpot display process, first, it is determined whether or not it is in a situation in which it is recognized that there is a special gaming situation by a power-on command from the main control board 4100. . That is, in this case, it is determined that the player is in a special gaming situation based on the power-on command from the main control board 4100, and based on the determination, processing for performing a special effect is started. .

  First, a display command (for the liquid crystal control board 4150) for starting a demonstration effect is set in the liquid crystal display device 1400. That is, the display command set in this way is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 4150 by the information output processing (step S1500) shown in FIG. Will be executed.

  Here, the state where such a demonstration effect is performed is basically the first after the display command is set (step S1237) in the decorative symbol variation start process (FIG. 241: step S1210). It can appear until it is determined that the variation pattern reception flag has been set based on the presence of a game ball entering either the start port 2001 or the second start port 2002. Yes. Therefore, as long as the game ball does not pass through the special figure gate 2500, the player who has seen such a demonstration performance despite the special game situation in which the progress of the game is stagnant is the first start port 2001. A game (left-handed game) for causing a game ball to enter any of the second start ports 2002 is started.

  However, as a result, even if a game ball has entered either the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002, the first / second start port winning process (FIG. 225: Step S110) is performed. Although the special symbol is suspended, the special symbol does not start to change. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 is in such a special game situation after the power supply is restored, and when a game ball is inserted into one of the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002, the peripheral control board 4140 is the same. Information indicating that there has been a ball is acquired from the main control board 4100, and based on the acquired information, the liquid crystal display device 1400 starts the effect that the right-handed game should be performed from the demonstration effect. I try to let them.

  For example, first, an effect image at the start of variation of the decorative design is displayed in the form of switching from the demonstration effect. However, the decorative design in the same image does not start to change, and after a certain amount of time is given as if it has been frozen for a certain period of time, a big hit finalizing effect such as the appearance effect of a premier character or a blackout effect To appear. After this, until the big hit game is started by passing the game ball through the special figure gate 2500, the opening effect before the big hit game that appears in the first production mode (performs a right-handed game) (Prompt to start a big hit game). As a result, when the big hit game is started by passing the game ball through the special figure gate 2500, the effect during the big hit game is appropriately performed based on the result of the round number determination process performed at that time. It will be.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after it is determined that the interval effect timer has timed out in the process of step S602 (when it is in the second closed control period), it is a big hit. As long as the game ball does not pass through the special figure gate 2500 even though it is elected (the condition device is activated), a special game situation in which the game progress is stagnated appears, and the power supply is shut off. Sometimes, the fact that the special game situation has occurred is stored and retained by backup, and when the power is restored, the game progress from the stored game situation is made possible. Therefore, when a player starts a new game such as when a hall is opened, a player enters a game ball into both the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002 as well as the lottery process for winning a big hit. There is a case where the big hit game can be started only by allowing the special figure gate 2500 to enter the game ball without making the ball play. According to the pachinko machine 1 equipped with such a backup function, not only can the reliability be improved when the power is cut off, but also the improvement of the game entertainment when a game is newly started, such as when a hall is opened. As a result, the operating rate in the gaming machine is suitably maintained.

  In addition, in realizing such special gameability after power restoration, by using the game stagnation period (second closing control period) after winning the jackpot with a predetermined winning probability, Without changing the predetermined winning probability to a higher probability (“100% probability”), it remains as a low probability, but only when a game ball enters the special gate 2500, The execution start can be determined.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the special-purpose gate 2500 is arranged only in a game area opposite to the left-handed game side in the normal external disadvantageous game state. Therefore, as for the hall side, for example, if you make a mechanism to automatically continue the left-handed game when holding an event, you can simply prepare a pachinko machine in such a special gaming situation just by leaving it for a predetermined time Will be able to.

  Further, according to the above-described special effect example, in the normal external disadvantageous game state in which the condition device is not operating, the predetermined start condition is not established, and either the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002 The game ball passes through the special gate 2500 regardless of whether the game progress is stagnated until the game ball enters the car or the jackpot is won (condition device is activated) Unless this is done, it is kept secret whether there is a special game situation where the game progress is stagnant. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not in a special game situation, there is a case where a game is started in consideration of the possibility that the pachinko machine 1 may be in the same game situation. The operating rate can be suitably maintained.

  Further, according to the above-described special effect example, when a game ball is received at the starting port (first starting port 2001 or the second starting port 2002) for the first time after the power is turned on, even the decoration pattern fluctuates. The big hit fixed image (a premier character, a blackout, an image urging a right-handed game, etc.) appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 without being broken. As a result, although the big hit lottery according to the entrance of the game ball to the starting port is not actually performed, the big hit is won in the first big hit lottery according to the entrance of the game ball to the starting port. It will be possible to have an image as if it were done. And these events will appear at a higher probability than other types of pachinko machines (higher probability of winning the jackpot plus the probability of power shut down when in a special gaming situation) As a result, the pachinko machine 1 has received a game ball at the start port (the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002) for the first time after the power is turned on. ) You will be able to make it appear as if the "first ball chance game" is installed.

  In the above-mentioned special effect example, a demonstration effect appears when the power is restored. After that, when a game ball enters either the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002, In the form of switching from the demonstration effect, an effect that the game ball is urged to pass through the special-purpose gate 2500 by the right-handed game further appears. However, when the demonstration effect appears, the game ball is allowed to pass through the special gate 2500 without entering the game ball in either the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002. But the big hit game is started. That is, in this case, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the effect during the big hit game is performed in the form of switching from the demonstration effect, and the real pleasure that can start the game from the big hit game is expressed by the effect.

  By the way, in a normal external disadvantageous game state in which the condition device is not operating, a predetermined start condition is not satisfied, and a game ball has entered either the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002. During the demonstration production when the game situation is stagnant until a certain time, as described above, the process in which the mode operation can be performed (FIG. 242: steps S1233 to S1235) is executable. On the other hand, even if the big hit is won (condition device is activated), unless the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500, the demonstration effect when the game progress is stagnant in a special game situation Even during the processing, the processing (FIG. 242: steps S1233 to S1235) in which the mode operation can be performed may be made executable. In other words, when the same processing is performed, even if there is an operation by the player to change the effect mode when starting the game, depending on the operation, any game situation may occur. You will not be able to figure out if there is.

  On the other hand, when in a special gaming situation, the processing (FIG. 242: steps S1233 to S1235) in which mode operation can be performed may not be executed. In this case, when the game is started, the effect mode is set. As a result of performing an operation to change, it becomes possible to grasp which game situation is in accordance with whether or not a mode change screen appears.

  Even when the game situation at the time when the power is turned off is a special game situation, after the power is turned on, the game situation at the time when the power is turned off by the lighting state in the game state display 647. Will be disclosed to the outside. However, the level of disclosure of such a game situation may be to notify only that there is a game situation in which neither the time-shortening function nor the probability variation function is in operation, or that it is in a special game situation. You may make it notify. In other words, when only the game situation in which neither the time-shortening function nor the probability variation function is operating is notified, even if the gaming state indicator 647 is confirmed after the power is turned on. In a normal external disadvantageous game state in which the condition device is not operating, a predetermined start condition is not satisfied, and there is a game ball entering either the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002 It becomes possible to make it impossible to grasp whether the game progress is stagnant until now or whether it is in a special game situation.

  By the way, “the game situation when the power is cut off” means a game state (normal external disadvantage game state, normal external advantage game state, normal external advantage game state, probable change external disadvantage game state) Not only the information regarding the probability change external advantageous gaming state), but also whether the condition device is operating, whether the special symbol is changing, whether the big hit game is being executed, etc. The type is determined by various information (flags) related to the progress.

  As mentioned above, although this invention was demonstrated based on embodiment, above-described embodiment is for making an understanding of this invention easy, and does not limit this invention. The present invention can be changed and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and equivalents thereof are included in the present invention.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the player is awarded when a big win is won in the lottery process on the first special symbol side and when a big win is won in the lottery process on the second special symbol side. Although there is no difference in the expected value of profit (the number of prize balls that can be acquired, etc.), a difference may be provided in the expected value. For example, when the big win is won in the lottery process on the first special symbol side, the expected number of rounds determined in the round lottery when passing the special figure gate 2500 is relatively high (or On the other hand, if the big win is won in the lottery process on the second special symbol side, the expected number of rounds determined in the round lottery when passing the special figure gate 2500 is relative This corresponds to a case where the setting is low (or high).

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the second effect mode, the opening effect before the big hit game (the effect that prompts the player to start the big hit game by performing the right-handed game) is also applied to the effect pattern at the time of the small hit game. It was made possible to complete within the first closed control period having a certain length. However, the first production is not completed within the first closed control period. For example, even in the second production mode, even if the production is performed within the second closed control period, the first production If the right-handed game is urged at an earlier timing than in the production mode, even if the display production pattern based on one production command (the variation time of the special symbol is the same), the first production mode It is possible to greatly vary the length of the production time required from the start of the change of the special symbol (decoration symbol) to the start of the big hit game between the second production mode and the second production mode.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the arrangement relationship between the special gate 2500 and the big prize opening 2003 is such that the game balls that have passed through the special figure gate 2500 flow down as they are and can be received in the big prize opening 2003 ( It is more desirable to set a relationship in which the special winning opening 2003 is arranged with a predetermined distance from the gate in the flow path of the game ball to the special figure gate 2500. As a result, the game can be widened while avoiding the appearance of a game loss due to the provision of the special figure gate 2500.

  In the above embodiment, the operation handle portion 410 is used as an operation target (operation means) by the player to end the second closing control period. As such an operation target, for example, Other operation means such as the main button 371 and the sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 may be employed. However, in this case, the game ball can be held in the game area 605, and the special game gate 2500 is set for the held game ball based on the operation of an appropriate operation means (for example, the main button 371). A holding device that can be discharged so as to pass through is disposed in a region directly above the special figure gate 2500.

  Also, in the second production mode, a false countdown production so that the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 at an earlier stage than the end of the first closing control period at the time of big hit or small hit. There may be cases where As a result of such a false countdown effect, at a stage earlier than the end of the first closing control period, a special gate 2500 (or, When the game ball passes through the spot X), the peripheral control MPU 4140a avoids the attack on the enemy character as a result of the small hit effect (as a result of the attack set) even when the big hit is won. Etc.) will appear. In other words, when the player confirms the contents of the effect at the time of such a small hit, it will be discouraged once, but after that, when the winner is won, the big winning opening 2003 is automatically opened. On the other hand, when the big win is won, the special winning opening 2003 is opened unless the game ball passes through the special-purpose gate 2500 by operating the predetermined operation means (operation handle portion 410) again. Absent. Moreover, the special symbol hold is not digested and a new symbol variation is not started. Therefore, the player can grasp the possibility of winning the big hit due to such a change in the game state (game stagnation state), and can raise the mood greatly from the disappointed state once. It becomes like this. On the other hand, depending on the player, there is a person who quickly stops the game without confirming such a change in the game state at the time of confirming the contents of the effect at the time of the small hit. It is possible to create a very unusual state (a state that is advantageous for other players) such that the pachinko machine 1 in a state where the player is operating becomes a vacant stand, and is thus installed in the hall. The operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 is suitably maintained. In addition, at the start of the game, a game technique for first passing through the special figure gate 2500 can be established, and for the player, the big hit game can be started without having the game ball enter the starting port. This is advantageous in that there are cases, and it is advantageous for the hall side in that the player's ball can be digested as much as the game ball passes through the special-purpose gate 2500.

  The first closed control period is prepared as a time having a predetermined length after the special symbol (identification symbol) is stopped (time until the interval effect timer expires). For example, it may be determined based on a value such as an acquired jackpot symbol random number or a variable display pattern random number when the special symbol varies. That is, in this case, when the special symbol fluctuates, one of a plurality of closed control periods (a plurality of interval effect timers that measure different times) prepared in advance is selected as the first closed control period. Will be used. In this way, if the length is at least a predetermined time for the variation of the special symbol, the addition time of the time thus determined and the variation time of the special symbol (or this additional time is set as the maximum effect time. It is possible to perform a display effect by selectively using a display effect pattern using a short time as one effect unit (effect time).

  Moreover, about the 1st closing control period, the time which is different by the big hit time and the small hit time may be predetermined. For example, when the interval effect timer at the big hit time counts the first time, when the interval effect timer at the small hit time measures the second time longer than the first time, Such effects can be realized. That is, in both cases of big hit and small hit, it is after the first time has elapsed since the special symbol (identification symbol) was stopped and until the second time has elapsed. In addition, if the opening effect such as the countdown effect described above is performed so that the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500, the game ball does not pass through the special figure gate 2500 immediately after the same effect is performed. However, until the second time elapses, the special winning opening 2003 can be prevented from being opened, and a time margin can be given to such an operation system effect. In this case, at the time of a small hit, the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 (or the place X) after the first time has elapsed and until the second time has elapsed. And when either condition of 2nd time passes, a challenge bonus effect will be performed. However, when the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 (or the place X) before the second time elapses, the challenge bonus effect is started without opening the grand prize opening 2003. Become. In addition, since the time until the special winning opening 2003 is opened is relatively long, it is easier to grasp that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small hit than in the case of the above embodiment. There is a demerit that it ends up.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine. However, even a gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a pachislot machine, a gaming machine in which the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine are fused, The invention can be applied. In consideration of the application of the present invention to a pachislot machine, the “game ball” in each of the above configurations may be used as a “game medium”.

  A pachinko machine is a gaming machine in which an input medium such as a game ball, which is a medium that a player inputs into the game machine, and a game medium that is a medium used for a substantial game performed by the player are the same. There is a kind of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball inserted. Specifically, “a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a number of obstacle nails, center objects, display means, etc. A game area provided with an appropriate entrance for a game ball such as a mouth, a passage opening, an arrival opening, etc., a rail for guiding the game ball from the launching device to the game area, and a game ball guided to the game area It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entrance to the entrance and according to the entrance mode of the game balls to a plurality of entrances.

  There are various types of pachinko machines, which are generally represented by what is referred to as “digipachi”, “entrance state detection means for detecting the entrance state to the entrance (ie, game state) Detection means), lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a ball is detected by the entrance state detection means, and special symbol display means for changing the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means and stopping the fluctuation. Or “additional effect image display means for displaying a decorative symbol sequence composed of a plurality of decorative symbols and causing characters or the like to appear at a predetermined timing” , Which is generally represented by what is referred to as a “multi-function machine”, comprising a lottery means for performing lottery by distributing game balls in an accessory and lottery means for performing lottery by winning at the start opening. ”, Represented by what is generally called“ Alepatchi ”“ For example, one game is played with a predetermined number of game balls, such as 16 games, and the game balls are placed in a plurality of entrances in one game. In accordance with this, “a payout of a predetermined number of game balls” can be exemplified.

  On the other hand, with a pachislot machine, a medal that is a game medium is inserted, and after inserting the medal, a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the operation of the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). It is a slot machine with a stop operation function that performs a substantial game of stopping the fluctuation of the symbol sequence in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time of stopping the variation of the symbol row satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large amount of medals. In addition, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  In addition, a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined is a plurality of (for example, five) game balls that are used as one unit of input medium. ) Is variably displayed in accordance with the operation of), and thereafter, the variation of the symbol string is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time when the variation of the symbol sequence is stopped satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large number of medals. In this case, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  In addition, it seems that there is no gaming medium at first glance in a gaming machine that does not play a substantial game depending on the medium to be inserted, such as a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. However, even in such a gaming machine, it can be assumed that the game content played using a game ball or other appropriate article is included in the entire game content. Therefore, even such a gaming machine can be a target of a gaming machine in which a game is played using a gaming medium.

  In addition, the effect display device in the above-described embodiment is preferably a liquid crystal display device, but is not necessarily limited to a liquid crystal display device. It may be a display device such as an EL display device, a plasma display device, and a CRT.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 1400 Liquid crystal display device 3011 Decoration board 3012 Upper side illumination body 3013 Lower side illumination body 3014 Flat cable 3015 Upper LED board 3016 Lower LED board 3017 Recess 3018 Projection part 3018a Diffuse reflection surface 3019 Upper frame-like decoration body 3020 Lower side Frame-shaped decorative body 3021 Groove forming portion 3021a Drawer port 3023 Rack 3031 Decorative plate 3034 Flat cable 3051 Decorative plate 3090 Drive unit 3094 Left inner motor 3096 Gear 3097 Pinion 3110 Lower support portion 4140 Peripheral control board

Claims (3)

Launching means for launching a game ball to the game area by the player's operation;
A starting port capable of receiving a game ball driven into the game area;
A prize opening that is arranged in the game area and facilitates the reception of game balls by the operation of a predetermined opening and closing means;
Lottery means for performing lottery based on the reception of game balls at the start port;
An identification symbol control means for determining a variation time of the identification symbol based on a result of the lottery by the lottery means, and variably displaying the identification symbol based on the determined variation time and then stopping the identification symbol;
When the identification symbol is stopped and displayed by the identification symbol control means based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery is a win, after the predetermined waiting period after the stop display of the identification symbol ends, the big prize A hit control means capable of executing control related to the operation of the predetermined opening / closing means so as to facilitate the reception of the game ball in the mouth,
The hit control means includes
The predetermined waiting period is controlled as a period to be ended based on the determination that a game ball has been received at a specific receiving port provided in the gaming area. As a waiting period for
For receiving a game ball at the specific receiving port for a predetermined time longer than the time required for the game ball launched after the stop display of the identification symbol and launched by the launching unit to reach the specific receiving port. As a period having a predetermined length that is not terminated until the long predetermined time has elapsed regardless of whether or not the game ball is received at the specific receiving port by performing control to invalidate such determination. A first closing control period, and a control that is started after the end of the first closing control period and that makes a determination on accepting a game ball into the specific receiving port is performed. Control that sequentially generates two closed control periods of a second closed control period as a period having an indefinite length, which is terminated when a game ball is received at the receiving port. Gaming machine characterized in that it is feasible. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine further comprising a lamp device that performs a predetermined light emission effect. In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
A gaming machine further comprising a speaker device that performs a predetermined sound effect.